Technical Product Documentation

Ultra Precision Lathe PD

with control
FANUC 32i-B

Serial number:
Version: PD_V19_2016_15.03_32i-B
TRANSLATION OF ORIGINAL MANUAL
Article number: 134520

SPINNER WERKZEUGMASCHINENFABRIK GmbH

D-82054 Sauerlach, Rudolf-Diesel-Ring 24
Tel: 08104 / 803-0, Fax: 08104 / 803-19,
E-Mail: [email protected]; [email protected]
Keep this Technical Product Documentation
always at the machine!

It must be available at any time!

 Table of contents / Index

Table of contents
1 BASIC INFORMATION...........................................................................................................................1-18
1.1 BASIC INFORMATION .............................................................................................................................. 1-19
2 BASIC SAFETY INFORMATION ..............................................................................................................2-21
2.1 WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS ....................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.2 APPROPRIATE USE .................................................................................................................................. 2-23
2.3 APPLICATION LIMITS ............................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4 WHEN THE MACHINE CAN BE USED ............................................................................................................ 2-24
2.5 WORKING SAFELY – ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES ........................................................................................ 2-24
2.6 PERSONNEL SELECTION AND QUALIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 2-25
2.7 GENERAL HAZARDS ON THE MACHINE......................................................................................................... 2-26
2.7.1 Mechanical hazards ...................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.7.2 Electrical hazards .......................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.7.3 Thermal hazards ........................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.8 SPECIAL TYPES OF HAZARDS...................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.8.1 Electrical ....................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.8.2 Hydraulic and pneumatic systems ................................................................................................ 2-26
2.8.3 Oil, grease and other chemical substances................................................................................... 2-27
2.9 DANGER THROUGH VERTICAL AXES AND TILTED AXES ..................................................................................... 2-27
2.10 DANGER DURING MACHINING BAR MATERIAL............................................................................................... 2-27
2.11 RISK FOR THE HEALTH BECAUSE OF THE PULVERIZATION OF THE COOLANT ......................................................... 2-28
2.12 EMERGENCY OFF .................................................................................................................................. 2-29
2.13 FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS/OTHER HAZARDS .......................................................................................... 2-29
2.13.1 Machining or processing aluminium or magnesium ................................................................ 2-30
2.13.2 Organizational measures for fire prevention in the vicinity of the machine tool ..................... 2-30
2.14 CUSTOMER´S OWN PRESSURIZED AIR FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................... 2-31
2.15 AVOIDING WATER POLLUTION .................................................................................................................. 2-31
2.16 TESTING OF EMERGENCY-STOP BUTTON ...................................................................................................... 2-32
2.17 INSTRUCTIONS FOR WORKING WITH HYDRAULIC FLUIDS ................................................................................. 2-33
3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................3-34
3.1 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................................................ 3-35
3.2 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.3 AREAS OF USE ....................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.3.1 Areas of use .................................................................................................................................. 3-36
3.4 MACHINE VIEWS OF THE PD SERIES ........................................................................................................... 3-37
3.4.1 Overall view of the machine without housing .............................................................................. 3-37
3.4.2 Front view and right side of the machine ..................................................................................... 3-38
3.4.3 Left side of the machine................................................................................................................ 3-38
3.4.4 Rear view ...................................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.5 MECHANICAL DESIGN ............................................................................................................................. 3-39
3.5.1 Machine versions .......................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.6 MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM..................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.7 LOCATION OF THE RATINGS PLATE AND CE SYMBOL ...................................................................................... 3-41
3.8 SAFETY EQUIPMENT................................................................................................................................ 3-41
3.9 WARNING PLATES AND SAFETY INFORMATION ON THE MACHINE ..................................................................... 3-44
3.10 TECHNICAL DATA OF THE MACHINE ............................................................................................................ 3-45
3.10.1 Mechanical data....................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.10.2 Electrical data........................................................................................................................... 3-46
3.10.3 Pneumatic system .................................................................................................................... 3-46
3.10.4 Noise emission .......................................................................................................................... 3-46
3.10.5 Electromagnetic compatibility ................................................................................................. 3-47
4 TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE .......................................................................................................4-48
4.1 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................... 4-49
4.2 PREPARING FOR TRANSPORTATION ............................................................................................................ 4-49
4.3 MOVING THE BASE MACHINE.................................................................................................................... 4-50
4.3.1 Moving with a fork lift .................................................................................................................. 4-50

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-3

 Table of contents / Index
4.3.2 Moving with a lifting truck ........................................................................................................... 4-51
4.3.3 Moving using a crane ................................................................................................................... 4-52
4.4 TRANSPORTATION OVER SHORT DISTANCES ................................................................................................. 4-53
4.4.1 Packing the machine..................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.4.2 Unpacking the machine ................................................................................................................ 4-53
4.5 TRANSPORTATION OVERSEAS.................................................................................................................... 4-54
4.5.1 Packing the machine..................................................................................................................... 4-54
4.5.2 Unpacking the machine ................................................................................................................ 4-55
4.6 STORAGE .............................................................................................................................................. 4-56
4.6.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 4-56
4.6.2 Storage conditions for machines under a PE protective plastic sheet .......................................... 4-56
4.6.3 Storage conditions for machines in a wooden crate .................................................................... 4-56
4.6.4 Guarantee ..................................................................................................................................... 4-56
5 PUTTING INTO OPERATION..................................................................................................................5-57
5.1 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................... 5-58
5.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AT THE INSTALLATION SITE .................................................................................... 5-58
5.2.1 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................................... 5-58
5.2.2 Pneumatic connection .................................................................................................................. 5-61
5.2.3 Other environmental conditions ................................................................................................... 5-62
5.3 INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS/FOUNDATION PLAN ............................................................................................. 5-63
5.4 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................................... 5-65
5.5 SPINDLE STOPPER................................................................................................................................... 5-67
6 SWITCH ON/OFF ROUTINE ...................................................................................................................6-68
6.1 SWITCHING ON THE MACHINE................................................................................................................... 6-69
6.2 SWITCHING OFF THE MACHINE.................................................................................................................. 6-69
7 SETTING UP THE MACHINE ..................................................................................................................7-70
7.1 SETTING UP THE CLAMPING DEVICE............................................................................................................ 7-71
7.1.1 Mounting the clamping device ..................................................................................................... 7-71
7.1.2 Danger from chuck and chuck jaws .............................................................................................. 7-72
7.1.3 Mounting top jaws........................................................................................................................ 7-73
7.2 SETTING UP THE TOOLS ........................................................................................................................... 7-74
7.2.1 Linear Standard Toolholder .......................................................................................................... 7-74
7.2.2 Linear Cartridge Toolholder .......................................................................................................... 7-74
7.2.3 Turret Toolholder .......................................................................................................................... 7-75
7.3 TOOL MEASURING .................................................................................................................................. 7-75
7.3.1 Tool measuring by touching the workpiece .................................................................................. 7-77
7.3.2 Optical tool measuring ................................................................................................................. 7-78
7.4 MOUNTING TOOLS ................................................................................................................................. 7-79
7.5 TOOL ARRANGEMENT ON TURRET CIRCUMFERENCE....................................................................................... 7-80
7.6 SPINDLE NOSE DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................................... 7-81
7.6.1 Spindle nose 32mm ....................................................................................................................... 7-81
7.6.2 Spindle nose 42mm ....................................................................................................................... 7-82
7.7 WORKING AREA ..................................................................................................................................... 7-83
7.8 CONTINUOUS LOAD/DUTY CYCLE (TURRET MODEL BARUFFALDI) ..................................................................... 7-85
7.9 WORKPIECE GAUGING ............................................................................................................................ 7-86
8 MACHINE SPECIFIC OPTIONS OF THE CONTROL FANUC 32I-B...............................................................8-87
8.1 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................... 8-89
8.2 OPERATING ELEMENTS OF THE CONTROL FANUC 32I-B ................................................................................. 8-90
8.2.1 Screen and keyboard .................................................................................................................... 8-90
8.2.2 Operating panel ............................................................................................................................ 8-90
8.2.2.1 Machine control panel ........................................................................................................................ 8-91
8.2.3 Operating Panel on the left Side of the Machine Front ................................................................ 8-94
8.3 MAIN OPERATIONAL MODES ................................................................................................................... 8-94
8.3.1 Manual operation mode, JOG....................................................................................................... 8-94
8.3.2 Semi-automatic operation, MDI ................................................................................................... 8-95
8.3.3 Automatic operation, AUTO ......................................................................................................... 8-95
8.3.4 Incremental operation .................................................................................................................. 8-96

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-4

 Table of contents / Index
8.3.5 Edit operation ............................................................................................................................... 8-96
8.4 SET-UP OPERATION ................................................................................................................................ 8-96
8.5 SELECTING THE HANDWHEEL .................................................................................................................... 8-97
8.6 SETTING THE CLAMPING PRESSURES ........................................................................................................... 8-97
8.6.1 Value and function ranges ............................................................................................................ 8-98
8.6.2 Changing the clamping pressures from the NC program.............................................................. 8-98
8.7 FURTHER PROGRAMMING INFORMATION .................................................................................................... 8-99
8.7.1 G-code system............................................................................................................................... 8-99
8.7.2 Tapping holes in rigid tapping mode CNC/ISO (Rigid Tapping) .................................................... 8-99
8.7.3 Spindle speed and axis feed .......................................................................................................... 8-99
8.7.4 Stopping and continuing the program........................................................................................ 8-100
8.7.5 Synchronizing the main spindle and subspindle with M36 ......................................................... 8-100
8.7.5.1 Example of the determination of a phase offset ............................................................................... 8-100
8.7.6 Synchronous axis operation of the main and subspindle with M31 (C-axis coupling) ................ 8-101
8.7.7 Torque limiting on the E-axis / driving into a dead stop ............................................................. 8-101
8.7.8 Part gripper programming (option) ............................................................................................ 8-102
8.8 NORDMANN TOOL FRACTURE MONITORING (OPTION) ................................................................................. 8-103
8.8.1 M-functions for the tool fracture monitoring ............................................................................. 8-103
8.8.2 Messages from the tool fracture monitor................................................................................... 8-103
8.9 WORKPIECE SENSOR - FANUC 32I (OPTION) .............................................................................................. 8-104
8.9.1 Workpiece sensor activate/deactivate ....................................................................................... 8-104
8.9.2 Measurement values .................................................................................................................. 8-104
8.9.3 Set of measurements .................................................................................................................. 8-104
8.9.4 Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 8-104
8.9.5 Programming example ............................................................................................................... 8-105
8.9.6 Error messages ........................................................................................................................... 8-105
8.10 COMPRESSED AIR FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................. 8-106
8.11 UNIMAG INTERFACE DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................ 8-107
8.11.1 Safety information.................................................................................................................. 8-107
8.11.2 Conditions for a safe operation of the machine ..................................................................... 8-107
8.11.2.1 Safe cutoff of the bar feeder when the safety door of the machine is open..................................... 8-107
8.11.3 Structure NC-parts program ................................................................................................... 8-108
8.11.4 Signal description for the interface ........................................................................................ 8-109
8.11.5 Option bits .............................................................................................................................. 8-111
8.11.5.1 Setting the option bits: ...................................................................................................................... 8-112
8.11.6 Examples of programs ............................................................................................................ 8-114
8.11.6.1 Program example for Spinner Servo Load ......................................................................................... 8-118
8.11.7 Time diagram for bar changing .............................................................................................. 8-118
8.12 LIST OF M FUNCTIONS .......................................................................................................................... 8-120
8.12.1 Notes concerning the programming of macro M functions ................................................... 8-122
8.12.1.1 Notes concerning the programming of G code macros ..................................................................... 8-123
8.12.2 Extension of the M functions .................................................................................................. 8-123
8.13 DATA TRANSFER BY SERIAL PORT RS232 TO FANUC 3XI-B CONTROLS ........................................................... 8-125
8.13.1 Information and system requirements ................................................................................... 8-125
8.13.2 Data transfer cable................................................................................................................. 8-125
8.13.3 Settings on the control ........................................................................................................... 8-125
8.13.3.1 Setting the I/O channel...................................................................................................................... 8-125
8.13.3.2 Setting the transfer parameters ........................................................................................................ 8-125
8.13.4 Settings on the laptop and in the transfer software package ................................................ 8-126
8.13.5 Data transfer from CNC to laptop (read out programs) ......................................................... 8-127
8.13.6 Data transfer from laptop to CNC (read in programs) ........................................................... 8-128
8.14 NETWORK CONNECTION TO FANUC 32I-B CONTROL SYSTEMS.................................................................... 8-129
8.14.1 System requirements .............................................................................................................. 8-129
8.14.2 Configuration of the CNC control system for network operation ........................................... 8-129
8.14.3 Network settings of the Server PC .......................................................................................... 8-131
8.14.4 Installing and configuring the FTP Server ............................................................................... 8-132
8.14.5 Testing the connection ........................................................................................................... 8-133
8.14.6 Reading in, reading out and deleting programs..................................................................... 8-134
8.15 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE LIVE TOOL.......................................................................... 8-136
8.15.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 8-136
8.15.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................... 8-136
8.16 TOOL MONITORING BY CURRENT CONSUMPTION (OPTION) .......................................................................... 8-138

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-5

 Table of contents / Index
8.16.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 8-138
8.16.2 Background ............................................................................................................................ 8-138
8.16.3 Mode of operation ................................................................................................................. 8-138
8.16.4 Possible applications .............................................................................................................. 8-138
8.16.5 Important terms ..................................................................................................................... 8-139
8.16.6 Restrictions ............................................................................................................................. 8-140
8.16.7 M-functions ............................................................................................................................ 8-140
8.16.8 Panel buttons ......................................................................................................................... 8-142
8.16.9 Function of the softkeys ......................................................................................................... 8-143
8.16.10 Taught values ......................................................................................................................... 8-143
8.16.10.1 Maximum value ............................................................................................................................ 8-143
8.16.10.2 Mean value ................................................................................................................................... 8-143
8.16.11 Monitoring limits .................................................................................................................... 8-143
8.16.11.1 Fracture alarm limit ...................................................................................................................... 8-144
8.16.11.2 Lower alarm limit.......................................................................................................................... 8-144
8.16.11.3 Wear alarm limit ........................................................................................................................... 8-144
8.16.11.4 Wear message limit ...................................................................................................................... 8-144
8.16.12 Alarm and message responses ............................................................................................... 8-144
8.16.13 Axis and Spindle Status window ............................................................................................. 8-145
8.16.14 Operation ............................................................................................................................... 8-146
8.16.14.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 8-146
8.16.14.2 Access to the monitoring screen .................................................................................................. 8-147
8.16.14.3 Creating and deleting cuts ............................................................................................................ 8-147
8.16.14.4 Axis and spindle selection ............................................................................................................. 8-147
8.16.14.5 Limit definition ............................................................................................................................. 8-148
8.16.14.6 Response definition ...................................................................................................................... 8-148
8.16.14.7 Cut selection ................................................................................................................................. 8-149
8.16.14.8 Saving to memory card ................................................................................................................. 8-149
8.16.15 Loading from memory card .................................................................................................... 8-149
8.16.16 Alarms and messages ............................................................................................................. 8-150
8.17 UNIROB INTERFACE DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 8-151
8.17.1 General description ................................................................................................................ 8-151
8.17.1.1 Important note concerning the CE conformity prohibition declaration ............................................ 8-151
8.18 AUTOMATIC DOOR ............................................................................................................................... 8-151
8.19 DATA TRANSMISSION ............................................................................................................................ 8-152
9 ERROR DIAGNOSIS ............................................................................................................................. 9-154
9.1 PROCEDURE FOR RELEASING THE Z AXIS AFTER COLLISION WITH THE HARDWARE LIMIT SWITCH OF THE E AXIS OR THE
TAILSTOCK ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-155
9.2 MANUAL LOCKING OF THE TURRET (ONLY WITH MACHINES WITH TURRET) ...................................................... 9-155
9.3 TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................................................................. 9-156
9.4 ALARMS AND MESSAGES ....................................................................................................................... 9-157
9.4.1 Alarm messages .......................................................................................................................... 9-158
9.4.2 Operation messages ................................................................................................................... 9-164
10 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................................ 10-174
10.1 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................. 10-175
10.2 WARRANTY INFORMATION .................................................................................................................. 10-175
10.3 GENERAL INFORMATION ON MAINTENANCE / CARE................................................................................... 10-176
10.3.1 Machine................................................................................................................................ 10-176
10.3.2 Pneumatic system ................................................................................................................ 10-176
10.3.3 Safety doors.......................................................................................................................... 10-177
10.4 TABLE OF LUBRICANTS......................................................................................................................... 10-178
10.4.1 Table of lubricant suppliers / manufacturers ....................................................................... 10-180
10.5 TABLE WITH CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE MEASURES .............................................................................. 10-181
10.5.1 Täglich .................................................................................................................................. 10-184
10.5.2 Weekly .................................................................................................................................. 10-184
10.5.3 Monthly ................................................................................................................................ 10-184
10.5.4 Every 3 months ..................................................................................................................... 10-184
10.5.5 Half-Yearly ............................................................................................................................ 10-184
10.5.6 Yearly .................................................................................................................................... 10-184
10.5.7 2 years .................................................................................................................................. 10-185

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-6

 Table of contents / Index
10.5.8 2 1/2 years ............................................................................................................................ 10-185
10.5.9 3 years .................................................................................................................................. 10-185
10.5.10 4 years .................................................................................................................................. 10-185
10.5.11 6 years .................................................................................................................................. 10-185
10.5.12 Periodically, depending on operating conditions ................................................................. 10-185
10.5.13 According to load cycle ........................................................................................................ 10-185
10.6 REPLACING THE FINE FILTER BAG ........................................................................................................... 10-186
10.7 REPLACING THE CNC BACKUP BATTERY IN CASE OF THE CONTROL FANUC 32I-B ................................................... 10-188
10.8 BATTERY CHANGE FOR ABSOLUTE ROTARY ENCODER ................................................................................ 10-189
10.9 REPLACING HOSE LINES ....................................................................................................................... 10-191
10.9.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................. 10-191
10.10 GREASING THE CHUCK......................................................................................................................... 10-191
10.11 FEEDSCREW X-AXIS ............................................................................................................................ 10-192
10.11.1 Lubricating the X-axis ........................................................................................................... 10-192
10.12 FEEDSCREW Z-AXIS ............................................................................................................................ 10-193
10.12.1 Lubricating the Z-axis ........................................................................................................... 10-193
10.13 FEEDSCREW E-AXIS ............................................................................................................................ 10-194
10.13.1 Lubricating the E axis (only with sub spindle option) ........................................................... 10-194
10.14 HYDRAULIC UNIT................................................................................................................................ 10-195
10.14.1 Handling ............................................................................................................................... 10-196
10.14.2 Declaration of conformity of the pressure accumulator ...................................................... 10-198
10.15 DISC-TYPE TOOL TURRET SAUTER .......................................................................................................... 10-199
10.15.1 Turret gear-box .................................................................................................................... 10-199
10.15.2 Tool drive .............................................................................................................................. 10-200
10.16 SERVO TURRET TYPE BARUFFALDI .......................................................................................................... 10-201
10.17 LOW PRESSURE DUPLEX FILTER “MAHLE” (OPTION) ................................................................................ 10-202
10.17.1 Exchanging the filter element .............................................................................................. 10-203
10.18 OPTIONAL AUTOMATIC SAFETY DOOR..................................................................................................... 10-204
10.19 SPARE PART LIST PD FANUC ............................................................................................................... 10-205
11 ASSEMBLY PD-010-000 FOUNDATION PLATE/MACHINE BASE.......................................................... 11-206
11.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 11-207
11.2 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 11-207
11.2.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 11-207
11.2.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 11-209
12 ASSEMBLY PD-106-000 COOLANT SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 12-210
12.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 12-211
12.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 12-211
12.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 12-211
12.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 12-211
12.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 12-213
13 ASSEMBLY PD-099-000 SPLASH GUARD ........................................................................................... 13-214
13.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 13-215
13.2 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 13-215
13.2.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 13-215
13.2.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 13-217
14 ASSEMBLY PD-121/122-000 SLIDING DOOR LEFT/RIGHT .................................................................. 14-219
14.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 14-220
14.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 14-220
14.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 14-220
14.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS ................................................................................................................ 14-221
14.4.1 Exploded drawing ................................................................................................................. 14-221
14.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 14-224
15 ASSEMBLY PD-030-000 WORKSPACE PANELING............................................................................... 15-225
15.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 15-226
15.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 15-226
15.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 15-226

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-7

 Table of contents / Index
15.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 15-226
15.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 15-228
16 ASSEMBLY PD-124-000 CROSS-SLIDE................................................................................................ 16-229
16.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 16-230
16.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 16-230
16.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 16-230
16.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 16-230
16.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 16-232
17 ASSEMBLY PD-083-000 CENTRAL LUBRICATING UNIT ...................................................................... 17-233
17.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 17-234
17.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 17-234
17.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 17-234
17.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 17-235
17.4.1 Detail assembly drawing ...................................................................................................... 17-235
17.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 17-237
18 ASSEMBLY PD-095-000 PNEUMATIC UNIT........................................................................................ 18-238
18.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 18-239
18.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 18-239
18.2.1 Filling the oil reservoir of the pneumatic unit....................................................................... 18-239
18.2.2 Setting the air oiler ............................................................................................................... 18-239
18.3 MAINTENANCE AND UPKEEP ................................................................................................................ 18-240
18.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 18-240
18.4.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 18-240
18.4.2 Detail assembly - Pneumatic for options .............................................................................. 18-242
18.4.3 Pneumatic diagram with subspindle option ......................................................................... 18-243
18.4.4 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 18-244
19 ASSEMBLY PD-114-000 ELECTRIC CABINET (FANUC) ......................................................................... 19-246
19.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 19-247
19.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 19-247
19.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 19-247
19.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 19-247
19.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 19-249
20 ASSEMBLY PD-096/098-000 SAFETY BLOCK WITH/WITHOUT SUB-SPINDLE...................................... 20-250
20.1 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 20-251
20.1.1 Exploded view drawing of safety block with sub-spindle ..................................................... 20-251
20.1.2 Exploded view drawing of safety block without sub-spindle option .................................... 20-253
20.1.3 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 20-254
21 ASSEMBLY SB-NC-195-000 SPINDLE 5000/42 ................................................................................... 21-256
21.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 21-257
21.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 21-257
21.2.1 Setting the clamping stroke ................................................................................................. 21-257
21.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 21-258
21.3.1 Detail assembly .................................................................................................................... 21-258
21.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 21-260
22 ASSEMBLY SB-NC-194-000 SPINDLE 8000/32 ................................................................................... 22-261
22.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 22-262
22.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 22-262
22.2.1 Setting the clamping stroke ................................................................................................. 22-262
22.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 22-263
22.3.1 Detail assembly .................................................................................................................... 22-263
22.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 22-265
23 ASSEMBLY PD-110-000 SPINDLE DRIVE 5000/42 (FANUC) ................................................................ 23-266
23.1 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 23-267

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-8

 Table of contents / Index
23.1.1 Detail assembly .................................................................................................................... 23-267
23.1.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 23-268
24 ASSEMBLY PD-109-000 SPINDLE DRIVE 8000/32 (FANUC) ................................................................ 24-269
24.1 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 24-270
24.1.1 Detail assembly .................................................................................................................... 24-270
24.1.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 24-271
25 ASSEMBLY INCREMENTAL TOOTHED-WHEEL ENCODER VS SENSORIK .............................................. 25-272
25.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 25-273
26 ASSEMBLY PD-088-000 FEEDSCREW X-AXIS ..................................................................................... 26-274
26.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 26-275
26.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 26-275
26.2.1 Lubricating the X-axis ........................................................................................................... 26-275
26.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 26-275
26.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 26-275
26.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 26-277
27 ASSEMBLY PD-089-000 FEEDSCREW Z-AXIS ...................................................................................... 27-278
27.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 27-279
27.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 27-279
27.2.1 Lubricating the Z-axis ........................................................................................................... 27-279
27.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 27-279
27.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 27-279
27.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 27-281
28 ASSEMBLY PD-119-000 TAILSTOCK................................................................................................... 28-282
28.1 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 28-283
28.1.1 Adjusting the limit switches ................................................................................................. 28-283
28.1.1.1 Monitoring characteristic ................................................................................................................ 28-283
28.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 28-284
28.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS ................................................................................................................ 28-284
28.3.1 Detail assembly drawing and the ISO-view .......................................................................... 28-284
28.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 28-286
29 ASSEMBLY SB-NC-110-000 SPINDLE FLUSHING SYSTEM 5000/42 ..................................................... 29-288
29.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 29-289
29.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 29-289
29.2.1 Mounting .............................................................................................................................. 29-289
29.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 29-290
29.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS ................................................................................................................ 29-290
29.4.1 Detail assembly drawing ...................................................................................................... 29-290
29.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 29-291
30 ASSEMBLY SB-NC-137-000 SPINDLE FLUSHING SYSTEM 8000/32 ..................................................... 30-292
30.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 30-293
30.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 30-293
30.2.1 Mounting .............................................................................................................................. 30-293
30.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 30-294
30.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS ................................................................................................................ 30-294
30.4.1 Detail assembly drawing ...................................................................................................... 30-294
30.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 30-295
31 ASSEMBLY PD-074-000 STROKE MONITORING DEVICE FOR THE MAIN SPINDLE............................... 31-296
31.1 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 31-297
31.1.1 Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device ........................................................ 31-297
31.2 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS ................................................................................................................ 31-299
31.2.1 An exploded view drawing ................................................................................................... 31-299
31.2.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 31-300
32 ASSEMBLY SB-NC-142-000 UNIVERSAL LIMIT STOP 5000/42 ............................................................ 32-301

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-9

 Table of contents / Index
32.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 32-302
32.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 32-302
32.2.1 Mounting the universal limit stop ........................................................................................ 32-302
32.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 32-303
32.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 32-303
32.4.1 Detail assembly .................................................................................................................... 32-303
32.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 32-305
33 ASSEMBLY SB-NC-143-000 UNIVERSAL LIMIT STOP 8000/32 ............................................................ 33-306
33.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 33-307
33.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 33-307
33.2.1 Mounting the universal limit stop ........................................................................................ 33-307
33.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 33-308
33.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 33-308
33.4.1 Detail assembly .................................................................................................................... 33-308
33.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 33-310
34 PULL-TYPE COLLET ASSEMBLY W25/5C ............................................................................................ 34-311
34.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 34-312
34.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 34-312
34.2.1 Mounting the pull-type collet ............................................................................................... 34-312
34.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 34-314
34.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 34-314
34.4.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 34-314
34.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 34-318
35 PUSH-TYPE COLLET ASSEMBLY F38/F48 ........................................................................................... 35-319
35.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 35-320
35.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 35-320
35.2.1 Mounting the push-type collet ............................................................................................. 35-320
35.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 35-321
35.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 35-322
35.4.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 35-322
35.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 35-325
36 POWER-CHUCK ASSEMBLY, 3 JAWS/4 JAWS .................................................................................... 36-326
36.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 36-327
36.1.1 Mounting the power-chuck .................................................................................................. 36-327
36.2 CENTRE OF GRAVITY OF THE WORKPIECE ................................................................................................. 36-328
36.3 CUSTOMISED JAWS............................................................................................................................. 36-329
37 ASSEMBLY REDUCTION PIPE ............................................................................................................ 37-330
37.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 37-331
37.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 37-331
37.2.1 Mounting the reduction pipe ............................................................................................... 37-331
37.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 37-331
37.4 DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................................................... 37-332
37.4.1 Reduction pipes for pull-type collets .................................................................................... 37-332
37.4.2 Reduction pipes for push-type collets and a chuck .............................................................. 37-334
38 ASSEMBLY PD-067-000 ROLLER BELT COVER .................................................................................... 38-336
38.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 38-337
38.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 38-337
38.3 DRAWINGS AND THE PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................ 38-337
38.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 38-337
38.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 38-339
39 ASSEMBLY PD-078-000 E-SLIDE / PD-082-000 REPLACEMENT-E-SLIDE .............................................. 39-340
39.1 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 39-341
39.1.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 39-341
39.1.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 39-344

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-10

 Table of contents / Index
40 ASSEMBLY PD-108-000 SUB-SPINDLE HEADSTOCK (FANUC) ............................................................. 40-345
40.1 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 40-346
40.1.1 Exploding view drawing ....................................................................................................... 40-346
40.1.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 40-348
41 ASSEMBLY PD-097-000 AIR DISTRIBUTOR ........................................................................................ 41-349
41.1 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 41-350
41.1.1 Assembly drawing ................................................................................................................ 41-350
41.1.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 41-352
42 ASSEMBLY PD-113-000 SUB-SPINDLE 8000/32 (FANUC) ................................................................... 42-353
42.1 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 42-354
42.1.1 Setting the clamping stroke ................................................................................................. 42-354
42.2 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 42-355
42.2.1 Detail assembly .................................................................................................................... 42-355
42.2.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 42-357
43 ASSEMBLIES PD-107-000 SUB SPINDLE DRIVE 8000/32 (FANUC) ...................................................... 43-358
43.1 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 43-359
43.1.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 43-359
43.1.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 43-360
44 ASSEMBLY PD-090-000 FEED SPINDLE E-AXIS ................................................................................... 44-361
44.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 44-362
44.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 44-362
44.2.1 Lubricating the E axis (only with sub spindle option) ........................................................... 44-362
44.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 44-363
44.3.1 Detail exploded view drawing .............................................................................................. 44-363
44.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 44-365
45 ASSEMBLY: PD-111-000 Q-FEED DRIVE (FANUC) .............................................................................. 45-366
45.1 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 45-367
45.1.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 45-367
45.1.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 45-369
46 ASSEMBLY PD-065-000 BAR GRIPPING DEVICE................................................................................. 46-370
46.1 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 46-371
46.1.1 Setting up the bar gripping device ....................................................................................... 46-371
46.1.2 Alignment of the bar gripping device ................................................................................... 46-372
46.2 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 46-375
46.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 46-375
46.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 46-375
46.3.2 Part list ................................................................................................................................. 46-377
47 ASSEMBLY: PD-066-000 GRIPPER JAWS ........................................................................................... 47-379
47.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 47-380
47.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 47-380
47.2.1 Mounting of the gripper jaws............................................................................................... 47-380
47.2.2 Alignment of the gripper jaws .............................................................................................. 47-381
47.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 47-384
47.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 47-384
47.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 47-385
48 ASSEMBLY PD-075-000 STROKE MONITORING FOR THE SUB-SPINDLE ............................................. 48-386
48.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 48-387
48.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 48-387
48.2.1 Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device ........................................................ 48-387
48.3 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................. 48-389
48.3.1 Detail exploded view drawing .............................................................................................. 48-389
48.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 48-390

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-11

 Table of contents / Index
49 ASSEMBLY PD-071-000 SPINDLES FLUSHING SYSTEM SUB SPINDLE 8000/32.................................... 49-391
49.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 49-392
49.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 49-392
49.2.1 Mounting .............................................................................................................................. 49-392
49.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 49-393
49.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS ................................................................................................................ 49-393
49.4.1 Detail assembly drawing ...................................................................................................... 49-393
49.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 49-394
50 ASSEMBLY: PD-WA-000 TAILSTOCK.................................................................................................. 50-395
50.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 50-396
50.2 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 50-396
50.2.1.1 Monitoring characteristic ................................................................................................................ 50-396
50.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ................................................................................................................. 50-396
50.4 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS ................................................................................................................ 50-396
50.4.1 Detail assembly drawing and the ISO-view .......................................................................... 50-396
50.4.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 50-398
51 ASSEMBLY SB-BA-000 HYDRAULIC SPINDLE UNIT 5000/42 (OPTION) ............................................... 51-399
51.1 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 51-400
51.1.1 Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device ........................................................ 51-400
51.2 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS ................................................................................................................ 51-401
51.2.1 Detail view drawing.............................................................................................................. 51-401
51.2.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 51-404
51.2.3 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 51-404
52 PART-CATCHER PD „1 SPINDLE“ ....................................................................................................... 52-406
52.1 HANDLING ........................................................................................................................................ 52-407
52.2 MAINTENANCE AND UPKEEP ................................................................................................................ 52-407
52.2.1 Machine................................................................................................................................ 52-407
52.3 DRAWING AND PARTS LIST ................................................................................................................... 52-408
52.3.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 52-408
52.3.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 52-409
53 ASSEMBLIES LOW PRESSURE DUPLEX FILTER ................................................................................... 53-411
53.1 DRAWING AND PARTS LIST ................................................................................................................... 53-412
53.1.1 Exploded view drawing ........................................................................................................ 53-412
53.1.2 Parts list ................................................................................................................................ 53-413

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-12

 Table of contents / Index

Index
A
Adjusting feet D................................................................................................................................................................. 46-372
Adjusting the clamping stroke monitoring device D................................................................................. 31-297, 48-387, 51-400
Adjustment microscope C ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-78
Air distributor D................................................................................................................................................................. 41-350
Alarms/Messages C ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-157
Appropriate use A .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-23
Automatic door C ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-151
Axis feed C ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-100

B
Bar gripping device
Exchange D ..................................................................................................................................................................... 46-372
Bar gripping device D .......................................................................................................................................................... 46-371
Battery Change for Absolute Rotary Encoder C .................................................................................................................. 10-189
Battery replacement, CNC backup battery C....................................................................................................................... 10-188
Bearing block D ................................................................................................................................................................. 46-373

C
Central lubricating unit D .................................................................................................................................................. 17-234
CE-symbol A ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-41
CF-Card C .............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-152
Chuck
Greasing C ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-191
Clamping device C ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-71
Clamping pressures
setting C ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-97
Clamping stroke limitation C ................................................................................................................................................. 7-71
Cleaning the working area C................................................................................................................................................ 10-176
Compact-Flashcard C............................................................................................................................................................ 8-152
Continuous load A .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-85
Coolant system D .............................................................................................................................................................. 12-211
Cover belt D ........................................................................................................................................................................ 38-337
Cross-slide D ...................................................................................................................................................................... 16-230
Customised jaws D .............................................................................................................................................................. 36-329

D
Data transmission cable - Arrangement of cable C .............................................................................................................. 8-125
Data transmission cable - Article number. C ........................................................................................................................ 8-125
Declaration of conformity
Pressure accumulator C.................................................................................................................................................. 10-198
Declaration of conformity A ................................................................................................................................................... 3-35
Delete alarm message C ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-69
Desiccant bags B.................................................................................................................................................................... 4-50
Dimensions A ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-45
Duplex filter MAHLE
Maintenance C ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-202
Duty cycle A............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-85

E
Electric cabinet D .............................................................................................................................................................. 19-247
Electromagnetic compatibility A ............................................................................................................................................ 3-47
Emergency OFF A ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-29, 3-41

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-13

 Table of contents / Index
Error diagnosis C ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-156
E-slide D ............................................................................................................................................................................ 39-341
Explosion hazard A ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-29

F
Feed spindle E-axis D ........................................................................................................................................................... 44-362
Feedscrew X-axis D............................................................................................................................................................ 26-275
Feedscrew Z-axis D ............................................................................................................................................................ 27-279
Filling/Emptying the pneumatic oiler D ............................................................................................................................... 18-239
Filter of hydraulic unit C ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-196
Fine filter
Input B .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-66
Output B ........................................................................................................................................................................... 5-66
Overflow B........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-66
Fire hazard A .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-29
Foundation plan B .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-65
Foundation plate D............................................................................................................................................................ 11-207
Frequenzy A ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-41

G
G-code system C.................................................................................................................................................................... 8-99
Greasing the chuck C ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-191
Gripper jaws D................................................................................................................................................................... 47-380

H
Handwheel C ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-97
Hydraulic unit C ................................................................................................................................................................... 10-195

I
Installation
electrical connection B ............................................................................................................................................ 5-58, 5-61
Installation
Basic conditions B............................................................................................................................................................. 5-58
pneumatic connection B .................................................................................................................................................. 5-58
Installation
pneumatic connection B ................................................................................................................................................... 5-62
Installation
further environmental conditions B .................................................................................................................................. 5-62
Installation diagrams B ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-63
Installation instructions B...................................................................................................................................................... 5-66

K
Keyboard C ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-90
Keys of the machine control panel C ..................................................................................................................................... 8-91

L
Linear measurement system D.......................................................................................................................................... 16-230
Lock safety door C .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-69
Locking the sliding door D ................................................................................................................................................... 14-220
Lubricant manufacturers/suppliers C ................................................................................................................................ 10-180
Lubricants C ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-178
Lubricating the E axis D ........................................................................................................................................... 10-194, 44-362
Lubricating the X-axis D ........................................................................................................................................ 10-192, 26-275

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-14

 Table of contents / Index
Lubricating the Z-axis D ........................................................................................................................................ 10-193, 27-279

M
M functions C ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-120
M31 C ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-101
M36 C ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-100
Machine base D ................................................................................................................................................................. 11-207
Machine control panel C ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-91
Machine control system A...................................................................................................................................................... 3-40
Machine no. A ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-41
Machine panels A ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-43
Machine type A ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-41
Machine views A ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-37
Macro C ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-122, 8-123
MAHLE low pressure duplex filter C .................................................................................................................................. 10-202
Manual locking of the turret C ............................................................................................................................................. 9-155
Mechanical design A ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-39
Messages/Alarms C ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-157
Middle offset D ................................................................................................................................................................. 47-383
Mixing lubricants C ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-178
Mounting live tools C ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-80
Move to the dead stop C ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-101
Movement of the basic machine using a crane B .................................................................................................................. 4-52
Movement of the basic machine using a fork lift B ............................................................................................................... 4-50
Movement of the basic machine using a lifting truck B ........................................................................................................ 4-51

N
Noise emission A ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-46
Nominal current A .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-41

O
Oil-level indicator D............................................................................................................................................................. 10-196
Operating mode AUTO C ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-95
Operating mode EDIT C ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-96
Operating mode Increment C................................................................................................................................................ 8-96
Operating mode JOG C .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-94
operating mode MDI C .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-95
Operating panel
Clamp/Release chuck C ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-91
Drives ON/OFF C.................................................................................................................................................................. 8-91
Emergency-OFF C ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-91
Function keys C ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-91
Handwheel C ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-91
Key operated switch for Edit-mode C.................................................................................................................................. 8-91
Key operated switch for the protective doors/set-up operation C ..................................................................................... 8-91
Operating panel
Feed Override C ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-91
Operating panel (left side of machine front) C ...................................................................................................................... 8-94
Operating panel C ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-90
Operation messages C ......................................................................................................................................................... 9-164
O-Ring for tool holder C ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-79
Other hazards A ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-29

P
Parallelity measurement of the operating arm D ............................................................................................................. 46-374
part gripper C ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-102
Permission button A ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-43
Phasenversatz ermitteln bei der Spindelsynchronisation C.................................................................................................. 8-101

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-15

 Table of contents / Index
Pneumatic unit D............................................................................................................................................................... 18-239
Power chuck D .................................................................................................................................................................... 36-327
Preparations for transportation B .......................................................................................................................................... 4-49
Pressure accumulator
Declaration of conformity C ........................................................................................................................................... 10-198
Pressure monitors A ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-43
Program continue C ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-100
Program stop C.................................................................................................................................................................... 8-100
Proximity switch 5000/42 D ................................................................................................................................................ 21-257
Proximity switch 8000/32 D ................................................................................................................................................ 22-262
Pull-type collet D ............................................................................................................................................................... 34-312
Push-type collet D ............................................................................................................................................................. 35-320

Q
Q-Feed drive D .................................................................................................................................................................. 45-367

R
Ratings plate A ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-41
Reduction pipe D ............................................................................................................................................................... 37-331
Replacement E-slide D ...................................................................................................................................................... 39-341
Reset the machine axes C..................................................................................................................................................... 9-155
Rigid Tapping C ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-99
Roller belt cover D............................................................................................................................................................. 38-337

S
Safety block D.................................................................................................................................................................... 20-251
Safety door A.......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-41
Safety door left/right D ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-220
Safety doors A ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-41, 14-220
Safety equipment A ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-41
Safety glass A.......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-42
Screen C ................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-90
Setting the clamping stroke (5000/42) D ............................................................................................................................ 21-257
Setting the clamping stroke (8000/32) D .............................................................................................................. 22-262, 42-354
Setting the gripper position D ........................................................................................................................................... 47-381
Sliding door left/right D ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-220
Spindelsynchronisation C ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-100
Spindle flushing 5000/42 D .................................................................................................................................. 29-289, 30-293
Spindle flushing 8000/42 D ............................................................................................................................................... 49-392
Spindle nose A ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-81
Spindle nut D ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-194, 44-362
Spindle speed C .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-100
Spindle unit 5000/42 D........................................................................................................................................................ 21-257
Spindle unit 8000/32 D........................................................................................................................................................ 22-262
Splash guard D................................................................................................................................................................... 13-215
Stop ring 5000/42 D ............................................................................................................................................................ 21-257
Stop ring 8000/32 D ............................................................................................................................................................ 22-262
Stop ring D........................................................................................................................................................................... 42-354
Stopper B............................................................................................................................................................................... 5-67
Storage B ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-56
Stroke limiting ring 5000/42 D ............................................................................................................................................ 21-257
Stroke limiting ring 8000/32 D ............................................................................................................................................ 22-262
Stroke limiting ring D ........................................................................................................................................................... 42-354
Sub-spindle 8000/32 D ...................................................................................................................................................... 42-354
Sub-spindle headstock D ................................................................................................................................................... 40-346
Support bracket D ............................................................................................................................................................. 47-380
Switch on C............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-69
Switching off C ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-69
Synchroner Achsbetrieb C .................................................................................................................................................... 8-101

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-16

 Table of contents / Index
T
Tailstock D ............................................................................................................................................................. 28-283, 50-396
Tailstock quill D ................................................................................................................................................................... 28-283
Technical data A .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-45
Tension A................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-41
Threaded rod D ................................................................................................................................................................. 33-307
Threaded rod D ................................................................................................................................................................. 32-302
Throttle check valve
Gripper D ........................................................................................................................................................................ 46-371
Tie rod D ............................................................................................................................................................... 32-302, 33-307
Time diagram C ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-118
Tool drive A ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-85
Tool fracture monitor
messages C ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-103
M-functions C ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-103
Tool measuring C................................................................................................................................................................... 7-75
Tool mounting C ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-79
Torque limiting E-axis C ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-101
Touching the workpiece C ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-77
Transportation and storage B ................................................................................................................................................ 4-49
Transportation over short distances B .................................................................................................................................. 4-53
Transportation overseas B .................................................................................................................................................... 4-54
Troubleshooting C ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-156

U
UNIMAG interface
option bits C ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-111
signal description C ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-109
structure NC parts program C ........................................................................................................................................ 8-108
UNIROB Interface C ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-151
Universal limit stop 5000/42 D.......................................................................................................................................... 32-302
Universal limit stop 8000/32 D.......................................................................................................................................... 33-307
Unlock emergency off C ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-69
Unlocking the sliding door D ............................................................................................................................................. 14-220
Unpacking B .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-55
USB C .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-152

W
Warning plates A .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-44
Warnings and symbols A ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-23
Weight A ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-45
Wiper seals D .................................................................................................................................................................... 15-226
Work precision B ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-62
Workpiece sensor
activate/deactivate C ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-104
adjustment C .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-104
error messages C ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-105
measurement C ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-104
measurement set C ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-104
Workspace paneling D ...................................................................................................................................................... 15-226

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-17

A User information Basic information

Technical Product Documentation

1 Basic information

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-18

A User information Basic information

1.1 Basic information

This technical product documentation should make it easier for you to familiarize yourself
with the machine and use the machine in accordance with its intended areas of
application.

The document contains important information on how to safely, correctly and

economically use the machine. Paying close attention will help you to avoid hazardous
situations, reduce repair costs and down-times and increase the reliability and life span of
the machine.

The technical product documentation includes instructions on how to prevent accidents

and help protect the environment in accordance with the existing national laws relating to
these subjects. The documentation must always be available at the location where the
machine is used.

The documentation is to be read and used by everyone who works on the machine, for
example, persons who are assigned to carry out the following tasks:
− Operation, including setup, correcting errors in the work procedure, care and disposal of
operational and additional materials

− Maintenance (maintenance, inspection, repair) and/or

− Transportation
The recognized technical regulations relating to the safe operation and appropriate usage
of the machine are to be observed in addition to the technical product documentation and
the applicable regulations relating to accident prevention in the country where the
machine is used.

The personnel assigned to carry out tasks on the machine must have read and
understood the technical product documentation, especially the chapter "Basic safety
instructions", before he or she begins working on the machine. It is too late to start
reading this material once you have started working. The basic safety instructions must
be observed.

THE SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE OF THE COMPANY OPERATING THE

MACHINE MUST REPEATEDLY DRAW THE ATTENTION OF THE
OPERATING PERSONNEL TO THE DANGERS INHERENT TO
HANDLING THE INSTALLATION INDICATED IN THE BASIC
INFORMATION IN THE TECHNICAL PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION.
The technical product documentation was created in accordance with the following
guidelines and norms:

− Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC

− VDI 4500 Sheet 1: Technical documentation – Information for user (2006-06)
− DIN EN 62079: User's information – References for the presentation (2001-11)
− DIN EN ISO 12100: Safety of machinery – Basic terminology, methodology

The Spinner company reserves the right to make changes at any time to the product
without prior notification. In addition, the information contained in this technical product
documentation can be changed without prior notification.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-19

A User information Basic information

This technical product documentation contains copyright information protected by

copyrights. All rights reserved. It is not permitted to reprint, photocopy or store this
technical product documentation or any excerpt on an electronic storage medium without
the expressed consent of the Spinner company.

 Spinner Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 1-20

A User information Basic safety information

Technical Product Documentation

2 Basic safety information

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-21

A User information Basic safety information

THERE IS STILL A SMALL POTENTIAL FOR DANGER THAT

CANNOT BE ELIMINATED EVEN IF YOU HAVE TAKEN ALL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. THESE DANGERS MAY ONLY ARISE
UNDER CERTAIN CIRCUMSTANCES OR CANNOT BE
RECOGNIZED AS HAZARDOUS. WE WOULD ESPECIALLY LIKE
TO POINT OUT THAT YOU SHOULD PAY ATTENTION EVERY
TIME YOU USE THE MACHINE. INATTENTION CAN LEAD TO
BODILY INJURY AND DAMAGED EQUIPMENT.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-22

A User information Basic safety information

2.1 Warnings and symbols

The following designations and symbols are used for especially important information in
this technical product documentation:

DANGER
Information, regulations and prohibitions to prevent bodily harm

CAUTION
Special information, regulations and prohibitions to prevent
damage to equipment and materials

NOTE
Special statements/information regarding the (economic) use of
the machine

2.2 Appropriate use

The machine is built in accordance with the current state of the technology and recognized
safety regulations. However, the machine can be a source of danger when it is not used by
trained, or at least instructed, personnel, or when it is used incorrectly or for something for
which it is not intended. The following can occur in these cases:

• Danger of bodily injury or death of the user or others

• Damage to the machine and other material goods belonging to the user
• Inefficient operation of the machine
• Destruction of machine parts/tools due to collision.
Only use the machine when it is in technically perfect condition and for its intended
purpose, and be aware of the hazards and safety instructions stated in this technical
product documentation! In particular, correct (or have someone correct) any malfunctions
that affect the safety of the machine immediately!

The machine is only to be used for machining parts using the tools intended for this
purpose. Almost all materials that can be machined can be used such as metal, wood or
plastic. Materials such as ceramic may not be used. Both the use of this machine for any
other use and the overloading of the machine are considered inappropriate usage. The
manufacturer is not liable for any damage resulting from inappropriate use. The user
alone carries the responsibility in this case.

Appropriate use also includes the observance of the operation, maintenance and repair
guidelines as well as of the information in the technical product documentation.

You may not make any changes or structural modifications to the machine or add
equipment that may affect the safety of the machine without authorization from the
supplier. This also applies to the installation and setup of safety equipment.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-23

A User information Basic safety information

2.3 Application limits

The application limits are determined by the maximum values of the machine, especially
those for:
• The feed ranges
• The dimensions relating to the spindle taper
• The speed of the spindle
• The diameter of the chuck
These values are listed in the technical data. Familiarize yourself with this data before
using the machine to avoid severely damaging the machine (see book A User
information, Chapter 3 Product Description).

2.4 When the machine can be used

• You are only to operate the machine when all safety equipment and safety-
related equipment, e.g. removable safety equipment, emergency OFF equipment
or exhaust equipment, are available and function properly (see also Chapter 3
Product Description)!

2.5 Working safely – Organizational measures

• Do not carry out any work steps that negatively affect the safety of the machine!
• All safety information and information on hazards on the machine are to be
observed!
• All safety information and information on hazards on the machine are to be
maintained in a readable format together with all related documentation!
• Do not stand in the direct path of any objects that may fly off the spindle!
• The personnel should not have long exposed hair or wear loose clothing or
jewelry (including rings), otherwise there is a danger of bodily harm (e.g. when
clothing gets caught or the operator is pulled into the machine)! The operator
must conform to the personal safety measures in the national regulations related
to accident prevention (hair net, protective goggles, gloves, ear plugs or related
gear, protective steel-tipped shoes, etc.)!
• Check at regular intervals to ensure that the personnel are aware of the safety
measures and dangers in accordance with the technical product documentation!
• The responsibilities for the various tasks to be carried out in conjunction with the
operation of the machine must be clearly defined and maintained so that there
are no undefined areas of responsibility when it comes to safety! When making
changes to the machine that affect its safety or changing the way you operate
the machine, switch off the machine immediately and inform the office/person
responsible!
• Original parts and accessories are specially designed for this machine. We would
especially like to call your attention to the fact that original parts and accessories
not supplied by us have also not been tested and released by us! The installation
and/or the use of such products can therefore negatively affect the structural
properties of the machine! The manufacturer is not liable for any damage that
results from the use of parts and accessories that are not original parts and
accessories!
• Do not make any changes to the internal control software/machine software!
• Observe the fire prevention regulations when handling flammable materials!
• Switch off the machine immediately and lock it when a malfunction occurs! Have
the malfunction corrected as soon as possible!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-24

A User information Basic safety information
• Before switching on or engaging the machine, make sure that no one will be
placed in a hazardous situation as a result of the machine startup!
• Observe and maintain the prescribed setup, maintenance, and inspection tasks
and schedules, including those specifications regarding the exchanging of
parts/components, in the technical product documentation! These tasks may only
be carried out by trained personnel!
• If the machine is switched off completely for maintenance and repair work, then it
must be protected against an unexpected startup (by switching the main switch
off and locking it with a padlock, and by removing all keys from the operating
panel)!
• Scrap machines as well as replacement parts, packaging and lubricants are
recyclable materials. The owner is obliged to dispose of those materials
environmentally suitable and according to the statutory provisions!
• When mounting equipment on the machine at head level or above, use an
appropriate and safe ladder and a working platform! Do not climb onto the
machine using parts of the machine as a ladder!
• Ensure that the operational and auxiliary materials, as well as old, exchanged
parts, are disposed of in a safe and environmentally sound manner!
• The operator must also make sure that no unauthorized persons work on the
machine!
• The operator is required to inspect the machine at least once per shift for
external damage and defects, and to inform the appropriate persons when a
change is discovered that affects the safety (and operation) of the machine!
• If the safety equipment needs to be removed when adding new equipment to the
machine or when carrying out maintenance or repair work, then the safety
equipment must be remounted and inspected immediately after the maintenance
and repair work is completed!
• Keys and handling elements for locking devices must only be in possession of
authorized persons. Substitute keys, substitute elements or universal keys must
not be accessible for all. When no authorized persons are in possession of such
keys or elements there will be a high risk of injury for them at the machine by an
improper handling. An improper handling of the machine can also cause serious
damages to the machine!

2.6 Personnel selection and qualifications

• Allow only trained or instructed personnel to work on the machine! Clearly define
which persons are responsible for the operation, equipping, maintenance and
repair of the machine!
• Make sure that the only persons that work on the machine are those assigned to
work on the machine!
• Personnel in training, receiving instructions or who are still in a general training
program are only to be allowed on the machine when under constant supervision
by experienced personnel!
• Work done on the electrical equipment of the machine may only be carried out
by an electrician or by trained personnel under the guidance and supervision of
an electrician in accordance with the regulations relating to electrical systems!
Work done on the hydraulic equipment of the machine may only be carried out
by personnel with special knowledge and experience in hydraulics! The
appropriate tools and equipment must be available!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-25

A User information Basic safety information

2.7 General hazards on the machine

2.7.1 Mechanical hazards

• Danger of bodily injury in the form of bruises, cuts, bumps, stab wounds,
abrasions or any other injuries resulting from getting pulled into the machine,
etc.! These dangers are presented mainly by the moving machine parts, sharp-
edged workpieces/ sharp chips and filings, sharp tools, etc.! Do not reach into
moving machine parts!

2.7.2 Electrical hazards

• Danger of bodily injury due to contact with charged parts or current-carrying
parts in the electric cabinet! Allow only trained personnel to work on the electric
cabinet!

2.7.3 Thermal hazards

• Danger of bodily injury due to hot surfaces on the cooling system! Care is to be
taken when manually removing the machined workpieces! The workpieces can
still be very hot even though they are cooled while being machined!
• Be careful when touching the tools after the machining process! The tools can
still be very hot even though they are cooled while machining process!

2.8 Special types of hazards

YOU MUST NOT CARRY OUT WORKS IN CLOSE VICINITY OF THE

MACHINE THAT CAUSES FLYING SPARKS (E. G. GRINDING)!
THERE IS A RISK OF FIRE!

2.8.1 Electrical
• Use only original circuit breakers with the prescribed current and voltage ratings.
Switch off the machine immediately when a malfunction in the electrical supply of
the machine is discovered!
• Work done on the electrical equipment or operating materials of the machine
may only be carried out by an electrician or by trained personnel under the
guidance and supervision of an electrician in accordance with the regulations
relating to electrical systems.
• Machine and equipment parts on which inspection, maintenance and repair work
must be done may not carry current or be under voltage when conducting such
work! Switch off the corresponding equipment!
• The electrical equipment of a machine is to be inspected regularly. Defects such
as loose connections must be repaired immediately!

2.8.2 Hydraulic and pneumatic systems

• Work on the hydraulic equipment may only be carried out by persons with special
knowledge and experience in hydraulics!
• All lines, hoses and threaded connections must be inspected regularly for leaks
and other recognizable external damage! Repair damage immediately! Oil
spraying out of the machine can cause injury and burns and can also harm the
environment!
• Depressurize any sections of the system and compressed air or hydraulic lines
before beginning the repair work!
• Do not confuse the hydraulic and compressed air lines!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-26

A User information Basic safety information
• Exchange the hydraulic hoses in suitable intervals even when you cannot find
any defects that may affect the safety of the machine!

2.8.3 Oil, grease and other chemical substances

• You must observe the applicable safety regulations for the product when
handling oil, grease and other chemical substances!
• Take care when handling hot operational and auxiliary materials! You may burn
or scald yourself!

2.9 Danger through vertical axes and tilted axes

THERE IS A HIGH RISK OF ACCIDENT AND INJURY FOR THE
USER IN CASE OF VERTICAL OR TILTED AXES BECAUSE THEY
CAN FALL DOWN OR START MOVING WHEN NOT EXPECTED!

IN SPITE OF SAFETY DEVICES (MOTOR BRAKES, FIXING

DEVICES ETC.) THE STAY BELOW THE VERTICAL AXIS OR AT
THE TILTED AXIS RESPECTIVELY MUST BE LIMITED AS FAR AS
POSSIBLE IN CASE OF MANUAL WORK AND FORBIDDEN IN CASE
OF SET UP WORK!

2.10 Danger during machining bar material

WHEN MACHINING BAR MATERIAL NEVER INTRODUCE THE BAR

INTO THE SPINDEL WHEN THE SPINDLE IS STILL RUNNING!
OBSERVE THAT THE SPINDLE IS SAFELY STOPPED! IMPLEMENT
ACTIONS IN ORDER TO AVOID THE UNDESIGNED SWITCHING ON
OF THE MACHINE! THERE IS A RISK TO BE HIT AND HURT BY
TURNING MACHINE ELEMENTS!
THE BAR MATERIAL MUST NOT BE LONGER THAN THE LENGTH
OF THE SPINDLE UNLESS AN APPRPRIATE BAR SUPPORT WITH
COVER (BAR SUPPORT UNIT) OR A BAR FEEDER IS USED!
WITHOUT THESE MEASURES THE BAR MATERIAL MUST NOT JUT
OUT OF THE SPINDLE! THERE IS RISK TO BE HURT BY TURNING
AND POSSIBLY SNAPED OFF BARS! BEFORE SWITCHING ON
THE SPINDLE MAKE SURE THAT ALL PROTECTIVE COVERS ARE
SAFELY FIXED!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-27

A User information Basic safety information

2.11 Risk for the health because of the pulverization of the coolant
WHEN MACHINING PIECES USING COOLANT, THE RESULT IS A
VERY FINE PULVERIZATION OF THE COOLANT! THIS COOLANT
MIST CAN COME OUT DURING THE MACHINING THROUGH
OPENINGS WHICH RESULT FROM THE DESIGN OF THE MACHINE
(E.G DISCHARGE SLIDE OF THE PART CATCHER ETC.) OR AFTER
THE MACHINING WHEN OPENING THE SAFETY DOOR!
BREATHING IN THIS MIST CAN BE A HIGH RISK FOR THE HEALTH
AND MUST BE AVOIDED! TO KEEP THE LEVEL OF THE COOLANT
MIST ALREADY LOW FROM THE BEGINNING OF THE MACHINING
WE RECOMMEND TO INSTALL A SUITABLE ELECTROSTATIC
EXHAUSTER!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-28

A User information Basic safety information

2.12 Emergency OFF

• To immediately stop the machine in case of an emergency press down the red
Emergency OFF button on the machine operator panel or the operator panel on
the left (see also book A User information, Chapter 3 Product Description)!

Figure 2-1: Picture of all Emergency OFF buttons on the machine PD (Control Fanuc 32i-B)

2.13 Fire and explosion hazards/other hazards

Machine tools, e.g. for turning, milling, grinding, etc., that work with cutting oils, emulsions
(even water-based emulsions with a concentration >10%) can catch fire suddenly, even
when working dry. Explosive mixtures can also form in the closed working area when
using machine tools. When working dry, very fine metal particles may also be produced
that can lead to a dust explosion.

We would especially like to point out that the use of cutting oils of any kind as well as of
emulsions with concentrations >10% or dry work can only be done when the machine is
equipped with the corresponding fire and explosion prevention equipment. This
equipment can be purchased separately as an option. If the machine operator decides not
to use this equipment, then he or she must accept the fact that the machine's uses are
limited and that he or she assumes the risk of a fire or explosion when using cutting oils
or when working dry.

SPINNER DOES NOT ASSUME ANY RESPONSIBILITY WHEN

THE MACHINE OPERATOR IGNORES THESE FIRE AND
EXPLOSION HAZARDS OR USES THE MACHINE WITHOUT
THE SAFETY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO USE THE MACHINE!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-29

A User information Basic safety information

AT ALL EVENTS, PLEASE NOTE THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF

THE MANUFACTURER OF THESE FLUIDS PARTICULARLY IN
RESPECT OF THE VISCOSITY AND THE FLASH POINT OF THE
FLUID!

2.13.1 Machining or processing aluminium or magnesium

Additional hazards, e.g. owing to fire and explosion or hazardous dusts, occur when
machining or processing aluminium or magnesium. Here as well, it is necessary to take
additional safety measures for accident prevention (see 2.11)

SEE ALSO NATIONAL REGULATIONS ON ACCIDENT PREVENTION

WHEN MACHINING OR PROCESSING ALUMINIUM OR
MAGNESIUM.

2.13.2 Organizational measures for fire prevention in the vicinity of the

machine tool
To prevent the spread of fire to the surrounding area in the event of a machine tool fire,
the general rules governing conduct during a fire as well as those covering fire prevention
must be observed. The most frequent factors in the quick spread of a consequential fire
are the following: oil sumps full of oil and grating in front of the machine (which both have
large surface areas), large cooling lubricant surfaces as well as other combustible
materials in the vicinity of the machine (e.g. paper, cardboard, oily cloths, etc.).

THE POTENTIAL COMBUSTIVE ENERGY IN THE VICINITY OF A

MACHINE TOOL MUST BE KEPT AS LOW AS POSSIBLE!
CARDBOARD AND OILY CLOTHS MAY NOT BE PLACED OR
EVEN STORED IN THE VICINITY OF THE MACHINE TOOL!

Measures:
• Drain oil sumps regularly in accordance with maintenance regulations.
• Any grating in front of the machine that has filled with oil must be cleaned
regularly (oil siphoned off)
• Remove cardboard boxes and oily cloths. These kinds of cloths must be stored
in non-combustible, closed containers.
• Empty swarf containers regularly.

CIGARETTE ENDS AND COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS SUCH AS

OILY CLOTHS, CARDBOARD, ETC. SHOULD NOT BE FOUND IN
THE SWARF CONTAINER FOR ANY REASON! SMOKING IN THE
VICINITY OF THE MACHINE IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-30

A User information Basic safety information

2.14 Customer´s own pressurized air functions

IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO ENSURE THAT
PRESSURIZED AIR FUNCTIONS CONNECTED/SET-UP ON THE
PRESSURIZED AIR CONNECTIONS PROVIDED ON THE
MACHINE WHICH THEY HAVE RECEIVED FROM SPINNER, ARE
COMPLIANT TO THE RELEVANT SAFETY STANDARDS. NO
DANGER TO THE PERSONNEL OR MACHINE MAY RESULT IN
NORMAL OPERATION, WITH THE EMERGENCY-STOP OF THE
MACHINE, DURING A RESET, AS A RESULT OF PRESSURE
LOSS OR WHEN OPENING A SAFETY DOOR AS A RESULT OF
THESE PRESSURIZED AIR FUNCTIONS!

2.15 Avoiding water pollution

An absolute impermeability to leaks cannot be guaranteed under every mounting and
application condition with every machine. A danger of cooling lubricant loss when
inserting and removing workpieces or due to the rupture of a hydraulic connection within
the system can lead to the emergence of lubricant oil in special individual cases causing
contamination of the ground.
The operator of the machine has to undertake the following measures depending on the
installation site of the machine and onsite conditions as well as the national regulations
which apply:

− THE MACHINE MUST BE INSTALLED IN A SUITABLE,

RESISTANT AND LIQUID SEALED COLLECTION PAN,
WHEREBY THE COLLECTION VOLUME OF THE PAN MUST
BE 10 % MORE THAN THE STORED QUANTITY OR THE
CONTENT OF THE LARGEST CONTAINER (NORMALLY
COOLANT TANK)!

− ALL HOSES, LINES (INCLUDING PRESSURELESS RETURN

LINES) AND TANKS SHOULD BE INSPECTED REGURLARY
TO ENSURE THAT THEY ARE SEALED!

CONTACT THE RELEVANT AUTHORITIES IMMEDIATELY IF

SURFACE RIVERS/STREAM BECOMES CONTAMINATED!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-31

A User information Basic safety information

2.16 Testing of emergency-stop button

The emergency-stop buttons on the machine and units are to be visually inspected daily
for damage.

They are to be tested for functionality and effectiveness once per day. To do so, each
emergency-stop button is to be pressed separately to make sure that all individual
emergency-stop buttons are functional.

The operator of the machine is responsible for carrying out emergency-stop functionality
testing.
The testing must take place in accordance with your local "Workplace Safety Regulation"
valid in your country or a testing system of comparable quality.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-32

A User information Basic safety information

2.17 Instructions for working with hydraulic fluids

Danger to Personnel and Environment

− The product is combustible
− Repeated skin contact can dry out skin
− Water hazardous material of
water hazard class WGK 2
Flammable Harmful Environmentally
hazardous

Protective Measures and Conduct

− The hydraulic system pressure has to be removed
before work commences
− Wear oil resistant gloves (Nitrile rubber type)
− Wear closed safety goggles when refilling
− Change clothing contaminated with oil immediately
− Do not put cloths contaminated with oil in your trouser pockets
− Keep away from food and drink
− Ensure proper ventilation when working

Behaviour with Danger

− Do not use water to extinguish
− Extinguish with foam, CO2 or powder
− Avoid penetration into the ground
− Avoid contamination of the sewage drainage system and surface
water
− Use oil binding agents to soak up hydraulic oil or coolants

First Aid
− Rinse out thoroughly for 15 minutes under flowing water with eye
contact
− Prevent vomiting if ingested
− Wash the affected body parts with soap and water. Consult a doctor
if symptoms persist.

Correct Disposal
− Empty used hydraulic oil or coolant into the containers provided for
disposal
− Do not pour remaining quantities into the drain
− Contact the relevant authorities if the fluid enters surface waters,
sewage systems or sub surfaces

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 2-33

A User information Product Description

Technical Product Documentation

3 Product Description

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-34

A User information Product Description

3.1 EC Declaration of conformity

EC Declaration of conformity
as defined by the EC machine direction 2006/42/EC Annex II A
EC direction Electromagnetic compatibility 2014/30/EU
EC direction Electrical equipment 2014/35/EU

The machine
Description Ultra precision lathe
Type PD
Serial number
Year of
construction
Use Industrial Zone
has been developed, designed and built according to the above mentioned EC directions in the own
risk of:
Company SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH
Rudolf-Diesel-Ring 24
D-82054 Sauerlach (near Munich)
Tel.: +49 8104/803-0; Fax: +49 8104/803-19
E-Mail: [email protected]; [email protected]
If the machine has been modified or changed by the enduser, this certificate is not valid any more.
The following standards have been used to judge the electromagnetic compatibility:
EN 50370-1
EN 50370-2

The following harmonized standards have been used:

EN 13857 EN 894-1/-2/-3 EN 23125 EN 55011

EN 12100 EN 13849-1 EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-4
EN 13850 EN 953 EN 60204 T1 + T2
EN 13732 EN 349 EN 1550

The following national standards, directions and specifications have been used

VDE 0100-T410 DIN 45635 T16 VDI 2854 ENV 50140

ENV 50141 ENV 50142

The following international standards, directions and specifications have been used:

IEC 801-2

Authorised person to compile the technical documentation:

Siegbert Kokott
SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH
Rudolf-Diesel-Ring 24
D-82054 Sauerlach (bei München)

Sauerlach 03/2016 .......................................................................

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-35

A User information Product Description
Dipl.-Ing. (FH) Nicolaus Spinner (authorized signatory

3.2 Introduction
The machine in the PD series is a compact high precision lathe for meeting the highest
demands relating to geometry, surface quality and dimensional precision on small to
medium-sized rotary parts. The machine can be adapted to the production requirements
at various development levels, from the simple finishing lathe up to a fully automatic
turning cell, so that it is equally possible to have small series production or mass
production. The machine is fitted with the most recent CNC control systems for the
economic production runs from one piece upwards. This machine model is characterised
by generous machining potential from a machine which takes up a very small amount of
floor space.

3.3 Areas of use

There are many different areas in which machines in the PD series can be employed.
High precision parts for virtually all sectors of industry can be produced or finished.

The main areas of use lie in fine mechanics, optics, medical technology, computer-
technology, for the manufacture of hydraulic and pneumatic components and parts for the
automobile and aircraft industries. The machines can also be used in entertainment
electronics manufacture, the ball-bearing Industry, for the manufacture of articles for daily
use and luxury articles such as watches or writing utensils, in toolmaking or also in
Research and Development and training.

3.3.1 Areas of use

Fine mechanics: Measuring imstruments, small motors, axes, shafts, gears

Optics: Microscopes, spectacle frames, housings, objectives
Medical technology: Implants, medical apparatus, tools
Hydraulics/pneumatics: Valves, hydro-motors, hydro-pumps, slide valves for
pistons
Electronics: Plug connectors
Automobile/Aircraft Industry: Valves, nozzles for petrol injection and ABS, sensors
Supply industries: Finishing of diecast, moulded and sintered parts
Roller Bearing Industry: Hard turning, the machining of ball cages
Tool making, mould making: Individual parts, electrodes, form cores

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-36

A User information Product Description

3.4 Machine views of the PD series

3.4.1 Overall view of the machine without housing

7 6
5

Figure 3-1: Overall view of the machine without its housing

1) Heavy machine base with coolant system
2) Rigid 40-degree cast iron bed in slanting position
3) Hardened and ground guide ways
4) Subspindle
5) Indexing turret/servo turret or linear tools
6) Solid headstock housing
7) High precision spindle unit
8) Cross slide with linear measuring system
9) Coolant tank and chip box (chip conveyor as option)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-37

A User information Product Description

3.4.2 Front view and right side of the machine

Machine
Safety doors control panel

Electric cabinet
with cooling
Push buttons system

Chip box

Coolant tank Main switch

Permission button

Figure 3-2: Front view and right side of the PD series

3.4.3 Left side of the machine

Part catcher

Main spindle motor

Spindle covering unit

Socket for bar

feeder

Parts collector

Figure 3-3: Left side of the machine of the PD series; on the right with part catcher as
option - on the left without part catcher

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-38

A User information Product Description

3.4.4 Rear view

Pneumatic unit

Electric cabinet

Central lubrication
reservoir

Figure 3-4: Rear view of the PD series

3.5 Mechanical design

The machines of the PD series are made of a thick walled sheet steel base which takes
the machinebed, the axes as well as the spindle unit. The solid machinebed, the cross
slide and the headstock housing are made of vibration damping cast iron material.

The cross slide unit has slide ways without backlash, preloaded ballscrews to move the
slides a linear measuring systems for a safe positioning in a range of 0.1 µm. All slide
ways are hardened and ground.

The working area is completely sealed and closed. A safety door with two sliding doors
and safety equipment guarantee a fast and not dangerous access to the working area to
change the workpiece or to set up the machine.

3.5.1 Machine versions

The machines of the PD series are built in different versions. The basic machine is
equipped with 2 linear axes (X and Z) which are controlled by CNC and a linear tool
holder. This basic machine is already ready for service to machine precision parts.

The next higher version has an indexing turret for the tools and a tailstock for the
universal machining of wavy parts. The highest version is equipped with 3 axes controlled
by CNC (X, Z, C). In conjunction with driven tools there can be integrated complex milling
and drilling operations.

For a fully automatic handling all machine versions can be equipped with bar feeder
devices (from a simple weight feeder up to a fully automatic loading magazine) or with
CNC controlled gantry loaders.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-39

A User information Product Description

3.6 Machine control system

The machine is fitted with the most modern control system from Fanuc that means with a
control system of the i-series. This new CNC-generation is the flattest and most compact
CNC worldwide. There are two kinds of processors: a Pentium processor (32i-B)
respectively a 486DX2 processor (32i-B). The control system is equipped with a high
speed PLC which shortens the machine cycles. A standard is the status display of the
PLC program for diagnosis.

Modern digital servo and spindle technologies enable the machining with high speed, high
precision and effectiveness.

The operation of the CNC control is easy and not complicated. In a lot of points the i-
series shows a uniform operation compared with older control generations. That´s way
the setting-in period of the operating staff can be considerably reduced.

Optionally the control can be equipped with a workshop programming (Manual Guide i)
without changing the hardware or the user interface.

Next to the control system there is a plug-in place for PCMCIA-memory cards and USB
flash drive. These can be used for rapidly and easily saving parts programs, parameters
etc. The electrical system in the machine is designed in accordance with DIN EN 60204-
1.

Emergency-
off button

Figure 3-5: The user interface for the machine’s control system

Please see Book C Operation/Maintenance, Chapter 8 Machine specific options of the

control Fanuc 32i-B for description of the functions of the control system.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-40

A User information Product Description

3.7 Location of the ratings plate and CE symbol

Figure 3-6: Ratings plate and CE symbol

The ratings plate and the CE symbol are located for the PD series on the rear of the
machine above the electric cabinet.

The ratings plate contains the following statements: Machine no., machine type, tension,
nominal current and frequency.

3.8 Safety equipment

The PD series machines come with a number of passive and active safety devices as
standard equipment. These devices guarantee maximum safety for the operating
personnel when using the machine. It is not permitted to remove this safety equipment or
make it inoperative as this significantly increases the risk of injury or accident.

YOU MAY NOT REMOVE SAFETY EQUIPMENT ON THE MACHINE

OR MAKE IT INOPERATIVE! THIS SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASES
THE RISK OF INJURY OR ACCIDENT!

1) Emergency OFF: The Emergency OFF buttons are located on the operator
panel of the machine control system (see Figure 3-5) and on the operator panel
next to the safety door (on the left). They are used to shut down the entire
machine system and are triggered by pressing the button or by a machine
malfunction. It is unlocked again by turning slightly in the counterclockwise
direction (see also the picture of the Emergency Off button in Book A User
information, Chapter 2 Basic safety information).

THE EMERGENCY OFF BUTTON MAY ONLY BE UNLOCKED

AFTER THE REASON WHY THE EMERGENCY OFF WAS
TRIGGERED HAS BEEN CORRECTED! OTHERWISE THERE IS A
HIGH RISK OF INJURY OR ACCIDENT!

2) Safety doors: The safety doors prevent persons from reaching into the working
area while the machine is running.
The closed doors* are locked after booting the control system, when the key
operated switch has been turned to the position Automatic mode before
switching on the machine, they are automatically unlocked when the key
operated switch has been turned to the position Setup mode before switching on
the machine (provided that the forced security check succeeded).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-41

A User information Product Description
The safety doors which are locked in the Automatic mode are unlocked turning
the key operated switch to the Setup mode.
When the key operated switch is on the Setup mode the safety doors can be
opened and closed as necessary. They will not be locked. They only will be
locked turning the key operated switch to the position Automatic mode and
subsequently closing them.
* The switch on routine can not be effected completely with safety doors open

THE CLOSED DOORS ARE NOT AUTOMATICALLY LOCKED

TURNING THE KEY OPERATED SWITCH TO THE POSITION
AUTOMATIC MODE. YOU MUST THEN OPEN AND CLOSE
THEM ONCE.

THE SAFETY DOOR MUST ALWAYS REMAIN CLOSED! THE

KEY-OPERATED SWITCH ON THE SAFETY DOOR MAY NOT BE
DAMAGED, REMOVED OR MADE INOPERATIVE!

3) Safety glass: The safety door is equipped with a high-impact resistant screen of
Polycarbonate. If a workpiece were to become loose and fly off the chucking tool,
then the safety glass will prevent the workpiece from breaking through. However,
in spite of this safety feature, the operator is still not allowed to stand directly in
the flight path of the spindle, and therefore of the workpiece. Due to the safety
glass the risk of workpieces or clamping devices to be expelled from the working
area by centrifugal force is reduced but the safety glass can not completely avoid
this risk.

THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY

AFTER IT IS BROKEN OR WHEN IT IS CRACKED! IT SHOULD
ALSO BE REPLACED WHEN IT COMES INTO CONTACT WITH A
LOOSE WORKPIECE, EVEN IF NO EXTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE
SAFETY GLASS CAN BE FOUND! REPLACE THE SAFETY
GLASSES AFTER 2 YEARS AT THE LATEST FOR AGEING
REASONS!

IN ADDITION, THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE CHANGED WHEN

THERE ARE PERMANENT DEFORMATIONS AS DENTS, WHEN
THE BORDER SEALS ARE DAMAGED OR WHEN THE SAFETY
GLASS BECOMES UNCLEAR BY COOLANT THAT PENETRATES
THE SANDWICH STRUCTURE!

SAFETY GLASSES MADE OF POLYCARBONATE ARE VERY

DANGEROUS WHEN THEY BECOME MILKY! ALSO IN THIS
CASE THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE CHANGED!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-42

A User information Product Description

4) Set-up operation: In set-up operation, the machine can be operated with

reduced speed even when the protection door is open. In order to do this, the
key switch of the protection door must be turned to set-up operation. Additional
protective measures in connection with this are the reduced feed speed (2
m/min) and the reduced spindle speed (50 1/min).

ONLY TRAINED PERSONNEL ARE ALLOWED TO WORK IN THE

PERMISSION MODE!

5) Pressure monitors: The pressure monitor is located in the pneumatic unit. It

triggers an emergency OFF as soon as the pressure drops below a preset value.

THE DEFAULT SETTINGS OF THE PRESSURE MONITORS MAY NOT

BE CHANGED!

6) Machine housing: The machine housing protect the operator from rotating and
moving machine parts.

THE MACHINE MUST NOT BE OPERATED WITHOUT MACHINE

HOUSING! THERE IS A HIGH RISK OF MORTAL DANGER DUE
TO ROTATING AND MOVING MACHINE COMPONENTS!

7) Working area: The working area is completely sealed so that no coolant can
leak from the working area during machining. All seals of the working area must
be in perfect state to avoid that coolant leaks from the working area. Damaged
seals must be changed.

DAMAGED SEALS MUST IMMEDIATELY BE CHANGED!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-43

A User information Product Description

3.9 Warning plates and safety information on the machine

It is necessary not only to observe the basic safety instructions for the machine, but also
to observe the warnings and “safety information” plates (see the pictures below).

Warning plate on the right

side of the machine on
the left door of the electric
cabinet (left)

Warning plate on the

tailstock in the working
area (right) - exists only
when the machine is
equipped with a tailstock

Warning plate “Safety

door“ (left)

Warning plate “Running

spindle“ above the main
spindle in the working area
(right)

Warning plate „Cover“ on

the left side of the machine
(right)

Warning plate
„Warning plate „Risks
during machining bar
material“ (see right
plate)

Plate “Security notice“ on the left side of the

machine

Figure 3-7: Warning plates and security information on the machine

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-44

A User information Product Description

3.10 Technical data of the machine

Due to constant development of the equipment and accessories for our products as well
as due to technical requirements, we reserve the right to make technical changes that
serve to improve the operation, maintenance and safety of the machine.

3.10.1 Mechanical data

Dimensions/ L x W x H (without chip conveyor) m 2,8x2,0x1,7

Weight Floor space m² 5,6
Total weight kg app. 2300
Swing diameter above bed mm 300
Usual turning diameter mm 120
Axes max. X stroke mm 400
max. Z stroke mm 400
max. speed X/Z m/min 12
1)
Main spindle Speed (bar capacity 42 mm) 1/min 5000
1)
Speed (bar capacity 32 mm) 1/min 8000
Ø Spindle nose (5000 1/min) mm 110
Ø Spindle nose (8000 1/min) mm 100
Max. permitted weight for chuck jaws kg 1,25
(5000 rpm)
Max. permitted weight for chuck jaws kg 0,625
(8000 rpm)
Max. Ø Power chuck (5000 1/min) mm 140
Max. Ø Power chuck (8000 1/min) mm 125
Max. force of clamping cylinder (5000 1/min) daN 600 (6 bar)
Max. force of clamping cylinder (8000 1/min) daN 500 (6 bar)
1)
Subspindle Speed 1/min 8000
Ø Spindle nose mm 100
Ø Power chuck mm 125
Max. force of clamping cylinder daN 500 (6 bar)
Tailstock Diameter of quill mm 40
Stroke of quill mm 100
Stroke of tailstock mm 400 (NC)
Force max. N 3000 (6 bar)
Indexing turret Number of tool positions VDI20 Piece 12
Number of tool positions VDI16 Piece 16
Live tools VDI20 Piece 6
Live tools VDI16 Piece 8
Speed of live tools 1/min 6000
Torque Main spindle with 5000 1/min (30 min) Nm 42
Main spindle with 8000 1/min (30 min) Nm 26
Subspindle (30 min) Nm 23
Live tool (30 min) Nm 3,5
1) According to the diameter / type of clamping device a reduction may be required

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-45

A User information Product Description

Capacity of coolant tank Quantity liter ~ 115

Capacity of central lubrication Quantity liter ~3
reservoir
Capacity of hydraulic tank* Quantity liter ~ 10
Pneumatic Quantity liter 50 ml
*) Only present in case of hydraulic spindle unit (option)

3.10.2 Electrical data

Power Main spindle motor (40%) kW 5,5
consumption Subspindle motor (40%) kW 3,7
Live tools kW 1,1
Coolant pump kW 0,8
Electric cabinet cooler kW 0,5
Chip conveyor kW 1,0
Control system Siemens type 32i-B
Electrical system Operating voltage V 400
Frequency Hz 50/60
Control voltage V 24 DC
Power supply kVA 35 (TN-power supply
network)
Operation current IB A 30
Nominal current of the safety A 35
device IN
Connection power supply TN / TT / IT
network
(see book B
Assembly/Disassembly, chapter 5
Putting into operation)

3.10.3 Pneumatic system

Supply values max. operating pressure bar 10
normal operating pressure bar 6
min. operating pressure bar 3
Compressed air flow rate (depends on the Nl/min ~ 1000
clamping force)
Valves controlled by V 24 DC
Oil sprayer capacity liter 50 ml
Quality 2 According to PNEUROP
6611

3.10.4 Noise emission

Noise Max. volume, normal operation dB(A) 67

Noise level measured according to: DIN 45635
Noise level measuring devices according DIN 45633
to:
Position of the measuring devices 1 m from the contour
1,6 m above the floor
Table 3-1: Technical data and noise emission

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-46

A User information Product Description

THE NUMERICAL VALUES SPECIFIED ARE EMISSION LEVELS

AND NOT NECESSARILY SAFE WORKING LEVELS. EVEN
THOUGH THERE IS AN INTERRELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE
DEGREE OF NOISE EMISSION AND THE DEGREE OF NOISE
NUISANCE, IT CANNOT BE USED RELIABLY TO ESTABLISH
WHETHER FURTHER SAFETY MEASURES ARE REQUIRED OR
NOT. THE FACTORS WHICH INFLUENCE THE ACTUAL
DEGREE OF NUISANCE TO THOSE EMPLOYED INCLUDE THE
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE WORK AREA AND THE OTHER
NOISE SOURCES ETC., I.E. THE NUMBER OF MACHINES,
OTHER PROCESSES OCCURRING NEARBY AND THE PERIOD
OF TIME FOR WHICH AN OPERATOR IS EXPOSED TO THE
NOISE. IN ADDITION, THE PERMITTED LOAD LEVEL MAY
DIFFER FROM COUNTRY TO COUNTRY. HOWEVER, THIS
INFORMATION SHOULD ALLOW THE USER OF THE MACHINE
TO ASSESS THE HAZARDS AND RISKS BETTER.

3.10.5 Electromagnetic compatibility

The requirements for noise emissions for industrial areas in EN 55011 / EN 55022 Class
A are fulfilled. This product can cause radio interference when used at home. In this case,
the user must take the appropriate measurements and take suitable steps to eliminate
this interference, if necessary.

This device is only to be used in industrial environments and is not released for domestic,
business and commercial areas or small-scale operations.

The requirements in EN 50370-1/2 - Emission immunity in industrial areas as it relates to

ESD according to EN 61000-4-2, burst according to EN 61000-4-4 and surge according to
EN 61000-4-5, are maintained.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 3-47

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage

Technical Product Documentation

4 Transportation and storage

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-48

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage

4.1 Introduction
The machine of the PD series is a precision tooling machine and is therefore to be
handled with the appropriate care during transportation and when moving the machine as
well as when placing in temporary storage. Please follow the instructions and observe the
guidelines stated in the following in order to prevent damaging the machine and reducing
its precision.

Only devices and equipment that have been approved to move the machine and that can
handle the corresponding loads may be used. The applicable safety guidelines are to be
observed.

AS A RULE LIFTING AND TRANSPORTATION EQUIPMENT IS NOT

INCLUDED IN THE SCOPE OF DELIVERY.
IF LIFTING AND TRANSPORTATION EQUIPMENT WAS SUPPLIED,
THEN ALL THIS EQUIPMENT MUST GENERALLY BE RETURNED
UNDAMAGED TO THE SPINNER COMPANY. PLEASE CHECK THE
CONTRACT AGREEMENTS IN THIS REGARD.

4.2 Preparing for transportation

1. Clean the machine (the working area, the outer surfaces of the machine), before
it is prepared for transportation. Empty the swarf containers and the cooling fluid
container or the chip conveyer (optional) (see Book A User information, Chapter
3 Product Description - Figure 3-2 to see the position of the swarf container and
the cooling fluid container).

WHEN HANDLING COOLING FLUIDS YOU SHOULD ABSOLUTELY

OBSERVE THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ISSUED BY THE
MANUFACTURER! THERE CAN BE DANGER TO ONE’S HEALTH!

THE COOLING FLUID PUMP SHOULD NOT BE ALLOWED TO BE

SWITCHED ON AGAIN AFTER THE COOLING FLUID
CONTAINER HAS BEEN EMPTIED! THE PUMP CAN BE
DAMAGED THROUGH THE SUCKING IN OF AIR

2. Move the X-axis as far as it takes in the negative direction until the
corresponding guides on the X-axis are covered by the X-slide. Move the Z-axis
to the central position of its stroke and the E-axis, if present, completely to the
left up to the limit switch.
3. Remove the fine filter (optional) by loosening the pipe clamps but unscrew the
hoses for the fine filter inlet, fine filter outlet and fine filter overflow before this
dis-assembly operation. The filter is located outside the machine on the rear
side; it should be emptied before transporting the machine. Keep the hoses safe.

IT IS ADVISABLE TO HAVE RAGS TO HAND WHEN REMOVING

THE HOSES, SINCE FLUID REMAINING IN THE SYSTEM CAN
RUN OUT.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-49

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage

4. If necessary, empty the central lubrication tank and the pneumatic oiler.
5. Open the safety door. Press the Emergency Stop Button and then turn the main
switch for the machine to 0 (see Book A User information, Chapter 3 Product
Description to see the position of the main switch). Separate the machine from
its pneumatic supply lines and disconnect the mains cable.

ANY WORK ON ELECTRICAL MACHINERY OR FACTORY

EQUIPMENT MAY ONLY BE UNDERTAKEN BY A QUALIFIED
ELECTRICIAN OR BY TRAINED PERSONNEL UNDER THE
SUPERVISION OF A QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN ACCORDING TO
AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS RELATING TO
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS!

.
6. Cover the blank machine parts with anti-corrosive oil, grease.
7. Lay/hang desiccant bags as required in the working area and in the electric
cabinet.
8. Secure the safety door (working area door). This should not be free to move
during transportation.
9. Pull out the permission button and all keys from the control console (see Book A
User information, Chapter 3 Product Description).
10.Stow away the parts bin (on the left hand side of the machine), if a part catcher
is integrated into the machine. Ensure that the main spindle cover is firmly in
place and that there are no loose parts in the electric cabinet which could
damage components in the electric cabinet during transportation.

4.3 Moving the base machine

TO AVOID ANY POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE,

• ALL TRANSPORTATION EQUIPMENT MUST BE CHECKED

OPTICALLY TO ENSURE THAT IT IS IN A PERFECT AND
UNDAMAGED CONDITION!
• ONLY TRAINED PERSONNEL SHOULD BE CHARGED WITH
MOVEMENT/TRANSPORTATION!
• THE MACHINE SHOULD BE HANDLED AND SET DOWN WITH
EXTREME CARE (NO JOLTING)!
• CHECK THAT THE SUPPORT CAPABILITY OF THE FLOOR IS
SUFFICIENTLY HIGH DURING THE WHOLE STORAGE/
TRANSPORTATION OF THE MACHINE AT 2000 KG/M²!

4.3.1 Moving with a fork lift

Machines in the PD production series can be lifted and moved using a fork lift with
sufficient lifting and carrying capacity (at least 3,000 kg - note that the machine weighs
2,300 kg!) (see Figure 4-1). One comes carefully under the machine from the left, as far
under as possible, and then lifts only as much as is necessary. The forks on the fork lift
must be at least 2.4 metres long.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-50

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage

WHEN MOVING THE FORK LIFT UNDER THE MACHINE ONE

MUST ABSOLUTELY ENSURE THAT THE FORK LIFT DOES NOT
KNOCK AGAINST THE SPINDLE COVER, THE SPINDLE MOTOR
AND, IF INSTALLED, THE PARTS GRIPPER! ONLY LIFT THE
MACHINE UNDER THE MACHINE BASE! THE MACHINE MUST
NEVER BE LIFTED DIRECTLY UNDER THE ELECTRIC CABINET!

Figure 4-1: Moving the PD machine using a fork lift

4.3.2 Moving with a lifting truck

Machines in the PD production series can be lifted and moved using 2 short or one long
lifting truck with sufficient lifting and carrying capacity (note that the machine weighs
2,300 kg!) (see Figure 4-2). We recommend using two lifting trucks. The forks must be at
least 1.8 metres long in the case where only one lifting truck is used, while they must be
at least 1.2 metres long when two are used. One comes carefully under the machine from
the left (when using one lifting truck) or from both side (when using two lifting trucks), as
far under as possible, and then lifts only as much as is necessary.

WHEN MOVING THE LIFTING TRUCK UNDER THE MACHINE

ONE MUST ABSOLUTELY ENSURE THAT THE FORK LIFT DOES
NOT KNOCK AGAINST THE SPINDLE COVER, THE SPINDLE
MOTOR AND, IF INSTALLED, THE PARTS GRIPPER! ONLY LIFT
THE MACHINE UNDER THE MACHINE BASE! THE MACHINE
MUST NEVER BE LIFTED DIRECTLY UNDER THE ELECTRIC
CABINET!

Figure 4-2: Moving the PD machine using two lifting trucks

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-51

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage
4.3.3 Moving using a crane
Machines in the PD production series can be lifted and moved using a crane with
sufficient lifting capability (at least 3,500 kg - note that the machine weighs 2,300 kg!).
The machine is lifted using two bars and cables. The bars (Ø 40 mm, Length about. 1.55
m, material St 37) are inserted into the corresponding openings in the machine base.
When applying the cable make sure that it does not press against the machine
guarding/safety doors and thereby damage them. Secure the ends of the cable to the
bars using sprung pins and use a wooden board to act as a separator from other objects
(see Figure 4-3).

Wooden board

Sprung pin

Figure 4-3: Moving the PD machine using a crane

NEVER WALK UNDER SUSPENDED LOADS!

ONE MUST AVOID HANGING THE MACHINE AT AN ANGLE

WHEN MOVING IT! THIS WILL NOT GUARANTEE SAFE MOVING
AND THE MACHINE CAN BE DAMAGED IN THE PROCESS!

CHECK THE LIFTING CAPACITY OF THE CABLE!

THE ENDS OF THE CABLE MUST ABSOLUTELY BE SECURED

USED SPRUNG PINS!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-52

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage

4.4 Transportation over short distances

4.4.1 Packing the machine

The machine must be prepared for transportation before it can be packed. The steps
required for this are described in this chapter under 4.2.

For transportation over short distances the machine from the PD production series stands
on two wooden planks and is screwed to them at the openings in the machine base using
4 screws M12x120 DIN931-8.8. One just uses PE plastic protective sheeting (fixed with a
waistband) sized 250x130x190 mm to cover the goods to be transported (see Figure 4-4).
It is therefore necessary to take great care when loading and handling the machine to
avoid damaging the machine guard. We recommend the use of edge protection for the
spindle motor and, if installed, the parts catcher. One should avoid transportation on open
vehicles because of the possible negative effects of moisture.

Figure 4-4: Screwing the PD machine onto the transport planks

4.4.2 Unpacking the machine

1. Remove the waistband and the PE plastic protective sheeting. Check the delivery
for damage.
2. Remove the screws which hold the machine to the wooden planks.
3. Remove any edge protection for the spindle motor and the parts catcher which
may be on the machine (optional).

The machine can then be lifted off the planks using a fork lift (see 4.3.1).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-53

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage

4.5 Transportation overseas

4.5.1 Packing the machine

The machine must be prepared for transportation before it can be packed. The steps
required for this are described in this chapter under 4.2.

For the purposes of sea transport the machine from the PD production range should
stand on a pallet and is screwed to it at the openings in the machine base using 4 screws
M12x120 DIN931-8.8. Two pieces of PE plastic protective sheeting sized 250x130x190
mm are used to cover the goods. Here one of the pieces of sheeting is pulled up over the
machine from below before the machine is placed on the pallet. A wooden crate is made
for the machine which is different from the system used for transportation over short
distances. This packaging offers a much greater level of protection against damage and
environmental influences compared to open transportation (see Figure 4-6).

IT IS RECOMMENDED TO LIFT UP THE WALLS OF THE CRATE

WITH A LIFTING TRUCK OR FORK LIFT TO MAKE IT EASIER
TO SCREW THEM TOGETHER (SEE FIGURE 4-5).

Figure 4-5: Assembly of the crate walls in preparation for transportation by sea
The pallet has the internal dimensions of 1500 mm x 3100 mm. and is made according to
the drawing in Figure 4-7. The walls of the crate must be produced in such a way that an
inner height of 1800 mm is achieved while the pallet base is 40 mm. Where the machine
is fitted with a chip conveyer while being transported (optional) the 700 mm which it juts
out from the machine must be taken into account in the pallet width.

Figure 4-6: Packaging for transportation by sea

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-54

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage

Figure 4-7: Dimensions of the transportation pallet

4.5.2 Unpacking the machine

1. Remove the crate cover and the crate walls.

IT IS RECOMMENDED TO SUPPORT THE WALLS OF THE

CRATE WITH A LIFTING TRUCK OR FORK LIFT SO THAT
THEY CANNOT FALL DOWN WHEN THE SCREWS ARE
REMOVED (SEE FIGURE 4-5).

2. Remove the upper PE plastic protective sheeting and pull the second one
downwards. Check the delivery for damage.
3. Remove the screws which join the machine to the pallet.
4. Remove the edge protection for the spindle motor and the parts gripper
(optional).

The machine can then be lifted off the pallet using a fork lift (see 4.3.1).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-55

B Assembly/Disassembly Transportation and storage

4.6 Storage

4.6.1 Introduction
The machine was packed professionally for shipping from the manufacturer to the
customer so as to adequately prevent any damage to the machine during transportation.
The type and quality of the packaging as well as the storage conditions are the deciding
factors in determining how long the machine can be placed in storage after transportation.
The packaging from the manufacturer should therefore not be damaged or changed in
any way.

DAMAGED OR ALTERED PACKAGING CAN SHORTEN THE

STORAGE TIME AFTER TRANSPORTATION! FOR THIS REASON,
DO NOT DAMAGE OR ALTER THE PACKAGING IN ANY WAY!

4.6.2 Storage conditions for machines under a PE protective plastic sheet

Storage: In closed rooms only
Temperature: 20 C° ± 10 C°
Relative humidity: ≤ 50%
Storage duration: Max. 1 month

4.6.3 Storage conditions for machines in a wooden crate

Storage: In closed rooms only
Temperature: 20 C° ± 10 C°
Relative humidity: ≤ 50%
Storage duration: Max. 4 month if additional bags of desiccant (silica gel)
are placed in the machine

4.6.4 Guarantee
If the storage conditions listed above cannot be fulfilled, then all guarantee claims for any
technical or optical defects resulting from this fact will be rejected. In particular, no
guarantee claims will be granted for damage due to corrosion. The machine may not be
stored in the open where it is exposed to the environment, regardless of the type of
packaging.

THE MACHINE MAY NOT BE PLACED IN STORAGE IN AN OPEN

AREA WHERE IT IS EXPOSED TO THE ENVIRONMENT!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 4-56

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

Technical Product Documentation

5 Putting into operation

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-57

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

5.1 Introduction
The machine should only be put into operation by trained service technicians from the
Spinner company or its representatives. You must be familiar with the operation and
handling of the machine, and you must study the technical product documentation and
the machine documentation.

5.2 General requirements at the installation site

5.2.1 Electrical connection

Connected load: ca. 20 kVA
Nominal voltage: 3~ 400 V ± 10% +PE
Operation current: 30A
Nominal current of the safety 35 A
device:
Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz* ± 2 Hz
Type of grid/connection: TN network with earthed and resistant neutral point (see
(see following circuit following page)
diagrams) Without residual current circuit breaker (recommended) **)

*60 Hz only with the 60 Hz transformer option in the electric cabinet

**) IF A RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NECESSARY, IN

THIS CASE IT MUST BE UNIVERSAL CURRENT SENSITIVE (TYPE B).

TO FACILITATE COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIRED EMC LIMIT

VALUES, CORRESPONDING EMC FILTERS HAVE BEEN
INTEGRATED INTO THE MACHINE. THESE FILTERS CAUSE
ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE CURRENTS, SOME OF WHICH MAY BE
GREATER THAN 3.5 mA."

TO GUARANTEE A SAFE PE (GROUND) CONDUCTOR

CONNECTION, THE MACHINE MUST BE PERMANENTLY
CONNECTED TO THE MAINS POWER SUPPLY NETWORK (I.E.
WITHOUT ANY PLUG-AND-SOCKET CONNECTIONS).

AS AN ADDITIONAL SAFETY MEASURE, A SECOND PE

(GROUND) CONDUCTOR CABLE CAN BE LAID AND CONNECTED
TO THE MACHINE (NOT REQUIRED).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-58

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

PD Fanuc 18i  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-59

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

THE CONNECTION TO A TT OR IT NETWORK IS ONLY DONE BY MEANS OF A ISOLATIONG TRANSFORMER (SEE FOLLOWING
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS):

PD Fanuc 18i  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-60

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

THE ACTUAL POWER AND ENERGY REQUIREMENT IS HEAVILY

DEPENDENT ON THE USE OF THE MACHINE AND THE
MACHINING PROCESS.

ADDITIONALLY, THE ABOVE MENTIONED VALUES DIFFER FROM

THE REAL VALUES DUE TO VARIOUS OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT.

THE ABOVE MENTIONED VALUES RARELY ARISE IN PRACTICE

AS MAXIMUM VALUES. ACCORDING TO THIS THE MACHINE CAN
ALSO OPERATE WITH FULL FUNCTIONALITY WITH SIGNIFICANT
LESS RATED CURRENT THAN MENTIONED ABOVE.

IF NECESSARY IT IS POSSIBLE TO REDUCE POWER AND

CONNECTED LOAD BY CHANGING SOME MACHINE DATA.

THE ARISING POWER LOSS AND HEAT REDUCTION FOR

DIMENSIONING EXHAUST DEVICES AND AIR CONDITIONING
UNITS CAN ONLY BE CALCULATED REALISTICALLY ON SITE.

5.2.2 Pneumatic connection

Hose: 10 mm inner diameter with mounting clamp
Max. supply pressure: 10 bar
Min. supply pressure: 3 bar
Flow rate (depends on the ~1000 Nl/min
clamping force):
Compressed air quality: Quality class 2 according to PNEUROP 6611

THE MAINTENANCE UNIT FOR THE PNEUMATIC SYSTEM WITH

WATER SEPARATOR AND OIL MIST LUBRICATOR IS A SAFETY
ELEMENT AND PROTECTS THE MACHINE ASSEMBLIES
CONNECTED AFTER THIS UNIT FROM WEARING OUT. HOWEVER,
THIS MAINTENANCE UNIT DOES NOT REPLACE A CENTRAL
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY WITH A CENTRAL DRAIN AND
DRYING SYSTEM TO BE PROVIDED BY THE USER.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-61

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

5.2.3 Other environmental conditions

Temperature T: 15°C < T < 35°C
Relative humidity: ≤ 70% at 20°C
Temperature variation: < 5°C
Floor: Level concrete
Load on floor: Depending on free area around the machine
Foundation: Not required for a concrete floor with the properties listed
above; required for anchoring machine to the floor
Room height: At least 2,5 m (3 m is recommended)

THE GUARANTEED WORKING PRECISION AND RELIABILITY OF THE

MACHINE CAN ONLY BE OBTAINED WHEN EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE
INFLUENCES SUCH AS DIRECT HEAT OR SUNLIGHT, COLD AIR,
VIBRATIONS OR SHAKING FROM OTHER PRODUCTION UNITS IN THE
IMMEDIATE VICINITY ARE AVOIDED.

IF THE PRECISION REQUIREMENTS ARE INCREASED FOR THE

MACHINE, THEN IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN A CONSTANT
ENVIRONMENTAL TEMPERATURE AND ISOLATE THE SURFACE ON
WHICH THE MACHINE IS INSTALLED FROM EXTERNAL INFLUENCES.
THE INSTALLATION SITE CAN SIGNIFICANTLY INFLUENCE THE NOISE
EMISSIONS COMING FROM THE MACHINE DURING NORMAL
OPERATION. TO PROTECT THE MACHINE OPERATOR, MAKE SURE
THAT THE MACHINE IS NOT INSTALLED AT A LOCATION WHERE
THERE ARE ADDITIONAL SOURCES OF NOISE OR THE NOISE LEVEL
IS AMPLIFIED!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-62

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

5.3 Installation diagrams/Foundation plan

Figure 5-1: Installation diagrams

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-63

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

Figure 5-2: Installation diagram PD with gantry loader

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-64

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

Figure 5-3: Foundation plan PD

5.4 Installation
The machine should only be installed by trained service technicians from the Spinner
company or its representatives. You must be familiar with the operation and handling of
the machine, and you must study the technical product documentation and the machine
documentation.

It is recommended to transport the machine to its installation site while it is still in its
packaging as long as there is enough space there to unpack the machine (see Book B
Assembly/Disassembly, Chapter 4 Transportation and storage for information on how to
unpack the machine). Inspect the delivery after removing the transportation packaging to
make sure that the delivery is complete and undamaged (i.e. free of damage due to
transportation and storage).

The installation at the installation site is done on the delivered rubber pads (see Figure 5-
4). Put them between the machine base and the floor. If bigger adjustment is necessary
we recommend to use wedge pads or other levelling elements.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-65

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

Rubber pad

Figure 5-4: Rubber pads for the installation

If the machine is used without a barfeeder (option) there is no need to anchor the
machine on the floor otherwise the barfeeder and the machine must be attached to the
floor. This is necessary to keep the alignment between the barfeeder and the spindle of
the machine. For the attachment the machine base has recesses with the corresponding
drillings. We recommend foundation bolts with a length of about 80 - 120 mm (fixing
accessories are not delivered with the machine).

You need to carry out the following steps to install the machine:
1. If used remove the transportation clamp that held the safety door during the
transportation.
2. Remove all bags of desiccant.
3. Clean all preserved machine parts with a clean cloth.
4. Check the pneumatic and central lubrication oil level. Refill the corresponding
reservoirs with oil if necessary. Use the oil indicated in book C
Operation/Maintenance, chapter 10 Maintenance.
5. Attach the fine filter (option) to the machine base (rear of the machine) using the
delivered clips. Connect correctly the hoses (fine filter input, fine filter output and
the fine filter overflow). Note the arrows on the housing of the fine filter (see
Figure 5-5).

Fine filter output

(designated by an
↓, pointing away
from the
connection)

Fine filter input

(designated by
Fine filter overflow
an ↑, pointing to
Clips the connection)

Figure 5-5: Connecting a fine filter

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-66

B Assembly/Disassembly Putting into operation

6. Fill the coolant tank with coolant indicated in book C Operation/Maintenance,

chapter 10 Maintenance (for the location of the coolant tank see book A User
information, chapter) 3 Product Description.

THE MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED SAFETY MEASURES MUST

BE OBEYED WHEN HANDLING COOLANTS! THIS WORK
CONSTITUTES A HEALTH RISK!

7. Connect the machine to your compressed air system. Make the connection
between the machine and the power conduit first, then connect the power
conduit to the power supply.

WORK DONE ON THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR

OPERATING MATERIALS OF THE MACHINE MAY ONLY BE
CARRIED OUT BY AN ELECTRICIAN OR BY TRAINED
PERSONNEL UNDER THE GUIDANCE AND SUPERVISION OF
AN ELECTRICIAN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS
RELATING TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS!

5.5 Spindle stopper

It is absolutely necessary to close the end of the spindle by means of a stopper so that no
chips can pass the spindle and come out at the end especially in case of inside turning
(stopper is not included in the delivery).
When no stopper is used chips can pass the spindle and come out at the end.
Accumulated, they can damage the sensors.

Stopper

Article number 108577 (for spindle 5000 rpm)

Article number 108581 (for spindle 8000 rpm)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 5-67

C Operation/Maintenance Switch on/off routine

Technical Product Documentation

6 Switch on/off routine

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 6-68

C Operation/Maintenance Switch on/off routine

6.1 Switching on the machine

You must carry out the following steps to switch the machine on:

1. Turn the main switch (on the control panel) clockwise to the ON position. Wait
until the control system is completely powered up and the screen is active.
2. Unlock the emergency off button, if necessary.
3. Open the tap of the compressed air supply (see assembly pneumatic unit).
4. Set the feed Override for reasons of safety to 0%.
5. In order to look the protective door turn the, if necessary the key operated switch for the
set-up mode to the left position..
6. Close the safety door. Now the protective door should be locked.
7. Delete the alarm message displayed on the screen. To do this, press the RESET
key.
8. Press the “Drive ON” key.

After 2 seconds the lamp “Drives on“ stops flashing and lights on.

9. Start the MCC-OFF-Test (Safety-Self-Test) by pressing the „Drive ON“ key.

IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REFERENCE THE MACHINE AXES

BECAUSE THE MACHINE IS EQUIPPED WITH ABSOLUTE
ENCODERS.

6.2 Switching off the machine

To switch off the machine, first you need to press one of the Emergency OFF buttons.
Then turn the main switch to the 0 position (off). See book A User information, chapter 2
Basic safety information for the location of the emergency off buttons and chapter 3
Product Description for the location of the main switch.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 6-69

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

Technical Product Documentation

7 Setting up the machine

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-70

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.1 Setting up the clamping device

7.1.1 Mounting the clamping device

Clamping devices are used to hold the workpieces to be machined and are mounted on
the spindle. There are various types of clamping devices, such as pull-type collets, push-
type collets and power-chucks, for example. When mounting, make sure that the
clamping devices have been adjusted radially to obtain an optimal true running accuracy.
The spindle adaptors for all collets and chucks are provided with radial centre screws for
truing the clamping device using a dial indicator gauge.
.

Spindle

Workpiece

Spindle adaptor

Figure 7-1: Spindle with clamping device and clamped workpiece

See the corresponding assemblies in book D Assemblies for mounting the clamping
devices.

YOU MUST ENSURE THAT YOU USE THE CORRECT SCREWS,

APPLY THE CORRECT TIGHTENING TORQUE AND OBSERVE
THE MAX. OPERATING FORCE AND MAX. SPEED FOR THE
CLAMPING DEVICE WHEN MOUNTING IT TO THE SPINDLE.

IF THE CENTRE OF GRAVITY OF THE WORKPIECE DOES NOT

CORRESPOND WITH THE TURNING CENTRE OF THE
CLAMPING DEVICE (E. G. IN CASE OF NON-ROUND OR
ECCENTRIC WORKPIECES ETC.) THEN A COUNTERWEIGHT
MUST BE USED FOR THE BALANCE! IF THE WORKPIECE IS
TURNED WITHOUT PREVIOUS BALANCING IT COULD COME
OUT OF THE CLAMPING DEVICE WITH HIGH SPEED AND
CAUSE SERIOUS INJURIES OR DAMAGE THE MACHINE!

The total stroke of the draw tube is not necessary when workpieces are clamped with
push-type collets or pull-type collets. The stroke is limited. In addition to this the stroke
limitation protects these clamping devices against damage. See book D Assemblies,
chapter 21 Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle 5000/42 or chapter 22 Assembly SB-NC-
194-000 Spindle 8000/32 to adjust the stroke limitation.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-71

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.1.2 Danger from chuck and chuck jaws

The machine casing is only designed to retain flying chuck jaws for chuck types and
chuck diameters approved and factory-fitted by Spinner for the particular machine. Under
no circumstances should the operator fit a chuck with a greater diameter or jaw weight
without also reducing the rotational speed to a safe level. In doing so, the lowest
allowable rotational speed of all involved components (clamping devices or workpiece)
determines the maximum permissible rotational speed. The rotational speed reduction
must also be noted in the machining programme.
For customised jaws with a diameter </= the diameter specified in the technical data, it
should be checked whether any parts that could come loose are > the jaw weight. If this is
the case, the speed must again be reduced to a safe level.
Generally, the maximum spindle speed must be kept below the maximum rotational
speed for the chuck as specified by the chuck manufacturer.
Generally the maximum rotational speed of the spindle must be reduced to the maximum
rotational speed of the chuck as stated by the manufacturer of the chuck.
Only clamping devices approved by the machine manufacturer can be used. In case of
any doubt you must confer with SPINNER or the manufacturer of the clamping device.
The workpiece clamping device must be designed according to the machine directive and
the standard DIN EN 1550 [14] and it must be used according to the instructions in the
manual of the clamping device.
For safe function all components of the clamping device must always be in perfect
working state. This implies also to the maintenance according to the instructions of the
manufacturer as for example:
• Control of wear
• Cleaning the clamping device at regular intervals
• Lubricating the clamping device at regular intervals
• Check of the clamping force at regular intervals using a pressure cell device

THE SCREWS OF THE CLAMPING DEVICES / CLAMPING

DEVICE MUST BE CHECKED BEFORE STARTING MACHINING
WEATHER THEY ARE CORRECTLY TIGHENED! THERE IS
MORTAL DANGER THROUGH
CLAMPING DEVICES THAT COULD COME LOOSE WHEN THEY
ARE NOT PROPERLY TIGHENED

ON MACHINES FACTORY-EQUIPPED WITH CHUCKS, IT MAY

BE NECESSARY TO RESTRICT THE MAXIMUM SPINDLE
SPEED TO THE MAXIMUM ROTATIONAL SPEED OF THE
CHUCK AS SPECIFIED BY THE CHUCK MANUFACTURER.

WEAR AND DIRT IN THE MECHANISM OF THE CLAMPING

DEVICE REDUCE THE CLAMPING FORCE! FOR THIS REASON
THE CLAMPING FORCE MUST BE MEASURED AT REGULAR
INTERVALS! IN CASE OF A REDUCED CLAMPING FORCE THE
CLAMPING DEVICE MUST BE MAINTAINED ACCORDING TO
THE INSTRUCTIONS OF THE MANUFACTURER OR IT MUST BE
REPLACED!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-72

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

CHANGING COMPONENTS OF THE CLAMPING DEVICE, SUCH

AS NEW JAWS ETC. IS ONLY ALLOWED AFTER CONFERING
WITH SPINNER!

The necessary clamping force to clamp the workpiece must be determined. To do this
you can refer to technical books about machining which are appropriate for this purpose.
The determined clamping force is adjusted by adjusting the pressure of the clamping
cylinder. NOTE: The adjusted clamping pressure does not necessarily correspond to the
resulting clamping force. Therefore the clamping force must be measured when setting
up a workpiece.

7.1.3 Mounting top jaws

THERE IS A RISK OF INJURY WHEN INSERTING A WORKPIECE

INTO THE CHUCK! THE FINGERS CAN BE TRAPPED BETWEEN
THE CHUCK JAWS AND THE WORKPIECE!

When mounting top jaws take care of using screws with the correct length. Use screws of
the quality class 12.9.

Screw M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20

Torque 10 30 45 70 170 300

Only use original fixing devices of the clamping device manufacturer when fixing the jaws.
The fixing screws must be tightened using a torque wrench.

When a workpiece is clamped the maximum stroke of the jaws must only be 4mm. For
safe clamping the jaws must be appropriately shaped.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-73

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.2 Setting up the tools

There are different tool systems for the machines of the PD series: Linear standard
toolholders, Linear cartridge toolholders and Turret toolholders.

7.2.1 Linear Standard Toolholder

Figure 7-2: Linear standard toolholder

7.2.2 Linear Cartridge Toolholder

Figure 7-3: Linear cartridge toolholder

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-74

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine
7.2.3 Turret Toolholder

Figure 7-4: Turret toolholder

7.3 Tool measuring

The tools must be measured relative to the machine zero point before starting a CNC
programme otherwise the machine does not move the tool cutting edge to the correct
coordinates. The measuring can be done by either touching the surface of the workpiece
with the tool cutting edge in the two reference planes X and Z, or without workpiece
contact by using the Optical Tool Setting Microscope

Before mounting the turning tools for measurement, they must be previously adjusted
outside the machine to the required centre height of the machine.

THE CENTRE HEIGHT OF OF THE MACHINE IS INDICATED ON

THE LEFT SIDE OF THE CONTROL PANEL (SEE ADHESIVE
LABEL).

MESSRS. SPINNER OFFER OPTIONAL TOOL PRESETTING

DEVICES FOR TOOL GAUGING. IF NEEDED, PLEASE
CONTACT OUR SALES DEPARTMENT
([email protected]).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-75

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

4
2 5

Figure 7-5: Adjusting the tools to the correct centre height

1) Base plate
2) Microscope
3) Microscope support
4) Tool holder (e. g. cartridge, linear-holder, turret-holder)
5) Adapter for toolholder

Proceed as follows to adjust the height of centres:

1. Prepare ‘Gauge Blocks’ the centre height of the machine (e. g. 77mm).

NOTE THE THICKNESS OF THE INTERMEDIATE PLATE IN

CASE OF LINEARHOLDERS WHEN YOU ARE PREPARING THE
HEIGHT OF CENTRES. THIS THICKNESS (25MM) MUST BE
SUBTRACTED FROM THE HEIGHT OF CENTRES.

2. Position the ‘Gauge Blocks’ in case of cartridge and turret holders, on the base
plate of the adjustment device, in case of linear-holders on the adapter.
3. Adjust the microscope to the upper edge of the Gauge Block. Then remove the
Gauge Block.
4. Insert the toolholder into the adapter. Adjust the height of the cutting edge such
that the cutting edge can be seen in the reticule of the microscope. The
adjustment itself is done in case of:
cartridges :by the setting screw
linear-holders :with the support plate or the eccentric sleeve
turret-holders :by selecting the correct turning tool holder or by
compensating the height difference with shim stock..

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-76

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.3.1 Tool measuring by touching the workpiece

Spindle
Position e. g. X25, Z0

Toolholder
Workpiece

Figure 7-6: Tool measuring by touching the workpiece

THE TOOL MEASUREMENT BY TOUCHING THE WORKPIECE

ASSUMES THAT THE TOOLS HAVE BEEN ADJUSTED
PREVIOUSLY TO THE CORRECT CENTRE HEIGHT (SEE 2.3.1).

Proceed as follows to measure the tools by touching the workpiece:

1. Clamp the workpiece in the chuck of the spindle. Adjust the machining length of
the workpiece.
2. Clamp the toolholder on the cross slide in the way that there will not be any
collision.
3. Move the tool towards the workpiece using the handwheel.
4. Touch the surface area of the workpiece (diameter) with the cutting edge. Save
this value (e. g. position X25).
5. Touch the front end of the workpiece with the cutting edge. Save this value (e. g.
position Z0).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-77

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.3.2 Optical tool measuring

Optical Tool measurement is done by means of a Microscope that is mounted above the
main spindle (see Figure 7-7).

Clamping prisam
clamp

Vertical movement

Longitudinal movement

Figure 7-7: Optical tool measuring

OPTICAL TOOL MEASUREMENT ASSUMES THAT THE TOOLS

HAVE BEEN ADJUSTED PREVIOUSLY TO THE CORRECT
CENTRE HEIGHT (SEE 2.3.1).

Proceed as follows to measure the tools by optical measurement

1. Clamp the workpiece in the chuck of the spindle. Adjust the machining length of
the workpiece.
2. Mount the toolholder (turret or linear) in the way that there will not be any
collision.
3. Insert the microscope into the dovetail guide situated above the spindle. Clamp
the support.
4. Adjust the microscope by a longitudinal movement to the front edge of the
workpiece. If necessary focus the microscope by a vertical movement.
5. Now the microscope has the position X0 (=axis of spindle) and Z0 (=front end of
the porkpiece). Then remove the workpiece.
6. Traverse the cutting edge of the tool to be measured into the reticule of the
microscope.
7. Save the diameter e. g. as position X0. Save the front end e. g. as position Z0.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-78

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.4 Mounting tools

DO NOT MOUNT TOOL TO A TURRET STATION THAT IS TURNED TO
ITS WORKING POSITION!

TOOLS MUST BE ADJUSTED AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN MOUNTED!

BEFORE MACHINING YOU MUST INSERT DUMMY PLUGS INTO

TURRET STATIONS WHICH HAVE NO TOOLS!

THE TOOL HOLDER MUST BE PLANE ON THE TURRET DISK

SURFACE!

THE FASTENING TORQUE OF THE FASTENING SCREWS FOR TOOL

HOLDERS VDI16/20 (M6) IS 16,5 NM ACCORDING TO THE
MANUFACTURER! BUT OBSERVE THAT THE LIVE TOOL DOES NOT
BLOCK BY FASTENING THE SCREWS!

BEFORE MOUNTING TOOLS CHECK IF THE TOOL SHAFT IS

EQUIPPED WITH AN O-RING OF APPROPRIATE SIZE! O-RINGS CAN
BE PURCHASED AT SPINNER COMPANY INDICATING THE TOOL SIZE
(VDI)/ARTICLE NUMBER!

O-Ring

Tool size O-Ring* Article number

VDI16 15 x 1,5 30336
VDI20 18,7 x 1,78 111951
VDI25 23,52 x 1,78 30875
VDI30 28,3 x 1,78 26302
VDI40 37,77 x 2,62 108534
VDI50 47,29 x 2,62 110550
*According to DIN ISO 10889-1:2006-01

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-79

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.5 Tool arrangement on turret circumference

MOUNTING TOOLS ONLY ON ONE SIDE OF THE TURRET

CIRCUMFERENCE DAMAGES THE TURRET MECHANISM!
THEREFORE ARRANGE TOOLS EQUALLY OVER THE ENTIRE
CIRCUMFERENCE OF THE TURRET! IF THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE
BECAUSE YOU WANT TO SAVE TIME DURING THE MACHINING
PROCESS IT IS NECESSARY TO ARRANGE FOR A COUNTER
BALANCE ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE TURRET IN TERMS
OF TOOLS OR AT LEAST TOOL HOLDERS! (SEE FOLLOWING
PICTURES)

 

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-80

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.6 Spindle nose dimensions

7.6.1 Spindle nose 32mm

Figure 7-8: Dimensions of spindle nose 32mm

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-81

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.6.2 Spindle nose 42mm

Figure 7-9: Dimensions of spindle nose 42mm

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-82

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.7 Working area

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-83

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

Modell A1 A2 B C1 C2 D E
(without sliding lid)
1)
PD32/42 +74 +474
2)
PD32/42-T +74 +474 +155 +555 100
3)
PD32/42-S +74 +474 +151,5 +551,5 +551,5 +551,5 +551,5 +551,5
4)
PD32/42 + Option turret
6) 6) 7) 7) 7)
8xVDI20 -21 +379 +74 +474 +151,5 +551,5 -10 +390 +155 +555 100
6) 6) 7) 7) 7)
16xVDI16 -27 +373 +74 +474 +151,5 +551,5 -10 +390 -37 +363 +155 +555 100
6) 6) 7) 7) 7)
16xVDI16 (8 AGWZ) 5) -27 +373 +74 +474 +151,5 +551,5 -10 +390 -37 +363 +155 +555 100

1) only Linear tools

2) Linear tools + tailstock
3) Linear tools + Subspindle
4) Modell Baruffaldi
5) AGWZ = driven tool
6) equal values also with Option Subspindle
7) equal values with Option tailstock

Modell A1 A2 B C1 C2 D E
(with sliding lid)
1)
PD32/42 +74 +474
2)
PD32/42-T +74 +474 +155 +555 100
3)
PD32/42-S +74 +474 +151,5 +551,5 +551,5 +551,5 +551,5 +551,5
4)
PD32/42 + Option turret
6) 6) 7) 7) 7)
8xVDI20 -21 +379 +74 +474 +151,5 +551,5 -25,5 +374,5 +155 +555 100
6) 6) 6) 7) 6) 7) 6) 7) 6) 7) 7) 7) 7)
16xVDI16 -27 +373 +74 +474 +151,5 +551,5 -25,5 +374,5 -52,5 +347,5 +155 +555 100
5) 6) 6) 6) 7) 6) 7) 6) 7) 6) 7) 7) 7) 7)
16xVDI16 (8 AGWZ) -27 +373 +74 +474 +151,5 +551,5 -80,5 +319,5 -108 +292 +155 +555 100

1) only Linear tools

2) Linear tools + tailstock
3) Linear tools + Subspindle
4) Modell Baruffaldi
5) AGWZ = driven tool
6) equal values also with Option Subspindle
7) equal values with Option tailstock

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-84

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.8 Continuous load/Duty cycle (Turret model Baruffaldi)

When operating live tools, please consider Tool torque / Speed diagram (left) as well as
the reference diagram Duty cycle taking into account a total working time of 10 minutes
(right) to adjust working parameters correctly.

Below rated speed n0 tool torque can reach maximum torque Cmax (according to turret
size) while over n0 tool torque should not exceed value C resulting from tool speed n and
Power curve P. The characteristics of this turret are:
Maximum permissible torque Cmax 10Nm; maximum permissible power Pmax 3kW
Maximum speed nmax 6000rpm
Maximum permissible speed at maximum torque n0 2900rpm.
Concerning speed, the greater it is the lower is the allowable duty cycle. Once the
parameter k is calculated as ratio between actual speed and maximum speed, the
diagram below (right) gives information about allowable duty cycle. Left curve
corresponds to lower mechanical stress while right curve corresponds to higher
mechanical stress. An average value is recommended.

Example:
Type of turret: Size TBMA100
Required torque: 8Nm
Required tool speed: 2000rpm

Refer to Tool torque / speed diagram

As required torque C = 8Nm is lower than the maximum allowable turret torque of this
type of turret Cmax = 10Nm, maximum allowable tool speed is greater than n0, calculated
from the maximum turret power of this type of turret 3000W.
Maximum allowable tool speed:
N=(60*Pmax) / (2π*C)=(60*3000) / (2π*8)= 3580rpm > 2000rpm

Ratio between maximum allowable tool speed and maximum mechanical speed
k=n/nmax=3580 / 6000= 0,6

Refer to duty cycle diagram

1)
As speed is 0,6 = 60% of maximum mechanical speed, average admitted duty cycle of
the tool is about 40% - 10 min, i. e. 4 minutes duty cycle, 6 minutes stop.

1) Admitted duty cycle goes from 25% (lower mechanical stress) to 50% (higher mechanical stress). Any intermediate
value can be applied but an average one is recommended

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-85

C Operation/Maintenance Setting up the machine

7.9 Workpiece gauging

MESSRS. SPINNER OFFER AN OPTIONAL WORKPIECE

GAUGING PROBE FOR WORKPIECE GAUGING. THIS IS
FITTED IN THE WORKHOLDING FIXTURE. THE DATA IS
TRANSFERRED TO THE CNC CONTROL SYSTEM
WIRELESSLY BY MEANS OF INFRARED. IF NEEDED, PLEASE
CONTACT OUR SALES DEPARTMENT
([email protected]).

IF USING THE WORKPIECE GAUGING PROBE AND ITS

COMPONENTS, PLEASE NOTE THE CORRESPONDING
INFORMATION OF THE MANUFACTURER!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 7-86

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Technical Product Documentation

8 Machine specific options of the control

Fanuc 32i-B

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-87

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

THE OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING OF THE MACHINE

REQUIRES SUFFICIENTLY TRAINED PERSONNEL WITH
CORRESPONDING EXPERT KNOWLEDGE. DESPITE INTENSIVE
TRAINING IN CLASSES OFFERED BY THE SPINNER COMPANY
AND THEIR DISTRIBUTION PARTNERS, OR SEMINARS AND
CNC-PROGRAMMING CLASSES OFFERED BY THE CONTROL
MANUFACTURERS, A CERTAIN PERIOD FOR FAMILIARIZATION
MUST BE ASSUMED NECESSARY SUBSEQUENT TO PUTTING
THE MACHINE INTO OPERATION.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-88

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.1 Introduction
This chapter cannot present in detail all the capabilities of the control system Fanuc 32i-B.
The following descriptions refer for the most part to machine specific options.

Please refer to the Fanuc Programming Instructions for more detailed information such as
how to use G-functions for motions or M-functions, S-words and T-words (additional
functions). The manual contains precise instructions on DIN programming (DIN66025)
and complete lists of all G-functions.

Example:
O0001 (Main program test)
N05 M3 P1 S2000 (Spindle speed 2000 rpm)
N10 T0101 (Turret position 1, correction value 1)
N15 G0 X100 Z20 (Moving in rapid feed)
N20 G1 X0 F0.2 (Feed 0.2mm/rotation)
N25 ....
N30 ....
N35 M5 P1 (Spindle stop)
N40 M30 (End of program)

Additional functions:

The additional functions contain information about the machining technology. A maximum
of three M-functions, one S-function, one T-function can be programmed in the same
block.

T-functions:
The programmed T-number activates the corresponding tool station (e. g. T0909 =
station, correction 9). The first two digits stand for the station and the last two digits for
the tool correction.

S-functions:
Generally the S-function contains the spindle speed.

M-functions:
A lot of M-functions are determined by the manufacturer. See chapter 8.12.

P-Kommand:
The spindle selection is done by means of the P command
P1 = Main spindle, P2 = Power tool; P3 Sub spindle

(M3 P1 S1000 clockwise rotation of the main spindle with 1000 1/min)
(M4 P2 S1000 Counterclockwise rotation of the power tool)
(M5 P3 Supspindle stop)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-89

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.2 Operating elements of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.2.1 Screen and keyboard

3
6

Figure 8-1: Screen and key board of the control Fanuc 32i-B
1) Screen (displays data, options, functions, etc.)
2) Keyboard (input keyboard for numbers, letters, etc.)
3) Input field (delete input, change/delete word, move cursor, page up/down, etc.)
4) Horizontal soft-key bar (tool correction, machine commands, parameters, setting
data etc.)
5) Panel opening (PCMCIA card option)
6) USB

8.2.2 Operating panel

2 3 4 5
1

7 6

Figure 8-2: Operating panel

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-90

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

1) Feed Override
2) Handwheel
3) Keys to move the axes
4) Function keys
5) Key-operated switch for Edit-mode
6) Key-operated switch for the protective door/set-up operation
7) Clamp/Release chuck
8) Drives ON/OFF
9) Emergency-OFF

8.2.2.1 Machine control panel

Figure 8-3: Machine control panel

1) AUTO: Operating mode Automatic

2) EDIT: Operating mode Edit

3) MDI: Operating mode MDI

4) JOG: Operating mode JOG

5) MPGx1: Hand wheel Increment 0,001mm

6) MPGx2: Hand wheel Increment 0,100 mm

7) HOME: Not active

8) TEACH: Not active

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-91

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

9) OFSET-MESURE: Not active

10) SERIAL: Single part/Serial part production UNIMAG interface

11) ?NC: Screen for NC-alarms

12) ?MC: Screen for alarms and messages

13) +X: Move X axis in operating mode JOG (also -X key)

14) +Z: Move Z axis in operating mode JOG (also -Z key)

15) +C: Move C axis in the operating mode JOG (also -C key)

16) +E: Move E axis in the operating mode JOG (also -E key)

17) TRVRS: Rapid feed

18) +T: Indexing turret in the operating mode JOG (also -T key)

19) CYCLE START: Cycle start (and lock door)

20) CYCLE STOP: Cycle stop (and unlock door when spindle stops)

21) COOLANT OFF: Coolant pump OFF

22) COOLANT ON: Coolant pump ON

23) COOLANT AUTO: Coolant pump in the operating mode AUTO

(ON/OFF with M function)

24) SPINDLE STOP: In the operating mode JOG - Main spindle stop; in the
operating mode AUTO - active spindle stop/start (Condition: Program
stopped or does not run
25) SPINDLE CW: In the operating mode JOG - Main spindle turns in M4-
direction

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-92

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

26) SPINDLE CCW: In the operating mode JOG - Main spindle turns in M3
direction

27) SPINDLE JOG: Not active

28) SINGLE BLOCK: Single block

29) BLOCK DELETE: Omit block when programmed with “/“

30) OPT STOP: Optional program stop M01

31) PRG STOP: Not active

32) DRY RUN: Dry run with feed 5000 mm/min

33) PRG TEST: Program test without M/S/T function output

34) WORK LIGHT: Working area light

35) AXIS INHBT: Axis locking for program test

36) MPG INTRT: Not active

37) MPG X: Hand wheel: Selecting X axis

38) MPG Z: Hand wheel: Selecting Z axis

39) MPG C: Hand wheel: Selecting C axis

40) MPG E: Hand wheel: Selecting E axis

41) CHIP: Chip conveyor ON/OFF

42) SPDL DEC: Spindle rotations DEC

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-93

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

43) SPDL 100%: Spindle rotations 100%

44) SPDL INC: Spindle rotations INC

1 2 3 4

8.2.3 Operating Panel on the left Side of the Machine Front

Activated by the

key

7 6 5

Figure 8-4: Operating panel on the left side of the machine front
The operating panel on the left side of the machine contains the following functions:

1) Button for opening and closing the chuck on the main spindle
2) Feed potentiometer
3) Axis selection switch for the handwheel
4) Room for a button to open and close the chuck on the sub-spindle (not used
here)
5) Button cycle start for starting the program/part function
6) Handwheel
7) Emergency OFF button

8.3 Main Operational Modes

8.3.1 Manual operation mode, JOG

The operational mode JOG is used in the setting up operation. The following functions are
additionally available via the soft keys or the keyboard:

• Moving the axes using the move keys (see keys 13 to 16 in Section 8.2.2.1) or
the handwheel
• Index the turret using the keys on the machine control panel (see key 18 in
Section 8.2.2.1)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-94

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

• Clamp or release the chuck with the button on the operating panel (see button
block 7 in Figure 8-2)
• Edit tool memory
• Automatic measuring up of the tools
• Zero offsets

8.3.2 Semi-automatic operation, MDI

The operating mode MDI is used in setting up. Complete NC-blocks and instructions can
be input and processed. In addition, the following functions are available via the soft-keys
or the keyboard:

• Moving of the axes by programming a G-function + X/Z value

• Operating the rotating spindle by programming an M-function + S-word
• Indexing the turret by programming a T-function
• Clamp or release the chuck using the button on the operating panel (see button
block 7 in Figure 8-2)
• Tighten or release the chuck by programming an M-function
• Edit tool memory
• Zero offset
• Diagnosis menu

8.3.3 Automatic operation, AUTO

The operating mode AUTO is used to run part programs automatically (production of work
pieces). Complete part programs are selected and processed. The following functions are
additionally available via the soft-keys or the keyboard:

• Select program name and start a program

• Clamp or release the chuck with the button on the operating panel (see button
block 7 in Figure 8-2)
• Influencing a program
• Edit tool memory
• Shift zero point
• Diagnosis menu

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-95

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.3.4 Incremental operation

The operating mode INC (increment) is used in setting up operations. The axes can be
moved in steps selectable between 1 µm and 100 µm using the move keys or
continuously using the handwheel. T

8.3.5 Edit operation

The operating mode EDIT is used to edit programs.

For further information on the main operating modes of the control, we would refer you to
the operating instructions issued by Fanuc.

8.4 Set-up operation

In set-up operation, the machine can be operated with reduced speed even when the
protection door is open. In order to do this, the key switch of the protection door must be
turned to set-up operation.

THE MACHINE MAY ONLY BE OPERATED IN THE SETUP MODE BY

QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES!
QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES ARE THOSE WHO HAVE ENOUGH SKILLS
TO MOUNT AND ADJUST DEVICES AND TOOLS FOR THE
MACHINING PROCESS AND WHO HAVE ENOUGH EXPERIENCES
FOR SAFE AND PROFESSIONAL CLAMPING OF WORKPIECES.
PROFOUND SKILLS OF DATA INPUT FOR THE MACHINING OF
WORKPIECES AS WELL AS OF PROCESS OPTIMISATION ARE
NECESSARY!

THE ROTATING SPINDLE AS WELL AS INCORRECTLY CLAMPED,

LOOSE WORKPIECES AND INCORRECTLY MOUNTED CHUCKS
CAN BE HAZARDOUS! FOR THIS REASON, DO NOT STAND IN THE
FLIGHT PATH OF THE SPINDLE AND DO NOT REACH IN TOWARDS
THE ROTATING SPINDLE, TOOLS, TURRET OR CHUCKS!

HANDLING SHARP TOOLS, HOT, LOOSE CHIPS, COMING IN

CONTACT WITH IRRITATING COOLANTS AND REMOVING SHARP
CHIPS CAN BE HAZARDOUS! MOVING MACHINE PARTS CAN
CRUSH YOUR HAND OR ARM! WEAR PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND
GOGGLES, ETC.! NOTE THE INFORMATION REGARDING THE
HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH COOLANTS ISSUED BY THE
COOLANT MANUFACTURERS!

IN SET UP MODE, THE FEEDS ARE LIMITIED TO A MAXIMUM OF 2

M/MIN AND THE SPINDLE SPEED TO A MAXIMUM OF 50 RPM. IF
THE PERMISSION BUTTON IS RELEASED OR PRESSED ALL THE
WAY DOWN DURING THE MOVEMENT, THEN AN EMERGENCY OFF
IS TRIGGERED. THIS SAFETY DEVICE IS NECESSARY TO KEEP THE
DANGER OF AN ACCIDENT TO A MINIMUM. IN THE SET UP MODE
THE AXES CAN ONLY BE MOVED IN THE JOG MODE WHEN FOR
SAFETY REASONS IN ADDITION TO THE AXIS DIRECTION KEY + OR
- THE RAPID TRAVERSE KEY IS PRESSED.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-96

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

In spite of all the safety measures taken, injuries cannot be completely excluded when the
machine is operated with the protection door open! You should therefore work with great
care! Keep the protection door closed whenever possible! It is the responsibility of the
machine operator to give the key for set-up mode only to trained personnel who have
been advised of the dangers.

8.5 Selecting the handwheel

See No. 2 in Figure 8-2 for the location of the handwheel.

The handwheel is selected as follows:

1. Press one of the increment keys (see keys 5 and 6 in Section 8.2.2.1).
MPGx1 = 0.001 mm
MPGx2 = 0,100 mm
2. Select one of the axes by using the keys 37 to 40 (see Section 8.2.2.1).
3. Rotate the handwheel to drive the selected axis with the set increment.

SHOULD THE C-AXIS BE DRIVEN BY THE HANDWHEEL, THEN IT

MUST FIRST BE PROGRAMMED IN THE OPERATING MODE MDI M60
IN ORDER TO SWITCH THE SPINDLE TO POSITION CONTROL.

IT IS POSSIBLE TO SWITCH ON THE SPINDLE IN THE OPERATING

MODES JOG OR MPG SO AS ALSO TO BE ABLE TO CARRY OUT
MANUAL MACHINING ON A WORKPIECE. TO DO THIS, PRESS THE
KEY CW OR CCW IN THE OPERATING MODE JOG OR MPG. THE
SPINDLE ROTATES WITH THE SPEED THAT WAS LAST
PROGRAMMED S, IT STOPS ON PRESSING THE KEY SPINDLE STOP
OR ALSO BY LEAVING THE OPERATING MODE.

8.6 Setting the clamping pressures

The programmed clamping forces for main and sub-spindles and for the tailstock with
their allowable deviations can be set directly in the CNC control by inputting the desired
values. This menu can be reached via the keys "Customer" "Clamping parameters“
(see key block in Figure 8-1).

Figure 8-5: Menu for setting the clamping pressures

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-97

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.6.1 Value and function ranges

1. Main and sub-spindles clamping pressure

50 daN < Programmed clamping force < 1000 daN

10 daN < Allowable deviation < 300 daN
50 daN < Real clamping force < 1000 daN
500 mbar < Real clamping pressure < 10000 mbar
Clamping direction rear = Input "OFF" > Clamping direction on frontside active
Clamping direction rear = Input "ON"
Press the key "ALTER“ to change this value

2. Tailstock

10 daN < Programmed clamping force < 350 daN

10 daN < Allowable deviation < 150 daN
10 daN < Real clamping force < 350 daN
100 mbar < Real clamping pressure < 10000 mbar

3. Pneumatics Set-up
The input of the supply pressure and the setting of the pneumatics oiler have already
been carried out during the commissioning by the SPINNER Co.

IT IS NOT NECESSARY FOR THE USER TO MAKE ADJUSTMENTS IN

THE SECTION FOR PNEUMATIC SET-UP.

8.6.2 Changing the clamping pressures from the NC program

1. Main spindle
• G171 F... D...where: F = programmed clamping force and D = max. deviation
e.g. G171 F450 D150

2. Tailstock
• G172 F... D...where: F = programmed clamping force and D = max. deviation
e.g. G172 F250 D100

3. Sub-spindle:
• G173 F... D...where: F = programmed clamping force and D = max. deviation
e.g. G173 F450 D150

NOTE: REAL FORCE AND PROGRAMMED FORCE

DESIRED CLAMPING FORCES CORRESPOND TO THE REAL
VALUES OF FORCE AT THE PUSH/PULL TUBE OF THE MAIN
SPINDLE AND ARE THEREFORE NOT IDENTICAL TO THE
CLAMPING FORCE AT THE CLAMPING JAWS! THIS DEPENDS
ON THE CLAMPING SYSTEM USED! IF THE ACTUAL FORCE
DEVIATES FROM THE PROGRAMMED FORCE BY MORE THAN
THE ALLOWABLE VALUE, THE LATHE WILL BE STOPPED FOR
SAFETY REASONS!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-98

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.7 Further programming information

8.7.1 G-code system

G-code system A is active. See Section II.3 G-functions in the programming instructions
from Fanuc.

8.7.2 Tapping holes in rigid tapping mode CNC/ISO (Rigid Tapping)

• Tapping without compensating chuck with main spindle:

M26 M3 P1 S500 Tapping ON, spindle speed 500 1/min
(Right handed thread)
M26 M4 P1 S500 Tapping ON, spindle speed 500 1/min
(Left handed thread)
G84 F1 Z-30 Tapping cycle in Z direction
G80 End of tapping cycle
M05 P1 Spindle stop
• Tapping without compensating chuck with live tool (AGWZ):
M26 M3 P2 S500 Tapping ON, speed of live tool 500 1/min
(Right handed thread)
M26 M4 P2 S500 Tapping ON, speed of live tool 500 1/min
(Left handed thread)
G84 F1 Z-30 Tapping cycle in Z direction
G80 End of tapping cycle
M05 P2 Live tool stop
• Tapping without compensating chuck with sub spindle:
M26 M3 P3 S500 Tapping ON, sub spindle speed 500 1/min
(Right handed thread)
M26 M4 P3 S500 Tapping ON, sub spindle speed 500 1/min
(Left handed thread)
G84 F1 Z30 Tapping cycle in Z direction
G80 End of tapping cycle
M05 P3 Sub spindle stop

8.7.3 Spindle speed and axis feed

On a machine with a Fanuc control, the spindle which has been programmed last is the
stipulating spindle. Stipulating spindle means that the speed for the speed-dependent
commands is derived from the stipulating spindle. This means that the commands G99
(feed/RPM) and G97 (constant cutting speed) are always relative to the last spindle
programmed in the channel.

On the machines with Fanuc controls of the 30 series, the new spindle command syntax
from Fanuc is used. This syntax is necessary in order to implement all inter-channel
spindle functions.
The syntax is as follows:
Rotate right: M3 Px Syyyy
Rotate left: M4 Px Syyyy
Stop: M5 Px

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-99

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B
x represents:
1 = spindle command sent to the main spindle
2 = spindle command sent to the sub-spindle
3 = spindle command sent to the live-tools

NEVER PROGRAM TWO SPINDLES IN ONE PROGRAM BLOCK!

8.7.4 Stopping and continuing the program

It is sometimes necessary during a machining process to open the protection door in
order to make measurements or remove chips. The program is therefore interrupted.

Proceed as follows:

1. Stop the program in the automatic or MDI operational modes. To do this, press
key CYCLE STOP (see key 20 in Section 8.2.2.1). The program is interrupted
and the feeds stopped.
2. Press the key SPINDLE STOP (see key 24 in Section 8.2.2.1). The spindle is
stopped and the protection door is unlocked.
3. Open the protection door and carry out the necessary work. Finally, close the
door.
4. Press again the SPINDLE STOP key. The LED in the key goes out and the
active spindle starts to rotate again.
5. Press the CYCLE START key. The program is continued at the point where it
was interrupted.

8.7.5 Synchronizing the main spindle and subspindle with M36

In the synchronous spindle mode (M36), the subspindle is synchronized with or without
angular offset
(M36 C...) at the same speed as programmed for the main spindle. First the speed is
synchronized, then the angular offset is set (transfer parameter M36 C... in degrees). The
synchronization is terminated with M37, and the spindles rotate at the previously
programmed speeds.
For example:
M3 P1 S1000 Main spindle speed 1000 rpm
M36 C90 Synchronization ON
Subspindle offset 90° (without offset just M36)
M3 P1 S0 Stop spindles at the same time (when necessary)
:
:
M37 End synchronization, synchronization OFF
Main spindle continues to turn at the programmed speed

8.7.5.1 Example of the determination of a phase offset

1. Program and start in the MDI operating mode
M60
2. Program and start in the MDI operating mode

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-100

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B
M160

Both spindles are now at 0.0 degrees

3. Select the handwheel. Then press one of the increment keys and the key MPG
C.
4. Rotate the B-axis of the subspindle with the handwheel until transfer is possible.
Note the value of the position of the B-axis. This value is the angular offset.

8.7.6 Synchronous axis operation of the main and subspindle with M31 (C-axis
coupling)
When the main spindle and subspindle are operated in the synchronous axis mode (M31)
, the subspindle is position first in the axis mode (B-axis) with or without angular offset
(M31 C...). After that, the main spindle is switched to the axis mode (C-axis) and the main
spindle - subspindle coupling is activated. The subspindle now follows the main spindle in
the axis mode. The coupling of the axes is eliminated with M37.

Example:
...
...
N300 M3 P1 S2000;
G1 X50 Z200 F300; Turning operation until now
G0 X200 Z400; Tool change point
M5 P1
T1010; Tool 10, for example swivel in milling head
M31 C90; Switch to the C-axis synchronization mode with an offset
of 90 degrees from the subspindle
M49; Open the chuck of the subspindle
G0 E-200; Preposition the E-axis
G1 E-210 F500; Move to end position of the E-axis
M48; Close the chuck of the subspindle
G1 C90 F400; Turn the main and subspindle in the C-axis mode
synchronously 90 degrees with a feed of 400
M23 P2 S2000; Switch on the driven tool
... The C-axis machining operations are performed
M37 Deactivate C axis synchronous function
M30

Note: If the "M31" command is called, the main spindle and subspindle may not be
mechanically linked through the workpiece (=> the chuck on the main spindle or the
chuck on the subspindle must be open or one of the two spindles is clamped without a
workpiece).

8.7.7 Torque limiting on the E-axis / driving into a dead stop

It is possible with the G-Code G174 to drive into a dead stop on the E-axis.

Syntax: G174 Q... E... F...

Parameter: Q = input in % of max. possible torque on the E-axis

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-101

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

E = axis position located behind the dead stop

F = axis feed with which the dead stop is driven into
Example: G98
G174 Q30 E-120 F300
Moving along the E-axis in the direction of position E-120 with
300 mm/min. If the torque of the feed motor exceeds the max. possible
moment by 30% during the movement, the movement is stopped and the
axis held in this position in position control. If a dead stop that is impacted
should give way, then the E-axis would not be tracked. If there is no dead
stop, the E-axis remains at the position - 120 and the NC block is
executed.

DO NOT SET MORE THAN 40% OF THE MOTOR TORQUE TO

AVOID DAMAGES!

8.7.8 Part gripper programming (option)

The following M-functions are available for the part gripper of the PD:

• M181 grip the part (grip finished part, there is no blocking of read-in!!)
• M182 part gripped ? (there is blocking of read-in till the finished part
is gripped)

• M183 drop part (drop finished part, there is no blocking of read-in!!)

• M182 part gripped ? (there is blocking of read-in till the finished part
is dropped)

The following M-functions are available for the testing of the part gripper:

• M81/M91 Discharge rail forwards/backwards

• M82/M92 Gripper arm swing in / swing out
• M83/M93 Gripper open/close
• M84/M94 Gripper arm forwards/backwards

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-102

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.8 Nordmann tool fracture monitoring (option)

8.8.1 M-functions for the tool fracture monitoring

M62: Program active ON

This M-function is used to activate the pre-selected program in the Nordmann
monitoring. M62 should be programmed at the beginning of an NC program.
The signal "program active“ is reset with M30, M02, reset and M66.
M66: Program active OFF
This M-function is used to reset the signal "program active". M66 should be
programmed at the end of an NC-Program.
M63: Cut active ON
Programming the M-function M63 at the beginning of a cut which is to be
monitored. The signal "cut active“ is reset with M30, M02, reset and M64.
M64: Cut active OFF
Programming the M-function M64 at the end of a cut which is to be monitored.

If the fracture monitor detects a tool break, the feed enable is withdrawn and a
corresponding signal generated. The operator can carry out a dialogue at the fracture-
monitor and decide whether he wants to continue to work or not. If not, the NC program
should be broken off by a reset. Acknowledging the alarm in the monitor enables the feed
again.

If the fracture monitor detects wear, the NC-start is blocked and a corresponding
message generated. The operator can decide via dialogue at the display of the fracture
monitor whether he wants to continue to work or not. Acknowledging the alarm in the
monitor enables the NC-start again.

8.8.2 Messages from the tool fracture monitor

1025 Tool monitor signals a broken tool

The feed enabling is blocked until the fault is acknowledged at the
monitoring unit.
2170 Tool monitor signals wear
The NC-Start is blocked until the fault is acknowledged at the monitoring
unit.
2171 Tool monitor - M62 not programmed before M63
The program must first be activated in the monitoring unit (M62). Only then
may cut active (M63) be programmed. The read in enable is locked out and
the NC program has to be broken off with a reset.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-103

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.9 Workpiece sensor - Fanuc 32i (option)

The measuring head is mounted on the toolholder for the tool turret. The turret position
corresponds to the tool number of the sensor. If this tool number is programmed, the
sensor swings into its working position and the infra-red LEDs point in the direction of the
receiving station.

8.9.1 Workpiece sensor activate/deactivate

The sensor is activated in the NC program with M58. During the initialisation phase
(1.5 sec.) the read enable remains blocked and the message "Wait, measuring head is
being initialised“ appears on the screen. If, after that, the measuring head is ready, the
message "Measuring head ready" is issued.

The measuring sensor must be switched off following measurement operation with M59.
In addition, it can be de-activated with reset or automatically after 2 min 15 sec.

8.9.2 Measurement values

At the switching instant of the measuring sensor, the axis positions of the workpiece
coordinate system (therefore including G54, tool correction) are written to variables which
are not visible to the user:
• #5061 X-axis
• #5062 Z-axis
To make the measured values visible or to process them further, they must be transferred
to macrovariables (e.g. #501=#5061, #502=5062).

8.9.3 Set of measurements

In the NC program, the following block must be programmed for a measurement activity:
• G31 G98 F... W...
The feed F should not exceed 600 mm/min. With the switching of the measuring sensor,
the rest of the path is deleted and the next NC instruction set executed.

8.9.4 Adjustment
A known machine position must be "measured" without tool correction and the
geometrical data of the measuring sensor must be determined from the measurements.
this measuring process must be carried out in the same drive direction and with same
speed as in the measurements made later in the running production.

An example of determining the Z-length:

The spindle nose is touched in the Z direction, G54 offset = 0
1. Position the tip of the measuring sensor with the handwheel till it is approx. 5 mm
in front of the spindle nose.
2. Input the following in the operation mode MDA :
T0200 (Measuring sensor in Station 2)
M58 (Activate measuring sensor )
G31 G98 F100 W-10 (Measure)
G4
#502=#5062 (Store measurement)
G1 G98 F200 W5 (Lift)
M59 (Measuring sensor off)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-104

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B
3. Enter the measured value of the variable #502 in the tool correction of the Z-
length of the measuring sensor.

8.9.5 Programming example

The correct release length of a work piece shall be checked at Z=0 with a tolerance of
± 0.3 mm (G54 entered and active):

T0202 (Swing in measuring sensor)

G0 X0 Z10 (Position: 10 mm in front of the work piece)
M58 (Measuring sensor on)
G31 G98 F100 W-15 (Measure )
G4
#502=#5062 (Store measurement)
G1 G98 F300 W10 (Lift)
M59 (Measuring sensor off)
IF [ABS[#502] GT 0.3] THEN #3000=1 (Measuring tolerance violated)
#5222=#5222+#502 (correct the Z-offset of G54 by the measured
value)

ALWAYS PLACE AN M58 BEFORE A SET OF MEASUREMENTS

TO ENSURE THAT THE MEASURING HEAD IS READY TO
TRANSFER. AN AXIAL MOVEMENT AT THE MEASURING
POINT IS ONLY STOPPED BY A MEASURMENT SET (G31). IN
ALL OTHER CASES, THE MEASURING SENSOR CAN BE
DESTROYED.

8.9.6 Error messages

1031 Fault during measurement

The transmission between measuring head and receiver could not be
established or was broken off. Feed block is triggered. Remove possible
obstacle in the transmission path, replace battery.
2173 Battery discharged
Battery charge low; transmitter and receiver dirty or badly aligned. Replace
battery in measuring head.
2174 Measuring sensor deflected
Measuring sensor is active and deflected.
2175 Measuring head ready
The measuring head has been initialised and is ready to measure.
2176 Wait - measuring head is being initialised
The measuring head was activated with M58. The read enable is blocked
for 1.5 sec. and the measuring head is given time for the initialisation.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-105

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.10 Compressed air functions

Four programmable compressed air connections (M77/M87, M78/M88, M79/M89,
M80/M90) are attached to the foundation plate. These can be used to control accessories
like gripping devices, compressed air driven drilling and milling spindles, automation
components such as pneumatic gripper and cylinder or for the blowing away of chips.

Compressed air
connectors

Figure 8-6: Programmable Compressed Air Connectors

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-106

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.11 UNIMAG Interface Description

8.11.1 Safety information

We point out that the function and circuit descriptions in this chapter must absolutely be
kept.

The departure from the instructions of this description is only permitted after consulting
Spinner.

The declaration of conformity delivered with this machine (EC Machine direction Machine
98/37/EC) and the CE sign are only valid for the extended machine when the type and
make of the peripheral unit were arranged with Spinner.

The CE declaration of conformity is no more valid in case of the non-compliance of these

points.

8.11.2 Conditions for a safe operation of the machine

8.11.2.1 Safe cutoff of the bar feeder when the safety door of the machine is open
The main danger of the turning machine is that the bar is pushed while the safety door of
the machine is open and the operator is still working in the working area.

The signal SAFETY DOOR CLOSED (PIN18-19) was intended for the safe cutoff of the
machine.

The following circuit principle must be observed in the bar feeder:

Signal Safety door closed

On the one hand the pushing of the bar must safely be enabled by means of this signal,
on the other hand it must also block the pushing of the bar when the safety door is open.

Both signals must absolutely be processed by a contact in intrinsically safe technology.

Ideally, both signals enable directly the 2 motor contactors respectively they block these
contactors when the safety door is open.

IT IS NOT PERMITTED TO PROCESS BOTH SIGNALS IN THE

SOFTWARE (PMC) OF THE BAR FEEDER!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-107

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.11.3 Structure NC-parts program

The UNIMAG interface is a universal feed interface that can be operated with the feeds or
magazines of most manufacturers. The following syntax should be observed in order to
obtain a smooth NC programming sequence:

O4000
N0005 M68 (Clamp)
(N0006 M54) (Optional: M54 = move continuously)
N0010 /2 M98 P4001 (Call bar start program)
N0015 Begin machining program
N0020
:
:
N0190
N0200 End machining program
N0210 G0 X... Z... (Position the stop some distance from the
bar)
N0220 G1 G98 F1000 Z... (Safety feature in case a part is not cut-
off)
N0230 M69 (Release and move)
(N0235 M54 / M53) (Optional M54 / M53 as an
acknowledgement function)
N0240 G1 G98 F500 Z... (Give out bar)
N0250 G4 (Pre-read stop)
N0260 /3 G0 X... Z... (Move the stop away)
N0270 M30 (End of program)

O4001
N0005 Machining rough bar (e.g. face turning)
:
:
N0090 M99 (Return to the main program)

Comments:

The block skip stages /2 and /3 are permanently in operation when using the UNIMAG
interface, except for:

/2: After each bar change the block skip /2 for a program pass is automatically
deactivated and with that, runs through the bar start program (e.g. face turning
or parting off the new bar). This function is reset using the reset key or can be
done by hand at the machine control panel by pressing simultaneously the
spindle keys CW and CCW in the automatic operation mode. If no preliminary
machining is necessary for a new bar, the block skip /2 can be left out
completely.
/3 If feed registers a bar end, the block skip /3 is deactivated. The skipping is
deactivated so long as a bar end is present. In the case of a bar end the stop is

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-108

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B
therefore moved away and the remainder of the bar can be removed from the
front.

In the case of magazines which have an automatic bar change one should ensure that
the collet is opened at the end of the program when the end of the bar is reached.

The command M54 "move" at the beginning of a program is only necessary for hydro-
static feeders with non-gripping moving heads (e.g. SAMECA-Monosam). The "normal"
moving command during the period that the collet is open is issued automatically with the
M-function M69 and cancelled with M68. There is, however, also the possibility of using
M54 as a move/acknowledge function. In this case the move command is given by M54
and a status message from feed awaited before the next NC-program block is processed.
When feeding out the bar the stop should first of all be positioned at a safe distance from
the bar and then moved axially in the direction of the bar, to ensure that the bar is pushed
back if the finished part was not parted off.

One should basically observe the program structure given above. Other programming
sequences do exist, however, (e.g. issue the bar at the beginning of the program) while
fulfilling the general conditions which apply (see programming example).

With the key on the machine control panel, single part or series parts machining can
be selected. In the case of single part machining (LED OFF) the program stops after M30
while in the case of series part machining (LED ON) an NC start is executed automatically
after M30 and the program will run endlessly.

8.11.4 Signal description for the interface

• From the feed device to the lathe

No fault present:
This signal is "high" for as long as there is no fault in the bar feed. An
emergency stop is normally triggered if the bar feed reports a fault.

Material available:
This signal is generally "high". When the bar end is reached, the signal goes
"low“.

Feed-in position reached:

This signal is given out by magazines with automatic bar change. If a new bar
is pushed into the machine when a bar change occurs then the signal must go
"high" on reaching the feed-in position. It also has the function of a status
signal to acknowledge the M-function M54, should M54 be used as a
move/acknowledge function.

Supply unit in motion:

This signal is "high“ when the slider is in motion. If the M-function M53 is
programmed in the lathe, the read enable is blocked so long as this signal is
"high“.

Max. slider position reached / optimisation of the remaining piece:

This signal is "high“ when the slider reaches its max. position in the lathe. The
signal can, however, also be used for remainder optimisation should this be

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-109

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B
possible in feed. Branching into the corresponding subprogram must then be
made via /4 (SKIP 4).

Spindle release:
This signal is "high“ as soon as the feed unit is ready and the lathe can begin
the machining operation.

Emergency Stop:
The emergency stop is a dual channel design. If the contacts are opened, the
emergency stop on the lathe will be triggered and all drives are stopped.

Identification of the dummy plug:

The dummy plug which is supplied with the machine must be inserted if the
lathe is going to be run without feed.
The following signals form the list above must be supplied by the feed unit:
no fault existing, material available, emergency stop, slider position reached
(only for magazines)

• Signals from the lathe to the feed unit:

Permission signal:
This signal is "high“ when the protection door is locked.

Supply mode on:

This signal is "high" when there is no emergency stop condition present on the
lathe.

Moving:
This signal is "high" when the feed unit should move on its axis.

Start loading cycle:

This signal is "high" for about 2 seconds when a new bar has to be loaded
(only in the case of magazines with automatic bar changing).

The collet is closed:

This signal is "high" when the collet is closed.

The machine also supplies 24V DC and 3-phase 400V AC. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagram for the pin allocation.

Plug: Supplier:
ILME GmbH
Max-Planck-Str. 12
51674 Wiehl
Tel.: 02261/7955-0
Fax : 02261/79559
E-Mail : [email protected]

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-110

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

On the lathe:
Base housing design TMAP
Order-no.: 123176
Bush insert
Order-no.: 118069

On the feed unit:

Plug housing TMAO
Order-no.: 123178
Plug insert
Order-no.: 118070

8.11.5 Option bits

D0100.0 = 1 UNIMAG interface active

This bit must be set to 1 so that the PMC module for the interface is
processed..
D0100.1 = 1 Bar feed without automatic bar change
This bit must equal 1 for feed units while it must be 0 for magazines with
a bar change
D0100.2 = 1 Generally move when the spindle is running
The output will be move "high" if this bit is set to 1 as soon as the spindle
turns (should be 1, for example, for hydrostatic bar feeds).
D0100.3 = 1 M54 enable "axial movement"
The output will be move "high" when M54 is programmed. M54 will only
be reset by an emergency stop, a fault on the feed unit, failing to be in the
operating mode AUTO, when the door is open and reset. and possibly
M68/bar end, depending on D0100.7.
D0100.4 = 1 Without shuttling of the spindles
This bit should be set to 1 if there is shuttling of the spindles when
automatic insertion of a new bar by the magazine takes place.
D0100.5 = 1 Unimportant
D0100.6 = 1 General movement in the operating mode "AUTOMATIC".
This bit should only be set in exceptional cases.
D0100.7 = 1 M54 "Move" also further when the bar end has been reached (reset by
M68)
This bit must be 1 when, for example, the bar is fed out at the beginning
of the program and the machining of the part must be completed when
the bar end appears. An appropriate length of remaining bar must be
present for magazines. If M54 is used as an axial
movement/acknowledgement function, M54 will be acknowledged in the
case of bar end if this bit = 0.
D0101.0 = 1 With detection M53 supply unit in motion
If M53 is programmed and the signal Supply unit in motion is "high", then
the read in release is locked out until the supply movement has been
completed.
D0101.5 = 1 With a spindle lock-out from the feed unit
The feed unit can release or lock out the spindle using the interface signal
"Spindle lock-out“.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-111

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

D0101.6 = 1 With M54 as an axial movement/acknowledgement function

The "Move" command is only issued with the M54 and the next NC block
will only be processed when the M-function has been acknowledged by
the feed unit.
DW102: Duration of pulse for start of loading cycle:(unit 48 ms, format BIN, length
2 byte). Standard value = 40
DB104: Shuttle speed (unit 1.95 rpm for the 8000 unit, 1.22 rpm for the 5000 unit;
format BIN, length 1 byte). Standard value = 50

8.11.5.1 Setting the option bits:

1. Turn the key-operated switch "Edit“.
2. Enter the password in order to suspend the write protection.
3. Enter
A) For the “Data” area press one after the other the keys: "SYSTEM“ > „Next
page“ until softkey „PMC Maintenance“ is displayed. Press this key. Then
„Next page“ until softkey „Data“ is displayed. Then press this key:

No Address Parameter Type No. Of Data

1 D0000 0000 0100 0 200

If other values appear here, please change them to the values shown above!

A1) Press the soft-key "ZOOM“ (correct group selected?). Position the cursor on
the address D0100.
A2) Enter the option bits: D0100 = see below
D0101 = 01
B) For the “Status” area press one after the other, the keys: "SYSTEM“ > „Next
page“ until softkey „PMC Mainte.“ is displayed. Press this key. Then „Next
page“ until softkey „Status“ is displayed. Then press this key.
B1) Position the cursor onto the necessary Bit in Address D0100/D101
B2) Press the softkey “ZWING” [FORCE] and set the Bit to the desired value by
means of the softkeys “ON”/”OFF”

6. Leave the input area by pressing any of the system keys (e. g. PROGR,
SYSTEM, MESSAGE etc.).

Remarks:

In the parameter area (input A) the option bits can only be entered bit by bit in hex format.
A hex field consists of 4 bits, i.e. a byte option bit consists of two hex fields. The following
applies:

0000 = 0 0001 = 1 0010 = 2 0011 = 3 0100 = 4 0101 = 5

0110 = 6 0111 = 7 1000 = 8 1001 = 9 1010 = A 1011 = B
1100 = C 1101 = D 1110 = E 1111 = F

Example: SAMECA-Monosam: D0100 = 0001 1111 = 1F

D0101 = 0000 0001 = 01

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-112

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

In addition option bits can also be set bit by bit in the „Status“ area (input B) by means of
the softkeys „Zwingen“ [FORCE] => „ON“/“OFF“. The “STATUS” area has the additional
advantage that the symbols and comments of the current bit (the cursor is on it) are
shown in the status bar (see picture below).

Settings table for various bar feeds:

Feed type D0100 D0101

SPINNER Servo Load 80 99 61
SAMECA - Monosam 1F 01
SAMECA - Quicksam 1F 01
LNS - Hydrobar 1F 01

SAMECA - Multisam 89 01
FMB - Turbo 89 01
LNS - Sprint 89 01
SPINNER Barload 89 01

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-113

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.11.6 Examples of programs

All the programs shown here are examples. We do not give any guarantees for their
correctness or that they will run properly.
In the following programming example a 30 mm dia. bar is used from which 20 mm long
parts are cut off.

Measured tools: Parting tool, a right hand cutter T0101

a left hand cutter T0102

Stop T0201

Example 1: - for a magazine or feed unit with a remaining piece length of 0, i.e. no more
parts will be machined once the end of the bar has been reached
- issuing of the bar at the end of the program
- in the bar start program we are assuming that the new bar has been laid in
the spindle until its end is just behind the spindle nose. The new bar is let out
and cut off to a dimension of Z0.

The bar start program:

O4001
N0005 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0010 T0201 (Swing in stop)
N0015 G0 X0 Z10 (Position the stop some distance from the bar)
N0020 G1 G98 F1000 Z-20 (Pick up bar)
N0025 M69 (Open the collet and move)
N0030 G1 G98 F500 Z1.0 (Give out bar)
N0035 M68 (Close collet)
N0040 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0045 T0102 (Parting tool, left cutter)
N0050 G0 X32 Z0.0 M4 P1 S3000 (Position parting tool)
N0055 G1 G99 F0.05 X-0.4 (Cut off)
N0060 G1 F1.0 X32 (Move upwards again)
N0065 G0 X200 Z200 M5 P1 (Tool change position)
N0070 M99

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-114

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Machining program:

O4000
N0005 G54 (Activate workpiece co-ordinate system)
N0010 M68 (Close collet)
N0015 /2 M98 P4001 (The bar start program)
N0020 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0025 T0101 (Parting tool, right cutter)
N0030 G0 X32 Z-20 M4 P1 S3000 (Position parting tool)
N0035 G1 G99 F0.05 X-0.4 (Cut off)
N0040 G1 F1.0 X32 (Move parting tool up again)
N0045 G0 X200 Z200 T0 M5 (Tool change position)
N0050 T0201 (The stop)
N0055 G0 X0 Z10 (Position the stop some distance from the bar)
N0060 G1 G98 F1000 Z-20 (Pick up bar)
N0065 M69 (Open collet and move)
N0070 G1 G98 F500 Z0.3 (Give out bar)
N0075 G4 (Pre-read stop)
N0080 /3 G0 X150 Z150 (Move the stop away)
N0085 M30 (End of program)

Example 2: - for a magazine or feed unit with a remaining piece length of 0, i.e. no more
parts will be machined once the end of the bar has been reached
- issuing of the bar at the start of the program
- in the bar start program we are assuming that the new bar has been laid in
the spindle until its end is just behind the spindle nose. The new bar is let out
and cut off to a dimension of Z-20.

The bar start program:

O4001
N0005 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0010 T0201 (Swing in stop)
N0015 G0 X0 Z10 (Position the stop some distance from the bar)
N0020 G1 G98 F1000 Z-20 (Pick up bar)
N0025 M69 (Open the collet and move)
N0030 G1 G98 F500 Z-19 (Give out bar)
N0035 M68 (Close collet)
N0040 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0045 T0102 (Parting tool, left cutter)
N0050 G0 X32 Z-20 M4 P1 S3000 (Position parting tool)
N0055 G1 G99 F0.05 X-0.4 (Cut off)
N0060 G1 F1.0 X32 (Move upwards again)
N0065 G0 X200 Z200 M5 P1 (Tool change position)
N0070 M99

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-115

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Machining program:

O4000
N0005 G54 (Activate workpiece co-ordinate system)
N0010 /2 M98 P4001 (The bar start program)
N0015 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0020 T0201 (The stop)
N0025 G0 X0 Z10 (Position the stop some distance from the bar)
N0030 G1 G98 F1000 Z-20 (Pick up bar)
N0035 M69 (Open collet and move)
N0040 G1 G98 F500 Z0.3 (Give out bar)
N0045 G4 (Pre-read stop)
N0050 /3 G0 X150 Z150 (Move the stop away)
N0055 /3 M30 (End of the program at the end of the bar)
N0060 M68 (Close collet)
N0065 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0070 T0101 (Parting tool, right cutter)
N0075 G0 X32 Z-20 M4 P1 S3000 (Position parting tool)
N0080 G1 G99 F0.05 X-0.4 (Cut off)
N0085 G1 F1.0 X32 (Move parting tool up again)
N0090 G0 X200 Z200 T0 M5 P1 (Tool change position)
N0095 M30 (End of program)

Example 3:- for a magazine with infeedable remaining bar ends which means that there
still enough bar material left to machine one more part.
- issuing of the bar at the start of the program
- no bar start program since the magazine moves the new bar in to an exact
dimension (Z-22) and the new bar head is already sufficiently flat.

Machining program:

O4000
N0005 G54 (Activate workpiece co-ordinate system)
N0010 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0015 T0201 (The stop)
N0020 G0 X0 Z10 (Position the stop some distance from the bar)
N0025 G1 G98 F1000 Z-20 (Pick up bar)
N0030 M69 M54 (Open collet and move)
N0035 G1 G98 F500 Z0.3 ((Give out bar)
N0040 M68 (Close collet)
N0045 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0050 T0101 (Parting tool, right cutter)
N0055 G0 X32 Z-20 M4 P1 S3000 (Position parting tool)
N0060 G1 G99 F0.05 X-0.4 (Cut off)
N0065 G1 F1.0 X32 (Move parting tool up again)
N0070 G0 X200 Z200 T0 M5 P1 (Tool change position)
N0075 G4 (Pre-read stop)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-116

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B
N0080 /3 M69 (Release for bar change)
N0085 /3 G4 X1.0 (Dwell time)
N0090 M30 (End of program)

Remarks:

The M54 programmed here lengthens the move command including going beyond the bar
end up to M68. The length of the remaining piece of bar must be adequate to allow the
last piece to be machined.

Example 4: - for a magazine which positions the bar itself

- issuing of the bar at the end of the program
- not a bar start program since the magazine moves the new bar in to an exact
dimension (Z0.3) and the new bar head is already sufficiently flat.

Machining program:

O4000
N0001 M68 (Close collet)
N0005 G54 (Activate workpiece co-ordinate system)
N0010 G0 X200 Z200 T0 (Tool change position)
N0050 T0101 (Parting tool, right cutter)
N0055 G0 X32 Z-20 M4 P1 S3000 (Position parting tool)
N0060 G1 G99 F0.05 X-0.4 (Cut off)
N0065 G1 F1.0 X32 (Move parting tool up again)
N0070 G0 X200 Z200 T0 M5 P1 (Tool change position)
N0080 M69 (Open collet and move)
N0090 G4 X0.2
N0095 M54 (Wait for acknowledgement from feed unit)
N0096 /3 G4 X1.0 (Dwell time)
N0097 M30 (End of program)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-117

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.11.6.1 Program example for Spinner Servo Load

The Spinner Servo Load should be operated with the following interface settings:

D100 = 99
D101 = 61

Example:
− Feed and bar change with movement and acknowledge function
− Without separate bar start program
− Remaining piece ejection using a pusher at end of bar

O4000
N0005 /2 M68 Bar start: Close the chuck
N0010 /2 GOTO45 Bar start: Ignore stop for material feed, as the
material is already in the machining position
N0015 G53 G0 X200 Z200 T0 Move to tool change point
N0020 T0808 Turret stop position
N0025 G0 X0 Z10 Position the stop some distance from the bar
N0030 G1 G98 Z0.5 F1000 Pick up bar
N0035 M69 M54 Chuck OPEN and move with acknowledge
function
N0040 M68 Close the chuck
N0045 G53 G0 X200 Z200 T0 Move to tool change point
.
. Part machining
.
N0080 G53 G0 X200 Z200 T0 Move to tool change point
N0085 T0606 Change parting tool
N0090 M3 P1 S1500 Main spindle cutting speed
N0095 G0 X20 Z-23 Pre-position for cut-off
N0100 G1 G99 X-1 F0.05 Cut-off
N0105 G0 X20 Retraction
N0110 G53 G0 X200 Z200 T0 M5 Move to tool change point and main spindle
P1 stops
N0115 /3 M69 M54 End of bar: Chuck OPEN and move with
acknowledge function
End of bar: Bar change, remaining piece
ejection with pusher
N0125 /3 G0 X0 Z0.5 Move to stop
N0130 M30 Program end and new start

8.11.7 Time diagram for bar changing

(See following page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-118

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

• Operational sequence in supply mode

1=24V, "A“ = from machine to magazine, "E“= from magazine to machine
Supply mode on:
1
A0
0

Move
1
A2 0
max
200ms
Magazine removes signal E4,
when it comes to rest

1 optional
E4 0
Supply unit in motion

No fault present
1
E1 0

• With loading cycle

1=24V, "A“ = from machine to magazine, "E“= from magazine to machine
Supply mode on
1
A0
0
End of bar change
Move
1
A2
0
max
200ms

1
E4 optional
0
Supply unit in motion

1 End of bar
E0
0

approx. 2 sec

1 Start loading cycle

A3
0

A B C

1
E2
0 Feed-in position reached

ca. 50 ms

A: Depends on the parts program

B: Bar change Part 1: Exchange to place a new bar in the guide channel
C: Bar change Part 2: Move into the spindle
Total bar change sequence = B + C
Figure 8-7: Time diagram for the bar loading magazine

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-119

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.12 List of M functions

M-Fct. Meaning
M0 Program stop
M1 Conditional program stop
M2 Program end
M3 Spindle - right-handed rotation: P1=main spindle, P2=live tool, P3=sub spindle
M4 Spindle - left-handed rotation: P1=main spindle, P2=live tool, P3=sub spindle
M5 Spindle stop: P1=main spindle, P2=live tool, P3=sub spindle
M7 Coolant valve 1 ON (Coolant at turret + Coolant next to the spindle)
M8 Coolant valve 2 ON (Coolant spindle flushing at main spindle)
M9 Coolant valve 3 ON (Coolant spindle flushing at subspindle)
M10 Chip conveyor ON
M11 Chip conveyor OFF
M13 Turret rotates to the right
M14 Turret rotates to the left
M15 Tailstock quill forward
M16 Tailstock quill back
M20 Spindle brake ON
M21 Spindle brake / spindle inhibitor OFF
M22 Spindle inhibitor ON
M26 Reserved for tapping holes in rigid tapping mode
M27 Coolant valve 1 OFF (Coolant at turret + Coolant next to the spindle)
M28 Coolant valve 2 OFF (Coolant spindle flushing at main spindle)
M29 Coolant valve 3 OFF (Coolant spindle flushing at subspindle)
M30 Program end
M31 Synchronous axis mode for main spindle and subspindle ON (M31 C... =
angular offset GS)
M36 Spindle synchronization of main spindle and subspindle ON (M36 C... =
angular offset GS)
M37 Spindle / axis synchronization for main spindle and subspindle OFF
M38 Exact stop ON
M39 Exact stop OFF
M47 Clamp the subspindle and return the empty status message
M48 Clamp the subspindle (also when spindle running)
M49 Release the subspindle (also when spindle running)
M50 Part counter +1
M53 UNIMAG query: feed is in motion
M54 UNIMAG move command
M55 Open gantry loader working area cover
M58 Workpiece measurement sensor ON
M59 Workpiece measurement sensor OFF
M60 Axis mode for main spindle ON (with automatic referencing) SB/PD/TC: C-axis
M61 Axis mode for main spindle OFF
M62 Select tool breakage monitor program

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-120

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

M-Fct. Meaning
M63 Activate cutting tool breakage monitor (M63 Q.. = cut no. in the tool monitor
software)
M64 Deactivate cutting tool breakage monitor
M65 Close gantry loader working area cover
M66 Tool breakage monitor program OFF
M67 Clamp the main spindle with the empty status message
M68 Clamp the main spindle (also when spindle running)
M69 Release the main spindle (also when spindle running)
M72 Electric 2 ON
M73 Electric 2 OFF
M75 Electric 3 ON
M76 Electric 3 OFF
M77 Air 1 ON
M78 Air 2 ON
M79 Pneumatic connection 3 ON
M80 Pneumatic connection 4 ON
M81 Part gripper: Discharge rail forward (Tapper 1 Spindle)
M81 Part gripper: Discharge rail forward (Tapper 2 Spindle)
M82 Part gripper: Gripper arm swing in (Tapper 2 Spindle)
M83 Part gripper: Gripper open (Tapper 2 Spindle)
M84 Part gripper: Gripper arm forward (Tapper 2 Spindle)
M85 Electric connection 1 ON
M86 Electric connection 1 OFF
M87 Pneumatic connection 1 OFF
M88 Pneumatic connection 2 OFF
M89 Pneumatic connection 3 OFF
M90 Pneumatic connection 4 OFF
M91 Part gripper: Discharge rail backward (Tapper 1 Spindle)
M91 Part gripper: Discharge rail backward (Tapper 2 Spindle)
M92 Part gripper: Gripper arm swing out (Tapper 2 Spindle)
M93 Part gripper: Gripper close (Tapper 2 Spindle)
M94 Part gripper: Gripper arm backward (Tapper 2 Spindle)
M95 Automatic machine shutdown (Auto-Power-Off)
M96 Macro Interrupt ON
M97 Macro Interrupt OFF
M98 Subprogram call (on the CNC / control system side)
M99 Subprogram end (CNC / control system)
M103 Main spindle - change direction of rotation with M-function ON
M104 Main spindle - change direction of rotation with M-function OFF
M107 High pressure pump: Coolant valve 1 ON (Coolant at turret + Coolant next to
the spindle)
M108 High pressure pump: Coolant valve 2 ON (Coolant spindle flushing at main
spindle)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-121

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

M-Fct. Meaning
M109 High pressure pump: Coolant valve 3 ON (Coolant spindle flushing at
subspindle)
M123 Driven tool - change direction of rotation with M-function ON
M124 Driven tool - change direction of rotation with M-function OFF
M125 Main spindle clamp with reduced pressure ON
M126 Main spindle clamp with reduced pressure OFF
M133 Subspindle - change direction of rotation with M-function ON
M134 Subspindle - change direction of rotation with M-function OFF
M160 Axis mode subspindle ON (with automatic referencing) PD: B-axis TC: A-axis
M161 Axis mode subspindle OFF
M181 Grip piece PD400
M182 Piece gripped? PD400
M183 Put down piece PD400
M184 Put down piece? PD400
M198 Subprogram call (externally from M-Card / serial interface)
M199 Subprogram end (externally from M-Card / serial interface)

8.12.1 Notes concerning the programming of macro M functions

Some of the M functions are macro M functions. Programming them means that a sub
program is started. Thus, there are some restrictions to be followed when using these
macro M functions:

1. Macro M functions must be programmed in a separate NC bloc, if necessary together

with the associated parameter values!
2. Using programming instructions in the same bloc which are no parameter values are
not read. They are ignored!

The following M functions are macro M functions. In case of these M functions the above
mentioned restrictions must be followed:

M function
M19
M31
M36
M37
M60
M63
M160
M310

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-122

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Example: => Main spindle changes to C axis mode; power tool speed 1000 rpm
PD Result
... => Wrong! Power tool does
M60 M3 P2 S1000 not start
....
... => Correct! Power tool starts
M60
M3 P2 S1000

8.12.1.1 Notes concerning the programming of G code macros

G code macros (e. g. G100 …) are always sub program calls. They must always be
programmed in a separate NC bloc. Programming instructions which follow the G code
are interpreted and processed as macro parameter values.

8.12.2 Extension of the M functions

Order M31
Parameter C***
Explanation Synchronous function of the main and sub spindle in the C axis
operation

Proceeding:
When the order M31 C*** is executed firstly the sub spindle is referenced and then be
turned about the angle C***, supposing an angle offset of 360°. If a bigger angle or no
angle is programmed the sub spindle will not be turned. The main spindle is referenced
after the sub spindle and then switched into the C axis operation. All following C axis
movements will also be done synchronously by the sub spindle.

Advice: When the order „M31“ is called up there must not be any mechanical coupling
between the main and the sub spindle by means of the workpiece (=> Chuck of the main
spindle or chuck of the sub spindle must be open or one of the two spindles is clamped
without workpiece).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-123

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Example:

...
...
N300 M3 P1 S2000;
G1 X50 Z200 F300; Up to here machining by turning
G0 X200 Z400; Tool change point
M5 P1
T1010; Turn in tool 10 e. g. milling tool
M31 C90; Switching into the C axis synchronous function with
a sub spindle angle offset of 90 degrees
M49; Opening chuck of the sub spindle
G0 E-200; Pre-positioning of the E axis
G1 E-210 F500; Moving to the end position of the E axis
M48; Closing chuck of the sub spindle
G1 C90 F400; Turning the main and the sub spindle in the C axis
operation about 90 degrees having a feed of 400
M23 P1 S2000; Switching on the live tool
... The C axis machining will be done
...
M30

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-124

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.13 Data transfer by serial port RS232 to FANUC 3xi-B controls

8.13.1 Information and system requirements

This documentation describes connection and operation of the serial port RS232 to
FANUC 3xi-B controls. The serial port is available as standard on machine SB/PD with
FANUC 3xi-B control. A computer/laptop with serial port and a data transfer software
package is required for data transfer. The description refers to the SINUCOM PCIN
software package.

IT IS ADVISABLE TO BACK UP DATA AT REGULAR INTERVALS IN

ORDER TO PREVENT LOSS OF PART PROGRAMS IN THE EVENT OF
A FAULT OF THE CNC PROGRAM MEMORY.

8.13.2 Data transfer cable

The 25-pin Sub-D connector (pin) to 9-pin Sub-D connector (socket) data transfer cable
from the control to the laptop must have the following pin assignment (see illustration
below). The cable is available from the SPINNER company, order number 13402, or can
be made by the customer himself on the basis of the following pin assignment. A max.
cable length of 10 m is recommended in order to ensure reliable serial data transfer.

FANUC control: Laptop:

Sub-D connector Sub-D connector
25-pin pin connector 9-pin socket
PIN PIN

2 2
3 3
4 7
5 8
7 5
6 1
8 4
20 6

8.13.3 Settings on the control

The following settings must be made on the control for data transfer:

8.13.3.1 Setting the I/O channel

Panel button “OFS/SET" ⇒ horizontal softkey “SETTING”
⇒ enter 0 under point “I/O CHANNEL" for serial data transfer.

8.13.3.2 Setting the transfer parameters

Choose panel button “SYSTEM" ⇒ mode “EDIT”
⇒ vertical softkey "NEXT PAGE" until softkey “ALL IO” is displayed
⇒ vertical softkey “PARAMETER”
⇒ check the settings of the serial port in the Configuration window. These settings must
be as follows by way of example:

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-125

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

I/O CHANNEL 0
DEVICE NUM. 4
BAUDRATE 9600
INPUT CODE EIA/ISO
PUNCH CODE ISO
STOP BIT 2BIT
FEED OUTPUT NO FEED
NULL INPUT (EIA) NO
EOB OUTPUT LF
TV CHECK OFF
TV CHECK(NOTES) ON

8.13.4 Settings on the laptop and in the transfer software package

The settings relate to the SINUCOM PCIN software package by way of example. Launch
the transfer software and make the following settings:

Under “RS232 Config”, configure the transfer parameters, as shown in the illustration:

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-126

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Close the window for setting the transfer parameters with “Save & Activate”.

THE CONFIGURED BAUD RATE MUST CORRESPOND TO THE

SETTING ON THE CNC CONTROL.

8.13.5 Data transfer from CNC to laptop (read out programs)

Make a connection with the data transfer cable between CNC and laptop. Use the "I/O
CHANNEL" = 0 setting on the CNC for serial data transfer as described in Section
8.13.3.2. Depending on configuration and availability, use the COM1 or COM2 port on the
laptop.

Now launch the data transfer software package (SINUCOM PCIN) and make the settings
described in Section 8.13.4. Now proceed as follows:

Establishing reception standby on the laptop:

1. Click on the “Receive Data" button in the transfer software.

2. Choose the required file location on the hard disk under "Save in".
3. Enter the required name of the program to be saved under “File name"
(generally the same name as the CNC control, e.g. O1000).
4. Click on the “Save" button to establish reception standby.

Then start transfer of the program to be read out as follows on the CNC control:

1. Click on the panel button “PROG".

2. Chose “EDIT" mode by clicking on the corresponding panel button.
3. Click on vertical softkey “FOLDER" to obtain a general overview display of the
available CNC programs.
4. Enter the required program (e.g. O1000) to be saved on the keypad.
5. Use the right-hand horizontal softkey “+" to scroll down until softkey “PUNCH" is
shown. Click on this softkey.
6. Start data transfer by clicking on softkey “EXEC".

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-127

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B
7. Click on the "Abort Transfer" button in the data transfer program (SINUCOM
PCIN) after transfer is complete.
8. The program to be transferred should now be in the selected file location if data
transfer was successful.
9. Launch the program on the laptop as a check.

8.13.6 Data transfer from laptop to CNC (read in programs)

Use the data transfer cable to establish a connection between CNC and laptop. Use the
"I/O channel" = 0 setting on CNC for serial data transfer, as described in Section 8.13.3.2.
Depending on configuration and availability, use the COM1 or COM2 port on the laptop.

Now launch the data transfer software package (SINUCOM PCIN) and make the settings
shown in Section 8.13.4.

Establish reception standby of the CNC control:

1. Click on panel button “PROG".

2. Choose “EDIT" mode by clicking on the corresponding panel button.
3. Click on vertical softkey “FOLDER".
4. Enter the required program name (e.g. O1000) under which the program is to be
saved on the CNC using the keypad.
5. Use the right-hand horizontal softkey “+" to scroll down until softkey “READ" is
shown. Click on this softkey.
6. Start reception standby for data transfer by clicking on softkey “EXEC". This is
shown by a blinking "INPUT" in the status bar.

Then start data transfer on the laptop as follows:

1. Click on the “Send Data" button.

2. Choose the folder containing the program on the laptop under “Look in".
3. Choose the required program or enter the name.
4. Click on the “Open" button to start data transfer.
5. The program to be transferred should now be in the CNC's program memory if
data transfer was successful

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-128

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.14 Network Connection to FANUC 32i-B Control Systems

8.14.1 System requirements

The computer or laptop must feature an Ethernet card or an Ethernet connection. In
addition, the TCP/IP protocol and an FTP server software package are required for data
exchange. The following description of functions refers to use of the Personal FTP Server
freeware package (current version 5.52f) that can be found on the data backup CD of the
machine. Using other FTP server software packages should be possible analogous to this
description but is not ensured or supported by Spinner Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH
Service.

8.14.2 Configuration of the CNC control system for network operation

Setting the I/O channel:
Panel button "OFS/SET" ⇒ horizontal soft-key "SETTING" ⇒ enter 9 under "I/O
CHANNEL" for network operation.

Configuring the IP address of the control system:

Important: When assigning IP addresses, ensure that they are compatible in relation to
Subnet Mask.

Panel button "SYSTEM" ⇒ press horizontal soft-key "NEXT PAGE" several times until
soft-key "EMBED PORT" is shown. Assign the following addresses under soft-key
"COMMON":

IP ADDRESS Enter required address (e.g. 192.168.0.1)

SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-129

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

TCP Port settings:

Panel button "SYSTEM" ⇒ press horizontal soft-key "NEXT PAGE" several times until
soft-key "EMBED PORT" is shown. Assign the following addresses under soft-key
"FOCAS2":

PORT NUMBER (TCP) Enter required port number (e.g. 8193)

TIME INTERVAL 10

FTP settings:
Panel button "SYSTEM" ⇒ press horizontal soft-key "NEXT PAGE" several times until
soft-key "EMBED PORT" is shown. Make the following settings under soft-key "FTP
TRANS":

HOST NAME (IP ADDRESS) Enter address of Server (e.g. 192.168.0.2)

PORT NUMBER As required; depending on Server (Standard 0)

USER NAME User name in network (e.g. ANONYMOUS)

PASSWORD Assign if necessary

LOGIN FOLDER Share the directory on Server (e.g. I:\NETWORK)

Important: I:\ must be replaced by I:/ on CNC, see
example

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-130

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.14.3 Network settings of the Server PC

The TCP/IP protocol must be installed on the Server PC. In order to check this, please
check your PC under START ⇒ CONTROL PANEL ⇒ NETWORK CONNECTIONS ⇒
LAN CONNECTIONS ⇒ PROPERTIES (see example) to ensure that the protocol is
installed. Enter the required Server IP and Subnet Mask under "Properties" (see
example).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-131

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.14.4 Installing and configuring the FTP Server

Install the FTP Server by running file PFTP_setup.exe. You can find the file on the data
backup CD of the machine in the Network folder.
Start the Server by running file PFTP.exe (please refer to the enclosed documentation for
the Server software for operator information). Call User Management with CTRL + B and
define a user (see example). Under Path, enter a folder for data exchange. Ensure that
the folder is shared for network access (e.g. click with the right mouse button on the
corresponding folder ⇒ Sharing and Security... Enable Network Access Sharing).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-132

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.14.5 Testing the connection

Example: IP address control system 192.168.0.1
IP address server PC 192.168.0.2

Connect the Server PC and the control system with an RJ45 cross-over cable.

Server PC:
START ⇒ RUN ⇒ enter "ping 192.168.0.1" ⇒ the control system responds with
"Response from 192.168.0.1......." if the connection is correct.

CNC control system:

Panel button "SYSTEM" ⇒ press vertical soft-key "NEXT PAGE" several times until soft-
key "EMBED PORT" is shown ⇒ "NEXT PAGE" ⇒ "PING" ⇒ horizontal soft-key "PING
FTP1" ⇒ the Server PC responds with "Response from...." if the connection is correct.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-133

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.14.6 Reading in, reading out and deleting programs

Ensure that there is a connection between Server PC and control system (see 8.14.5)
and that the FTP Server is running (see 8.14.4).

Reading in a program:
• Select EDIT mode
• Select panel button "PROG"
• Press vertical soft-key "FOLDER"
• Press horizontal soft-key "DEVICE CHANGE"
• Press horizontal soft-key "EMB ETHER"
• All programs in the server path are shown
• Select the program with the cursor
• Press horizontal soft-key "+" to extend the soft-key bar
• Press horizontal soft-key "READ"
• Enter program number or press soft-key "F GET"
• Press horizontal soft-key "EXEC"
• The program is located in the CNC program memory

Reading out program:

• Select EDIT mode
• Select panel button "PROG"
• Press vertical soft-key "FOLDER"
• Press horizontal soft-key "DEVICE CHANGE"
• Press horizontal soft-key "CNC MEM"
• Select the program with the cursor
• Press horizontal soft-key "+" to extend the soft-key bar

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-134

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B
• Press horizontal soft-key "PUNCH"
• Enter program number or press soft-key "P GET"
• Press horizontal soft-key "EXEC"
• The program is located in the server path

Deleting a program:
• Select EDIT mode
• Select panel button "PROG"
• Press vertical soft-key "FOLDER"
• Press horizontal soft-key "CHANGE DEVICE"
• Press horizontal soft-key "EMB ETHER"
• Select the program with the cursor
• Press horizontal soft-key "DELETE"
• Press horizontal soft-key "EXEC"
• The program has been deleted on the server

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-135

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.15 Changing the direction of rotation of the live tool

8.15.1 General
According to the turret it is necessary to use an angular tool holder for facing or surface
operations. Possibly, these tool holders can - depending on the design - change the
rotation direction of the clamped tool. Therefor there is a new screen integrated into the
control system to correct this fact. There, one can enter weather a tool has got this
character or not. This information always is interpreted when a move command (for
example. M3 P2) is given - a corresponding change of direction is done.

In addition to that, this function enables also to drill a left-handed thread with the Fanuc
tap cycles which can normally only be used for right-handed threads. The cycle is
programmed for a left-handed thread as usual. The tool holder with the left-handed tap is
determined as holder which changes the rotation direction.

8.15.2 Operation
One access the message screen by pressing the key „CUSTOM“. Than press the key
„Tool holder“ (WZ Halter)(see figure below)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-136

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

The following screen opens (see figure below)

The corresponding tool holder can be selected by means of the arrow keys. The selected
tool holder is always displayed in red. You can change between „No“ and Yes“ by
pressing 0 and 1.

The entry is confirmed by means of the „INPUT“ key.

The number of the tool holders depends on the number of stations of the turret.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-137

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16 Tool monitoring by current consumption (Option)

8.16.1 Introduction
Tool monitoring on lathes represents a form of monitoring of perfect tool operation during
workpiece machining. Basically, a distinction is made between external or hardware tool
monitoring and software tool monitoring. The basic mode of operation of both versions is
based on monitoring the power consumption of servo-motors and spindle motors involved
in the machining process. With external tool monitoring, an additional monitoring system
is generally used, e.g. sound receiver, in order to allow more sensitive and more precise
monitoring. This means that the systems are also fairly expensive. Tool monitoring
implemented by software is a lower-cost variant. Admittedly, such systems are not able to
replace external systems but they do allow practical monitoring of workpiece machining
and thus prevent machine damage if certain restrictions and limits are allowed for.

8.16.2 Background
The available software monitoring system for lathes of the TC Series uses a function,
made available by the Fanuc control, allowing detection of the current, standardised
consumption of the servo-motors and spindle motors, thus also allowing them to be
monitored. The acceleration and braking torques, the static friction occurring and the
influence of overhead axes on the power consumption are suppressed or standardised by
machine and motor-specific parameter tuning. This makes it possible to detect possibly
unexpected parasitic torques or consumption caused by tool fracture or tool wear.

8.16.3 Mode of operation

Tool monitoring is basically used as follows: cuts to be monitored are defined in an
existing workpiece program. The power consumption occurring during the machining
process is determined for the axes and spindles active or selected within the cut in what is
called a teach-in cut, and this value is then saved. This relates to a maximum value and a
minimum value for each servo-motor and each spindle. Alarm and signal limits and the
related machine response by the operator are then defined on the basis of these taught
values. When Monitoring mode is activated, the monitoring system then automatically
monitors for a limit transgression of the current consumption values during workpiece
production. If a limit violation is detected, the machine responds as defined and an alarm
or a message is displayed on the screen. This allows damage to the machine, e.g. as the
result of a fractured tool, to be prevented.

8.16.4 Possible applications

Basically, tool monitoring is intended for use in series production in the absence of an
operator. However, this prerequires a practical configuration of the monitoring limits,
which can be achieved only with the experience of an operator or the willingness of an
operator to conduct tests. This applies, above all, to the case of wear detection. Only
fracture monitoring is practical in the case of small-scale series production since practical
definition of the wear limits is generally not possible.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-138

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Figure 8-8: Tool monitoring

Tool fracture monitoring can be used for the following monitoring areas:

• Tool fracture detection

• Restricted wear detection of an indexable insert or drill bit
• Monitoring for undershoot of a defined lower limit

8.16.5 Important terms

Cut:
Within a program, a cut represents a monitoring area limited by the M-functions M63 and
M64. Cut configuration allows axes and spindles involved in the machining process to be
activated or deactivated for monitoring.

Teach-in:
This is activated with the Teach-In button on the machine control panel. In
Teach-In mode, a maximum value and a minimum value are determined
and saved for all activated axes and spindles of a cut. The operator can
then define monitoring limits on the basis of these taught values.

Monitoring:
This is activated with the Monitoring button on the machine control panel.
In Monitoring mode, all activated axes and spindles of this cut are
monitored for the defined limits. The current values are compared with the
taught values for this purpose. If a limit transgression is detected, a defined
response of the machine occurs and an alarm or message is displayed on
the monitor.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-139

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16.6 Restrictions
The following restrictions and limits must be noted when using tool monitoring:

• Maximum 32 cuts may be defined and monitored.

• Only one spindle (main spindle, live tooling or sub-spindle) may be monitored in
a cut.
• It is advisable to assign only one tool to each cut.
• Monitoring in the upper and lower borderline area, i.e. in the case of very high or
very low cutting forces, is not possible or is possible only to a restricted extent
since it is then no longer possible to define practical monitoring limits.
• Correct definition of the wear limits is associated with a high degree of
experience or willingness to test since criteria to be allowed for include individual
wear criteria of the cutting material.
• In principle, it is possible to monitor complex machining cycles (e.g. in Manual
Guide), but it is not practical in certain cases.
• In the case of Teach-In, the machine should have been operated to allow it to
reach operating temperature, i.e. two or three workpieces should have been
produced on the machine before Teach-In.

8.16.7 M-functions
The following M-functions are used when using tool monitoring:

M63 Q1 (Q1...Q32 is optional)

Defines the start of a cut in the program if Teach-In or Monitoring mode is active. M63
must be programmed with fixed cut assignment Q. With the cut assignment M63
Q1...Q32 (corresponds to Cut 1...Cut 32), it is possible to enter at any point in a program
and monitor simultaneously. M63 Q… should, wherever possible, always be programmed
directly before a cutting movement to be monitored.

M64
Defines the end of a cut in the program with Teach-In or Monitoring mode active. M64
must always follow a programmed M63 since, otherwise, the cut assignment does not
function correctly and no cut mean values are calculated.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-140

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Simple example program with two monitored cuts. M63 is used with fixed cut assignment
Q1...Q32:

%
O0101
M3P1S1000
G98
T100
M63 Q1 /* Start of 1st cut → Teach-In or Monitor
G1Z20X80F2000
M64 /* End of 1st cut
T1200
M63 Q2 /* Start of 2nd cut → Teach-In or Monitor
G1Z110X160F2000
M64 /* End of 2nd cut
M5P1
M30 /* End of program; M30 is for cut management
% /* No longer required since this is done via Q

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-141

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16.8 Panel buttons

Teach-In panel button

This button is used to activate Teach-In mode.

Monitoring panel button

This button is used to activate Monitoring mode.

The LEDs in the buttons provide information on the status of the program in the relevant
mode:

Status Description
LED blinks slowly Teach-In or Monitoring mode has been activated by
pressing the button and M63 is not active.
LED lights steadily M63 is active and the program is learning or monitoring a
cutting movement.
LED blinks fast M63 is active but no cutting movement is occurring and no
learn function or monitoring is active, e.g. G0
Retract movement in a cycle

IF TEACH-IN OR MONITORING MODE HAS BEEN ACTIVATED

BY PRESSING THE PANEL BUTTONS, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO
MAKE CHANGES TO THE CUT CONFIGURATION OR THE
LIMITS. THE PROGRAM IS AUTO MODE AND DISPLAYS THE
CURRENTLY ACTIVE CUT IN THE RUNNING NC PROGRAM.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-142

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16.9 Function of the softkeys

The softkeys (8-8) for tool monitoring have the following function:

Softkey Function
UP Cuts run through in ascending sequence
DOWN Cuts run through in descending sequence
CONFIG Allows navigation of the cursor in the "Values and Limits" and
"Response" window
Allows configuration of the limits and responses
CUT+ Create or add cut
CUT- Delete existing cut (last cut is deleted)
LOAD Allows an existing, created cut configuration to be loaded with the
related taught values
SAVE Allows a created cut configuration to be saved, including the taught
values and limits
EXIT Quits tool monitoring and returns to the "Messages Alarms" screen

8.16.10 Taught values

After Teach-In, a determined maximum value and mean value are available for each cut
and for each active axis or spindle.

8.16.10.1 Maximum value

The maximum value identifies the maximum power consumption of a servo-motor or a
spindle within a cut. It is determined over the entire course of a cut. The maximum value
is displayed under "Taught Values", referred to the maximum permitted value, in percent,
and allows fracture detection.

8.16.10.2 Mean value

The mean value identifies the average power consumption of a servo-motor or a spindle
during a cut. It is generated at the end of a cut with M64. The mean value is displayed
under "Taught Values", referred to the maximum permitted value, in percent and allows
wear detection.

8.16.11 Monitoring limits

The following monitoring limits may be defined:

Figure 8-9: Monitoring limits

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-143

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16.11.1 Fracture alarm limit

The fracture alarm limit refers to the taught maximum value. The operator can define a
limit in percent which, when reached, triggers an alarm and causes the machine to
perform a defined response. When defining the limit, note that the taught maximum value
is considered as 100 %.
Example: the monitoring limit is 80 % with a taught maximum value of 40 % and a defined
limit of 100 %.
The fracture alarm limit is monitored constantly during a cut and thus allows tool fracture
detection identified by a significant rise in power consumption.

8.16.11.2 Lower alarm limit

This limit refers to the taught mean value. Note the conditions specified in 8.16.14.5 when
defining the limit. The lower limit is checked at the end of a cut in the case of M64 and
serves to detect an undershoot of the taught mean power consumption.

8.16.11.3 Wear alarm limit

The wear alarm limit refers to the taught mean value. Note the conditions specified in
8.16.14.5 when defining the limit. The limit is checked at the end of a cut in the case of
M64 and allows restricted wear detection. Note that the wear alarm limit may never be
lower than the wear message limit (checked by the input logic).

8.16.11.4 Wear message limit

The same conditions as for the wear alarm limit apply to this limit. It should be used as an
"early-warning stage" for wear detection. Note that the wear message limit must always
be lower than the wear alarm limit (checked by the input logic).

8.16.12 Alarm and message responses

The following responses can be defined dependent on the relevant alarm and message
limit:

THE SELECTED ALARM AND MESSAGE RESPONSES APPLY

TO ALL CUTS AND ARE NOT SAVED WHEN SAVING TO
MEMORY CARD.
IF THE RESPONSE OF ONE OF THE THREE ALARM LIMITS IS
DEACTIVATED AND MONITORING MODE IS SELECTED,
MESSAGE "ALARM RESPONSE DEACTIVATED" IS DISPLAYED
ON THE ALARM AND MESSAGE SCREEN. THIS MESSAGE IS
INTENDED TO REMIND THE OPERATOR THAT NO MACHINE
RESPONSE OCCURS IN THE CASE OF A LIMIT
TRANSGRESSION.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-144

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

Deactivated
The machine does not respond in the case of a limit transgression. Only an alarm or a
message is output on the screen. This response setting is primarily suitable for test
purposes.

Feed stop
Feed is stopped immediately in the case of a limit transgression. All spindles continue to
turn and an alarm or message is displayed on the screen.

Single block
The machine stops at the end of the cut after M64 in the case of a limit transgression, and
an alarm or message is displayed on the screen.

NC start interlock
The machine stops at the end of the program in the case of a limit transgression, and an
alarm or message is displayed on the screen.

Emergency-Off
The machine stops immediately if an alarm limit is violated. Emergency-Off is active, all
drives are switched off and an alarm is displayed on the screen.

THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL ASPECT APPLIES TO RESPONSES

FEED STOP, SINGLE BLOCK AND NC START INTERLOCK IF
MONITORING MODE IS ACTIVE AND A LIMIT VIOLATION IS
DETECTED: IF THE ALARM IS A FALSE ALARM, MACHINING
CAN BE CONTINUED WITH NC START. MONITORING MODE IS,
HOWEVER, NO LONGER ACTIVE SINCE A LIMIT ADAPTATION
MUST BE PERFORMED IN ORDER TO AVOID THE FALSE
ALARM RECURRING. HOWEVER, THIS ALLOWS MACHINING
OF A WORKPIECE TO BE COMPLETED.

8.16.13 Axis and Spindle Status window

The colour of an Axis or Spindle Status window visualises the status of the relevant axis
or spindle:

Colour Status
White No taught values available for active axis /
spindle.
Green Taught values available for active
axis / spindle
Monitoring mode: active axis / spindle has not
triggered an alarm or message.
Amber Active axis / spindle has triggered a message.
Red Active axis / spindle has triggered an alarm.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-145

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

IF AN ALARM OR MESSAGE HAS BEEN CAUSED BY AN ACTIVE

AXIS OR SPINDLE, THE CURRENT STATUS (ALARM OR
MESSAGE), SYMBOLISED BY THE RELEVANT COLOUR, IS
MAINTAINED UNTIL THE PROGRAM HAS BEEN RUN THROUGH
IN MONITORING MODE WITHOUT A FURTHER ALARM OR
MESSAGE BEING TRIGGERED OR WITHOUT RUNNING TEACH-
IN AGAIN.

8.16.14 Operation

8.16.14.1 Overview
The illustration below is intended to explain the abbreviations used by tool monitoring.

Current cut

DT = current parasitic torque in % Toolholder used in cut (is Current cut / number
MDT = max. parasitic torque in % saved during Teach-In) of existing cuts

Figure 8-10: Abbreviations

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-146

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16.14.2 Access to the monitoring screen

Pressing the < CUSTOM > panel button allows you to access the "Messages Alarms"
screen. Softkey < Tool Mon > opens the Monitoring and Configuration screen of tool
monitoring.

8.16.14.3 Creating and deleting cuts

A new cut can be created with softkey < CUT+ >. You will see prompt < INPUT = OK /
RESET = Cancel > in the status bar of tool monitoring. When panel button < INPUT > is
pressed, a new cut is created. An existing cut can be deleted with softkey < CUT- > and
pressing the < INPUT > key. Note that the last cut, together with all related data, is
deleted in each case.

8.16.14.4 Axis and spindle selection

The current cursor position is highlighted in amber. Keys < ⇐ > and < ⇒ > allow you to
position the cursor on the Axis and Spindle Status windows. Using the < ALTER > panel
button, you can select and activate the relevant axis or spindle. The current selection is
displayed in the status bar. Pressing the < INPUT > button activates the selection and
displays it in the status window.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-147

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16.14.5 Limit definition

Softkey < CONFIG > allows you to define the limits of the currently selected axis or
spindle. The amber cursor identifies the selected input window. The cursor can be
positioned with buttons < ⇑ > and < ⇓ >. Using panel buttons < 0 > to < 9 >, you can enter
the required limit in percent and then set it with < INPUT >. Button < CAN > allows you to
delete an incorrect numerical entry. Press < CONFIG > again to quit limit definition.

8.16.14.6 Response definition

Softkey < CONFIG > allows you to define the alarm and message responses. Note that
the selected alarm and message responses apply to all cuts. You can position the cursor
with the panel buttons < ⇑ >, < ⇓ >, < ⇐ > and < ⇒ >. The response can be selected with
< ALTER > and displayed in the status bar. You can set the response with < INPUT >.
Press < CONFIG > again to quit response definition.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-148

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16.14.7 Cut selection

Softkeys < UP > and < DOWN > allow you to select the configured cuts. This is possible
only if Teach-In or Monitoring mode is not active. If a mode is active, the Monitoring
window of the currently active cut is displayed.

8.16.14.8 Saving to memory card

Softkey < SAVE > allows you to save a created cut configuration, the taught values and
the monitoring limits to a memory card. The data is saved in a DAT file. The name of the
file (max. 8 characters, e.g. TOOLMONI.DAT) must be assigned by the operator. The file
extension .DAT is added automatically when saving. Clicking on < INPUT > performs the
save operation. The related NC program must be saved separately.

8.16.15 Loading from memory card

Softkey < LOAD > allows you to load an already saved cut configuration, the taught
values and the monitoring limits from a memory card. You can load all data by entering
the corresponding file name (without .DAT) and then confirming with < INPUT >. The
monitoring screen is updated automatically. The related NC program must be loaded
separately

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-149

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.16.16 Alarms and messages

No. Alarm / message text Description / remarks
Alarms
1025 Tool fracture detected Failure alarm limit exceeded.
1062 Lower alarm limit reach -
1063 Wear alarm limit exceeded -
Messages
2217 M63 Tool-monitor - M63 programmed You didn´t program the cut-number Q
without cut-number Q after M63.
2220 Not enough cuts defined or M30 missing The number of M63s used does not
correspond to the number of cuts
configured.
M30 has not been programmed.
Consequently, an error has occurred in
cut assignment if M63 is used without
Q1...Q32.
2221 No cuts defined Teach-In or Monitoring mode can be
activated only if at least one cut has
been configured.
2222 M63 programmed without M64 You have forgotten to program M64 for
a cut.
2223 M64 programmed without M63 You have forgotten to program M63 for
a cut.
2224 Wear message limit exceeded -
2225 Maximum number of cuts exceeded More than the maximum 32 allowable
cuts have been used in the program.
2226 Alarm response deactivated At least one alarm response has been
deactivated (this serves to remind the
operator).
2227 Continue machining with NC Start Continue NC program after a false
alarm in Monitoring mode (dependent
on selected alarm and message
response).

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-150

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.17 UNIROB Interface Description

8.17.1 General description

The Spinner UNIROB interface is an UNIversal ROBot interface for connecting robots or
loading gantries from external manufacturers to Spinner turning or milling machines.
Based on clearly established pin assignment for the individual function signals, the
interface creates a standard which particularly also allows robot and loading system
manufacturers, with very little effort, to create repeat installations of their systems on
SPINNER machines.
This interface description contains all information required by robot / loading system
manufacturers, both on the hardware and the software side.

IF REQUIRED SPINNER CAN PROVIDE YOU WITH A

DESCRIPTION THAT CORRESPONDS TO THE SOFTWARE
VERSION OF THE MACHINE.

8.17.1.1 Important note concerning the CE conformity prohibition declaration

SPINNER turning machines and machining centres are delivered ex Works with an EC
manufacturer declaration. When attaching a robot or loading system this declaration
loses its validity since a whole new TOTAL PLANT is created by adding the
systems. A new risk analysis has to be performed for the overall plant including any
required barriers and a new manufacturer declaration must be created. The risk analysis
and certification of the overall plant according to machine guidelines 98/37/EG must be
undertaken either by the suppliers of the robot / loading systems or the owner/operator.

IT IS FORBIDDEN TO COMMISSION THE NEWLY CREATED

TOTAL PLANT BEFORE CONFORMITY WITH MACHINE
GUIDELINES 2006/42/EG HAS BEEN ESTABLISHED!

8.18 Automatic door

The door can be moved by hand when the key operated switch is turned to the set-up
position.
When the key operated switch is turned to the production mode the door is shut by
pressing the key CYCLE START. It opens automatically after finishing the program using
M30.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-151

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

8.19 Data transmission

Parts programs can be stored from an USB stick or on an USB stick (see USB interface)
in the program manager.

USB FLASH DRIVES FROM OTHER COMPANIES CAN CAUSE

PROBLEMS DURING THEIR USE. THEREFORE WE RECOMMEND
TO USE ONLY USB FLASH DRIVES CHECKED AND SOLD BY
SPINNER!

Parts programs can be stored from a CF-Card or on a CF-Card in the program manager
when the card is connected to the PCMCIA interface.

USE MEMORY CARDS THAT ARE RECOMMENDED BY OR

PURCHASED FROM FANUC!

When a compact flash card is inserted into a compact flash card adapter (A02B-0303-
K150) (referred to below as the CF adapter) purchased from FANUC, and then the CF
adapter is inserted into the card slot on the display unit side, the compact flash card lock
function is available, the memory card interface cover can be closed with the CF adapter
inserted.

Insertion
• Set a compact flash card in the CF adapter (A02B-0303-K150).
• Check that lock lever A is lifted, then insert the CF adapter into the memory card
interface.
• Lower lock lever A.
• Close the memory card interface cover.

FOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH A CF ADAPTER INSERTED,

BE SURE TO LOWER LOCK LEVER A AND CLOSE THE MEMORY
CARD INTERFACE COVER. THE LOCK FUNCTION IS ENABLED
ONLY WHEN A CF ADAPTER (A02B-0303-K150) IS USED. INSERT A
CF ADAPTER SO THAT THE PLANE BEARING THE LABEL FACES
THE SCREEN.

Extraction
• Open the cover of the memory card interface.
• Push up lock lever A.
• Push eject button B once. The button protrudes.
• Push eject button B again. The CF adapter is ejected.
• Hold the CF adapter with fingers and pull it out.
• Close the memory card interface cover.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-152

C Operation/Maintenance Machine specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B

WHEN THE LOCK LEVER IS LOWERED (LOCKED), THE EJECT

BUTTON CANNOT BE PUSHED.

Lock lever A
Compact-Flashcard

Ejekt button B

Compact-Flashcard-Adapter

Data medium Maximum memory Format

space
CF-Card 4 GB FAT32
(Kompact-Flashcard)
USB 8 GB FAT32

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 8-153

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

Technical Product Documentation

9 Error Diagnosis

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-154

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

9.1 Procedure for releasing the Z axis after collision with the
hardware limit switch of the E axis or the tailstock

1. Set the feed Override to 5%.

2. Close and lock the safety door.
3. Press the green Start Cycle - NC-Start button and hold it down during the entire
procedure.
4. Press the button Drives ON.
5. Press the RESET button.
6. Press the JOG button and select the Z axis.
7. Release the Z axis using the “-” button.
8. Release the green Start Cycle button.
9. Press the RESET button. The alarm messages are deleted.

9.2 Manual locking of the turret (only with machines with turret)
When an emergency stop is triggered during the rotation of the turret, the turret will
remain in an unlocked position so that the turret disc can be turned e. g. by hand. In this
situation the turret can no longer be set to its basic position by means of the normal
switch on routine of the CNC. It must be set again. Proceed as follows:

1. Press the RESET (12) to delete all alarm messages.

2. Select the operating mode JOG (3).
3. Set the feed override (10) to 0%.
4. Index the turret again with the keys +T or -T.
5. All messages concerning the turret should disappear. If not switch off and on the
machine.

IF NECESSARY REPEAT THE STEPS. IN CASE OF ERRORS

CAUSED BY CRASH, THE TURRET MUST BE CHECKED BY A
SERVICE ENGENEER.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-155

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

9.3 Troubleshooting
When a failure arises first of all it is important to find out the reason of this failure.
Proceed as follows:

When? While which operation? Which failure?

Defining the failure

Remedy

Finding and getting rid

of the failure

1) When and how often? (frequency of failure)

2) While which operation?
3) Which failure arose?

1) When did the failure arise?

• Date and time?
• While running/while an operation? (How long did the running/operation last?)
• Did the failure arise while switching on the machine?
• Where there peaks in voltage, power failure or other failures in the power supply
main?
• How often did the failure arise:
– Once?
– Several times? (How often per hour/ per day / per month?)

2) While which operation did the failure arise?

• In which mode was the NC running when the failure arose?
Typing-mode / manual mode / automatic mode / referencing mode
• When in program running:
Where in the program?
Which number of program and line?
Which program?
While moving the axes?
While executing a M/S/T-code?
Failure specific to the program? Does a certain operation always trigger
the same failure? (Check if the failure happens again)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-156

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

3) Which failure arose?

• Which alarm message has been displayed? (diagnosis screen)
– Number of alarm
– Text of alarm
• Which operation messages have been displayed? (diagnosis screen)

4) Other points to check

• Are there other sources of trouble near to the machine?
• Check mains voltage
• Are there damaged mechanical parts?

When you contact our after-sales service, please give us the following information:

Machine type .......................................................................

Machine number .......................................................................
Control type .......................................................................
Description of failure as precise as possible (see above):

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

9.4 Alarms and messages

The alarm and message screen appears by pressing the key “?MC“. When the LED of
this key flushes there is a failure message. When this LED lights up consistently there is
an operating message.

The error messages are numbered from 1000 up to 1067. They are in red characters.
They must be confirmed with RESET after redressing them. The messages from 2070 on
are in black characters. They disappear automatically after redressing the cause of the
error.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-157

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

9.4.1 Alarm messages

Used abbreviations:
• HSP = Main-spindle
• GSP = Sub-spindle
• AGWZ = Live tool

1000 Emergency stop pressed

Process: At least one of the Emergency stop buttons at the machine has been
pressed.
Solution: Unlock all Emergency stop buttons by rotating and pulling them. Then
switch on drives.

1001 Compressed air is missing

Process: The pneumatic pressure on the compressed air connection has fallen
below 3 bar.
Solution: Open main valve of the pneumatic supply and check system pressure.

1002 Circuit breaker triggered

Process: A circuit breaker or a motor protection breaker has been triggered in
the electric cabinet.
Solution: Open the electric cabinet and reset the corresponding components
back to 1. If a circuit breaker or a motor protection breaker triggers
again, then consult an electrician.

1003 Bar feeder emergency STOP

Process: The bar feeder is in the emergency STOP state and has stopped the
machine.
Solution: See the Operating Manual of the bar feeder manufacturer..

1004 Tailstock emergency limit switch

Process: The Z axis has hit the hardware limit switch of the tailstock.
Solution: Release the Z-axis. See corresponding chapter.

1005 Collision Z axis- E axis! Release !

Process: The Z axis and the E axis have collided respectively the Z axis has hit
the hardware limit switch of the E axis.
Solution: Release Z axis. See corresponding chapter.

1006 Emergency stop by the permission button

Process: The permission button has triggered an Emergency stop.
Solution: Confirm the Emergency stop, check if the permission button is
connected.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-158

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

1007 Switch on the drives

Process: The feed drives are not yet in the control circuit and the pneumatic unit
is not under pressure.
Solution: Confirm all errors. Press the key with the motor symbol. The lamp
must light on consistently.

1010 Bad clamping of tailstock

Process: The feedbacks for the clamping of the tailstock are not correct.
Solution: Check the feedbacks for the clamping of the tailstock (sensors,
pressure switch).

1011 Over temperature turret

Process: The monitoring of the over temperature has been triggered off.
Solution: Check the temperature of the turret. If necessary prolong the switching
time.

1012 Emergency Stop from foot-switch

Occurrence: An Emergency Stop was triggered by the quill foot switch being
pressed all the way down.
Solution: Remove foot from switch and press button to switch drive back on.

1013 Not all helpdrives contactors are shut off

Process: There are still some contactors of the auxiliary drives which are live.
Solution: Check weather the contacts of the contactors are covered. Replace
them if necessary.

1014 Bar feeder malfunction

Process: The feeding has got a failure.
Solution: See the Operating Manual of the bar feeder manufacturer.

1015 Position of clamping-unit mainspindle is incorrect

Process: During the machining the clamping cylinder has left its position.
Solution: Adapt the clamping pressure. Adjust the position switch again.

1016 Pressure of mainspindle is incorrect

Process: The actual pressure in the clamping cylinder of the HSP left the
permitted tolerance range while the spindle was running. The spindle
was stopped with the Emergency stop.
Solution: Increase the value of the tolerance parameter. Have the pneumatic
clamping system checked.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-159

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

1017 Position of clamping-unit subspindle is incorrect

Process: During the machining the clamping cylinder has left its position.
Solution: Adapt the clamping pressure. Adjust the position switch again.

1020 Pressure of subspindle is incorrect

Process: The actual pressure in the clamping cylinder of the GSP left the
permitted tolerance range while the spindle was running. The spindle
was stopped with the Emergency stop.
Solution: Increase the value of the tolerance parameter. Have the pneumatic
clamping system checked.

1021 Pressure of tailstock is incorrect

Process: See alarm 1016
Solution: See alarm 1016

1022 Piece in main spindle not securely clamped

Process: Only in Option Empty monitoring: The program cannot be started
because the sensor Chuck empty has triggered off.
Solution: Check whether the piece is correctly clamped. The sensor may need to
be adjusted again. To start the program without a piece, turn the key-
operated switch.

1023 Piece in sub spindle not securely clamped

Process: Only in Option Empty monitoring: The program cannot be started
because the sensor Chuck empty has triggered off.
Solution: Check whether the piece is correctly clamped. The sensor may need to
be adjusted again. To start the program without a piece, turn the key-
operated switch.

1025 Tool-Monitor - tool crash detect

Process: The actual tool break monitoring has detected a broken tool.
Solution: Stop the machining or when the alarm is wrong delete the error at the
tool break monitoring.

1026 Hydraulics - oillevel low

Process: The oil level in the hydraulic tank is less than minimum.
Solution: Refill hydraulic oil. Check weather there are leaks.

1030 Peripheral circuit breaker triggered

Process: A motor protection of one of the peripheral drives or an overload
protection has triggered. NC start block is set. So a restart of a
program is not possible as long as the alarm is activ.
Solution: Check fuses of the machine and get rid of the cause which triggered
the fuse.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-160

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

1031 Error from measurement unit

Process: There was an error during the measurement of the tool.
Solution: Repeat the measurement. Check the measurement device.

1032 Emergency stop is active

Process: The lathe is in the emergency stop state.
Solution: See further messages, redress the cause, confirm with RESET and
switch on the machine by pressing the key “Drives on“.

1033 Battery alarm

Process: The battery voltage of the control is too low.
Solution: Change the battery. See Fanuc instructions.

1034 Pinole limit-switch reached

Process: The tailstock sleeve has been moved out and has reached the switch
for the end position.
Solution: Move in the pinole. Check the adjustment of the tailstock and the
tailstock sleeve.

1035 Feedback M15 missing

Process: Tzhe external RPM-monitoring has been triggered off.
Solution: Stop the movement which causes the error. Then confirm the
emergency-off.

1036 Loader in collision area

Process: An NC Start signal was received, although the loader/robot is still in the
working area.
Solution: Move the loader out of the machine’s working area. Check the
interface cable connection (Input X15.3). Check that the parameter
values for the loader/robot are correctly set.

1037 Loader not ready

Process: In the “Series Part” operating mode, the loader is not transmitting the
“Ready” signal.
Solution: Check the interface cable connection (Input X15.5). Check that the
parameter values for the loader/robot are correctly set.

1040 Machine axes in collision area for loader

Process: A loading process was about to be started, although the machine axes
are not outside of the collision area.
Solution: Check NC program. Check that the parameter values for the lathe are
correctly set (see chapter “Control”)

1041 Timeout - waiting for FB is crossed

Process: An auxiliary function has been programmed (T, M, S-order), which has
not been confirmed during the period entered in the PMC parameter.
Solution: Before pressing „RESET“ check all alarm and message screens (CNC
and PMC) to limit the possible causes to a minimum. Check the

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-161

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis
feedback signals in case of M orders. In case of S orders check the
program and the spindle function. In case of T orders check the correct
function of the turret.

1042 Pressure of steady rest is incorrect

Process: The pressure monitor for the steady-rest reacted while the machine
was running.
Solution: Increase hydraulic pressure for steady-rest if it is near its lower limit.
Replace the pressure monitor if it is defective. Pressure monitor may
be incorrectly configured.

1043 Turret check pressure switch

Process: The „turret locked“ pressure monitor has reacted.
Solution: There is a fault with the turret. Replace the pressure monitor if it is
defective. Pressure monitor may be incorrectly configured.

1044 Fire alert

Process: The fire prevention system has detected a fire!
Solution: Extinguish the fire! Than reset the message input of the fire prevention
system.

1045 Fire prevention system not ready

Process: The fire prevention system is not ready.
Solution: Set the fire prevention system ready

1046 Chuck main spindle open - M-command for chuck missing

Process: The machine has been started with open chuck on the main spindle. In
this case the main spindle remains blocked until a command for the
chuck (M67, M68, M69) was programmed.
Solution: Change the program.

1047 Chuck sub spindle open - M-command for chuck missing

Process: The machine has been started with open chuck on the sub spindle. In
this case the sub spindle remains blocked until a command for the
chuck (M47, M48, M49) was programmed.
Solution: Change the program.

1056 Collision alarm tailstock – steady rest - position invalid

Process: A) The programmed tailstock position leads to a collision with the steady
rest!
B) The programmed steady rest position leads to a collision with the
tailstock!
Solution: 1. Check the NC program (programmed position for the steady rest
and/or the tailstock).
2. Check the parked position of the steady rest / tailstock or the tailstock
or steady rest via G101 correct park cycle.

1057 Automatic door - error

Process: The automatic door reports a malfunction.
Solution: Check the door mechanism. To diagnose fault, refer to manufacturer‘s

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-162

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis
manual.

1060 Subspindle cooler reports fault

Process: The spindle cooling unit reports a malfunction. A detailed error code
can be taken down from the cooling unit (seven-segment display).
Solution: To analyse the fault, refer to the cooling unit instruction manual.

1061 UNILOAD emergency STOP

Process: Emergency STOP was triggered by the loader/robot
Solution: Resolve and acknowledge emergency STOP on loader.

1062 Tool-monitor - lower alert limit reached

Process: The tool monitor detected that the lower alert limit was passed.
Solution: The alarm has been triggered. In the case of a false alarm, adjust the
alert limit.

1063 Tool-monitor - wear alert limit crossed

Process: The tool monitor detected that the alert limit for tool wear was passed.
Solution: The alarm has been triggered. In the case of a false alarm, adjust the
alert limit.

1064 Gear Switch Error

Process: An error has occurred during gear switching.
Solution: Check status messages for the different gears and check gear-
switching motor.

1065 Incorrect Y-axis position for turret

Process: The Y axis position is below zero while swinging the turret in JOG
mode.
Solution: Move the Y axis to a position above zero to assure turret can be swung
through safely.

1066 Bad clamping of automatic steady rest

Process: There is no correct feedback for the clamping of the automatic steady
rest.
Solution: Check pressure switch for correct clamping

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-163

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

9.4.2 Operation messages

For error messages regarding referencing, refer to Book C Operation/Maintenance,
Chapter 6 Switch on/off routine, where referencing is described in more detail.

2073 Close doors or press permission button

Process: The safety door is not locked. The door must be locked either by
simply closing the door when the key-operated switch is in the vertical
position or by pressing the permission button when the key-operated
switch is in the horizontal position in order to be able to work with the
machine.

2074 Automatic only allowed in SBL

Process: Automatic programs can only be processed in the single block when
the safety door is open.

2075 Door is open

Process: The safety door is open.

2076 Door 1 is open

Process: The safety door 1 is open.

2077 Door 2 is open

Process: The safety door 2 is open.

2080 Waiting for Servo-Ready-Signal

Process: The drives are live, the NC is waiting for the signal Servo-Ready.

2082 Start axis

Process: The axes have been stopped by the axes feed.

2083 Clamping position of mainspindle on frontside not reached

Process: The clamping cylinder has been moved to the front clamping position
using M68/M69 in the program but the cylinder has not reached the
corresponding position limit switch.
Solution: Check the clamping device, if necessary adjust the front sensor again.

2084 Clamping position of mainspindle on backside not reached

Process: The clamping cylinder has been moved to the clamping position at the
back using M68/M69 in the program but the cylinder has not reached
the position limit switch.
Solution: Check the clamping device, if necessary adjust the back sensor again.

2085 Collet of mainspindle is not empty

Process: A stroke of the clamping cylinder without workpiece has been
programmed with M67 to check if there is no workpiece any more in
the spindle.
Process: Remove piece out of spindle or check sensor.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-164

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2086 Incorrect clamping pressure of mainspindle on frontside

Process: The clamping cylinder can not keep the pressure tolerance range.
Solution: Check the clamping device.

2087 Incorrect clamping pressure of mainspindle on backside

Process: The clamping cylinder can not keep the pressure tolerance range.
Solution: Check the clamping device.

2090 Clamp mainspindle

Process: The main spindle is not clamped

2091 Clamping position of subspindle on frontside not reached

Process: The clamping cylinder has been moved to the front clamping position
using M48/M49 in the program but the cylinder has not reached the
corresponding position limit switch.
Solution: Check the clamping device, if necessary adjust the front sensor again.

2092 Clamping position of subspindle on backside not reached

Process: The clamping cylinder has been moved to the clamping position at the
back using M48/M49 in the program but the cylinder has not reached
the corresponding position limit switch.
Solution: Check the clamping device, if necessary adjust the front sensor again.

2093 Collet of subspindle is not empty

Process: A stroke of the clamping cylinder without workpiece has been
programmed with M47 to check if there is no workpiece any more in
the spindle.
Process: Remove piece out of spindle or check sensor.

2094 Incorrect clamping pressure of subspindle on frontside

Process: The clamping cylinder can not keep the pressure tolerance range.
Solution: Check the clamping device.

2095 Incorrect clamping pressure of subspindle on frontside

Process: The clamping cylinder can not keep the pressure tolerance range.
Solution: Check the clamping device.

2096 Clamp sub spindle

Process: The workpiece must be clamped before NC-start

2097 Check sensor-switches of mainspindle

Process: Both approximation switches for clamping at the front and at the back
have got a high signal at the same time.
Solution: Check sensors

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-165

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2100 Check sensor-switches of subspindle

Process: Both approximation switches for clamping at the front and at the back
have got a high signal at the same time.
Solution: Check sensors

2101 Redress failure and confirm with RESET.

Process: Redress the displayed failure. Then confirm with RESET.

2102 Axispositions lost - go to homeposition again

Process: The axis positions on the screen are not identical with those in the
machine (because of AXIS INHBT-Mode).

2103 Only turn turret with disengaged AGWZ

Process: The turret is turned during a AGWZ is engaged. First disengaged the
tool then turn the turret.

2104 Feedback M56 missing

Process: The feedback for the correct clamping of the tailstock is missing.
Solution: Check sensors and switch for the feedback.

2105 Feedback M57 missing

Process: The feedback for the correct coupling of the tailstock with the Z-axis is
missing.
Solution: Check sensors and switch for the feedback.

2106 Tailstock is fixed on Z-axis

Process: The tailstock is connected to the Z-axis to be moved.
Solution:

2107 Tailstock is fixed incorrect

Process: The feedback for the coupling is not clear.
Solution: Check sensors and switch for the feedback.

2110 Check sensor-switches of quillt

Process: Both sensors at the tailstock sleeve (at the front and at the back) have
got a high signal at the same time.
Solution: Check sensors.

2111 Feedback M15 missing

Process: The end position of the tailstock sleeve which has been programmed
with M15 is not reached.
Solution: Check the chokes and silencers to see if they are plugged, check the
hoses to see if they are kinked. Check sensors. If necessary adjust
them again.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-166

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2112 Feedback M16 missing

Process: See message 2111.

2113 Status message M77 is missing

Process: The end position of the move programmed with M77 has not been
reached.
Solution: Check if the pneumatic cylinder moves easily, check the chokes and
silencers to see if they are plugged, check the hoses to see if they are
kinked. Check initiators, recalibrate if necessary. To do this, press the
Emergency stop and move the cylinder to both end positions in a
depressurized state. The initiator must light up at the corresponding
end positions.

2114 Status message M87 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2115 Status message M78 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2116 Status message M88 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2117 Status message M79 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2120 Status message M89 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2121 Status message M80 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2122 Status message M90 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2123 Check air initiators 1-4

Process: Both initiators that are assigned to an air connection have sent a high
signal to the control system at the same time.
Solution: Check initiators, clean or replace if necessary.

2124 Status message M81 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2125 Status message M91 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2126 Status message M82 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-167

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2127 Status message M92 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2130 Status message M83 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2131 Status message M93 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2132 Status message M84 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2133 Status message M94 is missing

Process: See message 2113.

2134 Check air initiators 5-8

Process: Both initiators that are assigned to an air connection have sent a high
signal to the control system at the same time.
Solution: Check initiators, clean or replace if necessary.

2135 Clutch of life-tool not in correct position

Process: When engaging respectively disengaging, the corresponding position
is not reached.
Solution: Check sensor, clean or replace, if necessary. Check gear wheel of the
AGWZ.

2136 Feedback M20 missing

Process: The indexing lever of the HSP is not engaged.
Solution Remove cover above the spindle and check if the indexing lever
moves easily respectively if the lever is on the point of a tooth of the
index plate. Adjust the sensor again.

2137 Feedback M21 missing

Process: Indexing lever did not turn back.
Solution: Remove cover above the spindle and check if the indexing lever
moves easily.

2140 Refill guideway oil

Process: The oil level in the guideway oil reservoir is at a minimum

2141 The guideway lubricant pressure is not dropping

Process: The oil in the lubricant pump is still under pressure after the end of the
pumping process.
Solution: Check the oil lines of the central lubrication system to see if they are
dirty

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-168

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2142 Oil-pressure slides too low

Process: The required oil pressure was not reached in the lubrication system
while lubricating.
Solution: Check to make sure that the oil lines do not leak. Check the pump by
manual lubrication

2143 Loader in working area

Process: The loader/robot is located in the working area
Remedy: No action necessary. This is a status message that appears during
loading and unloading (X15.3=0)

2144 UNIMAG Load cycle step 1 active

Process: The command Load cycle Start was given to the bar magazine at
program end by the lathe. The bar loader removes scrap parts and
places a new bar in the guide channel.

2145 UNIMAG Load cycle step 2 active

Process: The bar loader has placed a new bar in the guide channel. After this
process, the input Material present is set to switch the spindle into
oscillation mode and the command Move is given.

2146 UNIMAG Load cycle step 3 active

Process: The bar loader has positioned the bar in the spindle and the signal
Insert position reached is set. The machine should now start the
machining program automatically. If the start does not occur when step
3 is active, check for failures in the lathe.

2147 UNIMAG - dummy-plug is connected

Process: A dummy plug is connected to the UNIMAG interface instead of the
loader.

2150 Feed is in motion (UNIMAG)

Process: Read in lock: Feed is in motion

2151 End of bar

Process: The signal „Material present“ is low.

2152 Spindle disable from barfeeder

Process: The last bar of the magazine is currently being machined.

2153 Feedback loader flap closed missing

Process: Check the intitiator for the „loader flap closed“ status message.

2154 Insert position reached

Process: The insert position of a new bar has been reached.

2155 Partscounter has stopped machining

Process: The parts counter has reached the pre-selected number of parts.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-169

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2156 Waiting for feedback of opening automatic door

Process: The automatic door moving pneumatic cylinder has not reached the
end position or is damaged.

2157 Waiting for feedback of closing automatic door

Process: The automatic door moving pneumatic cylinder has not reached the
end position or is damaged.

2160 Toolsetter in working area

Process: The toolsetter is in the working area

2161 Turret - Indexing bolt is active

Process: The indexing bolt is active

2162 Shut door to switch the turret

Process: Switching the turret is only possible when the door is closed.

2163 Turret - waiting for Ready from turret

Process: Read in lock and feed lock, because the turret is not correctly locked.

2164 Revolver - Dummy plug is connected

Process: The turret is disconnected and the dummy plug is connected.

2165 Turret - signal Strobe is low

Process: The signal Strobe is low. The turret stands between two stations.

2166 Turret - Searching for a station

Process: The turret is searching for a programmed station

2167 Turret - Position monitoring has triggered off

Process: The programmed position does not correspond to the real position of
the turret.

2170 Tool-monitor - tool edge is down

Process: The tool monitoring device indicates tool wear

2171 Tool-monitor - M63 without M62 programed

Process: Error when activating the tool monitoring
Solution: Correct program

2173 Low battery of measurement transmitter

Process: The battery of the tool measurement sensor is low.
Solution: Replace the battery.

2174 Probe is touched

Process: The workpiece has touched the probe.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-170

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2175 Probe is ready and waiting

Process: The tool measurement sensor is ready for the measurement.

2176 Wait - initialising measurement device

Process: Initialising of the workpiece measurement is running.
Solution:

2183 Turret - Waiting for positive flank Strobe

Process: The NC is waiting for the signal strobe during the indexing.

2184 Turret - Waiting for falling flank Strobe

Process: During the indexing the control is waiting for the disappearance of the
signal Strobe.

2185 Turret - Waiting for positive flank indexing

Process: During the indexing the NC is waiting for the signal “indexed“.

2186 Turret - Waiting for negative flank indexing

Process: During the indexing the control is waiting for the disappearance of the
signal “indexed“.

2187 Turret - waiting for rising edge Strobe

Process: Waiting for raising edge Strobe during the turning of the turret.
Solution:

2190 Feedback loader flap open missing

Process: The position feedback of the loader flap is missing.
Solution: Check the sensors for the feedback.

2191 Pinole limit-switch-check - move pinole completely out

Process: After switching on the machine the end position monitoring of the
tailstock sleeve is checked.
Solution: Move tailstock sleeve completely out and in

2195 FB Steady-Rest opened missing

Process: The status message that the hydraulic steady-rest is open is missing.
Solution: Check the steady-rest initiator and pressure monitor.

2196 FB Steady-Rest closed missing

Process: The status message that the hydraulic steady-rest is closed is missing.
Solution: Check the steady-rest initiator and pressure monitor.

2197 Loader flap - check sensor-switches

Process: Both of the intiators for the loader flap are active.
Solution: Check initiators.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-171

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2201 Waiting for FB Turret locked

Process: The feedback for Turrret locked is missing.
Solution: Check system pressure, feedback sensor and locking valve.

2202 Waiting for FB Turret unlocked

Process: The feedback for Turrret unlocked is missing.
Solution: Check system pressure, feedback sensor and locking valve.

2203 Minimal quantity lubrication - minimum level reached

Process: The minimum fill-level for the lubricant container has been reached.

2204 Parts gripper in place – Z axis locked

Process: The parts gripper has been swung into place. Axial movements of the
Z axis are blocked, to avoid collision with the parts gripper.
Solution: Move to the correct Z axis position for cutting-off before swinging in the
parts gripper.

2205 Feedback M210 missing

Process: The feedback for the correct clamping of the automatic steady rest is
missing.
Solution: Check feedback switch and pressure control device

2206 Feedback M211 missing

Process: The feedback of the correct coupling between the steady rest and the
Z axis is missing.
Solution: Check feedback switch and pressure control device

2207 Toolsetter - position of Y-axis is not zero

Process: In tool measurement mode, the position of the Y axis is not zero. A
warning sound is produced.
Solution: Move Y axis to zero position.

2220 Tool-monitor - less cuts defined or M30 missing

Process: The number of M63 commands used is not equal to the number of
cuts configured. M30 was not programmed, so when the cuts were
assigned an error occurred in cases where M63 is used without
Q1…Q32.
Solution: Check program.

2221 Tool-monitor - no cuts defined

Process: Learn or monitor mode can only be activated when at least one cut has
been configured.

2222 Tool-monitor - no cuts defined

Process: Programming M64 was omitted for a cut.
Solution: Check program.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-172

C Operation/Maintenance Error Diagnosis

2223 Tool-monitor - M64 without M63 programmed

Process: Programming M63 was omitted for a cut.
Solution: Check program.

2224 Tool-monitor - wear announcement limit crossed

Process: The preset limit was reached

2225 Tool-monitor - maximum cuts crossed

Process: More than the permitted maximum of 32 cuts were used in the
program.
Solution: Change program.

2226 Tool-monitor - alert reaction deactivated

Process: At least one alert reaction is deactivated.

2227 Tool-monitor - continue working with NC-start

Process: Continue running NC program after a false alarm in monitor mode
(depends on alarm selected und reaction to message).

2230 Analog clamping system - setting error

Process: One of the settings of the linear position measuring system is logically
incorrect.
Solution: Check settings under Clamping Parameters (see manual)

2231 Automatic steady rest ready for drag

Process: The automatic steady-rest is coupled to the Z axis and can be
dragged.

2232 Steady rest use with turning spindle allowed

Process: Status message when M212 is active. It is possible to couple, to open
and to close the steady rest when the spindle is running. This function
is deactivated with M213.

2233 Automatic door - obstacle detected

Process: The automatic door has hit an obstacle while opening or closing.
Solution: Remove the obstacle and close or open the door again.

2234 Automatic door - calibration necessary

Process: The automatic door must be calibrated every time the machine is
switched on.
Solution: Calibrate the door by opening and closing it using cycle start and cycle
stop.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 9-173

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

Technical Product Documentation

10 Maintenance

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-174

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.1 Introduction
The maintenance guidelines given in this document for SPINNER machines inform you on
how to carry out the required maintenance on the machines to retain the same precision,
availability and life span.
If the maintenance guidelines are not observed or if the specified maintenance intervals
are not maintained then this may lead to malfunctions when operating the machine and to
premature wear of the machine components. The operator of the machine must follow the
maintenance guidelines in order for a warranty claim to be granted by the SPINNER
company. Machine damage that is the result of a lack of care or maintenance or that is
due to non-adherence to the maintenance intervals are not covered by the warranty. We
therefore recommend that you keep a maintenance book in which all maintenance work
conducted is entered.
Inspection intervals can change depending on the intensity of use when machining, how
dirty the machining work is, the environmental conditions, any especially difficult operating
conditions, etc., and are to be changed accordingly by the operator, if necessary.

IF THE MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES ARE NOT OBSERVED OR IF

THE SPECIFIED MAINTENANCE INTERVALS ARE NOT
MAINTAINED, THEN THIS MAY LEAD TO MALFUNCTIONS WHEN
OPERATING THE MACHINE AND TO PREMATURE WEAR OF
THE MACHINE COMPONENTS!

10.2 Warranty information

SPINNER machines are manufactured with the greatest care and precision and are
subjected to numerous tests, functional and quality control checks before they are delivered
to the final customer. The geometry values and quality specifications determined during
these tests and checks are recorded in the machine log and serve as base values and
comparative values when inspecting the machine during a service call, for example. There
is a 1 year (= 2000 hours) replacement guarantee for malfunctioning/defective machine
components, mechanical assembly components or assemblies as well as for electrical or
electronic components belonging to the CNC control system and the drive controller that
malfunction or are defective due to premature wear, poor materials or manufacturing
defects. The following are not covered by the warranty:
• Damage to the machine caused by operating errors such as machine collision or
crashes. In this case the machine tool must be completely inspected by a service
technician from the SPINNER company. In no case may the machine continue to
be operated. Additional machine components may become damaged or, when
parts relating to safety are damaged, the operating personnel may be injured.
SPINNER reserves the right to claim that damage to the machine may be the
result of a crash that occurred earlier even if the entire machine was inspected at
that time, and can reject a warranty claim for the free repair or exchange of the
assembly component.
• Damage to the machine caused by fire, the effects of water, other natural events
or natural disasters or by incorrect handling of the machine such as overloading
(e.g. belts that break due to overloading), results of impacts, crashes, gross
negligence, vandalism, etc.
• Damage to the machine caused by faulty repair work that was not done by a
SPINNER service technician or other authorized sales partners.
• The results of normal wear such as damage to the paint, scratches on the safety
glass of the safety door, wear to the wiper lips of the guideway cover, etc

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-175

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.3 General information on maintenance / care

10.3.1 Machine
You are to regularly remove chips left laying around in the working area. The cleaning
interval depends on the application and operating conditions. Never use compressed air
to do this. Instead, clean the working area using the emulsion from the cooling lubricant
system. Make sure that you do not point a concentrated stream directly at the labyrinth
packing of the spindle. This can allow water to penetrate and to cause premature wear.

Additionally, you should make sure that the machine is generally clean. It is
recommended to clean the machine regularly to prevent damage caused by too much
dirt. Also clean the machine when a technical engineer from Spinner (after-sales service)
is expected. You will help him to finish his work earlier.
ONLY CLEAN THE WORKING AREA WITH EMULSION FROM THE
COOLING LUBRICANT SYSTEM! DO NOT POINT A
CONCENTRATED STREAM DIRECTLY AT THE LABYRINTH
PACKING OF THE SPINDLE! THIS CAN ALLOW WATER TO
PENETRATE AND TO CAUSE PREMATURE WEAR!

CHECK REGULARLY ALL FANS AND VENTILATORS (E. G. OF

MOTORS, PUMPS, OF THE ELECTRIC CABINET ETC.) AND ALL
STRAINERS AND FILTERS OF MOUNTED AGGREGATES
WEATHER THEY ARE DIRTY! IF NECESSARY CLEAN THEM
IMMEDIATELY! THEY MUST NOT CLOG BY DIRT OR DUST! DIRT
AND DUST CAN HAVE A NEGATIVE EFFECT ON THEIR FUNCTION
AND DAMAGE THE CORRESPONDING AGGREGATE OR EVEN THE
MACHINE!

AT THE END OF EVERY SHIFT, WHEN POSSIBLE, PROVIDE

SUFFICIENT VENTILATION OF THE WORKING AREA BY LEAVING
THE WORKING AREA MACHINE DOORS OPEN FOR AS LONG AS
THE MACHINE IS NOT OPERATING! CONDENSED COOLING
LUBRICANT EMULSION CAN THUS ESCAPE OVER AN EXTENDED
PERIOD AND DRY THE WORKING AREA! FORMATION OF RUST
AND GERMS DUE TO A BUILD-UP OF MOISTURE IS AVOIDED!

10.3.2 Pneumatic system

Generally, you should make sure that the pneumatic system is in perfect operating
condition. Damaged hoses or couplings must be replaced immediately.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-176

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.3.3 Safety doors

The safety door is equipped with a high-impact resistant plastic screen. If a workpiece
were to become loose and fly off the chucking tool, then the safety glass will prevent the
workpiece from breaking through. However, in spite of this safety feature, the operator is
still not allowed to stand directly in the flight path of the spindle, and therefore of the
workpiece. Due to the safety glass the risk of workpieces or clamping devices to be
expelled from the working area by centrifugal force is reduced but the safety glass can
not completely avoid this risk

THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY

AFTER IT IS BROKEN OR WHEN IT IS CRACKED! IT SHOULD
ALSO BE REPLACED WHEN IT COMES INTO CONTACT WITH A
LOOSE WORKPIECE, EVEN IF NO EXTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE
SAFETY GLASS CAN BE FOUND! REPLACE THE SAFETY
GLASSES AFTER 2 YEARS AT THE LATEST FOR AGEING
REASONS!

IN ADDITION, THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE CHANGED WHEN

THERE ARE PERMANENT DEFORMATIONS AS DENTS, WHEN
THE BORDER SEALS ARE DAMAGED OR WHEN THE SAFETY
GLASS BECOMES UNCLEAR BY COOLANT THAT PENETRATES
THE SANDWICH STRUCTURE!

SAFETY GLASSES MADE OF POLYCARBONATE ARE VERY

DANGEROUS WHEN THEY BECOME MILKY! ALSO IN THIS
CASE THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE CHANGED!

ENSURE DURING THE INSTALLATION OF A NEW COMPOSITE

SCREEN THAT THE MINERAL GLASS COATING OF THE
GLASS/POLYCARBONATE SHEET IS FACING TOWARD THE
WORKING AREA! THIS COATING PROTECTS THE
POLYCARBONATE SHEET FROM DIVERSE THERMAL,
MECHANICAL AND CHEMICAL STRESSES, E.G. CAUSED BY
THE IMPACT OF HOT CHIPS AS WELL AS CONTACT WITH
COOLING LUBRICANTS, GREASE AND OIL!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-177

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.4 Table of lubricants

The lubricants recommended for SPINNER machines are listed in a table in the following.
They guarantee safe and proper operation (see table 10-1).
You can use similar, exchangeable products from all name-brand mineral oil companies.
You can check to see if you can use similar mineral oils other than those listed in the
table by consulting the technical departments of the corresponding mineral oil companies.
It should be noted that only lubricants with the same viscosity and similar base oils can be
mixed without this having a negative influence on the lubrication. Mixing differently
structured lubricants can have a negative effect on the operating temperature and
lubricating characteristics, and therefore negatively affect the lubricating performance.
Disregarding the lubricant information or using lubricants other than those recommended
in the table can lead to malfunctions when operating the machine and to premature wear
of machine components. Damage to the machine that is caused by the use of unsuitable
lubricants is not covered by the warranty.

MIXING DIFFERENTLY STRUCTURED LUBRICANTS CAN HAVE

A NEGATIVE EFFECT ON THE OPERATING TEMPERATURE,
THE LUBRICATING CHARACTERISTICS AND THEREFORE
NEGATIVELY AFFECT THE LUBRICATING PERFORMANCE!

Lubricant point Supplier/ Lubricant / Type of lubricant

manufacturer brand name
Chuck see information of manufacturer of the chuck
Central ARAL DEGANIT BW 68
lubrication SHELL TONNA S3 M68
AGIP EXIDIA HG 68 Slide way oil
AVIA Bantleon AVIA GEAR RSU 68
FINA HYDRAN G68
KLÜBER LAMORA D 68
Pneumatic FINA HYDRAN TS10
unit OPTIMOL HYDO 10 Light oil
SHELL MORLINA 10 (Hydraulic oil)
AVIA Bantleon AVIA FLUID RSL 10
AGIP ACER MV10
ARAL VITAM GF10
Cutting surface FINA VULCITE MPD 32
(cooling) AVIA Bantleon AVILUB METACON 611
AVIA Bantleon AVILUB METACON 9773 Metal cutting oil
AVIA Bantleon AVILUB METACON 9804 (General use)
AVIA Bantleon AVILUB METACON 673
ARAL SULNIT US20
ARAL SULNIT HM-9 Metal cutting oil (Aluminium)
SHELL SITALA DF400 Water soluble coolant
ACMOS ACMOSIT 64-82 Water soluble coolant
ACMOSIT 64-84
AVIA Bantleon AVILUB METACOOL BEP Emulsion (water)
(General use)
AVIA Bantleon AVILUB METACOOL RWL
AVIA Bantleon AVILUB METACOOL ABX
AGIP ASTER TA/E Metal cutting oil (Aluminium)
AGIP ASTER MP Metal cutting oil
(General use)
AGIP aquamet TOP EP Emulsion (water)
(General use; concentrate -
water mixable)
Blaser Swisslube Blasocut BC25/MD Water soluble coolant

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-178

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance
Lubricant point Supplier/ Lubricant / Type of lubricant
manufacturer brand name
Blaser Swisslube Blasomill 10/22 Metal cutting oil
(General use)
AVIA Bantleon METACON 609 Metal cutting oil (Aluminium)
BP Hysol 30 FF Emulsion
Feed ARAL ARALUB HLP 2
screws AVIA Bantleon AVIALITH 2 EP Bearing grease
KLÜBER ISOFLEX NBU 15
KLÜBER STABURAGS NBU 8EP
Bearings KLÜBER ISOFLEX NBU 15
Mainspindle ARAL ARALUB MKL2
AVIA Bantleon OKS 422
AVIA Bantleon AVIALITH 2 EP Bearing grease
AGIP LONGTIME GREASE 2
SHELL ALVANIA EP (LF)2
ARAL ARALUB HLP2
Other OPTIMOL OLIT 2EP
bearings KLÜBER CENTOPLEX 2 EP
AVIA Bantleon AVIALITH 2 EP Universal grease
AGIP GR MU EP 2
SHELL ALVANIA RL2
ARAL ARALUB HLP 2
Hydraulic unit* AGIP OSO 32
ESSO NUTO H 32 (TERESSO Hydraulic oil HLP 32
32) (according to DIN51524)
SHELL TELLUS 32 viscosity 32mm²/s at 40°C
Turret type Acid-free gear oil ISO VG 46
Sauter KLÜBER ISOFLEX NBU 15 Bearing grease
Turret type AGIP BLASIA 320 High pressure gear oil
Baruffaldi
* only present in case of hydraulic spindle unit
Table 10-1: Table of lubricants

Capacity of coolant tank: ~ 115 l

Capacity of central lubrication reservoir: ~2l
Capacity of hydraulic tank: (only in case of machines with hydraulic ~ 10 l
spindle)

FOR USUAL MACHINING OF METAL 5% OF CUTTING COOLANT

IN THE WATER CAN BE SUFFICIENT! BUT FINALY THE MIXING
RATIO DEPENDS ON THE MATERIAL TO BE MACHINED AND
THE USED CUTTING COOLANT! FOR THE APPROPRIATE
MIXING RATIO FOR YOUR MACHINING CONTACT THE
SUPPLIER OF THE USED CUTTING COOLANT!
IF TOO MUCH CUTTING COOLANT IS USED THIS RESULTS
NOT ONLY IN DAMAGES TO THE MACHINE BUT ALSO IN A
HIGHER NEGATIVE INFLUENCE ON THE HEALTH OF THE
OPERATORS!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-179

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

HYDRAULIC OIL (WHEN THERE IS A HYDRAULIC UNIT) AND

OIL FOR THE CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM ARE
CONSUMABLES. THAT MEANS THAT BOTH OIL LEVELS MUST
BE CONTROLLED REGULARLY. WHEN THE OIL LEVEL IS TOO
LOW REFILL IMMEDIATELY THE CORRESPONDING OIL.

CONFER WITH YOUR LUBRICANT SUPPLIER WHAT SORT OF

CUTTING COOLANT IS THE BEST FOR YOUR WORKING
PURPOSE.

10.4.1 Table of lubricant suppliers / manufacturers

ACMOS 28199 Bremen, Germany, Tel: +49-421-51890, Fax: +49-421-511415

ARAL 44776 Bochum, Germany, Tel: +49-234-3150, Fax: +49-234-3152679
BLASER 3415 Hasle Rüegsau, Swiss, Tel. +34 460 0101, Fax. +34 460 0100
KLÜBER 81379 München, Germany, Tel: +49-89-78760, Fax: +49-89-7876565
OPTIMOL 81671 München, Germany, Tel: +49-89-41830, Fax: +49-89-402453
SHELL 22335 Hamburg, Germany, Tel: +49-40-63240, Fax: +49-40-6321-051
AGIP/ENI 97080 Würzburg, Germany, Tel: +49-931-900980, Fax: +49-931-8442
ESSO 20355 Hamburg, Germany, Tel: +49-04-63930, Fax: +49-40-63932327
AVIA BANTLEON 89077 Ulm, Germany, Tel: +49-731-39900, Fax: +49-731-399010
FINA 60325 Frankfurt, Germany, Tel: +49-69-976940, Fax: +49-69-97694057
CASTROL 22761 Hamburg, Germany, Tel: +49-40-359401, Fax: +49-40-35945420
BP 44789 Bochum, Germany, Tel: +49-234-3150, Fax: +49-234-3152679
MOBIL OIL 0800-7522584
Table 10-2: Lubricant suppliers / manufacturers

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-180

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.5 Table with control and maintenance measures

MAINTENANCE RATES CAN BE SHORTER OR LONGER

DEPENDING ON THE OPERATION CONDITIONS. IN THIS CASE
THEY MUST BE ADAPTED! THE INDICATED MAINTENANCE
MEASURES REFER TO AN 8 HOUR-SHIFT.
Control and maintenance measures
Cycle Maintenance point Maintenance/Control measure Control period
– Duplex filter If the contamination indicator Regularly
(if available, see triggers, check and exchange the
10.17) filter element(s) if necessary
24 Chuck Greasing Regularly
24 Protective window for Never wipe the surface of the Regularly
machine tools polycarbonate pane with a dry cloth.
Use a soft cloth with water. Never
use abrasive or strongly alcaline
detergent, razor blades or other
sharp tools. To get rid of more
tenacious soiling the pane may also
be cleaned with benzole-free high-
purity benzene!
24 Hydraulic unit* Check the level of the hydraulic unit Regularly
24 Maintenance unit for Empty water separator Regularly,
the compressed air Check level of the oil reservoir minimum once a
day
40 Working area of the Remove chips; general cleaning of Regularly,
machine, Machine the machine; rust protection according to use
outside Check guide ways if they are and machining
damaged conditions
40 Safety devices Check door locking; check safety Minimum once a
glass if there are damages week
General visual check/function check
of all machine parts
40 Spindle Check function of pneumatic Irregularly,
Clamping cylinder clamping cylinder and if there are according to use
Clamping device cracks or damages and machining
Check function of stroke limitation conditions
rings and if there are cracks and
damages
Check function of chuck and
clamping collet, grease if necessary
Check the belts (wear and tension)
40 Central lubrication Check oil level Irregularly,
reservoir according to use
100 Electric cabinet Check function of the cooling system Regularly,
Check seals of the electric cabinet according to use
Clean the keyboard of the control and machining
panel conditions
100 Coolant device Clean the chip boc Irregularly,
Clean the coolant reservoir according to
Clean the sieves quantity of chips
Check level of the coolant
100 Fine filter (option) Clean / replace filter Irregularly,
Clean fine filter casing according to
Check level of the coolant contamination

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-181

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance
Control and maintenance measures
Cycle Maintenance point Maintenance/Control measure Control period
100 Part catcher (option) Clean part catcher and remove chips Irregularly,
Check function; check if the according to
pneumatic hoses are damaged contamination
200 Hydraulic unit* Check if there is leakage Regularly
Check filter
200 Maintenance unit for Clean air filter; check adjustment Regularly
the compressed air (about 10 drops/min.)
Check pressure monitor (Emergency
OFF when P ≤ 3 bar
500 Coolant device Check function of the coolant pump Irregularly,
and valves according to chip
volume
1000 Feed spindle Check reverse play Regularly
X/Z/E Grease spindles
Check tension of the belt
1000 Hydraulic unit* Drain hydraulic oil Regularly
Check the filter, change if necessary
Refill HLP hydraulic oil (see table of
lubricants)
1000 Tailstock (option) Check function electric/pneumatic Irregularly,
Check stroke of the tailstock quill according to use
Check seals and machine
conditions
1000 Turret type Check function Irregularly,
Sauter/Baruffaldi Check wear according to use
Check alignment and position and machining
related to the spindle conditions
2000 Part catcher (option) Dismantling Irregularly,
Check wear of belt according to
Grease bearings wear
2000 Working area Replace all guide way wipers Regularly
4000 Turret type Sauter Check coolant valve for wear and Regularly
(see manual of leak-tightness, change parts if
manufacturer) necessary
Check greasing state of tool drive,
add grease if necessary (only in
case of present tool drive)
Check oil level in gear box of turret,
refill if necessary
5000 Main spindle motor Check bearings Regularly
Sub spindle motor Check seals; check electrical
Feed motor connections; Check function
5000 Linear measuring Clean optic and guiding elements Irregularly,
system Check electrical connections according to use
Check functions and machining
conditions
5000 Guide ways Check play, if necessary re-adjust Irregularly
Cross slide Check wear according to use
X/Z/E Check machine geometry and machining
conditions
5000 Feed spindle Dismantling and cleaning Regularly
1)
X/Z/E Grease rolling bearings
Replace seals

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-182

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance
Control and maintenance measures
Cycle Maintenance point Maintenance/Control measure Control period
5000 Spindle Check residual unbalance Regularly
(Recommended balance quality
according to DIN ISO 1940 T1, class
G2.5)
Replace drive belt
5000 Tailstock Dismantling and cleaning Irregularly
Replace set of seals according to use
Check alignment to the spindle and machining
conditions
8000 Turret type Sauter Change oil in gear box of turret Regularly
(see manual of
manufacturer)
20000 Feed spindle Dismantling and cleaning Regularly
X/Z/E Replace bearings and spindles
Re-adjust pre-tension
Replace belt
20000 Clamping cylinder Check the permissible residual Regularly
Spindle unbalance
Tailstock
20000 Cross slide Dismantle and clean the X and Z Regularly
X/Z slide; clean the lubrication hoses
Q-slide Check the machine geometry
25000 Bearing of the spindle Check the spindle bearings, if Irregularly,
necessary grease them 2) according to use
Check the play and machining
Check concentricity of spindle nose conditions
(outer diameter and surface)
1) Klüber, ISOFLEX NBU 15
* Only present in case of hydraulic spindle unit

THE SIMPLE MAINTENANCE WORK (UP TO 2000h) DESCRIBED IN

THE TABLE ABOVE CAN BE DONE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL OF
THE OPERATOR. ALL THE EXTENSIVE MAINTENANCE WORK
(AFTER 2000h) SHOULD BE DONE BY A SERVICE ENGENEER FROM
SPINNER.

IF YOU WANT, THE SPINNER COMPANY CAN GIVE A SPECIAL

TRAINING FOR THE OPERATOR´S MAINTENANCE STAFF SO THAT
THE EXTENSIVE MAINTENANCE WORK CAN BE DONE BY THE
OPERATOR HIMSELF. TO CONTROL IF ALL MAINTENANCE WORK
HAS BEEN DONE CORRECTLY WE RECOMMEND TO KEEP A
MAINTENANCE BOOK.

SEE ALSO DOCUMENTATION OF MANUFACTURER COOLING UNIT

RITTAL IN ASSEMBLIES, CHAPTER 19 ELECTRIC CABINET.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-183

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.5.1 Täglich
• Die Not-Aus-Taster an der Maschine und den Aggregaten sind täglich auf
Beschädigung durch eine Sichtprüfung zu überprüfen.
• Not-Aus-Taster: Einmal täglich ist eine Funktions- und Wirksamkeitsprüfung
durchzuführen. Dazu werden einzeln alle Not-Aus Taster nacheinander betätigt,
um sicher zu stellen, dass die Not-Aus-Funktion gewährleistet ist.

10.5.2 Weekly
• Turret: Clean tool drive coupling and check for damages – only in case of
present tool drive (see also manual of manufacturer)
(Control period: regularly)

10.5.3 Monthly
• Turret type Baruffaldi: Check for oil level
(Control period: regularly)
• Optional automatic safety door: Check the bearing for noises to detect and
remedy damage to the bearing before it develops.
(Inspection interval: regularly)

10.5.4 Every 3 months

• Optional automatic safety door: Inspection of the function and safety device by
the operator. If faults are found, have them repaired immediately by the
manufacturer (see 10.18)
(Inspection interval: regularly)

10.5.5 Half-Yearly
• Electric cabinet: Check state of electric cabinet sealings that appear to be
damage and check components in electric cabinet if they are dirty (dust, oil film
etc.).
• Turret type Baruffaldi: Fill tool drive with oil (see also manual of manufacturer)
(Control period: regularly)

10.5.6 Yearly
• Electric cabinet: Visual check inside of electric cabinet by certified electrician +
check wires outside of machine it isolation is damaged/check state. Tighten all
screws
• Hose lines: Inspection to ensure safe operating condition
(Control period: regularly)
• Inspection of the safety valves of the cylinder
(Control period: regularly)
• Optional automatic safety door: Maintenance by knowledgeable personnel
(=specialist from the manufacturer or supplier, who because of their training or
experience has adequate knowledge in the area of power-operated doors)
(Inspection interval: regularly)
• Optional automatic safety door: Clean the housing of the door drive to ensure
optimum cooling
(Inspection interval: regularly)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-184

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance
10.5.7 2 years
• Hydraulic unit* (if present): The pressure accumulator of the hydraulic unit must
be checked by a person with expert knowledge for hydraulic systems
(safe function;-Corrosion/Leakage)
(Control period: regularly)
• Battery Change for Absolute Rotary Encoder (siehe 10.8)
• Exchange the screen of Polycarbonate due to ageing!
(Control period: regularly)

10.5.8 2 1/2 years

• Turret type Sauter: Check all electrical cables and connections for mechanical
damages as well for brittleness (see also manual of manufacturer)
(Control period: regularly)

10.5.9 3 years
• Changing the CNC back-up battery (see 10.7)
(Control period: regularly)

10.5.10 4 years
• At least all 4 years; in case of locals or in-company rules or in case of extreme
conditions even in shorter intervals: grounding contactor + high voltage test
according to EN60204.
(Control period: regularly)

10.5.11 6 years
• Hose lines: Replace
(Control period: regularly)

10.5.12 Periodically, depending on operating conditions

Check regularly if the coolant in the tank is in good condition (correct Oil / Water ratio,
and free from bacteria which are harmful to health etc.). If a coolant change is necessary,
remove chip conveyor from the machine and drain coolant completely, dispose of the old
coolant in an environmentally friendly way! Clean coolant tank completely from residual
chips and sludge accumulation. Replace chip conveyor into machine and then refill with
fresh coolant.

10.5.13 According to load cycle

• Bearing of the spindle: Replace spindle bearings, Check for play
Check for concentricity and axial run-out of spindle nose, check
machine geometry

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-185

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.6 Replacing the fine filter bag

Proceed as follows to replace the fine filter bag:
1. Switch off the machine. The coolant pump is also switched off. The machine
must be without pressure. Make sure that nobody can switch on the machine.
2. Open the fine filter tank by turning the lever to the right side (see Figure 10-1)

Lever (Must be turned

clockwise)

Figure 10-1: Open the fine filter tank

THE FINE FILTER TANK MUST ONLY BE OPENED BY HAND! DO

NOT USE ANY LENGTHENING OR HAMMER! THE HOLDERS
FOR THE LOCKING BOLT COULD BE DAMAGED!

3. Turn the locking bolt about 90° (see Figure 10-2).

Locking bolt

Figure 10-2: Fine filter - open the locking bolt

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-186

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

4. Take off the cover of the fine filter tank. The fine filter is situated underneath (see
Figure 10-3).

Figure 10-3: Fine filter bag

5. Check the fine filter bag. It must be replaced when 1 quarter of the bag is filled
with chips and dirt.
• Article-N°. Fine filter bag with fineness 250µ = 10098
• Article-N°. Fine filter bag with fineness 31µ = 10097

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-187

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.7 Replacing the CNC backup battery in case of the control Fanuc
32i-B
Offset data and system parameters are stored in SRAM memory in the control unit. The
power to the SRAM memory is backed up by a lithium battery mounted on the rear panel
of the control unit.

When the battery voltage falls the alarm message “BAT“ blinks on the LCD display When
this alarm is displayed replace the battery as soon as possible. In general the battery can
be replaced within one or two weeks after the alarm has been displayed for the first time
without loosening data. This, however, depends on the system configuration.

DO NOT WAIT UNTIL THE MESSAGE FOR BATTERY

REPLACEMENT IS DISPLAYED! CHANGE THE BATTERY
EVERY 3 YEARS, EVEN EARLIER WHEN THE MACHINE IS
OUT OF SERVICE FOR A LONGER PERIODE!

Replace the memory backup battery while the control unit is turned off.

Proceed as follows to replace the lithium battery:

1. Switch on the systems for about 30 seconds.
2. Switch off the systems.
3. Remove the old battery (of the rear of the CNC unit). Hold the latch of the battery
unit while releasing the claw from the case. Now the unit can be extracted
upward.
4. Mount the new battery unit pushing the battery unit in until the claw is latched into
the case. Ensure that the latch is engaged securely

Extract the unit while holding Push the unit in until the claw
this portion is latched into the case

Figure 10-4: Replacing the CNC backup battery in case of Fanuc 32i

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-188

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

COMPLETE STEPS 1 TO 3 WITHIN 30 MINUTES. IF THE

BATTERY IS LEFT DISCONNECTED FOR ANY LONGER THE
CONTENTS OF MEMORY WILL BE LOST! IF FOR SOME
REASON IT MAY PROVE IMPOSSIBLE TO COMPLETE THE
BATTERY REPLACEMENT WITHIN 30 MINUTES SAVE THE
ENTIRE CONTENTS OF THE SRAM MEMORY TO A MEMORY
CARD IN ADVANCE. THE DATA CAN THUS BE EASILY
RESTORED IF THE CONTENTS OF MEMORY ARE LOST!

USING ANOTHER THAN THE RECOMMENDED BATTERY MAY

RESULT IN BATTERY EXPLODING! REPLACE THE BATTERY
ONLY WITH THE SPECIFIED TYPE (ORDER NUMBER FANUC
A02B-0323-K102)!

ENSURE THAT THE USED BATTERIES ARE PROPERLY

DISPOSED OF.

10.8 Battery Change for Absolute Rotary Encoder

The batteries must be exchanged (with the machine switched on) when an APC (Absolute
Pulse Coder) alarm is triggered (APC flashes in the status bar against a purple
background), indicating low or very low battery voltage. If the batteries are empty, the
servo axes must be newly referenced after the battery change.

The (four) batteries are of the standard type LR20 1.5V (‘D’ size) and are located in a
battery chamber beneath the main power switch. High quality batteries can be expected
to last approximately 2 years. We recommend changing the batteries regularly in
accordance with their expected life span and keeping a stock of spare batteries.

DO NOT WAIT UNTIL THE MESSAGE FOR BATTERY

REPLACEMENT IS DISPLAYED! CHANGE THE BATTERY
EVERY 2 YEARS, EVEN EARLIER WHEN THE MACHINE IS
OUT OF SERVICE FOR A LONGER PERIODE!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-189

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

Changing the batteries:

1. With the machine switched on, open the battery compartment with a screwdriver.
2. Remove the batteries.
3. Replace with new batteries. Make sure the polarity is correct.
4. Screw the battery compartment shut.
5. Switch the machine off and then on again.
6. The machine may need to be newly referenced. This will be the case if the
batteries were completely empty.
7. If the battery change was successful, APC should no longer be flashing.

WHEN REPLACING BATTERIES MAKE SURE THAT THE

POLARITY IS CORRECT. BATTERIES INSERTED THE WRONG
WAY AROUND CAN OVERHEAT AND CATCH FIRE.

(See also Fanuc Maintenance Manual)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-190

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.9 Replacing hose lines

The operator must also make sure that hose lines are replaced at suitable intervals even
when no hose defects are found that would affect the safety of the machine.
The usage life of hose lines should not exceed six years, including a maximum storage
duration of 2 years. Deviations from this usage life cycle can be determined in
accordance with current test values and user experience in the individual application
areas, particularly taking the usage conditions into account. Other standard values may
be decisive for hoses and hose lines made of thermoplastics. Deviations from the above-
mentioned usage life are only to be put into practice in as far as they do not conflict with
operating instructions from the manufacturer.

10.9.1 Inspection
Before commissioning the machine for the first time, knowledgeable and trained
personnel are to inspect hose lines; subsequently they are to be inspected at least once
per year to ensure safe operating condition. If defects are detected during an inspection,
such defects must be remedied immediately or suitable measures must be taken.

10.10 Greasing the chuck

An insufficient greasing of the chuck will decrease its clamping force up to 60%. The
workpiece is not clamped safely anymore and can be thrown out of the chuck. This will
result in damaging the machine.

GREASE REGULARLY EVERY 24 HOURS THE CHUCK!

The greasing can be done with a grease gun. Press the grease into the chuck at the
lubricating nipples. Then clamp and release the chuck several times without workpiece for
better distribution of the grease. Use the grease recommended by your chuck
manufacturer. He is able to give you information about the necessary amount.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-191

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.11 Feedscrew X-axis

The feedscrew of the X-axis has a central bore and is equipped with a grease nipple (see
Figure 10-5). This grease nipple is used to force the high performance grease into the
bearing and spindle nut. Lubrication can only be implemented at a certain slide position. If
lubrication is carried out at another slide position, the grease cannot reach the necessary
areas and the process has to be repeated.

10.11.1 Lubricating the X-axis

Grease nipple

Figure 10-5: Lubricating the X-axis

Proceed as follows to lubricate the X-axis:

1. Select the JOG mode.
2. Move the X slide to the measurement A = 40 mm.
3. Press the Emergency stop button.
4. Use the grease press to force 3-5 cm³ high performance grease, as specified in
the table of lubricants, into the spindle.
5. Unlock the Emergency stop button.

Move the X slide slowly across the entire movement range.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-192

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.12 Feedscrew Z-axis

The feedscrew of the Z-axis has a central bore and is equipped with a grease nipple (see
Figure 10-6). This grease nipple is used to force the high performance grease into the
bearing and spindle nut. Lubrication can only be implemented at a certain slide position. If
lubrication is carried out at another slide position, the grease cannot reach the necessary
areas and the process has to be repeated.

10.12.1 Lubricating the Z-axis

Z slide

Grease nipple

Drive Z slide

Adjustment of
slide position

Figure 10-6: Lubricating the Z-axis

Proceed as follows to lubricate the Z-axis:

1. Select the JOG mode.

2. Move the Z slide to the measurement A = 13 mm.
3. Press the Emergency stop button.
4. Use the grease press to force 3-5 cm³ high performance grease, as specified in
the table of lubricants, into the spindle.
5. Unlock the Emergency stop button.

Move the Z slide slowly across the entire movement range.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-193

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.13 Feedscrew E-axis

The feedscrew of the E-axis has a central bore and is equipped with a grease nipple (see
Figure 10-7). This grease nipple is used to force the high performance grease into the
bearing and spindle nut. Lubrication can only be implemented at a certain slide position. If
lubrication is carried out at another slide position, the grease cannot reach the necessary
areas and the process has to be repeated.

10.13.1 Lubricating the E axis (only with sub spindle option)

Spindle

Grease nipple

E slide

Cover

Figure 10-7: Lubricating the E axis

To lubricate the E axis proceed as follows:

1. Select the REF mode.

2. Move the E slide to its reference position.
3. Select the JOG mode.
4. Move the E slide to the position E1=545 using the arrow keys (see screen).
5. Press the emergency off button. Remove the cover of the grease nipple.
6. Use the grease press to force 3-5 cm³ high performance grease, as specified in
the table of lubricants, into the spindle.
7. Unlock the Emergency off button.
8. Move the E slide slowly across the entire movement range.
Put the cover onto the nipple.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-194

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.14 Hydraulic unit

(Only present in case of machines with hydraulic spindle unit)
The hydraulic unit is attached to the right side of the machine base. It supplies the
hydraulic clamping cylinder with the necessary operation pressure.

Feed hole
Pressure
accumulator

Level indicator
(backside)

Oil filter

Screw to
Manometer for release the
clamping pressure
pressure

Adjusting screw
for clamping
pressure

Manometer for
system pressure

Figure 10-8: Hydraulic unit PD

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-195

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

The hydraulic unit has the following characteristics:

– The system pressure is preset in the factory to 70 bar (the adjustment screw is
sealed).
– The pressure switches for pressure monitoring -clamping cylinder-is integrated in the
valve.
– The pressure switch for pressure monitoring is set automatically (electro-
proportionally controlled) with a defined deviation range from the set pressure
chosen.

10.14.1 Handling
To ensure problem-free operation, please observe the following:

• MONITOR THE FLUID LEVEL IN THE HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR

DAILY. A LEVEL INDICATOR IS LOCATED ON THE FRONT OF THE
HYDRAULIC UNIT. NOTE THAT THE LEVEL FLUCTUATES BECAUSE
OF THE DIFFERENT AMOUNTS OF FLUID IN CIRCULATION. THE
INDICATOR MUST THEREFORE BE WATCHED FOR A FAIRLY LONG
TIME.
• ONLY FILL OIL WITH VISKOSITY HLP32!
• ONLY CARRY OUT MAINTENANCE WORK WHEN THE PRESSURE
ACCUMULATOR IS DEPRESSURISED!
• MAKE SURE THAT THE SCREW TO RELEASE THE PRESSURE
ACCUMULATOR MUST BE CLOSED BEFORE PUTING THE
MACHINE INTO OPERATION!

Very old or dirty fluid cannot be improved by topping up with new fluid. Never fill the oil
reservoir without using the filler filter. Only use oil that offers corrosion protection. Note
that hydraulic oils from different manufacturers or different oils from the same
manufacturer cannot necessarily simply be mixed. Your oil supplier can provide
information on the miscibility of oils as necessary.

IF HYDRAULIC OILS FROM DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS OR

DIFFERENT OILS FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER ARE
MIXED, RESIDUES AND DEPOSITS MAY BUILD UP! IN SOME
CASES, THESE MAY LEAD TO MALFUCTIONS AND DAMAGE TO
THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM!

USE A FILTER HAVING A FINENESS OF 10µ.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-196

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-197

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.14.2 Declaration of conformity of the pressure accumulator

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-198

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.15 Disc-type tool turret Sauter

SWITCH OFF THE MACHINE BEFORE STARTING ANY

MAINTENANCE WORK!

THE SERVICE LIFE OF THE TURRET IS APPROX.2–3MILLION

SWITCHINGS. THIS VALUE APPLIES TO COLLISION-FREE
OPERATION IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SPECIFIED
OPERATING CONDITIONS AND THE PERMISSIBLE LOADS! A
GENERAL OVERHAUL IS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER
TROUBLE-FREE OPERATION (SEE ALSO MANUAL OF
MANUFACTURER)!

THE SERVICE LIFE OF THE TOOL DRIVE UNIT IS APPROX.

8,000 HOURS OF OPERATION. THIS VALUE APPLIES TO
COLLISION-FREE OPERATION IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
SPECIFIED OPERATING CONDITIONS AND THE PERMISSIBLE
LOADS! A GENERAL OVERHAUL IS RECOMMENDED FOR
FURTHER TROUBLE-FREE OPERATION (SEE ALSO MANUAL
OF MANUFACTURER)!

10.15.1 Turret gear-box

➣ After 4000 operating hours

Check for oil:

Unscrew screw plug➣Rotate tool disc and observe rotating parts in gear-box.
Rotating parts in gear-box must be wet with oil. Refill oil if necessary. Use acid-free oil
with viscosity ISO VG 46

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-199

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

State Cause Measure

Oil black or brown, without Natural signs of wear and -
mechanical abrasion tear
Oil black or brown, with Internal parts of turret Request for service
mechanical abrasion damaged
Oil white mixed with Turret sealings damaged
coolant
None oil left Turret sealings damaged

➣ Change the oil of the turret gear-box after 8000 operating hours (see manual of
manufacturer)

10.15.2 Tool drive

(only in case of present tool drive)
➣ After 4000 operating hours

Check for state of grease:

➣Unscrew screw plug of filler hole.
➣Rotate gear-wheel and evaluate state of grease:

State Cause Measure

No grease at gear-wheel Natural consumption Add grease
visible
Grease black or brown, Natural signs of wear and -
without mechanical tear
abrasion
Grease black or brown, Inner parts of turret Request service
with mechanical abrasion damaged
Grease white mixed with Turret sealings damaged
coolant
Grease mixed with oil Turret sealings damaged
Add grease:
➣ max. 14cm3 (KLÜBER).
➣ Close filler hole with screw plug.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-200

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.16 Servo turret type Baruffaldi

WHEN DRAINING AND REFILLING THE TURRET WITH OIL MAKE

SURE THAT IT IS LOCKED, THAT ALL CONNECTED TUBES AND
HOSES ARE DEPRESSURISED AND THAT THE TURRET MOTOR IS
SWITCHED OFF! LET THE TURRET COOL DOWN BEFOREHAND!

➣ Check oil level monthly

➣ Refill oil every 6 months

AFTER FILLING LUBRICANT DO NOT FORGET TO CLOSE THE

FILLER HOLE WITH THE CORRESPONDING SCREW!

USE AGIP BLASIA 320 FOR FILLING! THE FILLING AMOUNT IS

ABOUT 0,020 LITRES!

PAY ATTENTION TO UTMOST CLEANLINESS WHILE REFILLING

LUBRICANT! CLEAN THE AREA AROUND THE FILLER HOLES
BEFORHAND! THE AREA AROUND THE FILLLING HOLE MUST BE
EXEMPT FROM DIRT, COOLANT AND SWARFS! DIRT PARTICLES
THAT ENTER THE TURRET WILL DAMAGE THE INNER TURRET
MECANISM!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-201

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.17 Low pressure duplex filter “MAHLE” (Option)

The duplex filter is equipped with a contamination indicator, which monitors the filter side
currently in operation (the switching lever points to the filter side which is out of
operation).

Figure 10-9: Low pressure duplex filter

1) Red button on the contamination indicator
2) Vent screws, with locking pins
3) Switching lever
(with pressure compensation lever on the rear)
4) Filter bowl (including filter elements)

The filter element of the filter bowl must be exchanged when the red button (1) of the
contamination indicator pops out.

DURING COLD STARTS THE RED INDICATOR BUTTON MAY POP

OUT AND A WARNING SIGNAL MAY SOUND. DEPRESS THE RED
BUTTON ONLY AFTER OPERATING TEMPERATURE HAS BEEN
REACHED.

IF THE RED BUTTON IMMEDIATELY POPS OUT AGAIN AND THE

ELECTRICAL SIGNAL HAS NOT SWITCHED OFF AFTER REACHING
OPERATING TEMPERATURE, THE FILTER ELEMENT OF THE
CORRESPONDING FILTER BOWL MUST BE REPLACED!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-202

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.17.1 Exchanging the filter element

THE CONTAMINATION INDICATOR MONITORS THE FILTER SIDE IN

OPERATION. THE SWITCHING LEVER CATCH POINTS TO THE
FILTER SIDE THAT IS OUT OF OPERATION. THE FILTER MUST BE
SWITCHED PRIOR TO FILTER SERVICING. AFTER SWITCHING,
THE SIGNAL OF THE CONTAMINATION INDICATOR IS CANCELLED
AND THE RED BUTTON CAN BE DEPRESSED AGAIN.

1. Pull and hold the pressure compensation lever

on the switching lever. Swivel the switching
lever. Engage the catch. Place through or drip
pan underneath to collect leaking oil.
2. Loosen vent screw of the filter side not in use
by 2-3 turns. Maximum retraction to locking pin
limit.
3. Unscrew filter bowl (2) by rotating counter
clockwise and clean with a suitable medium.
4. Remove filter element (1) with a light side-to-
side motion.
5. Check O-ring on the filter bowl and the spigot
for damage. Replace, defective parts if
necessary.
1
6. Make sure that the part number on the spare
element corresponds with the part number on
the filter label to ensure that the correct filter
element is used.
7. Apply a light oil coating to the threads of the
filter bowl and screw it back on until it comes to
a full stop in the filter head. Then unscrew the
bowl 1/8 to 1/2 turn. 2
8. To refill the filter chamber, operate only the
pressure compensation lever long enough for
the medium to emerge bubble-free from the
vent bore.
9. Tighten vent screw. Check filter for leaks by
operating the pressure compensation lever once again.

WEAR PROTECTIVE GLOVES TO AVOID DIRECT CONTACT WITH

COOLANT.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-203

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.18 Optional automatic safety door

Maintenance work to be performed every three months by the operator include:
• Visually inspect the door system exterior for visible damage
• Inspect all component and bolt connections to ensure they are tight.
• Inspect the power transfer (terminal connection belt drive<>machine door)
• The guide rails of the safety door must be cleaned to remove residue and
deposits with a suitable cleaning agent! They must operate smoothly
• Inspection of the Emergency OFF function (personnel protection):
Press Emergency OFF > Doors can be moved manually
Reset Emergency OFF > Automatic safety door operates normally again
• Checking of internal obstacle detection:
Introduce an obstacle into the closing area of the door (foam block or similar)
and issue a close command > as soon as the door meets the obstacle, it must
immediately open

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-204

C Operation/Maintenance Maintenance

10.19 Spare part list PD FANUC

Name of part Part number Article number Assembly
Wiper PD X axis PD-015-030 20960 PD-015-000
Wiper PD X axis PD-015-031 20961 PD-015-000
Wiper PD X axis PD-015-032 20962 PD-015-000
Wiper PD X axis PD-015-000 14103 PD-015-000
Countersunk screw for wiper 102310 PD-015-000
X axis ISO 10642
Wiper PD E axis PD-050-013 20812 PD-078-000
Wiper PD E axis PD-050-014 20813 PD-078-000
Wiper PD E axis PD-050-046 20814 PD-078-000
Wiper PD Z axis PD-030-018 103763 (Viton) PD-030-000
20920 (NBR)
Wiper PD Z axis PD-030-019 103764 (Viton) PD-030-000
20921 (NBR)
Wiper PD Z axis PD-030-020 103745 (Viton) PD-030-000
20922 (NBR)
Countersunk rivet for wiper Z 102605 PD-030-000
axis DIN 661
Assembly feed screw X axis PD-088-001 10782 PD-088-000
Assembly feed screw Z axis PD-089-001 10873 PD-089-000
Assembly feed screw E axis PD-090-001 10784 PD-090-000
Toothed belt 3x1000x8 - 31473 PD-109-000
Main spindle drive 8000/32
Toothed belt 3x1000x8 - 31473 PD-110-000
Main spindle drive 5000/42
Toothed belt feed screw X - 30210 PD-088-000
axis
Toothed belt feed screw Z - 30185 PD-089-000
axis
Toothed belt feed screw E - 30195 PD-090-000
axis
PD X/Z/E axis Fanuc - 113402 PD-015-000
Absolute length measuring
system LC493F-ML420mm
Door switch TZKF/BS - 31515 PD-121-000
PD-122-000
Pressure switch 10bar - 31125 -
Working area lamp 24W - 30864 -
Relay - 105478 -
Minicoder (VS-Sensorik) - 121766 SB-NC-194/195-000
Main contactor 4kW - 111770
Optocoupler - 105479
CNC back-up battery 101682
Battery of absolut encoder 110718

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 10-205

D Assemblies Assembly PD-010-000 Foundation plate/Machine base

Technical Product Documentation

11 Assembly PD-010-000 Foundation

plate/Machine base

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 11-206

D Assemblies Assembly PD-010-000 Foundation plate/Machine base

11.1 Description
The basis of the the PD machine is formed by a base welded out of thick sheet steel.
Fitted on this is a torsion resistant foundation plate made of cast iron with screwed-on
guide tracks. The hardened guide tracks are precision made, together with the foundatin
plate .

11.2 Drawings and parts list

11.2.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 11-207

D Assemblies Assembly PD-010-000 Foundation plate/Machine base

Figure 11-1: Exploded view drawing of plate base

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 11-208

D Assemblies Assembly PD-010-000 Foundation plate/Machine base

11.2.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-010-000 Foundation plate/Machine base; Article No. 10585
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
4 Pcs PD-010-002 Guide track 20893
1 Pcs PD-010-003 End cover plate 20894
1 Pcs PD-010-008 Machine base 20899
4 Pcs SB-NC-010-030/1 Adjustment screw 21325
4 Pcs SB-NC-010-031 Lock nut 21326
1 Pcs SB-NC-010-002 Headstock basic holder 21309
1 Pcs PD-010-005 Cover, right 20896
1 Pcs PD-010-006 Cover, left 20897
1 Pcs PD-010-007 Lower cover 20898
1 Pcs PD-010-010 Cover base 20901
1 Pcs PD-010-011 Cable holder 20902
1 Pcs PD-010-012 Plate for pneumatic connections 21441
1 Pcs BK-012-081 Allen screw M8 21320
1 Pcs BK-012-003 Rotary water connection 20749
1 Pcs BK-012-006 Connecting head air/water 21318
6 Pcs SB-NC-010-024 Washer 21315
1 Pcs PD-011-037 Apron for machine base 20872
6 Pcs SB-NC-085-019 Spacer roller valve battery 21261
1 Pcs SB-NC-010-061 Cover panel for Z-motor 21345
1 Pcs BK-012-032 Water hose connection 21185
1 Pcs Angle piece Rectus G3/4 21317
1 Pcs O-Ring 32x3 30180
4 Pcs BK-002-005 Rubber plate 20540
1 Pcs Ball valve BEE 3411-1/4 21192
9 Pcs AVS1 Locking screw 261M-1/4 21319
2 Pcs Seal 269N-1/4x1.5 21853
1 Pcs Thiermann coolant hose 21333
1 Pcs Plate M07 20746
2 Pcs AVS2 Locking screw 261M-3/8 21338
1 Pcs Menzel sepcial seal for coolant water distributor 21332
36 Pcs SB-NC-010-017/1 Stopping plugs 21312
4 Pcs Disk 13DIN6340 21327
1 Pcs PD-010-001 Machine base 20892

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 11-209

D Assemblies Assembly PD-106-000 Coolant system

Technical Product Documentation

12 Assembly PD-106-000 Coolant system

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 12-210

D Assemblies Assembly PD-106-000 Coolant system

12.1 Description
The coolant system assembly consists of the swarf-catching container PD-018-001 and
the coolant tank PD-018-002 located below it. The coolant is fed to the relevant usage
points on the machine by means of a feed pump.

12.2 Maintenance and repair

The swarf-catching container must be emptied on a regular basis. The coolant must be
replaced as necessary according to the medium used. Losses causes by escaping
cooilant or evaporation of water from emulsions must be topped up by the operator.

12.3 Drawings and parts list

12.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 12-211

D Assemblies Assembly PD-106-000 Coolant system

Figure 12-1: Exploded view drawing of coolant system

PD Fancu 18i  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 12-212

D Assemblies Assembly PD-106-000 Coolant system

12.3.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-106-000 Coolant system
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs Brinkmann submersed pump TS13/110-61 22220
1 Pcs Option Brinkmann Pressure boosting pump 8 bar (pump = 102005
art.101117 + seal kit = art. 118390)
8 Pcs BK-012-032 Water hose connection 21185
3 Pcs Müller Coax-valve 30217
2 Pcs Hose Ø 13x1500 PVC mesh and 2x straight connections 21186
M22x1.5
Pcs Hose Ø 10x1000 PVC mesh and 2x straight connections 21187
M16x1.5
1 Pcs SB-NC-100-009 Coolant distributor for turret 21335
2 Pcs SB-NC-001-012 Distribution unit for spindle flushing 21285
2 Pcs AVS Reducing nipple, conical 253M-3/4K-1/2 21188
2 Pcs AVS Reducing nipple 253M-1/2-1/4 21191
11 Pcs AVS Seal 269N-1/4x1.5 21853
2 Pcs BEE Ball valve 3411-1/4 21192
3 Pcs Ermeto Straight threaded joint XGE 10-PLR-ED 21213
1 Pcs AVS Angle piece, conical 202M-1/4K-1/4 21212
1 Pcs Ermeto Straight threaded joint XGAI 10-PLR 21193
2 Pcs Ermeto Adjustable angle connection supports EVW10-PLR 21214
5 Pcs Ermeto Straight threaded support with shaft EVGE 15-PLR-ED 21334
5 Pcs AVS Straight threaded joint 151M-10/8-1/4 21217
1 Pcs PD-018-001 Swarf container 20879
1 Pcs PD-018-002 Coolant reservoir 20880
1 Pcs PD-018-003 Support plate for coolant pump 20881
2 Pcs PD-010-009 Connection block for swarf trough 20900
1 Pcs AVS Locking screw 261M-1/4 21319
1 Pcs AVS Locknut 256M-1/4 21211
1 Pcs AVS Reducing nipple 252M-1/4-1/4 22036
1 Pcs AVS T-joint 154-10/8 22035

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 12-213

 BE4100
Operating Instructions

Brinkmann – pressure boosting pumps series FH45 ... FH360

Contents
1 General.................................................................. 1 6 Start up / Shut down .............................................. 2
2 Safety .................................................................... 2 7 Servicing and Maintenance ................................... 3
3 Transport and storage ........................................... 2 8 Trouble shooter’s guide ......................................... 3
4 Description of product and accessories ................ 2 9 Spare parts ............................................................ 4
5 Installation ............................................................. 2 10 Mounting instructions........................................5-6
1 General
These operating instructions apply to the pumps of the series FH45 ... FH360 with different lengths and specifications.
Pumps of series FH using closed impellers minimise power consumption by optimum hydraulic efficiency. In
combination with pre-pumps or central coolant supply pumps of series FH work as pressure booster up to 26 bar
increase.
These operating instructions contain basic information and instructions which must be observed when the pump is being
installed, operated or repaired. Therefore it is important that these operating instructions are read by the fitter, the
operator and relevant technical personnel before installation and start-up, and they are available at all times at the place
where the unit/system is being operated.
Specifications

Max. del. pressure Max. del. volume Depth of immersion Weight Power Noise level max.
Type bar / spec. weight 1 l/min mm kg kW dBA / 50 Hz
FH45-14 3,0 82 167 17 0,5 58
FH45-19 4,9 83 217 19 0,85 58
FH45-24 7,2 88 267 20 1,1 58
FH45-29 9,4 90 317 27 1,3 63
FH45-34 11,4 91 367 28 1,7 63
FH45-39 13,8 92 417 29 2,2 63
FH45-47 16,3 93 502 34 2,6 63
FH45-54 19,8 94 567 45 3,3 71
FH45-69 25,8 95 717 50 4,0 71
FH90-14 2,8 150 167 19 0,85 58
FH90-19 4,7 150 217 20 1,1 58
FH90-24 6,4 150 267 26 1,3 63
FH90-29 8,2 150 317 27 1,7 63
FH90-34 10,0 150 367 28 2,2 63
FH90-39 11,9 151 417 33 2,6 63
FH90-47 14,9 152 502 44 3,3 71
FH90-54 17,5 153 567 49 4,0 71
FH90-69 22,8 154 717 56 5,5 71
FH180-19 3,8 292 237 38 1,7 63
FH180-23 5,4 294 275 42 2,2 63
FH180-27 6,8 297 313 45 2,6 63
FH180-30 8,1 298 351 54 3,3 71
FH180-38 10,6 300 427 59 4,0 71
FH180-50 14,3 302 541 67 5,5 71
FH180-65 20,1 308 693 82 7,5 74
FH180-76 24,1 310 807 99 10,0 74
FH360-15 3,2 440 199 39 2,2 63
FH360-19 4,8 448 237 50 3,3 71
FH360-23 6,7 464 275 54 4,0 71
FH360-30 9,9 470 351 61 5,5 71
FH360-38 13,1 472 427 74 7,5 74
FH360-46 16,7 480 503 89 10,0 74
Measuring of noise level to DIN 45635 at distance of 1m.

Mediums Water, coolants, cooling- and cutting-oils

2
Kinetic viscosity of the medium FH45 ... FH90 1 .... 45 mm /s
2
FH180 ... FH360 1 .... 90 mm /s
Temperature of medium 0 .... 80 °C

 Brinkmann Pumpen Edition 12/08 Page 1 of 6

2 Safety
See appendix A.

3 Transport and storage

Protect the pump against damage when transporting.
Store pump in dry and protected areas and protect it against penetration of foreign bodies.

4 Description of product and accessories

The pump shaft and the motor shaft are connected by a coupling. The pump shaft is sealed by a rotating mechanical
seal. Possible leakage will be caught by a leakage chamber and returned to the tank by means of a leakage line from
the leakage bore on the upper side of the flange.
The motor is surface cooled and complies with the DIN IEC 34 resp. EN 60034 (IP 55).
Tension voltage and frequency must correspond with the shown specification on the nameplate. The terminal links of
the motor are delivered in star connection from the plant. A circuit breaker or overload trip must be provided and the
tripping current adjusted to correspond with the motor rated current.
Special electrical or mechanical versions are described in appendix B!

Check the terminal links according to the following wiring diagram.

Motors of 7,5 kW and higher are supplied in ∆ connection, e.g. start, ∆ 3 x 380 – 420V, 50Hz.

Star connection Delta connection

3 x 400 V, 50 Hz 3 x 230 V, 50 Hz
resp. 380-420 V, 50 Hz resp. 220-240 V, 50 Hz

Work on the electrical equipment must only be carried

out by a qualified electrician.
The motor must be isolated before any work is carried out.

5 Installation
The pumps can be mounted next to the coolant tank or the lined-up pump. Pumps
must be mounted securely. The pipework must be installed so that no distorsion of the
pump can occur. Care has to be taken that the pump station will not run empty.
The liquid entrance is situated above the fastening flange.
The pressure connection is at the connection cover in the end of the pump unit.
To obtain the full flow rate it is recommended to choose for the pipework the nominal
bore diameter of the pumps cross section for connection. Therfore pipe bends should
be used, not pipe angles!
The pipework must be qualified for occuring hydraulic pressure!

6 Start up / Shut down

Start up
Switch off at the mains.
After connection of the terminals close the terminal box.
Briefly start the motor and check the rotation according to the arrow on the top of the
motor. Looking through the fan cover of motor, the fan has to turn anticlockwise.
If the direction is incorrect change over two of the power leads.
Shut down
Switch off at the mains.
Open terminal box and disconnect the power leads
Empty out the pump.
.

BE4100 Edition 12/08 Page 2 of 6

 The temperature of the medium is not allowed to be higher than 80 °C.
The pumps are not suitable for dry running and conveyance against
a closed sliding valve ( plan bypass ).
The valve on the suction side of the pump must be opened 1 or 2 seconds
before starting up the pump to avoid the damage resulting from low pression.
Do not switch on pressure boosting pump FH before positive inlet pressure
by a primary pump or by a static head pressure (from a central filtration system)
is established. Max. inlet pressure 26 bar.
The particle-size in the medium is not allowed to be bigger than 1 mm for
FH45 to FH90 and 2 mm for FH180 to FH360 !

ATTENTION Switching-on frequency: Motors less 3 kW max. 200 times per hour.
Motors from 3 kW to 5,5 kW max. 40 times per hour.
Motors from 7,5 kW to 10 kW max. 20 times per hour.

7 Servicing and Maintenance

The surface of the motor must be kept free of dirt.
The motor shaft is spinning in permanently greased ball bearings (with special grease and increased bearing play) and
does not require any special maintenance. Spare parts are readily available from stock.

8 Trouble shooter’s guide

Fault Cause Remedy
Motor does not start, At least two of the power supply leads Check fuses, terminals and supply
no motor noise have failed leads
Motor does not start, One of the supply leads has failed See above
humming noise. Impeller faulty Replace impeller
Motor bearing faulty Replace bearing
Pump does not pump Pre-pump does not work Check the pre-pump
Pump mechanism faulty replace pump mechanism
Pipe blocked Clean pipe
Insufficient flow and pressure Wrong direction of rotation of impeller Change over two power supply leads
Pump mechanism silted up Clean pump mechanism
Worn pump mechanism Replace pump mechanism
Power consumption is too high Wrong direction of rotation of impeller See above
Lime or other deposits See above
mechanical friction repair pump

Spare parts are available from the supplier.

Standard commercially available parts are to be purchased in accordance with the model type.
The ordering of spare parts should contain the following details:
1. Pumptype
e.g. FH90-29
2. Pump No.
e.g. 04043900
The date of the construction year is a component
of the pumps type number.
3. Voltage, Frequency and Power
Take item 1, 2 and 3 from the nameplate
4. Spare part with item No.
e.g. Impeller item No. 57.

Brinkmann Pumpen
K. H. Brinkmann GmbH & Co. KG
Friedrichstraße 2 D-58791 Werdohl
Tel.: +49 -2392 / 5006-0
Fax.: +49-2392 / 5006-180
www.BrinkmannPumps.com
[email protected]

Subject to change without prior notice. Order – No.: BE4100 ENGLISH

BE4100 Edition 12/08 Page 3 of 6

9 Spare part list for the pressure boosting pumps series FH45 ... FH360
Item Description
1 Stator with terminal box
2 Motor flange
3 End shield
4 Motor shaft with rotor
5 Terminal box up to 5,5 kW
6 Terminal box frame from 7,5 kW and over
7 Terminal box cover from 7,5 kW and over
8 Fan
9 Fan cover
10 Gasket
11 Gasket from 7,5 kW and over
13 Retaining ring
14 Thread rolling screw DIN 7500
from 1,1 kW and over
15 Ball bearing up to 5,5 kW DIN 625
15 Ball bearing from 7,5 kW and over DIN 628
16 Ball bearing DIN 625
17 Slotted cheese head screw DIN 84
18 Stud bolt with bond up to 0,85 kW
18 Hexagon socket head cap screw DIN 912
from 1,1 kW and over
19 Parallel pin DIN 7
20 Retaining ring up to 5,5 kW DIN 472
21 Retaining ring up to 5,5 kW DIN 471
22 Socket head cap screw DIN 912
23 Bearing cover from 7,5 kW and over
24 Hexagon head screw DIN 931
from 7,5 kW and over
25 Shaft nut from 7,5 kW and over
26 Compensation disk from 1,1 kW amd over
27 O-ring from 1,1 kW amd over
50 Pump body
51 Connection cover
52 Pump shaft
53 Diffusor with sliding ring
54 Entering stage with sliding ring
55 Outflow stage
56 Bearing stage with sliding ring
57 Impeller
58 Spacer-long 2 x per stage
59 Spacer-short 1 x per bearing stage
60 Sliding ring
61 Shaft sleeve
62 Supporting ring
63 Spiral backup ring
64 Mech. seal stop ring cover
65 Mech. seal stop half-ring
66 Mech. seal stop ring FH45...FH90
66 Mech. seal washer FH180…FH360
67 Pump casing
69 Clamp coupling
70 Coupling shield
71 Stud bolt
72 O-ring
73 Rotary shaft seal
74 Mechanical seal
75 Retaining ring
76 Parallel pin DIN 7
77 Hexagon head cap screw DIN 933
78 Hexagon socket head cap screw DIN 912
79 Serrated lock washer
80 Hexagon nut DIN 934
81 Hexagon cap nuts DIN 917
82 Woodruff key DIN 6888
83 Distance plate instead
of impeller / 60 Hz
84 Hexagon socket pipe plug DIN 906

BE4100 Edition 12/08 Page 4 of 6

 Brinkmann – pressure boosting pumps series FH45 ... FH90

10.1 Mounting instructions for exchanging the rotary mechanical seal:

1) Disconnect the pump from the power supply.

2) Pull out coupling shield (70). Remove clamp coupling (69.1, 69.2) and parallel pin (76).
3) Loosen and pull off the hexagon cap nuts (81), the stud bolt (71), connection cover (51) and the pump casing (67)
from the pump unit. Remove pump unit with pump shaft (52) from the pump body (50).
4) Take off rotating axial face seal unit (74.1-74.5) and mech. seal stop ring (66) from the shaft (52) and clean the shaft.
Pay attention to the drilledhole for the parallel pin (76) that it is without any bur. Check the sliding surface for the
rotary shaft seal (73) for any damage.
5) Remove complete seal (74.6, 74.7) from the pump body (50) and clean the seat.
6) Mounting of the new axial face seal :
Ensure that the sliding surfaces of the ring and the rotating axial face seal unit are free from grease and dirt.
Moisten the angle-sleeve (74.7) of the counter ring lightly with rinse water / ( water with washing-up liquid ) and push
the unit into the seat of the pump body (50).
Slide the mech. seal stop ring (66) first an then the axial face seal (74.5-74.1) (single part) onto the pump shaft (52).
7) Lubricate lighty the lip of the rotary shaft seal (73) and push it into the pump body (50). Then insert the pump shaft
(52) with the pump unit through the rotary shaft seal (73).
8) Fit together the coupling clamp (69) with the parallel pin (76) around the shafts. tighten the hexagon socket head cap
screws (78) with the serrated lock washer (79) lightly.
Be sure that the key of the motor shaft (4) coincides with the key groove of the coupling clamp (69.1).
Press the pump shaft (52) toward the motor and tighten the screws. The distance between the two shaft ends must
be zero.
9) Lubricate the O-ring seal (72).
Put on the spiral-backup ring (63), the O-ring seal (72), the connection cover (51) and the pump casing (67) and
screw evenly the stud bolt (71) and the hexagon cap nuts (81).
During the assembly from (63) and (72) take care of the order. See the pump drawing.
10) Fit the coupling shield (70) into the pump body (50).
11) Reconnect pump to the power supply.

Check direction of rotation

Tightening torques for screwed connections

Thread - ∅ M4 M5 M6 M8 M10
Strength classes 4.8 4.8 8.8 8.8 8.8
Tightening torque 1 Nm 3 Nm 4,5 Nm 15 Nm 30 Nm
(Nm) 20 Nm Clamp coupling 30 Nm Clamp coupling

BE4100 Edition 12/08 Page 5 of 6

 Brinkmann – pressure boosting pumps series FH180 ... FH360
10.2 Mounting instructions for exchanging the rotary mechanical seal:

1) Disconnect the pump from the power supply.

2) Pull out coupling shield (70). Remove clamp coupling (69.1, 69.2) and parallel pin (76).
3) Loosen and pull off the hexagon cap nuts (81), the stud bolt (71), connection cover (51) and the pump casing (67)
from the pump unit. Remove pump unit with pump shaft (52) from the pump body (50).
4) Take off rotating axial face seal unit (74.1-74.5) and mech. seal washer (66) from the shaft (52) and clean the shaft.
Pay attention to the drilledhole for the parallel pin (76) that it is without any bur. Check the sliding surface for the
rotary shaft seal (73) for any damage.
5) Remove complete seal (74.6, 74.7) from the pump body (50) and clean the seat.
6) Mounting of the new axial face seal :
Ensure that the sliding surfaces of the ring and the rotating axial face seal unit are free from grease and dirt.
Moisten the angle-sleeve (74.7) of the counter ring lightly with rinse water / ( water with washing-up liquid ) and push
the unit into the seat of the pump body (50).
Slide the mech. seal washer (66) first an then the axial face seal (74.1-74.5) onto the pump shaft (52).
7) Lubricate lighty the lip of the rotary shaft seal (73) and push it into the pump body (50). Then insert the pump shaft
(52) with the pump unit through the rotary shaft seal (73).
8) Fit together the coupling clamp (69) with the parallel pin (76) around the shafts. tighten the hexagon socket head cap
screws (78) with the serrated lock washer (79) lightly.
Be sure that the key of the motor shaft (4) coincides with the key groove of the coupling clamp (69.1).
Press the pump shaft (52) toward the motor and tighten the screws. The distance between the two shaft ends must
be zero.
9) Lubricate the O-ring seal (72).
Put on the spiral-backup ring (63), the O-ring seal (72), the connection cover (51) and the pump casing (67) and
screw evenly the stud bolt (71) and the hexagon cap nuts (81).
During the assembly from (63) and (72) take care of the order. See the pump drawing.
10) Fit the coupling shield (70) into the pump body (50).
11) Reconnect pump to the power supply.

Check direction of rotation

Tightening torques for screwed connections

Thread - ∅ M4 M5 M6 M8 M10
Strength classes 4.8 4.8 8.8 8.8 8.8
Tightening torque 1 Nm 3 Nm 4,5 Nm 15 Nm 30 Nm
(Nm) 20 Nm Clamp coupling 30 Nm Clamp coupling

BE4100 Edition 12/08 Page 6 of 6

D Assemblies Assembly PD-099-000 Splash guard

Technical Product Documentation

13 Assembly PD-099-000 Splash guard

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 13-214

D Assemblies Assembly PD-099-000 Splash guard

13.1 Description
The machine paneling consists of an aluminium support frame with attached steel sheets.
The paneling complies with the relevant safety guidelines.

13.2 Drawings and parts list

13.2.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 13-215

D Assemblies Assembly PD-099-000 Splash guard

Figure 13-1: Exploded drawing Splash guard

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 13-216

D Assemblies Assembly PD-099-000 Splash guard

13.2.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-099-000 Splash guard; Article No. 10781
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
4 Pcs PD-011-001 Mounting base 20836
1 Pcs PD-011-002 Front right support 20837
1 Pcs PD-011-003 Front left support 20838
1 Pcs PD-011-004 Rear right support 20839
1 Pcs PD-011-005 Rear left/new support 20840
1 Pcs PD-011-006 Entry shaft 20841
1 Pcs PD-011-008 Rear left inner holder 20843
1 Pcs PD-011-009 Right inner holder 20844
1 Pcs PD-011-011 Separator 20846
1 Pcs PD-011-013 Crossbar 20848
1 Pcs PD-011-014 Door track support 20849
1 Pcs PD-011-015 Guide rail 20850
2 Pcs PD-011-016 External door stop 20851
1 Pcs PD-011-017 Central door stop 20852
1 Pcs PD-011-019 Track for front plate 20854
11 Pcs PD-011-020 Spacer roller 20855
1 Pcs PD-011-022 Operating console 20857
1 Pcs PD-011-023 Front right panel 20858
1 Pcs PD-011-024 Front left panel 20859
1 Pcs PD-011-025 Top right panel 20860
1 Pcs PD-011-026 Top left panel 20861
1 Pcs PD-011-028 Inner right panel 20864
1 Pcs PD-011-030 Rear panel 20865
1 Pcs PD-011-031 Inner left panel 1 20866
1 Pcs PD-011-032 Inner left panel 2 20867
1 Pcs PD-011-033 Inner left panel 3 20686
1 Pcs PD-011-035 Outer left panel 2 20870
1 Pcs PD-011-018 Front plate 20853
1 Pcs PD-011-029 Inner right panel 2 20863
1 Pcs PD-011-036 Outer left panel 3 20871
1 Pcs PD-011-037 Apron for machine base 20872
1 Pcs PD-011-041 Outer left plate 1 (without gantry loading) 20876
1 Pcs PD-011-042 Cover panel 20877
2 Pcs PD-011-044 Working light holder 21380
2 Pcs SB-NC-030-052 Terminal 21222
2 Pcs SB-NC-020-029 Terminal 21221
2 Pcs PD-011-049 Spacer block 21995
1 Pcs PD-011-021 Enclosure for operating console 20856
2 Pcs PD-011-045 Cable terminal for operating console 21460
1 Pcs PD-011-027 Right side panel 20862
1 Pcs PD-099-001 Holder 1 for energy chain 22353
1 Pcs PD-099-002 Holder 2 for energy chain 22354
1 Pcs PD-011-012 Cable duct 20847
1 Pcs SB-NC-020-005 Cover for enclosure 21220
1 Pcs SB-NC-165-001 Enclosure Version 2 22351
1 Pcs PD-011-007 Rear left outer holder 20842
1 Pcs PD-011-010 Right outer holder 20845
1 Pcs PD-011-034 Left outer panel (with gantry loading) 20869
2 Pcs Waldmann lamp 30864
4 Pcs Waldmann holder 30562
2 Pcs Klöckner Möller rubber sleeve KT 16 41220

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 13-217

D Assemblies Assembly PD-099-000 Splash guard
1 Pcs Pöppelmann plug GPN 910; 910/3222
1 Pcs Bosch bulkhead stuffing box 1823 391 227 21218
1 Pcs AVS Locking screw 261M-1/4; 21319 21319
1 Pcs AVS Seal 269N-1/4x1.5 21853

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 13-218

D Assemblies Assembly PD-121/122-000 Sliding door left/right

Technical Product Documentation

14 Assembly PD-121/122-000 Sliding door

left/right

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 14-219

D Assemblies Assembly PD-121/122-000 Sliding door left/right

14.1 Description
According to the necessary safety regulations the machine is equipped with two sliding
doors. These are made of a profile frame of aluminium with integrated safety glasses.
The doors are guided at the top by means of rollers which can be eccentrically be
adjusted, at the bottom by a slideway.

14.2 Handling
The safety doors prevent persons from reaching into the working area while the machine
is running.
The closed doors* are locked after booting the control system, when the key operated
switch has been turned to the position Automatic mode before switching on the machine,
they are automatically unlocked when the key operated switch has been turned to the
position Setup mode before switching on the machine (provided that the forced security
check succeeded).

The safety doors which are locked in the Automatic mode are unlocked turning the key
operated switch to the Setup mode.
When the key operated switch is on the Setup mode the safety doors can be opened and
closed as necessary. They will not be locked. They only will be locked turning the key
operated switch to the position Automatic mode and subsequently closing them.
* The switch on routine can not be effected completely with safety doors open

THE CLOSED DOORS ARE NOT AUTOMATICALLY LOCKED

TURNING THE KEY OPERATED SWITCH TO THE POSITION
AUTOMATIC MODE. YOU MUST THEN OPEN AND CLOSE
THEM ONCE.

THE SAFETY DOOR MUST ALWAYS REMAIN CLOSED! THE

KEY-OPERATED SWITCH ON THE SAFETY DOOR MAY NOT BE
DAMAGED, REMOVED OR MADE INOPERATIVE!

14.3 Maintenance and repair

The safety glasses of the sliding doors must always be in a perfect and undamaged state.
A damaged glass must be immediately replaced for reasons of safety. Only use original
replacement parts which are certified by a shelling test.

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 14-220

D Assemblies Assembly PD-121/122-000 Sliding door left/right

THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY

AFTER IT IS BROKEN OR WHEN IT IS CRACKED! IT SHOULD
ALSO BE REPLACED WHEN IT COMES INTO CONTACT WITH A
LOOSE WORKPIECE, EVEN IF NO EXTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE
SAFETY GLASS CAN BE FOUND! REPLACE THE SAFETY
GLASSES AFTER 2 YEARS AT THE LATEST FOR AGEING
REASONS!

IN ADDITION, THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE CHANGED WHEN

THERE ARE PERMANENT DEFORMATIONS AS DENTS, WHEN
THE BORDER SEALS ARE DAMAGED OR WHEN THE SAFETY
GLASS BECOMES UNCLEAR BY COOLANT THAT PENETRATES
THE SANDWICH STRUCTURE!

SAFETY GLASSES MADE OF POLYCARBONATE ARE VERY

DANGEROUS WHEN THEY BECOME MILKY! ALSO IN THIS
CASE THE SAFETY GLASS MUST BE CHANGED!

14.4 Drawings and parts lists

14.4.1 Exploded drawing

(See following page)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 14-221

D Assemblies Assembly PD-121/122-000 Sliding door left/right

Figure 14-1: Exploded drawing left sliding door

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 14-222

D Assemblies Assembly PD-121/122-000 Sliding door left/right

Figure 14-2: Exploded drawing right sliding door

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 14-223

D Assemblies Assembly PD-121/122-000 Sliding door left/right

14.4.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-121-000 Sliding door left; Article No. 101300
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
2 Pcs Roller koncentric 108639
2 Pcs Roller excentric 108640
1 Pcs PD-020-006 Top crossbeam 22452
1 Pcs PD-012-005 Sliding pad 20832
1 Pcs PD-020-008 Left apron 22454
1 Pcs PD-020-007 Bottom crossbeam 22455
1 Pcs PD-020-004 Outer frame 22456
1 Pcs PD-020-003 Support plate 22457
1 Pcs PD-020-001 Composite disc 22459
1 Pcs PD-020-002 Intermediate plate 22458
2 Pcs Screw M6x50-A2 101603
1 Pcs PD-121-002 Fixing for actuator 101302
2 Pcs Screw M4x12-A2 101600
1 Pcs PD-121-001 Inner frame 101301
- - Sealing tape 101809

Assembly PD-122-000 Sliding door right; Article No. 101303

Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs Inner frame 101305
1 Pcs Intermediate plate 101306
1 Pcs Door switch TZKF/BS 31515
2 Pcs Screw M6x16-A2 101602
1 Pcs Top crossbeam 101304
- - Sealing tape 101809
2 Pcs Roller koncentric 108639
2 Pcs Roller excentric 108640
1 Pcs PD-020-002 Intermediate plate 22458
1 Pcs PD-020-001 Composite disc 22459
1 Pcs PD-020-003 Support plate 22457
1 Pcs PD-021-001 Outer frame 22461
1 Pcs PD-012-005 Sliding pad 20832
1 Pcs PD-021-003 Right apron 22462
1 Pcs PD-020-007 Bottom crossbeam 22455

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 14-224

D Assemblies Assembly PD-030-000 Workspace paneling

Technical Product Documentation

15 Assembly PD-030-000 Workspace paneling

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 15-225

D Assemblies Assembly PD-030-000 Workspace paneling

15.1 Description
The entire working area of the machine is covered with stainless steel panels with the
corresponding wiper seals.

15.2 Maintenance and repair

Damaged seals must be replaced with appropriate new parts. If cooling lubricant
emulsions or oils are used that do not comply with the specifications in the operating
instructions, the seal lips will be destroyed.

15.3 Drawings and parts list

15.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 15-226

D Assemblies Assembly PD-030-000 Workspace paneling

Figure 15-1: Exploded drawing of workspace paneling

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 15-227

D Assemblies Assembly PD-030-000 Workspace paneling

15.3.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-030-000 Workspace paneling; Article No. 10591
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs PD-030-015 Cover panel 5 20917
1 Pcs PD-030-016 Cover panel 6 20918
1 Pcs PD-030-013 Connecting strips 20915
1 Pcs PD-030-018 Wiper lip for cover panel 6 (NBR) 20920
1 Pcs PD-030-018 Wiper lip for cover panel 6 (VITON) 103763
1 Pcs PD-030-019 Wiper lip for cover panel 4 20921
1 Pcs PD-030-019 Wiper lip for cover panel 4 (VITON) 103764
1 Pcs PD-030-020 Wiper lip for cover panel 5 (NBR) 20922
1 Pcs PD-030-020 Wiper lip for cover panel 5 (VITON) 103765
1 Pcs PD-030-017 Supports for cover panel 6 20919
1 Pcs PD-030-001 Holding plate for Z-E-limit switch 20903
1 Pcs PD-030-003 Cover panel 1 20905
1 Pcs PD-030-004 Cover panel 2 20906
1 Pcs PD-030-005 Cover panel 3 20907
1 Pcs PD-030-006 Botton slide rail 20908
1 Pcs PD-030-007 Top slide rail 20909
1 Pcs PD-030-008 Guide shoe 20910
1 Pcs PD-030-010 Left holder 20912
1 Pcs PD-030-011 Right holder 20913
1 Pcs PD-030-021 Top left corner ledge 21375
1 Pcs PD-030-022 Center corner ledge 21376
1 Pcs PD-030-023 Top right corner ledge 21377
1 Pcs PD-030-024 Right corner ledge 21378
1 Pcs PD-030-025 Outer right corner ledge 21379
1 Pcs PD-030-026 Left leveling piece 21641
1 Pcs PD-030-027 Right leveling piece 21642
1 Pcs Euchner Limit switch 3-row type 30354
1 Pcs SB-NC-010-023 Holding angle for the limit switch 21231
4 Pcs Cylindrical pin DIN 6325-5M6x20 30794
2 Pcs Cylindrical pin DIN 6325-3M6x8 30659
1 Pcs PD-030-009 Complete mounting frame 20911
1 Pcs PD-030-014 Cover panel 4 20916

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 15-228

D Assemblies Assembly PD-124-000 Cross-slide

Technical Product Documentation

16 Assembly PD-124-000 Cross-slide

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 16-229

D Assemblies Assembly PD-124-000 Cross-slide

16.1 Description
The assembly PD-124-000 cross-slide unit forms the basis for the adjusting options of the
tool holder (turret or linear tool holder) mounted on the cross-slide rest PD-124-019. The
cross-slide rest moves on two guideway tracks, the front one of which is a V-guide. An
optical linear measurement system is located between the two guideway tracks. The Z-
slide located underneath is also moved on 2 sliding guideways. The upper of these
guideway tracks represents the small guideway for this system. Another optical linear
measurement system is located between these guideways.

16.2 Maintenance and repair

Ensure that the guideways are kept sufficiently lubricated. If necessary, the play of the
guideways can be adjusted by a SPINNER service technician to comply with the relevant
specifications.

16.3 Drawings and parts list

16.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 16-230

D Assemblies Assembly PD-124-000 Cross-slide

Figure 16-1: Exploded view drawing of cross-slide

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 16-231

D Assemblies Assembly PD-124-000 Cross-slide

16.3.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-124-000 Cross-slide, Article No. 104618
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs PD-015-001 Bottom part of Z slide 20932
1 Pcs PD-124-009 X-Slide 104586
1 Pcs PD-124-008 Rear X-axis gripper 104585
1 Pcs PD-124-015 Top sealing cover 104615
2 Pcs SB-NC-193-004 Top limit stop 104598
1 Pcs PD-015-030 Wiper lip PD X-axis 20960
10 Pcs BK-NC-010-031 adjusting screw 20412
1 Pcs SB-NC-193-006 Bottom sealing cover 104595
1 Pcs PD-015-009 Guide strip Z-axis 20940
2 Pcs PD-015-011 Bottom Z gripper 20942
1 Pcs PD-015-012 Top Z gripper 20943
1 Pcs PD-015-013 Top Z gripper 20944
4 Pcs PD-124-014 Bottom linit stop 104599
1 Pcs PD-015-015 Holding cam 20946
2 Pcs PD-015-016 Rotary lock 20947
2 Pcs PD-015-018 Countersunk head bolt 20948
1 Pcs PD015-000 Wiper lip PD X-axis 14103
2 Pcs PD-124-013 Top plug for X slide 104469
2 Pcs PD-124-010 Lateral plug for X slide 5mm 104467
1 Pcs PD-015-015 Holding cam 20946
1 Pcs PD-015-025 Scale cover Z-axis 20955
1 Pcs PD-124-007 Scale holder-Z-axis 104045
2 Pcs PD X/Z/E-axis linear scale absolut LC493F-ML420mm 113402
1 Pcs PD-015-028 Mount for X-axis drive 20958
1 Pcs PD-015-029 Cover for motor holder X-axis 20959
1 Pcs PD-015-033 Terminal block 21381
2 Pcs PD-015-034 Cable terminal 21382
1 Pcs PD-124-005 Clamping plate for Measuring head holder Z-axis 104043
1 Pcs PD-124-006 Measuring head holder 104044
1 Pcs Pin DIN 6325 6M6x16 30676
1 Pcs PD-124-001 Top scale holder X axis 104039
1 Pcs PD-124-002 Bottom scale holder X axis 104040
1 Pcs PD-124-004 Measuring head holder 104042
1 Pcs PD-124-003 Scale holder X-axis 104041
1 Pcs PD-015-030 Wiper lip 20960
1 Pcs PD-015-031 Rear wiper lip 20961
1 Pcs PD-015-032 Front wiper lip 20962
10 Pcs BK-NC-010-035 Short adjusting screw 20449
1 Pcs Cylindrical pin 2x20-C1 ISO 8734 102742
1 Pcs PD-015-021 Front X-axis gripper 20951
1 Pcs PD-015-010 Base strip for the gripper 20941
1 Pcs Cylindrical pin 6x32 ISO 8734 100646
1 Pcs SB-193-009 Cap 112707
1 Pcs PD-124-016 Cover plate above 135953
1 Pcs LC493F-ML420mm für PD X/Z/E-axis FANUC; length 113402
measuring system absolute, l=420mm, serielles FANUC02-
Interface

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 16-232

D Assemblies Assembly PD-083-000 Central lubricating unit

Technical Product Documentation

17 Assembly PD-083-000 Central lubricating

unit

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 17-233

D Assemblies Assembly PD-083-000 Central lubricating unit

17.1 Description
The central lubricating unit automatically supplies the guideways of the cross-slide with
the necessary lubricating oil. The central lubricating unit is located on the rear of the
machine. If the oil level is too low, an alarm message is displayed on the CNC cotnrol
screen.

Button for manual

actuation of pump
(e.g. to bleed the oil Filling inlet with
lines) integrated sieve
and safety cap

Level indicator

Figure 17-1: Central lubricating unit

17.2 Handling

SWITCH OFF THE OPERATING VOLTAGE BEFORE OPENING

THE COVERING HOOD (FOR SERVICING)!

FOR TROUBLEFREE OPERATION OF THE CENTRAL

LUBRICATING UNIT

• ONLY USE CLEAN OIL OF A SUITABLE VISCOSITY

• THE FILLER NECKS MUST NOT BE REMOVED AND THE
INTEGRATED SIEVE MUST NOT BE DAMAGED
• THE SYSTEM MUST NOT BE OPENED DURING OPERATION

17.3 Maintenance and repair

Check the oil level in the central lubricating unit regularly. If the oil level is too low it must
be topped up. Only use oil specified in Book C Operation/Maintenance, Chapter 10
Maintenance.

When filling the central lubricating reservoir, ensure that everything is extremely clean.
Dirt particles in the oil circuit can cause malfunctions and negatively affect the machine’s
operation.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 17-234

D Assemblies Assembly PD-083-000 Central lubricating unit

17.4 Drawings and parts list

17.4.1 Detail assembly drawing

(see next page)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 17-235

D Assemblies Assembly PD-083-000 Central lubricating unit

View from rear

(main spindle side)
View from rear
(sub-spindle side)

Art. Nr. 31414

Art. Nr. 31413

Art. Nr. 31418

Art. Nr. 31412

Art. Nr. 31416

Art. Nr. 31407

Art. Nr. 31411

Art. Nr. 31406

Art. Nr. 31410

Art. Nr. 31403

Art. Nr. 31418

Art. Nr. 31408

Art. Nr. 31408

Art. Nr. 31401

Art. Nr. 31402

Figure 17-2: Layout of central lubricating unit

Order length for polyamide tubing PR 4.2,5 w - 3500 mm; Order No. 100120061
Order length for polyamide tubing PR 6.4 h - 2500 mm; Order No. 100120064
Lubricating pulses every 2 min/5 min

MAKE SURE THAT THE PUMP ELEMENTS ARE CORRECTLY

ALLOCATED TO THE LUBRICATING POINTS!

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 17-236

D Assemblies Assembly PD-083-000 Central lubricating unit
17.4.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-083-000 Central lubricating unit; Article No.30873
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs Central lubricating package PD 30873
1 Pcs PD-060-003 Dummy cap oil reservoir 22075
1 Pcs SB-NC-145-005 Oil rating plate 30918

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 17-237

D Assemblies Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit

Technical Product Documentation

18 Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 18-238

D Assemblies Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit

18.1 Description
The pneumatic unit purifies the compressed air of the connected air supply from dust,
drains the compressed air and enriches it with oil to avoid a premature wear of all
following pneumatic components. The condensate is automatically emptied. The
pneumatic unit is situated on the rear of the machine.

Filler screw
Set screw of the air oiler

Pneumatic oiler Condensate separator

Main stop cock Pressure gauge for main

pressure

Main connection for Connection for

compressed air supply compressed air gun

Figure 18-1: Pneumatic unit

18.2 Handling

18.2.1 Filling the oil reservoir of the pneumatic unit

In order to refill the oil bowl the pneumatic system of the machine must be pressure-less!
The bowl can be refilled with oil by means of the filler screw. (see manual C
Operation/Maintenance, chapter 10 Maintenance for the oil types).

THE PNEUMATIC SYSTEM MUST BE ABSOLUTELY

PRESSURELESS BEFORE THE OIL CAN BE FILLED IN!

18.2.2 Setting the air oiler

The air in the pneumatic system has to be enriched with oil from the oil reservoir in order
to protect the pneumatic components from corrosion and wear. This is done by the air
oiler which must be set to dispense the proper amount of oil. Press the key MC which is
situated on the control panel (see book C Operation/Maintenance, chapter 8 Machine
specific options of the control Fanuc 32i-B for the location of the key). You get into the
message screen. Then press successively the softkeys „Clamping Parameters“ and
„Variables“. In the window which opens set the variable “Oil adjustment“ to “ON“. Then
observe the oiler. Set the air oiler in the way that an oil droplet forms every 10 to 12
seconds. This is done by turning the screw on the air oiler. Reset the variable “Oil
adjustment“ to “OFF“.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 18-239

D Assemblies Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit

18.3 Maintenance and upkeep

Check the oil level of the pneumatic unit periodically (depending on the status of the air).
If the oil level is too low refill the oil reservoir with the oil indicated in book C
Operation/Maintenance, chapter 10 Maintenance.

It is very important to be very clean when filling the pneumatic unit´s oil reservoir. Dirt
particles in the oil circuit can cause malfunctions and strongly affect the machine´s
operation.

Regularly empty the condensate separator by opening the drain plug. Regularly clean the
filter in the separator of the pneumatic unit. At the latest, change the filter when the
pneumatic unit is having problems.

18.4 Drawings and parts list

18.4.1 Exploded view drawing

(See following page)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 18-240

D Assemblies Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit

Figure 18-2: Exploded view drawing pneumatic - basic machine

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 18-241

D Assemblies Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit

18.4.2 Detail assembly - Pneumatic for options

Auxiliary assembly valve block  (Programmable air

connections)
Auxiliary assembly valve block  (Indexing
device/Shutting slide for gantry loader/Door opener)
Auxiliary assembly valve block  (Part catcher)

Figure 18-3: Detail assembly - Pneumatic for options

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 18-242

D Assemblies Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit
18.4.3 Pneumatic diagram with subspindle option

Figure 18-4: Pneumatic diagram with subspindle option

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 18-243

D Assemblies Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit

18.4.4 Parts list

Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit - basic machine
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs PD-095-001 Pneumatic feed-in 22357
2 Pcs Techno-Chemie banjo bolt 2, G1/8; 380221483040 22321
7 Pcs Techno-Chemie Sealing ring 2, DIN 7603; 391310800090 22322
2 Pcs Rexroth 5/2 path magnetic valve; 576 351 022 0 31128
1 Pcs Rexroth Check valve 1, G1/8; 534 098 100 0 31114
1 Pcs Rexroth Safety valve 10 bar; 134 607 011 0 3113
1 Pcs SB-NC-160-002 Distributor block 22310
1 Pcs Bosch Distributor tube 2F, G1/8; 1823 391 405 31133
2 Pcs Bosch Distributor ring 2F, G1/8; 1823 391 400 31134
1 Pcs Riegler Socket with washer, inner diameter 9 (236F) with nut 31138/
3/8 (234B) 31137
1 Pcs AVS Coupling connection NG5, G1/4, Typ 551M-1/4; 359010 21339
1 Pcs AVS Banjo bolt 5, short, Typ 164M-11-1/4A 22320
1 Pcs AVS Reducing nipple 2, 251M-1/8-1/4 22318
1 Pcs Rexroth Left connection plate; 898 512 100 2 31123
1 Pcs Rexroth Right connection plate; 898 512 101 2 31122
4 Pcs Rexroth Locking screw 1, G3/8, 893 014 201 4 31126
1 Pcs Rexroth Interlinking plate 2; 898 512 109 2 31121
1 Pcs Rexroth Locking screw 2, G1/8; 893 014 190 4 31129
1 Pcs Rexroth Sound absorber 1, G3/8; 532 401 112 0 31124
1 Pcs Rexroth Rapid connection Steck-Fix, G3/8 outer diameter 8mm; 31154
1823 391 159
1 Pcs Rexroth Pressure switch, G1/4; 341 058 020 0 31125
1 Pcs Murrelektronik, 6x distributor MVC6-VC3.0; 27812 31142
1 Pcs PD-095-005 Support plate for valve battery 22361
1 Pcs Bosch Rotatable L-turn threaded union pipe, G1/4, Tube 31231
D=8mm; 1823 391 205
2 Pcs PD-095-006 Spacer sleeve for terminal box 22362
1 Pcs PD-095-007 Support bracket for tank 22352
1 Pcs PD-095-002 Elbow 1 22358
1 Pcs PD-095-003 Elbow 2 22359
1 Pcs PD-095-004 Elbow 3 22360
1 Pcs GESA Tank, article number D 80 S 137 21854
4 Pcs Lapp Dummy screws 42075
2 Pcs Rexroth Connecting flange; 535 100 607 2 31118
1 Pcs Murelektronik MSUD valve plug; MSUD-CB1Z-G1.0 31193
1 Pcs Murrelektronik Plug with cable; 00025043 41103
1 Pcs Murrelektronik Connector M12 with valve plug; MSSL3-A- 31189
WAO.6
1 Pcs Festo ON-OFF valve HE-1/4-D-Mini 112615
3 Pcs Festo Blanking plug B-1/4 31120
1 Pcs Festo Double nipple E-1/4-3/8-MS 31139
1 Pcs Festo Silencer U-1/8 31145
1 Pcs Festo Quick coupling socket KD4-1/4-A 21339
2 Pcs Festo Branching module FRM-D-Mini 112614
1 Pcs Festo Push-in L-fitting QSLV-1/4-8 30206
1 Pcs Festo Manometer MA-40-16-1/8-EN 112616
1 Pcs Festo Fitting QSL-V-1/8-8 31130
1 Pcs Festo Filter LF-1/4-D-Mini-A 112619
6 Pcs SB-NC-160-009 Adapter plate 112609
1 Pcs Festo Elbow-fitting LJK-1/8 31132

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 18-244

D Assemblies Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatic unit
1 Pcs Festo Oiler LOE-1/8-D-Mini 112617
1 Pcs Festo Sleeve QM-1/8-A/I with Sealing ring 112618

Assembly PD-095-000 Pneumatics for options

Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
9 Pcs Rexroth 5-port solenoid valve with 2 outlets Magnet/Spring; 576 31128
351 022 0
1 Pcs Rexroth 5-port solenoid valve with 2 outlets Magnet/Magnet; 31158
576 352 022 0
1 Pcs Rexroth 5-port solenoid valve with 3 outlets Magnet/Magnet; 31159
576 381 022 0
11 Pcs Rexroth Interlinking plate 1; 898 512 105 2 31153
3 Pcs Rexroth Left connection plate; 898 512 100 2 31122
3 Pcs Rexroth Right connection plate; 898 512 101 2 31122
7 Pcs Rexroth Locking screw 1, G3/8; 893 014 201 4 31126
6 Pcs Rexroth Sound absorber 1, G3/8; 532 401 112 0 31124
1 Pcs Bosch Angle swivel screw fitting 4, G3/8, tube D=8; 1823 391 31131
167
4 Pcs Bosch Rapid connection Steck-Fix, G3/8, tube outer diameter 31154
8; 1823 391 159
2 Pcs Murrelektronik 4x distributor MVC4-VC3.0; 27802 31141
1 Pcs Murrelektronik 6x distributor, MVC6-VC3.0; 27812 31142
2 Pcs Rexroth Blanking plate; 898 512 149 2 31147
1 Pcs PD-095-005 Support plate for valve battery 22361
8 Pcs Bosch Rapid connection Steck-Fix G1/4, tube outer diameter 8; 31155
1823 373 012
8 Pcs AVS Coupling connection type 551M-1/4 21339
4 Pcs Bosch Straight connection reduced Ø4 Ø8 31227
1 Pcs Bosch Pilot-controlled check valve 31266

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 18-245

D Assemblies Assembly PD-114-000 Electric cabinet (Fanuc)

Technical Product Documentation

19 Assembly PD-114-000 Electric cabinet

(Fanuc)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 19-246

D Assemblies Assembly PD-114-000 Electric cabinet (Fanuc)

19.1 Description
The electric cabinet is used to contain all electrical components of the machine. Its design
complies with EMC requirements. The electric cabinet cooling system mounted on the
electric cabinet serves to keep the interior of the electric cabinet at a moderate
temperature. It consists of a cooling system with an air conditioning compressor. The use
of this device permits safe cooling of the electric cabinet without direct air exchange.

19.2 Maintenance and repair

The air supply and exhaust vents of the electric cabinet cooling system must always be
kept clear. If the cooling performace decreases, it may be necessary to clean the electric
cabinet cooling system in compliance with the manufacturer’s guidelines.

19.3 Drawings and parts list

19.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 19-247

D Assemblies Assembly PD-114-000 Electric cabinet (Fanuc)

Figure 19-1: Exploded view drawing of electric cabinet Fanuc

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 19-248

D Assemblies Assembly PD-114-000 Electric cabinet (Fanuc)
19.3.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-123-000 Electric cabinet Fanuc Art. 134359
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs Rear wall cap 101738
1 Pcs Rear door 101736
1 Pcs Electric cabinet housing 132778
1 Pcs PD door rear side 132310
1 Pcs Right door 101735
1 Pcs Left door 132788
1 Pcs Mounting plate 132787

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 19-249

 Schaltschrank-Kühlgerät
Cooling unit
Climatiseur
Koelaggregat
Kylaggregat
Condizionatori per armadi
di comando
Refrigerador para armarios

SK 3302.xxx SK 3328.xxx
SK 3302.3xx SK 3329.xxx
SK 3303.xxx SK 3332.xxx
SK 3304.xxx SK 3361.xxx
SK 3305.xxx SK 3366.xxx

Montage-, Installations- und Bedienungsanleitung

Assembly and operating instructions
Manuel d’installation et de maintenance
Montage- en bedieningshandleiding
Montage- och hanteringsanvisning
Istruzioni di montaggio e funzionamento
Instrucciones de montaje
Contents
1 Notes on documentation. . . . . . . . . . 4 5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 EN
1.1 Associated documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 CE labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3 Retention of documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6.1 Control using the Basic controller . . . . . 21
1.4 Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6.1.1 Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.2 Operating and error display. . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2 Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6.1.3 Test mode for the Basic controller . . . . . . . 23
6.1.4 Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6.1.5 Resetting the Basic controller . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6.2 Control using the e-Comfort controller . 23
3.1.1 How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6.2.1 Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1.2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6.2.2 Eco-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.1.3 Bus mode (e-Comfort controller only). . . . . . 5 6.2.3 Launching test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.1.4 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.4 General programming information . . . . . . . 24
3.1.5 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.5 Editable parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1.6 Filter mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.6 Programming overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.1.7 Door limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.7 Defining system messages
3.1.8 Additional interface X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 for evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 Proper usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.8 Setting the master-slave identifier . . . . . . . 28
3.3 Scope of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.9 Evaluating system messages. . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.2.10 Resetting the e-Comfort controller . . . . . . . 30
4 Assembly and connection . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 Choosing the installation site . . . . . . . . . . 7
7 Inspection and maintenance. . . . . . 30
4.2 Assembly instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7.1.1 Compressed air cleaning
4.2.2 Layout of the electronic components SK 3304.xxx, SK 3305.xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
in the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7.1.2 Compressed air cleaning
4.3 Fitting the cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SK 3328.xxx, SK 3329.xxx, SK 3332.xxx . . 34
4.3.1 Cutting out on the enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3.2 External mounting of the cooling unit . . . . . . 9 8 Storage and disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.3.3 Partial internal mounting
of the cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . 39
4.3.4 Full internal mounting of the cooling unit . . 11
4.4 Connecting the condensate discharge. . 12 10 List of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.5 Notes on electrical installation . . . . . . . . 12
4.5.1 Connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11 Appendix:
4.5.2 Overvoltage protection Cut-out and hole sizes . . . . . . . . . . . 47
and supply line load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11.1 Dimensions for external mounting . . . . . 47
4.5.3 Three-phase devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11.2 Dimensions for partial
4.5.4 Door limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 internal mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.5.5 Notes on the flicker standard . . . . . . . . . . . 13 11.3 Dimensions for full internal mounting . . 49
4.5.6 Potential equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.6 Carrying out the electrical installation . . 13
4.6.1 Bus connection
(only in conjunction with several units with
an e-Comfort controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.6.2 Connection X3 for serial interface. . . . . . . . 13
4.6.3 Installing external transformers. . . . . . . . . . 13
4.6.4 Installing the power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.7 Finalising assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.7.1 Installing the filter media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.7.2 Fitting the cooling unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.7.3 Setting the filter mat monitor
(only with e-Comfort controller). . . . . . . . . . 20

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 3

 1 Notes on documentation
1 Notes on documentation 2 Safety instructions
EN These assembly instructions are aimed at tradesper-
sons who are familiar with assembly and installation
Please observe the following general safety instruc-
tions when assembling and operating the unit:
of the cooling unit, and at trained specialists who are – Assembly, installation and servicing may only be
familiar with operation of the cooling unit. performed by properly trained specialists.
– Screw the enclosure to the floor to prevent it from
1.1 Associated documents tipping over when the cooling unit is installed.
There are two sets of instructions for the unit types – Do not obstruct the air inlet and air outlet of the
described here: cooling unit inside and outside the enclosure
– Assembly and installation instructions enclosed (see also section 4.2.2).
with the unit in the form of a paper document – To ensure problem-free opening and closing of
– Assembly, installation and operating instructions the enclosure door, use a ride-up door roller (refer
enclosed with the unit in the form of a PDF file to the accessories in the Rittal Catalogue).
(Adobe Acrobat) on CD-ROM This raises the door slightly and balances out the
We cannot accept any liability for damage associat- weight of the cooling unit, to prevent buckling of
ed with failure to observe these instructions. Where the door and associated seal problems.
applicable, the instructions for any accessories used – The heat loss of the components installed in the
also apply. enclosure must not exceed the specific useful
cooling output of the cooling unit.
1.2 CE labelling – When transporting the enclosure with the cooling
The declaration of conformity is supplied with the unit unit externally mounted, always use an additional
as a separate document. shipping brace to support the cooling unit.
– The cooling unit must always be transported in an
1.3 Retention of documents upright position.
These instructions and all associated documents – Use only original spare parts and accessories.
constitute an integral part of the product. They must – Do not make any changes to the cooling unit other
be given to the plant operator. The plant operator is than those described in these instructions or asso-
responsible for storage of the documents so they are ciated instructions.
readily available when needed. – Risk of burn injuries! For cooling units with auto-
matic condensate evaporation, the surface of the
1.4 Symbols used thermal element will get very hot during operation,
Please observe the following safety instructions and and will remain so for some time afterwards.
other notes in this guide: – The mains connector of the cooling unit must only
Symbol for an instructed action: be connected and disconnected with the system
• The bullet point indicates that you should perform de-energised. Connect the pre-fuse specified on
an action. the rating plate.
Safety and other instructions:

Danger!
Immediate danger to life and limb!

Caution!
Potential threat to the product
and its environment.

Note:
Useful information
and special features.

4 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 3 Device description
3 Device description into the hermetically sealed cooling circuit provides
effective protection against moisture, acid, dirt
Depending on the model chosen, your cooling unit
may vary in appearance from the illustrations con- particles, and foreign bodies within the cooling EN
tained in these instructions. However, the functions circuit.
are identical in principle. Condenser (3)
PSAH
8 pressure-
operated
switch
9 Condenser fan
1 Compressor Filter dryer (5)
(2)
14
2
10 External circuit
3
Internal circuit
Temperature
4 control
5 11
Evaporator coil (1)
6 12 Expansion valve (4)
Evaporator fan
13
Fig. 2: Cooling circuit
7
In the evaporator coil (1), the liquid coolant is con-
verted to a gaseous state. The energy needed for
this purpose is taken from the enclosure air in the
form of heat, which has the effect of cooling the
15 enclosure air. In the compressor (2), the coolant is
16 heavily compressed, so that it achieves a higher
Fig. 1: Device description temperature inside the condenser (3) than the ambi-
ent air. This means that excess heat may be emitted
Legend
to the ambient air via the surface of the condenser,
1 Blind rivet nut
2 Evaporator fan as a result of which the temperature of the coolant
3 Electrical wiring plan drops and it is converted back into liquid. It is re-
4 X2 master-slave connection injected into the evaporator coil via a thermostatic
5 X3 optional serial interface expansion valve (4), which causes it to cool down
6 X1 terminal strip further, and is then once again able to absorb the
7 Air outlet hole energy from the enclosure air in the evaporator coil.
8 Front half of the enclosure The whole cycle begins again.
9 Rear half of the enclosure
10 Louvred grille for air outlet 3.1.2 Control
11 Display Rittal enclosure cooling units are fitted with a con-
12 Infill panel troller for setting the functions of the cooling unit.
13 Louvred grille for air inlet
Depending on the design, this is either a Basic con-
14 Rating plate
troller (display of the operating status via LED) or a
15 Condensate discharge
16 Dispatch bag e-Comfort controller (display plus extended func-
tions, see chapter “6 Operation”, page 21).
3.1 Functional description
3.1.3 Bus mode (e-Comfort controller only)
Enclosure cooling units are designed to dissipate
The serial unit interface X2 allows you to create a bus
heat from enclosures by cooling the air inside the
connection with up to ten cooling units using the
enclosure and so protect the temperature-sensitive
master-slave cable (shielded, four-wire cable, Model
components. They are built into the side or rear
No. SK 3124.100). This allows you to implement the
panel or into the door of the enclosure.
following functions:
3.1.1 How it works – Parallel unit control (the cooling units in the network
The cooling unit (compression refrigeration system) can be switched on and off simultaneously)
is comprised of four main components (cf. Fig. 2): – Parallel door status message (“door open”)
the evaporator (1), the coolant compressor (2), the – Parallel collective fault message
condenser (3), and the control or expansion valve Data is exchanged via the master-slave connection.
(4), which are connected by suitable pipework. This During commissioning, assign an address to each
circuit is filled with a readily boiling substance, the unit that also includes the identifier “master” or
refrigerant. Coolant R134a (CH2FCF3) is chlorine- “slave”.
free. Its ozone destruction potential is 0, making it
very eco-friendly. A filter dryer (5) which is integrated

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 5

 3 Device description
3.1.4 Safety equipment 3.1.6 Filter mats
– In the cooling cycle, the cooling unit has a tested The cooling unit condenser is finished all over with a
EN pressure-operated switch to EN 12 263 which is dirt-repelling, easy-to-clean RiNano coating. In many
set to maximum PS (admissible pressure); this cases, therefore, the use of filter media is unneces-
operates via an automatic reset device whenever sary, particularly in the case of dry dusts.
the pressure drops again. For dry, coarse dust and lint in the ambient air, we
– Temperature monitoring prevents the evaporator recommend installing an additional PU foam filter
coil from icing over. If there is a risk of icing, the mat (available as an accessory) in the cooling unit.
compressor switches itself off and automatically Depending on the incidence of dust, you will need
switches itself back on again at higher tempera- to replace the filter from time to time.
tures. For air containing oil condensation, we recommend
– The refrigerant compressor and the fans are the use of metal filters (also available as an accesso-
equipped with thermal winding shields to protect ry). These may be cleaned with suitable detergents
against excess current and excess temperatures. and reused.
– In order to allow a reduction of pressure inside the Function of the filter mat monitor:
compressor and hence a safe restart, once it has Dirt on the filter mat is automatically determined by
been switched off (e.g. upon reaching the set tem- measuring the temperature difference in the external
perature via the door limit switch function or via de- circuit of the cooling unit. As the level of filter mat soil-
energising), the device will switch back on with a ing rises, the temperature difference will increase.
delay of 180 seconds. The nominal value of the temperature difference in
– The device has floating contacts on the connection the external circuit adapts automatically to the rele-
pins (terminals 3 – 5), via which system messages vant operating points in the performance diagrams.
from the device may be polled, e.g. using a PLC Hence there is no need to readjust the nominal value
(1x change-over contact Basic controller, 2 x nor- for different operating points of the cooling unit.
mally open contacts e-Comfort controller).
3.1.7 Door limit switch
3.1.5 Condensation The cooling unit may be operated with a floating door
At high levels of humidity and low temperatures in- limit switch connected. The door limit switch is not in-
side the enclosure, condensation may form on the cluded with the supply (available as an accessory,
evaporator coil. Model No. PS 4127.010).
The cooling units (except SK 3302.xxx, SK 3303.xxx The door limit switch function causes the fans and
and SK 3361.xxx) have automatic, electric conden- the compressor in the cooling unit to be switched off
sate evaporation. The thermal component used for after approximately 15 seconds when the enclosure
this purpose is based on self-regulating PTC tech- door is opened (contacts 1 and 2 closed). This pre-
nology. Condensate arising on the evaporator coil vents the formation of condensation inside the enclo-
is collected in a tank in the external circuit of the cool- sure while the enclosure door is open. In order to
ing unit, and partially evaporated via the airflow. prevent damage to the unit, it is equipped with an
When the water level rises, the water enters the PTC ON delay: The evaporator fan cuts back in with a de-
thermal component and is evaporated (through-flow lay of approximately 15 seconds after the door has
heater principle). The water vapour streams out of been closed, while the condenser fan and compres-
the cooling unit with the airflow from the external fan. sor switch on after approximately 3 minutes.
The PTC thermal component is permanently con-
nected and has no switchpoint. It is protected Note:
against short-circuits with miniature fuses (F1.1,
– No external voltage must be applied to
F1.2). If the fuse has tripped, any condensation is
the door contacts (terminals 1 and 2).
drained off via the safety overflow.
– For Basic controller cooling units with
For unit types SK 3302.xxx, SK 3303.xxx and
230/115 V and 400 V/2-phase connec-
SK 3361.xxx, the condensation is routed downwards
tion, the evaporator fan remains opera-
out of the unit via a drain pipe on the evaporator coil
tional even with the door open.
divider panel. For this purpose, a hose must be con-
nected to the condensate nozzle (see “4.4 Connect-
ing the condensate drain”, page 12). External con-
densate evaporators are available as accessories
for these unit types (refer also to the accessories in
the Rittal Catalogue).

6 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 4 Assembly and connection
3.1.8 Additional interface X3 4 Assembly and connection
Note: 4.1 Choosing the installation site
EN
The electrical signals at the interface are of When choosing the installation site for the enclosure,
an extra-low voltage (not extra-low safety please observe the following:
voltages to EN 60 335). – The site for the enclosure, and hence the arrange-
An additional interface card may be connected to ment of the cooling unit, must be carefully selected
the 9-pole SUB-D connector X3 in order to incor- so as to ensure good ventilation (distances bet-
porate the cooling unit into higher-level monitoring ween units and distances between the unit and the
systems (available as an accessory, interface card wall must be at least 200 mm in each case).
Model No. SK 324.200). – The cooling unit must be installed and operated in
a vertical position (maximum deviation: 2°).
3.2 Proper usage – The site must be free from excessive dirt and
Rittal enclosure cooling units were developed and moisture.
designed in accordance with the state-of-the-art and – The ambient temperature must not exceed 55°C.
the recognised rules governing technical safety. – It must be possible to fit a condensate discharge
Nevertheless, if used improperly, they may pose a (see “4.4 Connecting the condensate discharge”,
threat to life and limb or cause damage to property. page 12).
The unit is only intended for cooling enclosures. Any – The mains connection data as stated on the rating
other use is deemed improper. The manufacturer will plate of the unit must be guaranteed.
not be liable for any damages caused as a result of
improper use, or for incorrect assembly, installation 4.2 Assembly instructions
or use. All risk is borne solely by the user.
Proper usage also includes the observation of all 4.2.1 General
valid documents and compliance with the inspection – Check the packaging carefully for signs of damage.
and servicing conditions. Traces of oil on damaged packaging are an indi-
cation of refrigerant loss and leakages. Packaging
3.3 Scope of supply damage may be the cause of a subsequent func-
The unit is supplied in a packaging unit in a fully tional failure.
assembled state. – The enclosure must be sealed on all sides (IP 54).
Please check the delivery for completeness: Increased condensation will occur if the enclosure
is not airtight.
Qty. Description
– In order to avoid excessive condensation inside
1 Enclosure cooling unit the enclosure, we recommend installing a door
1 Dispatch bag: limit switch (e.g. PS 4127.010) which deactivates
1 – Assembly and installation instructions the cooling unit when the enclosure door is opened
1 – Assembly, installation and operating (see “3.1.7 Door limit switch”, page 6).
instructions on CD-ROM
1 – Safety instructions
1 – Self-adhesive tape
1 – Connector X1
4 – 10 – Self-tapping screws
1 – Declaration of conformity
– Nuts, washers
1 Drilling template
Tab. 1: Scope of supply

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 7

 4 Assembly and connection
4.2.2 Layout of the electronic components x
in the enclosure
EN
Caution!
Risk of condensation!
When arranging the components inside
the enclosure, please ensure that the
cold airflow from the cooling unit is not
directed at active components. Please
also ensure that the cold airflow is not
directed at the warm exhaust airflow
from active components such as con-
verters. This may lead to an air short-
circuit and therefore prevent adequate
climate control, or may even cause the
cooling unit’s internal safety devices to Fig. 4: Air circulation inside the enclosure
cease cooling operation.
4.3 Fitting the cooling unit
The enclosure cooling unit may optionally be exter-
nally mounted on the enclosure (1), partially internal-
ly mounted (2) or fully internally mounted (3):

1 2 3

Fig. 3: Never direct the cold airflow at active components

Fig. 5: Installation method
Air diversion components are available as accesso-
ries – please refer to the Rittal catalogue. To this end, cut the side panel or door of the enclo-
It is important to ensure even air circulation inside the sure as per the drilling template included with the
enclosure. Under no circumstances should air inlet supply, and drill the relevant holes.
and outlet openings be obstructed, otherwise the
cooling performance of the unit will be reduced. Note:
Ensure the distance “x” (see Fig. 4) from electronic Units of type SK 3302.xxx can only be either
components and other installed enclosures so that externally mounted or fully internally moun-
the required air circulation is not obstructed and pre- ted.
vented. Units of type SK 3332.xxx can only be either
externally mounted or partially internally
mounted.
For mounting the units SK 3328.xxx,
SK 3329.xxx and SK 3332.xxx in the TS side
panel or rear panel, we recommend the use
of enclosure panel fasteners TS 8800.071
(see Rittal Catalogue).

8 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 4 Assembly and connection
4.3.1 Cutting out on the enclosure
• Stick the supplied drilling template onto the side
panel or door of the enclosure using adhesive EN
tape.
There are dimensioning lines on the drilling template
to suit the various installation options for your cooling
unit.
• Using the dimension drawings (see Appendix),
identify the valid lines and dimensions for your
installation type on the drilling template.

Risk of injury! Fig. 8: Secure the cooling unit

(SK 3302.1xx “external mounting” only)
Carefully deburr all drilled holes and
cut-outs to prevent injuries caused by 4.3.3 Partial internal mounting of the cooling unit
sharp edges. • Carefully remove the louvred grille and, where
• Mark, drill and deburr the holes. applicable, the infill panel, from the enclosure by
• Make the cut-outs including the line width as per pulling forwards.
the drilling template. • Carefully disconnect the connector from the rear of
Deburr the cut-outs. the display and gently push it inwards through the
cable gland.
4.3.2 External mounting of the cooling unit
• Cut the supplied sealing tape to the correct length
and stick it carefully along the back of the unit so
that no gaps are left at the joints.

Fig. 6: Attach the sealing tape

• Screw the supplied grub screws into the blind nuts

on the rear of the unit.
• Secure the unit using the supplied washers and Fig. 9: Remove the louvred grille & disconnect the display
nuts.
Risk of damage!
Stability of the cooling unit is only
guaranteed in its assembled state.
Brace the rear enclosure half to prevent
it from falling over before removing the
front enclosure half.
• Loosen the four nuts on the front enclosure half and
pull the enclosure forwards by approx. 5 cm.
• Loosen the flat-pin connectors of the PE conductor
between the two enclosure halves.
• Disconnect the fan connection.
Fig. 7: Secure the cooling unit
(all models except SK 3302.1xx) • Remove the front enclosure tray completely.

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 9

 4 Assembly and connection

EN

Fig. 10: Remove the cover Fig. 12: Secure the cooling unit
• Remove the four spacer bolts. • Connect the fan connector and PE conductor.
• Cut the supplied sealing tape to the correct length • Mount the front enclosure tray using the washers
and stick it carefully along the inside of the rear and nuts.
enclosure half so that no gaps are left at the con-
nection points.

Fig. 11: Attach the sealing tape

• Push the rear enclosure half into the mounting cut-

out and secure it with the four spacer bolts.
• Push the display cable through the cable gland of
the front enclosure half.

Fig. 13: Connect the display connector

• Carefully connect the display connector.
• Push the louvred grille and, where applicable,
the infill panel, onto the enclosure.

10 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 4 Assembly and connection
4.3.4 Full internal mounting of the cooling unit Only for SK 3302.xxx:
• Carefully remove the louvred grille and the infill • Before installing, remove the four screws as shown.
panel from the enclosure by pulling forwards. EN
• Carefully disconnect the connector from the rear of
the display. 4x

Fig. 16: Only for SK 3302.xxx: Remove the four screws

Fig. 14: Remove the louvred grille and disconnect

the display
• Cut the supplied sealing tape to the correct length
and stick it carefully along the front enclosure half
so that no gaps are left at the connection points.

Fig. 17: Secure the cooling unit

Fig. 15: Attach the sealing tape • Where necessary, additionally secure the unit
• Loosen the four nuts and washers from the front using the supplied mounting plates as shown in
enclosure half. Fig. 17.
• Push the unit into the mounting cut-out from the • Carefully connect the display connector.
inside of the enclosure, and secure it to the en- • Push the louvred grille and, where applicable,
closure from the outside using the washers and the infill panel, onto the enclosure.
nuts.

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 11

 4 Assembly and connection
4.4 Connecting the condensate discharge 4.5.2 Overvoltage protection and supply line
load
EN Unit types SK 3302.xxx, SK 3303.xxx and
SK 3361.xxx support the installation of a condensate – The unit does not have its own overvoltage pro-
discharge hose (Ø 1/2˝). tection. Measures must be taken by the operator at
The condensate discharge the supply end to ensure effective lightning and
– must be laid with a suitable and constant gradient overvoltage protection. The mains voltage must
(no siphoning) not exceed a tolerance of ±10%.
– must be laid without kinks – In accordance with IEC 61 000-3-11, the unit is
– must not have a reduced cross-section if extended. intended solely for use at sites with a continuous
The condensate hose is available as an accessory current-carrying capacity (incoming mains power
(refer also to Accessories in the Rittal Catalogue). supply) of more than 100 A per phase and with
a supply voltage of 400/230 V. If necessary, the
power supply company must be consulted to
ensure that the continuous current-carrying capa-
city at the point of connection to the public grid is
sufficient for connection of such a unit.
– The fans and compressors in single- and three-
phase units are intrinsically safe (thermal winding
protection). The same also applies to the transfor-
mer versions of types SK 3304.510, SK 3305.510,
SK 3328.510 and SK 3329.510 and to special-
voltage units which are likewise equipped with a
transformer.
Fig. 18: Connecting the condensate discharge
– Install the slow pre-fuse specified on the rating
• Connect a suitable hose to the condensate nozzle plate (miniature circuit-breaker with appropriate
and secure using a hose clip. characteristic – e. g. K characteristic – or fuse
• Lay the condensate hose into a pay-off or into the gG standard type, power circuit-breaker or trans-
external condensate evaporator (refer to accesso- former circuit-breaker) to protect the cable and
ries in the Rittal Catalogue). equipment from short-circuits. Select a suitable
circuit-breaker in accordance with the information
4.5 Notes on electrical installation specified on the rating plate: Set it to the minimum
When performing the electrical installation, it is im- specified value. This will achieve the best short-
portant to observe all valid national and regional reg- circuit protection for cables and equipment.
ulations as well as the provisions of the responsible Example: Specified setting range 6.3 – 10 A;
power supply company. Electrical installation must set to 6.3 A.
only be carried out by a qualified electrician who is
responsible for compliance with the existing stand- 4.5.3 Three-phase devices
ards and regulations. – The three-phase version of models SK 3304.xxx,
SK 3305.xxx, SK 3328.xxx, SK 3329.xxx and
4.5.1 Connection data SK 3332.xxx must be connected to a TN network
– The connected voltage and frequency must with star earthing via a circuit-breaker for plant
correspond to the values stated on the rating plate. protection (current setting as per the rating plate).
– The cooling unit must be connected to the mains Three-phase units with special voltages must be
via an all-pin isolating device, which ensures at protected with a circuit-breaker for transformer
least 3 mm contact opening when switched off. protection (category AC-3) as per the rating plate.
– No additional temperature control may be connec- – Units designed for three phase 400/460 V feature
ted upstream of the unit at the supply end. additional monitoring of the rotary field or the
– Install the pre-fuse specified on the rating plate absence of a phase. If the rotary field is incorrect
to protect the cable and equipment from short- or a phase is absent, the unit will not run.
circuits.
– The mains connection must ensure low-noise
potential equalisation.

12 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 4 Assembly and connection
4.5.4 Door limit switch When interconnecting, please note the following:
– Each door limit switch must only be assigned to – De-energise the cooling units to be connected.
one cooling unit. – Ensure proper electrical insulation.
EN
– Several door limit switches may be connected in – Make sure the cables are not laid in parallel to
parallel and operated on one cooling unit. power lines.
– The minimum cross-section for the connection – Make sure that the lines are short.
cable is 0.3 mm2 for a cable length of 2 m.
– The line resistance to the door limit switch must not Caution!
exceed a maximum of 50 :. Regarding the last slave unit in the
– The door limit switch only supports a floating group, do not, under any circumstances,
connection; no external voltages. connect the remaining socket of the
– The contact of the door limit switch must be closed Y cable SK 3124.100 into interface X3
when the door is open. of the cooling unit!
The safety extra-low voltage for the door limit switch
is provided by the internal power pack: Current 4.6.2 Connection X3 for serial interface
approx. 30 mA DC. The interface card (Model No. SK 3124.200) may be
• Connect the door limit switch to terminals 1 and 2 connected to X3. This is used to evaluate system
of the connector. messages in a PLC, for remotely setting parameters
and monitoring, or for integration into the facility
4.5.5 Notes on the flicker standard management system.
The flicker limits specified in standard EN 61 000-3-3
or -3-11 are adhered to, provided the supply im- 4.6.3 Installing external transformers
pedance is less than approx. 1.5 :. For SK 3361.x40 only.
Where necessary, the unit operator should measure
the connected impedance or consult the responsible
power supply company. If there is no way of influenc-
ing the supply impedance and sensitive installed
Attachment of the Mounted on 35 mm
components (e.g. BUS) are subjected to interfer- unit’s rear panel support rail
ence, a line reactor or starting-current limiting device DIN EN 50 022
should be connected upstream of the cooling unit to
restrict the startup current of the cooling unit.

4.5.6 Potential equalisation

If, for EMC reasons, the unit is to be integrated into
the existing potential equalisation system at the
customer, a conductor with a larger nominal cross-
section can be connected to the potential equalisa-
tion connection point (attachment points) on wall- Electrical connection 230 V
mounted cooling units. cooling unit

According to the standard, the PE conductor in the

mains connection cable is not classified as an equi-
potential bonding conductor.

4.6 Carrying out the electrical installation Connection at

the customer’s
4.6.1 Bus connection
(only in conjunction with several units Fig. 19: Installing external transformers (SK 3361.x40 only)
with an e-Comfort controller)
When using several cooling units, the serial device
interface X2 can be used to connect up to ten cool-
ing units with the bus cable (Model No. SK 3124.100).

Note:
The electrical signals at the X2 interface are
of an extra-low voltage (not extra-low safety
voltages to EN 60 335-1).

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 13

 4 Assembly and connection

EN CMC

I/O unit

RTT Adr.: 09 RTT Adr.: 11 RTT Adr.: 12 RTT Adr.: 19

Master Slave Slave Slave

X1 X1 X1 X1

X2 X3 X2 X3 X2 X3 X2 X3

St. X2 X3 Bu. St. X2 St. X2 St. X2

X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
Bu. St. Bu. St. Bu.
3

Fig. 20: Connection example: Master-slave operation

Legend
1 Serial interface (Model No. SK 3124.200) X2 Master-slave connection Sub-D, 9-pole
2 Serial interface cable X3 Serial interface Sub-D, 9-pole
3 Master-slave bus cable (Model No. SK 3124.100) St. Sub-D connector, 9-pole
RTT Rittal TopTherm cooling units Bu. Sub-D jack, 9-pole
X1 Supply connection/door limit switch/alarms Adr. Address

X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2

Adr.: 06 Adr.: 11 Adr.: 12 Adr.: 13 Adr.: 14 Adr.: 15

1 2 2 2 2 2
L2 L2
X10 L1 N PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 N PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5
X2

X10

NPE 1 2 3 4 5
L2
L1

Adr.: 16

1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 4 3 2

Fig. 21: Connection example: Door limit switch and master-slave operation
Legend 4.6.4 Installing the power supply
1 Master cooling unit • Complete the electrical installation by following
2 Slave cooling units the wiring plan on the rear of the cooling unit
3 2-door enclosure with two door limit switches
(see Fig. 1 on page 5, for key see page 19).
4 Enclosure with door limit switch
• If you would like the system messages from the
cooling unit to be evaluated via the system
message relay, you should also connect a suitable
low-voltage cable to connection clamps 3 – 5.

14 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 4 Assembly and connection
SK 3302.100/.110, SK 3302.300/.310 EN
PE

21
5
Mains S1 A2

22
L1 L2 R1

L2
X1 L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5
N

1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
NTC I red B1
L N 2
Power S1 NTC E blue B2
Kx
8
Term

A1
2
F2 1 P

M1 M2 M4
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 F2

C4

C1

S
R C2
M M
C F3 1~ 1~

M2 M4
M1

Fig. 22: Electrical wiring plan no. 1

SK 3303.500/.510, SK 3303.600/.610, SK 3361.500/.510, SK 3361.600/.610

21

Mains S1
22

PE
5 L2
X1 L1 N PE 1 2 3 4 5 X2 X3

3 8 A2

1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
MS1 Serial NTC_I B1
L N S1 K2 K1 2
Power NTC_E B2
Kx 2
NTC_C B3
PE 2
NTC_A B4
2
Level B5

4
A1 Term

2
M1 M2 M4 F2 1 P F2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

C4
PE

C1

S
R
C2
M M
C F3 1~ 1~

M2 M4
M1

Fig. 23: Electrical wiring plan no. 2

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 15

 4 Assembly and connection

EN SK 3361.540/.640

Mains
L1 L2 PE

21
T1 S1 X2 X3

22
230 V 3 PE 8 PE A2
PE
5 L2
X1 L1 N PE 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 2
1 2 3 2 1 B1
MS1 Serial NTC I red
K2 K1 2
L N S1 NTC E blue B2
Power Kx 2
NTC C white B3
PE 2
NTC A yellow B4
2
Level green B5

4
A1 Term

2
M1 M2 M4 F2 1 P F2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

PE
C1

S R

M M
C F3 1~ 1~

M2 M4
M1

Fig. 24: Electrical wiring plan no. 3

SK 3304.500/.600/.510/.520/.504/.514/.610
21

S1
Mains
22

PE
5 X2 X3
A2

X1 L2
L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5 PE PE
N

L1 L2
F11 E1 3 6
T1

L N

2
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 NTC I red B1
MS1 Serial
PE L N 2
S1 NTC E blue B2
Power K2 K1 2
NTC C white B3
Kx
2
A1 NTC A yellow B4
2
Level green B5

4
Term
2
M1 M2 M4 F2
1 P
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

F2

C1

1
S R
M M
F3 1~ 1~
3
C
M2 M4
M1

Fig. 25: Electrical wiring plan no. 4

16 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 4 Assembly and connection
SK 3305.500/.510/.504/.514/.520, SK 3328.500/.510/.504/.514/.520, SK 3329.500/.510/.504/.514/.520,
SK 3305.600/.610, SK 3328.600/.610, SK 3329.600/.610 EN
X2 X3

21
L1 L2
N
PE S1 PE PE
Mains

22
5 T1
A2
L1 L2/N
L2
F10 F11 E1 X1 L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5 3 6
N

F11 E1
1 2 3

1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
MS1 Serial NTC I red B1
L N K2 K1 2
Power S1 NTC E blue B2
Kx
2
NTC C white B3
2
NTC A yellow B4
A1
2
Level green B5

4
Term

2
F2
M2 M4 1 P
M1
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
F2

A3
A R
4
C
C12
1
P C11
2
5
M M
1~ 1~
F3 M1
M2 M4

Fig. 26: Electrical wiring plan no. 5

SK 3304.540, SK 3304.544, SK 3305.540, SK 3305.544, SK 3328.540/.544, SK 3329.540/.544,

SK 3304.640, SK 3305.640, SK 3328.640, SK 3329.640, SK 3366.540, SK 3366.640
Mains

22 S1
21

PE X1 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 X2 X3
5
F11 F12 3 8
A2
E1
T1

3 2 1 1 2 2
2 4 1 3 NTC I red B1
MS1 Serial
Power K2 2
K1 B2
S1 NTC E blue
2
Kx NTC C white B3
2
NTC A yellow B4
2
Level green B5

A1 4
Term

M1 F3 F2 M2 F4 M4 F5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2

F2

U V
M M

F3 3~ 3~
W
M2 M4
M1

Fig. 27: Electrical wiring plan no. 6

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 17

 4 Assembly and connection

EN SK 3366.500/.510/.600/.610

21
Mains S1
L1 L2
N
PE A2

22
X2 X3
5
T1
L2 3 6
X1 L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5
L1 L2/N N
F11 F10 F11
E1
E1

1 2 3

1 2 3 2
1 2 3 2 1 M51 Serial NTC I red B1
L N K2 K1 2
Power S1 NTC E blue B2
Kx
2
NTC C white B3
2
A1 NTC A yellow B4
2
Level green B5
4
Term

2
F2
M1 M2 M4 1 P

3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3
F2

A1
A3
1
1
C1.2
2 C1.1 C4
2
5

A P
C2 M M
1~ 1~ 1~
F3
C M2 M4
M1

Fig. 28: Electrical wiring plan no. 7

SK 3332.540/.640
21

S1
Mains
22

A2
PE
X2 X3
6 X1 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5
3 8
F11 F12

T1 E1

3 2 1 1 2 2 4 1 3 2
NTC I red B1
MS1 Serial
R S T 2
K2 K1 NTC E blue B2
Power S1
2
Kx NTC C white B3
2
NTC A yellow B4
2
A1 Level green B5

4
Term

M1 F3 F2 M2 F4 M4 F5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2

U
V F2

M M
P
3~ 3~
W
M2 M4
M1

Fig. 29: Electrical wiring plan no. 8

18 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 4 Assembly and connection
Legend
A1 Power PCB
A2 Display terminal EN
A3 Starter relay and RC element
B1 Temperature sensor, internal temperature
B2 Icing hazard temperature sensor
B3 Condenser temperature sensor
B4 Ambient temperature sensor
B5 Condensate warning sensor (optional)
C1.2 Start-up capacitor
C1.1, C2, C4 Running capacitors
E1 Condensate evaporator
F2 PSAH pressure-operated switch (3302.1x0 has bridge instead of pressostat)
F3 Bimetal contact compressor
F11/F12 Miniature fuses, condensate evaporator
K1 Relay collective fault 1
K2 Relay collective fault 2
L1 LED operational green
L2 LED alarm red
M1 Compressor
M2 Condenser fan
M4 Evaporator fan
R1 Potentiometer for setting the temperature
S1 Door limit switch (without door limit switch: terminal 1, 2 open)
T1 Transformer (optional)
X1 Main terminal strip
X2 Master-slave connection
X3 Optional interface

Note:
For technical data refer to the rating plate.

AC DC
cos f = 1 L/R = 20 ms
I max. = 2 A I min. = 100 mA
U max. = 250 V U max. = 200 V
U min. = 18 V
I max. = 2 A
Tab. 2: Contact data

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 19

 5 Commissioning
4.7 Finalising assembly 4.7.3 Setting the filter mat monitor
(only with e-Comfort controller)
EN 4.7.1 Installing the filter media Function of the filter mat monitor:
The cooling unit condenser is finished all over with a Dirt on the filter mat is automatically detected by
dirt-repelling, easy-to-clean RiNano coating. In many measuring the temperature difference in the external
cases, therefore, the use of filter media is unneces- circuit of the cooling unit (see “6.2.6 Programming
sary, particularly in the case of dry dusts. overview”, page 26). As the level of filter mat soiling
For dry, coarse dust and lint in the ambient air, we rises, the temperature difference will increase. The
recommend installing an additional PU foam filter nominal value of the temperature difference in the
mat (available as an accessory) in the cooling unit. external circuit adapts automatically to the relevant
For air containing oil condensation, we recommend operating points in the performance diagrams.
the use of metal filters (also available as an accesso- Hence there is no need to readjust the nominal value
ry). When used in textile plants with heavy lint con- for different operating points of the cooling unit.
tamination, lint screens should be used (available as
an optional extra).
• Pull the louvred air inlet grille from the enclosure.
• Insert the filter mat into the louvred grille as shown 5 Commissioning
in Fig. 30 and push it back onto the enclosure.
Caution! Risk of damage!
The oil must collect in the compressor in
order to ensure effective lubrication and
cooling.
Do not operate the cooling unit for
at least 30 min. after assembling the
equipment.
• Once all the assembly and installation work is com-
plete, switch on the power supply to the cooling
unit.
Fig. 30: Installing the filter mat The cooling unit starts running:
– With Basic controller: The green operating LED
4.7.2 Fitting the cooling unit (“line”) is illuminated.
For partial and full internal mounting only. – With e-Comfort controller: The software version
• Connect the connector to the rear of the display. of the controller first appears for approx. 2 sec.,
• Place the louvred grille onto the unit at the front, followed by “ECO” for activated eco-mode. Then
and press it down until you hear it snap into place. the enclosure internal temperature appears in the
7-segment display.
You can now make your individual settings on the
unit, e.g. set the temperature or (with e-Comfort con-
troller only) assign the network identifier, etc. (refer to
the “Operation” chapter).

Fig. 31: Connect the display and attach the louvred grille

20 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 6 Operation
6 Operation 6.1.1 Properties
– Two voltage variants are supported:
You can operate the cooling unit using the controller
on the front of the device (Fig. 1, no. 11, page 5). – 115 V
EN
Depending on the model, the unit is equipped with – 230 V
a Basic or an e-Comfort controller. – Integral start-up delay and door limit switch
function
6.1 Control using the Basic controller – Protective function to prevent icing
For unit types SK 3302.xxx. – Monitoring of all motors (compressor,
condenser fan, evaporator fan)
1
– Phase monitoring for three-phase units
– Visualisation of the operating status via LED
display:
– Voltage on, unit operational
– Door open (only if door limit switch installed)
– Warning of overtemperature
– High-pressure-operated switch has switched
3 4 – Switching hysteresis: 5 K.
If the cooling unit is oversized and compressor
running times are < 1 minute the switching
hysteresis is automatically increased to protect
the cooling unit.
– Floating system message contact in case
2
of overtemperature
5
– Temperature setting
(setting range 30 – 55°C) via potentiometer
Fig. 32: Basic controller – Test function
Legend – System messages via flashing mode
1 Controller trim panel (see “6.1.2 Operating and error system”,
2 Temperature setting page 22)
3 LED green (“line”)
4 LED red (“alarm”)
The cooling unit operates automatically i.e. after
5 Reset button
switching on the power supply, the evaporator fan
(see Fig. 2, page 5) will run continuously and perma-
nently circulate the internal enclosure air. The built-in
Basic controller ensures automatic normal shut-
down operation of the cooling unit by the value of the
fixed preset switching difference of 5 K.

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 21

 6 Operation
6.1.2 Operating and error display
The Basic controller monitors and controls the cool-
EN ing unit. It indicates the operating and error status via
the green and red LEDs (Fig. 32, no. 3 and 4):

LED Status Cause Solution

Green Illuminated Voltage present, –
(line) unit operational
Flashing Only with door limit switch installed: In order to avoid condensation, close the
Enclosure door open enclosure door as quickly as possible.
Only with door limit switch installed: Check the position of the door limit switch.
Enclosure door closed
Red Alarm/error/warning Number of Flash interval
(alarm) flash intervals
for the red LED
Implement Device reset (12) |_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|
a reset
High pressure alarm (0) |_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|
Sensors Potentiometer defective (3) |_|_|*****|_|_|*****|_|_|*****|_|_|*****|_|_|*****
or display error
Interior temperature (4) |_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|*****
sensor defective
Anti-icing sensor (5) |_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|
defective
Overload Compressor overloaded (6) |_|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|_|*****
Interior fan overloaded (7) |_|_|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|_|_|
Exterior fan overloaded (8) |_|_|_|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|*****
Device Overload mode (9) |_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|*****|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|_|*****
status/ (heat loss)
condition
Warning Anti-icing alarm (2) |_|*****|_|*****|_|*****|_|*****|_|*****|_|*****|_|
(ambient
conditions)
Off No No power – Check power supply
display
Rotary current phase – Swap phases
monitoring:
“LED off” = Incorrect
phase connection
Tab. 3: Operating and error display of the Basic controller
– Terminal 3: NC (normally closed)
Key to flash intervals – Terminal 4: C (connection of the supply voltage
| = 500 ms (red LED on) to the system message relay)
_ = 500 ms (red LED off) – Terminal 5: NO (normally open)
***** = 3 s pause (red LED off)
The NC and NO definitions refer to the de-energised
state. As soon as power is applied to the cooling unit,
The overtemperature message (red LED illuminated)
the system message relay picks up, so that the relay
may also be polled via an integral floating contact on
contacts change status (contact 3 – 4 open; contact
the connection clamp of the cooling unit (system
4 – 5 closed). This is the normal operating state of the
message relay with changeover contact, see con-
cooling unit. As soon as an error message occurs or
nection diagrams under “4.6.4 Installing the power
the power supply is interrupted, the relay drops out
supply”, page 14):
and contact 3 – 4 is closed.

22 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 6 Operation
6.1.3 Test mode for the Basic controller To change the temperature setting:
The Basic controller is equipped with a test function • Dismantle the trim panel of the controller as
whereby the cooling unit commences cooling ope- described in “6.1.3 Test mode for the Basic EN
ration independently of the set temperature or door controller”, page 23.
limit switch function. • Set the required temperature on the temperature
First you must dismantle the trim panel of the controller. setting device (Fig. 32, page 21).
• Switch off the mains voltage. • Carefully push the trim panel onto the display until
• Remove the louvred grille or infill panel in which the you hear it snap into place.
controller is installed. • Push the display back into the infill panel or louvred
• Release the display lock from behind and pull it grille.
forwards slightly. • Re-attach the louvred grille or infill panel to the
cooling unit.

6.1.5 Resetting the Basic controller

Following a high-pressure alarm in the cooling cycle,
and once the cause has been rectified, you will need
to manually reset the Basic controller:
• Dismantle the trim panel of the Basic controller
as described in “6.1.3 Test mode for the Basic
controller”, page 23.
• Press the reset button (Fig. 32, no. 5) for at least
3 sec.
The red LED is extinguished.
• Re-install the Basic controller.
Fig. 33: Loosen the trim panel of the Basic controller 6.2 Control using the e-Comfort controller
• Carefully raise the trim panel, e.g. using your For unit types SK 33xx.5xx and SK 33xx.6xx.
thumb or a flat screwdriver, and remove it.
1 2
You can now start test mode.
• Rotate the potentiometer to the left-hand stop, then
hold the rubberised potentiometer display down
while you re-connect the mains voltage.
The cooling unit will commence operation and the
green LED will flash (I_II_I_II_ . . .). Test mode is
completed after approximately 5 minutes. The unit
switches off and changes to normal operation.

Key
4 3
I = LED 500 ms on
_ = LED 500 ms off Fig. 34: e-Comfort controller
Legend
In normal operation, the green LED is permanently 1 Programming button, also display of the set
illuminated. temperature unit (degrees Celsius)
• Next, rotate the potentiometer back to the required 2 Set button
setpoint. 3 Programming button, also display of the set
temperature unit (degrees Fahrenheit)
6.1.4 Setting the temperature 4 7-segment display

6.2.1 Properties
Note:
– Three voltage variants are supported:
With the Basic controller, the temperature
– 115 V
is preset at the factory to +35°C. In order
– 230 V
to save energy, do not set the temperature
any lower than is actually necessary. – 400/460 V, 3-phase, supports multiple voltages
without rewiring
– Integral start-up delay and door limit switch
function

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 23

 6 Operation
– Protective function to prevent icing If required, the eco-mode can be deactivated via the
– Monitoring of all motors (compressor, control display. For this purpose switch the parame-
EN condenser fan, evaporator fan) ter from 1 to 0 in the programming level (see Tab. 4,
– Phase monitoring for three-phase units page 25). The fan then runs continuously.
– Master-slave function with a maximum of ten units. Setpoint
One device functions as a master unit. Once the Internal –5°C
Setpoint
set temperature is reached by one of the connect- temperature
–10°C
ed slave devices or in the event of the door limit
switch function, the affected slave unit will report ON
Internal fan
to the master unit, which will switch all the other status OFF
cooling units on or off as required. 10 min. 10 min. Time
– Switching hysteresis: Adjustable within the range 30 sec.
2 – 10 K, preset to 5 K.
– Visualisation of the current enclosure internal tem- Fig. 35: Diagram of eco-mode
perature and all error messages in the 7-segment
display. 6.2.3 Launching test mode
– Using an interface card (Model No. SK 3124.100), The e-Comfort controller is equipped with a test func-
the unit may be incorporated into higher-level tion whereby the cooling unit commences cooling
remote monitoring systems such as the Rittal operation independently of the set temperature or
Computer Multi Control CMC. door limit switch function.
The cooling unit operates automatically i.e. after • Simultaneously press buttons 1 and 2 (Fig. 34)
switching on the power supply, the evaporator fan for at least 5 sec.
(see Fig. 2, page 5) starts to run and circulates the The cooling unit will commence operation.
internal enclosure air. The compressor and con- After approximately 5 minutes, test mode will end.
denser fan are regulated by the e-Comfort controller. The unit switches off and changes to normal oper-
The e-Comfort controller has a 7-segment display ation.
(Fig. 34, no. 4). After switching on the power supply,
the current software version initially appears on this 6.2.4 General programming information
display for approx. 2 seconds, as well as the activat- Using buttons 1, 2 and 3 (Fig. 34) you can change
ed eco-mode. Followed by a preset option (e. g. t10) 24 parameters within the preset ranges (min. value –
or the temperature. max. value).
In regular operation, the display shows both the tem- Tables 4 and 5 show the parameters which can be
perature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit – users altered. Fig. 36 of page 26 shows which buttons
may switch between the two) and any error messages. must be pressed.
The current enclosure internal temperature is usually
displayed permanently. In the event of an error mes- Note on switching hysteresis:
sage, this will alternate with the temperature display. With a low hysteresis and short switching
The unit is programmed using buttons 1 – 3 (Fig. 34). cycles, there is a risk that cooling may not
The relevant parameters also appear in the display. be adequate or that only partial sections
of the enclosure are cooled. If the cooling
6.2.2 Eco-mode unit is oversized and compressor running
All Rittal TopTherm cooling units with e-Comfort times are < 1 minute the switching hysteresis
controller from firmware 3.2 have the energy-saving is automatically increased to protect the
eco-mode, which is activated in the delivered state. cooling unit.
The eco-mode is used to save energy in the cooling
unit if there is no thermal load, or there is a low ther- Note on temperature settings:
mal load in the enclosure (e. g. standby operation, With the e-Comfort controller, the tempe-
no production or weekend). During this process the rature is preset at the factory to +35°C.
evaporator fan in the internal circuit is switched off as In order to save energy, and due to the
appropriate if the actual enclosure internal tempera- risk of increased condensation, do not set
ture drops to 10 K below the setpoint temperature the temperature lower than that actually
set. To reliably measure the internal temperature necessary.
also during this process, the fan starts cyclically for
30 sec. (see Fig. 35). If the internal temperature Note on useful cooling output:
reaches the range 5 K below the setpoint set again, Interactive performance diagrams for
the fan switches back to continuous operation. calculating the useful cooling output may
be found at www.rittal.com.

24 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 6 Operation
In principle, the programming is identical for all • Keep the programming button ▲ (°C) held down
editable parameters. until “22” appears.
To enter programming mode: • Press button 2 (“Set”) to confirm the code. EN
• Press button 2 (“Set”) for approx. 5 sec. You can now alter the parameter within the preset
The controller is now in programming mode. While in limits.
programming mode, if you do not press any buttons • Press one of the programming buttons ▲ (°C) or
for approx. 30 sec., the display will first flash, then ▼ (°F) until the required value appears.
the controller will switch back to normal display • Press button 2 (“Set”) to confirm the change.
mode. The “Esc” display indicates that any made You can now alter other parameters in the same way.
changes have not been saved. There is no need to re-enter the authorisation code
• Press the programming buttons ▲ (°C) or ▼ (°F) “22”.
to switch back and forth between the editable • To exit programming mode, press button 2 (“Set”)
parameters (see tables 4 and 5). again for approximately 5 sec.
• Press button 2 (“Set”) to select the displayed “Acc” will appear in the display to indicate that the
parameter for editing. changes have been saved. The display will then
The current value of this parameter is displayed. switch back to regular operation (enclosure internal
• Press one of the programming buttons ▲ (°C) or temperature).
▼ (°F). You can also program the e-Comfort controller
The “Cod” display will appear. In order to be able to using a diagnosis software package (Model No.
change a value, you must enter the authorisation SK 3159.100), the supply of which also includes
code “22”. a connection cable to the PC. The cable connector
on the rear of the e-Comfort controller display serves
as an interface.

6.2.5 Editable parameters

See also Fig. 36 on page 26.

Progr. Display Parameter Min. Max. Factory Description

level screen value value setting
1 St Internal enclosure 20 55 35 The setting of the enclosure internal temperature
temperature is preset at the factory to 35°C and may be altered
setpoint Ti within a range of 20 – 55°C.
2 Fi Filter mat 10 60 99 To activate filter mat monitoring, set the display to
monitoring (= off) at least 10 K above the temperature differential
displayed in programming mode “Fi”. Filter mat
monitoring is preset to “deactivated” in the factory
(99 = off).
3 Ad Master-slave 0 19 0 See “6.2.8 Setting the master-slave identifier”,
identifier page 28.
4 CF Temperature 0 1 0 The temperature display can be switched from
conversion °C (0) to °F (1). The corresponding LED displays
°C/°F the current unit of temperature.
5 H1 Setting for 2 10 5 The cooling unit is preset in the factory to a
switching switching hysteresis of 5 K. This parameter should
difference only be changed in consultation with us.
(hysteresis) Please contact us for advice.
6 H2 Differential for 3 15 5 If the internal enclosure temperature exceeds the
error message A2 set value by more than 5 K, then error message
A2 (enclosure internal temperature too high)
appears on the display terminal. If necessary,
the differential may be altered here within the
range of 3 – 15 K.
26 ECO Eco-mode operation 0 1 1 Eco-mode OFF: 0 / Eco-mode ON: 1
Tab. 4: Editable parameters

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 25

 6 Operation
6.2.6 Programming overview

EN
= 5 sec.
= 5 sec.

Fig. 36: Programming overview

26 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 6 Operation
6.2.7 Defining system messages for evaluation A more detailed explanation of the system messages
System messages are shown on the display screen may be found in section “6.2.9 Evaluating system
of the e-Comfort controller via the displays A1 to A20 messages”, page 28. EN
and E0. See also Fig. 36 on page 26.

Progr. Display Min. Max. Factory Type or location of fault

level screen value value setting
7 A1 0 2 0 Enclosure door open
8 A2 0 2 0 Internal temperature of enclosure too high
9 A3 0 2 0 Filter monitoring
10 A4 0 2 0 Ambient temperature too high/too low
11 A5 0 2 0 Icing hazard
12 A6 0 2 1 PSAH pressure-operated switch
13 A7 0 2 2 Evaporator coil
14 A8 0 2 1 Condensate warning
15 A9 0 2 1 Condenser fan blocked or defective
16 A10 0 2 1 Evaporator fan blocked or defective
17 A11 0 2 2 Compressor
18 A12 0 2 1 Condenser
19 A13 0 2 1 Ambient temperature sensor
20 A14 0 2 1 Icing temperature sensor
21 A15 0 2 1 Condensate warning temperature sensor
22 A16 0 2 1 Internal temperature sensor
23 A17 0 2 1 Phase monitoring
24 A18 0 2 0 EPROM
25 A19 0 2 0 LAN/Master-Slave
Tab. 5: System messages which may be evaluated via relays

The system messages A1 – A19 may additionally be This is the normal operating state of the cooling unit.
evaluated via two floating system message relays. In As soon as a system message occurs or the power
this way, one of the two system message relays may supply is interrupted, the corresponding relay will
be allocated to each system message. drop out and open the contact.
System alarm relay with normally open contact: see
connection diagrams under “4.6.4 Installing the Program system messages with the value
power supply”, page 14: 0: System message is not sent to the system
– Terminal 3: NO (normally open, relay 2) message relay, but merely appears in the
– Terminal 4: C (connection of the supply voltage display
to the system message relay) 1: System message is evaluated by relay 1
– Terminal 5: NO (normally open, relay 1) 2: System message is evaluated by relay 2

The definition NO refers to the de-energised state.

As soon as power is applied to the cooling unit, both
system message relays (relay 1 and 2) energise.

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 27

 6 Operation
6.2.8 Setting the master-slave identifier On the slave cooling unit (00 = factory setting),
When several cooling units are connected together set its own address:
EN (maximum ten), one of the cooling units must be 11: Slave cooling unit no. 1
defined as the “master” and the others as “slaves”. 12: Slave cooling unit no. 2
For this purpose, assign a corresponding identifier 13: Slave cooling unit no. 3
(address) to each cooling unit which will enable the 14: Slave cooling unit no. 4
cooling unit to be identified in the network. 15: Slave cooling unit no. 5
If one of the slave units reaches the set temperature 16: Slave cooling unit no. 6
or if the door limit switch function is activated, the 17: Slave cooling unit no. 7
affected slave unit will report to the master unit, 18: Slave cooling unit no. 8
which then deactivates all the other cooling units. 19: Slave cooling unit no. 9

Notes:
– Only one unit may be configured as Master Slave Slave
02 11 12
master, and its identifier must match the
number of slave units connected.
– The slave units must have different Fig. 37: Master-slave connection (example)
identifiers. For further connection examples, see “4.6.1 Bus
– The identifiers must be numbered in connection (only in conjunction with several units
ascending order without any gaps. with an e-Comfort controller)”, page 13.
For details of how to set the identifier, see “6.2.5
Editable parameters”, page 25 or “6.2.6 Program-
On the master cooling unit (00 = factory setting),
ming overview”, page 26, parameter “Ad”.
set the number of slave units present in the network:
01: Master with 1 slave cooling unit 6.2.9 Evaluating system messages
02: Master with 2 slave cooling units In the e-Comfort controller, system messages are
03: Master with 3 slave cooling units indicated by a number in the display.
04: Master with 4 slave cooling units Following the appearance of messages A03, A06
05: Master with 5 slave cooling units and A07 and after rectifying their cause, you will
06: Master with 6 slave cooling units need to reset the e-Comfort controller (see “6.2.10
07: Master with 7 slave cooling units Resetting the e-Comfort controller”, page 30).
08: Master with 8 slave cooling units
09: Master with 9 slave cooling units

28 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 6 Operation
Display System message Possible cause Measures to rectify the fault
screen
A01 Enclosure door open Door open or door limit switch Close door, position door limit switch correctly,
EN
incorrectly positioned check connection if necessary
A02 Internal temperature Cooling capacity inadequate/unit undersized. Check cooling capacity
of enclosure too high Error as a consequence of messages A03 to
A17.
A03 Filter monitoring Filter mat soiled Clean or replace;
reset the e-Comfort controller
A04 Ambient temperature Ambient temperature outside of admissible Raise or lower the ambient temperature
too high/too low operating range (+10°C to +60°C) (e.g. heat or ventilate the room)
A05 Icing hazard Operational display in case of icing hazard. Set the enclosure interior temperature to
Evaporator coil fan may be mechanically a higher value. Check the evaporator fan;
blocked, defective, or cold air outlet release or exchange if necessary.
obstructed.
A06 PSAH pressure-operated Ambient temperature too high Lower the ambient temperature;
switch reset the e-Comfort controller
Condenser soiled Clean the condenser;
reset the e-Comfort controller
Filter mat soiled Clean or replace;
reset the e-Comfort controller
Condenser fan defective Replace; reset the e-Comfort controller
E-valve defective Have the sensor repaired by a refrigeration
engineer; reset the e-Comfort controller
PSAH pressure-operated switch defective Have the switch replaced by a refrigeration
engineer; reset the e-Comfort controller
A07 Evaporator coil Lack of coolant; sensor in front of or behind Have the sensor repaired by a refrigeration
condenser defective. engineer; reset the e-Comfort controller
A08 Condensate warning Condensate discharge kinked or blocked Check condensate discharge; repair any kinks
or blockages in the hose as necessary
Only in units with optional Check the evaporation unit,
condensate evaporation exchange if necessary
A09 Condenser fan Blocked or defective Clear the blockage; replace if necessary
A10 Evaporator fan Blocked or defective Clear the blockage; replace if necessary
A11 Compressor Compressor overloaded No action required;
(internal winding protection) unit switches back on automatically.
Defective Exchange by refrigeration engineer
(check by measuring the winding resistance)
A12 Condenser temperature Open or short-circuit Replace
sensor
A13 Ambient temperature Open or short-circuit Replace
sensor
A14 Icing temperature sensor Open or short-circuit Replace
A15 Condensate warning Open or short-circuit Replace
temperature sensor
A16 Internal temperature sensor Open or short-circuit Replace
A17 Phase monitoring For three-phase devices only: Exchange two phases
Incorrect rotary field/phase absent
A18 EPROM error New board obstructed Software update needed (only following board
installation with more recent software):
Enter the programming level with Code 22;
press button 1 and confirm with “Set” until
“Acc” appears. Next, disconnect the unit from
the mains and reconnect.
A19 LAN/Master-Slave Master and slave not connected Check setting and/or cable
A20 Voltage drop Error display not shown Event is stored in the log file
E0 Display message Connection problem between the display Reset: Switch power supply off, then switch
and the controller board on again after approx. 2 sec.
Cable defective; connection loose Exchange the boards
OL Overload Ambient parameters or heat loss outside of the applicable limits
b07 Cooling circuit leak Sensor B3 and B4 mixed up Correct sensor position
rSt Reset Manual device reset required,
see “6.2.10 Resetting the e-Comfort controller”, page 30.
Tab. 6: Troubleshooting with the e-Comfort controller

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 29

 7 Inspection and maintenance
6.2.10 Resetting the e-Comfort controller 7.1.1 Compressed air cleaning
After the occurrence of faults A03, A06 and A07, SK 3304.xxx, SK 3305.xxx
EN you will need to reset the e-Comfort controller.
• Press buttons 1 (▲) and 3 (▼) (Fig. 34) simul-
taneously for 5 sec.
The system messages will disappear and the tem-
perature display will be shown.

7 Inspection and maintenance

Risk of electric shock!

The unit is live.
Switch off the power supply before open-
Fig. 38: Disconnect the power cord
ing, and take suitable precautions against
it being accidentally switched back on.

7.1 General
The cooling circuit is designed in the form of a main-
tenance-free, hermetically sealed system. The cool-
ing unit is filled with the required quantity of refriger-
ant at the factory, checked for leaks, and subjected
to a functional test run.
The installed maintenance-free fans are mounted on
ball bearings, protected against moisture and dust,
and fitted with a temperature monitor. The life expec-
tancy is at least 30,000 operating hours. The cooling
unit is thus largely maintenance-free. All that may be
required from time to time is to clean the components
of the external air circuit using a vacuum cleaner or
compressed air if they become visibly dirty. Any
stubborn, oily stains may be removed using a non-
flammable detergent, such as degreaser.
Maintenance interval: 2000 operating hours. Depen-
ding on the level of contamination in the ambient air,
the maintenance interval may be reduced to suit the
air pollution intensity.

Caution!
Risk of fire!
Never use flammabel liquids Fig. 39: Remove the upper louvred grille
for cleaning.

Sequence of maintenance measures:

– Check the level of dirt.
– Filter soiling? Replace the filter if necessary.
– Cooling membranes soiled? Clean if necessary.
– Activate test mode; cooling function OK?
– Check noise generation of compressor and fans.

30 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 7 Inspection and maintenance

EN

Fig. 40: Remove the lower louvred grille Fig. 42: Disconnect the connector from the display (1)

Fig. 43: Disconnect the connector from the display (2)

Fig. 41: Remove the infill panel

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 31

 7 Inspection and maintenance

EN

Fig. 47: Disconnect the fan connectors

Fig. 44: Cooling unit without grille Fig. 48: Dismantle cover (loosen 4 nuts)

Fig. 45: Remove the external circuit fan Fig. 49: Push back the display cable
(loosen the four screws)

Fig. 46: Remove the fan Fig. 50: Push the display cable through the cable gland

32 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 7 Inspection and maintenance

EN

Fig. 53: Loosen the earthing cable between the cover

and the chassis (1)

Fig. 51: Remove the cover (1)

Fig. 54: Loosen the earthing cable between the cover
and the chassis (2)

Fig. 52: Remove the cover (2)

Fig. 55: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor
chamber using compressed air (1)

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 33

 7 Inspection and maintenance

EN

Fig. 56: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor Fig. 58: Remove the upper louvred grille (1)
chamber using compressed air (2)

7.1.2 Compressed air cleaning

SK 3328.xxx, SK 3329.xxx, SK 3332.xxx

Fig. 57: Disconnect the power cord

Fig. 59: Remove the upper louvred grille (2)

34 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 7 Inspection and maintenance

EN

Fig. 60: Remove the upper louvred grille (3) Fig. 62: Remove the lower louvred grille (2)

Fig. 61: Remove the lower louvred grille (1) Fig. 63: Remove the infill panel

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 35

 7 Inspection and maintenance

EN

Fig. 64: Disconnect the display cable Fig. 68: Remove the external circuit fan

Fig. 65: Push back the display cable and press it through Fig. 69: Disconnect the fan connectors (1)
the cable gland (1)

Fig. 66: Push back the display cable and press it through Fig. 70: Disconnect the fan connectors (2)
the cable gland (2)

Fig. 67: Loosen the four screws of the external circuit fan Fig. 71: Disconnect the fan connectors (3)

36 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 7 Inspection and maintenance

EN

Fig. 72: Disconnect the fan earthing cable (1)

Fig. 73: Disconnect the fan earthing cable (2) Fig. 75: Remove the cover

Fig. 74: Loosen the four nuts of the cover Fig. 76: Disconnect the earthing cable (1)

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 37

 7 Inspection and maintenance

EN

Fig. 77: Disconnect the earthing cable (2) Fig. 79: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor
chamber using compressed air (2)

Fig. 78: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor Fig. 80: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor
chamber using compressed air (1) chamber using compressed air (3)

38 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 8 Storage and disposal
8 Storage and disposal 9 Technical specifications
EN
Caution! Risk of damage!
The cooling unit must not be subjected
to temperatures above +70°C during
storage.
During storage, the cooling unit must stand upright.
The closed cooling circuit contains refrigerant and oil
which must be properly disposed of for the sake of
the environment. Disposal can be performed at the
Rittal plant.
Please contact us for advice.

Fig. 81: Rating plate (technical specifications)

– Observe the mains connection data (voltage and

frequency) as per the rating plate.
– Observe the pre-fuse as per the specifications on
the rating plate.

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 39

 9 Technical specifications
Unit Model No. SK
EN Basic controller,
– 3302.100 3302.110 3302.300 3302.310 – – – –
RAL 7035

Basic controller,
– 3302.200 3302.210 – – – – – –
stainless steel

e-Comfort controller,
– – – – – 3303.500 3303.510 3304.500 3304.510
RAL 7035

e-Comfort controller,
– – – – – 3303.504 3303.514 3304.504 3304.514
NEMA 4X

e-Comfort controller,
– – – – – 3303.600 3303.610 3304.600 3304.610
stainless steel cover
V 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~,
Rated voltage
Hz 50/60 60 50/60 60 50/60 60 50/60 50/60
Rated current A 1.6/1.7 3.3 1.6/1.7 4.0 2.6/2.6 5.7 3.9/4.3 8.0/8.8
Start-up current A 3.0/3.4 8.0 4.3/5.3 12.0 5.1/6.4 11.5 12.0/14.0 26.0/28.0
Pre-fuse T A 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 11.0 – 16.0
Motor circuit-breaker – – – – – – – – –
Transformer circuit-breaker – – – – – – – – 䡲
Miniature circuit breaker or
– 䡲 䡲 䡲 䡲 䡲 䡲 䡲 –
fuse gG (T)
.
Useful cooling output Qk L 35 L 35 W 300/320 300 300/320 300 500/610 500 1000/1450 1000/1450
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 150/170 150 150/160 150 280/350 280 1050/1100 980/1050
Power consumption Pel L 35 L 35 W 245/255 290 285/300 290 360/380 470 640/720 670/750
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 255/275 340 320/340 340 420/390 500 750/850 780/880
.
Refrigeration factor H = Qk/Pel 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.6
Refrigerant
– Type – R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a
– Filling g 100 100 100 95 170 170 325 325
Admissible pressure bar 25 25 25 25 28 28 25 25
Temperature setting range °C +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55
Setting range °C +30 to +55 +30 to +55 +30 to +55 +30 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55
Noise level dB (A) < 61 < 61 < 61 < 61 < 61 < 61 < 64 < 64
Protection category to EN 60 529
– Internal circuit – IP 54
– External circuit – IP 34
Protection category – (NEMA 4X)1)
280 x 550 x 206 400 x 950 x 260
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 280 x 550 x 140 525 x 340 x 153
(285 x 620 x 298)1) (405 x 1020 x 358)1)
Weight kg 13 13 13 17 17 (25)1) 17 (25)1) 39 (49)1) 44 (54)1)
1) Information relevant for NEMA 4X

40 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 9 Technical specifications
Unit Model No. SK

e-Comfort controller,
RAL 7035
– 3304.540 3305.500 3305.510 3305.540 3328.500 3328.510 3328.540 3329.500 EN
e-Comfort controller,
– 3304.544 3305.504 3305.514 3305.544 3328.504 3328.514 3328.544 3329.504
NEMA 4X

e-Comfort controller,
– 3304.640 3305.600 3305.610 3305.640 3328.600 3328.610 3328.640 3329.600
stainless steel cover
400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~,
Rated voltage V, Hz
460, 3~, 60 50/60 50/60 460, 3~, 60 50/60 50/60 460, 3~, 60 50/60
Rated current A 2.2/2.1 5.5/5.8 11.5/12.5 2.5/2.8 6.1/6.6 13.4/14.8 2.8/3.3 8.2/9.3
Start-up current A 11.5/12.7 22.0/24.0 26.0/28.0 12.2/11.3 20.0/22.0 40.0/38.0 6.8/7.8 20.0/24.0
Pre-fuse T A 6.3 – 10.0 16.0 14.0 – 20.0 6.3 – 10.0 16.0 18.0 – 25.0 6.3 – 10.0 16.0
Motor circuit-breaker – 䡲 – – 䡲 – – 䡲 –
Transformer circuit-breaker – – – 䡲 – – 䡲 – –
Miniature circuit breaker or
– – 䡲 – – 䡲 – – 䡲
fuse gG (T)
.
Useful cooling output Qk L 35 L 35 W 1000/1460 1500/1510 1500/1660 1500/1510 2000/2360 2000/2360 2000/2350 2500/2660
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 880/990 1150/1200 1150/1270 1230/1250 1620/1745 1620/1745 1450/1690 1840/1920
Power consumption Pel L 35 L 35 W 670/820 870/980 1010/900 820/1000 935/1055 965/1085 920/1145 1270/1410
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 760/930 1030/1150 1180/1060 980/1170 1080/1250 1110/1280 1145/1395 1470/1700
.
Refrigeration factor H = Qk/Pel 1.7 1.7 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.0
Refrigerant
– Type – R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a
– Filling g 325 600 600 600 950 950 950 950
Admissible pressure bar 25 25 25 25 28 28 28 28
Temperature setting range °C +20 to +55 +20 to +53 +20 to +53 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 (+20 to +50)1)
Setting range °C +20 to +55 +20 to +50 +20 to +50 +20 to +55 +20 to +55 (+20 to +50)1)
Noise level dB (A) < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64
Protection category to EN 60 529
– Internal circuit – IP 54
– External circuit – IP 34
Protection category – (NEMA 4X)1)
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 400 x 950 x 260 (405 x 1020 x 358)1) 400 x 1580 x 295 (405 x 1650 x 388)1)
Weight kg 40 (50)1) 41 (51)1) 46 (56)1) 42 (52)1) 66 (80)1) 73 (87)1) 67 (80)1) 69 (83)1)
1) Information relevant for NEMA 4X

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 41

 9 Technical specifications
Unit Model No. SK

EN e-Comfort controller, RAL 7035

e-Comfort controller, NEMA 4X
–
–
3329.510
3329.514
3329.540
3329.544
3332.540
–
3361.500
–
3361.510
–
3361.540
–
e-Comfort controller, stainless steel cover – 3329.610 3329.640 3332.640 3361.600 3361.610 3361.640
115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/ 400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 2~,
Rated voltage V, Hz
50/60 460, 3~, 60 460, 3~, 60 50/60 60 50/60
Rated current A 17.0/20.0 3.7/3.8 4.2/4.2 2.7/2.7 5.3 1.2/1.4
Start-up current A 44.0/42.0 6.8/7.6 9.2/11.0 6.0/9.6 12.0 3.1/3.3
Pre-fuse T A 18.0 – 25.0 6.3 – 10.0 6.3 – 10.0 10.0 10.0 6.3 – 10.0
Motor circuit-breaker – – 䡲 䡲 – – –
Transformer circuit-breaker – 䡲 – – – – 䡲
Miniature circuit breaker or fuse gG (T) – – – – 䡲 䡲 –
.
Useful cooling output Qk L 35 L 35 W 255/2660 2500/2700 4000/4400 750/790 750 750/790
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 1840/1920 1900/1950 3070/3570 570/570 500 570/570
Power consumption Pel L 35 L 35 W 1300/1440 1295/1495 1720/2120 420/450 570 420/450
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 1500/1730 1545/1845 1990/2460 480/510 670 480/510
.
Refrigeration factor H = Qk/Pel 1.9 1.9 2.3 1.8 1.3 1.7
Refrigerant
– Type – R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a
– Filling g 950 950 3000 280 260 280
Admissible pressure bar 28 28 28 28 28 28
Temperature setting range °C +20 to +55 (+20 to +50)1) +20 to +52 +20 to +55
Setting range °C +20 to +55 (+20 to +50)1) +20 to +52 +20 to +55
Noise level dB (A) < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64
Protection category to EN 60 529
– Internal circuit – IP 54
– External circuit – IP 34
Protection category – (NEMA 4X)1)
400 x 1580 x 295
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 500 x 1580 x 340 280 x 550 x 206
(405 x 1650 x 388)1)
Weight kg 76 (90)1) 70 (83)1) 91 22 22 22
1) Information relevant for NEMA 4X

Unit Model No. SK

e-Comfort controller, RAL 7035 – 3366.500 3366.510 3366.540
e-Comfort controller, stainless steel cover – 3366.600 3366.610 3366.640
230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/
Rated voltage V, Hz
50/60 50/60 460, 3~, 60
Rated current A 6.7/6.9 13.6/13.8 2.7/2.9
Start-up current A 22.0/24.0 43.0/47.0 8.0/8.8
Pre-fuse T A 10.0 14.0 – 20.0 6.3 – 10.0
Motor circuit-breaker – – – 䡲
Transformer circuit-breaker – – 䡲 –
Miniature circuit breaker or fuse gG (T) – 䡲 – –
.
Useful cooling output Qk L 35 L 35 W 1500/1500 1500/1500 1500/1500
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 1050/1100 1050/1100 980/1080
Power consumption Pel L 35 L 35 W 940/1070 940/1070 970/1120
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 1115/1230 1115/1230 1140/1310
.
Refrigeration factor H = Qk/Pel 1.6 1.6 1.5
Refrigerant
– Type – R134a R134a R134a
– Filling g 700 700 700
Admissible pressure bar 28 28 28
Temperature setting range °C +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55
Setting range °C +20 to +55 +20 to +55 +20 to +55
Noise level dB (A) 72 72 72
Protection category to EN 60 529
– Internal circuit – IP 54
– External circuit – IP 34
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 450 x 1590 x 195
Weight kg 45 49 46

42 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 10 List of spare parts
10 List of spare parts
75 EN
SK 3302.xxx
40 10

71

25
45

100
55 71
90
15

Fig. 82: Spare parts for SK 3302.xxx

SK 3302.3xx
10

90
71 71 20

25

100
45
40

5 1

15

55

Fig. 83: Spare parts for SK 3302.3xx

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 43

 10 List of spare parts

EN SK 3303.xxx
SK 3361.xxx 10

40

71

30

75
25

45

15
55
100

90
5
71 71

20
71

Fig. 84: Spare parts for SK 3303.xxx, SK 3361.xxx

SK 3304.xxx
10
SK 3305.xxx 40

71

30

102
75

1
45

25
100

71
50
80 15

20
55
90
5
45
71

71

101

Fig. 85: Spare parts for SK 3304.xxx, SK 3305.xxx

44 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 10 List of spare parts
75
SK 3328.xxx
SK 3329.xxx 46
40
10
EN
71

30

102
45

71
20
50

1
55

100

45

46
90 80
5

71
71 15
101

Fig. 86: Spare parts for SK 3328.xxx, SK 3329.xxx

SK 3332.xxx 75
10
46
40
71

102
45
25
100

50

55
1

45

71
90
46
71
71
20 15
5

30

101

Fig. 87: Spare parts for SK 3332.xxx

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 45
 10 List of spare parts

EN SK 3366.xxx
75 100 75
40 10
46
71

102
45

20

90
50 71 30

55

25
45

101

46
80
5

15

Fig. 88: Spare parts for SK 3366.xxx, SK 3377.xxx

Legend
1 Compressor Note:
5 Condenser fan As well as the spare part number, when
10 Evaporator fan ordering spare parts the following informa-
15 Dispatch bag tion must be provided:
20 Expansion valve – Unit model
25 Filter dryer – Fabrication number
30 PSAH pressure-operated switch
– Date of manufacture
40 Controller board
45 Louvred grille 1 This information may be found
46 Louvred grille 2 on the rating plate.
50 Infill panel
55 Display
71 Temperature sensor
75 Enclosure tray
80 Transformer
90 Evaporator coil
100 Condenser
101 Condensate evaporator
102 Miniature fuse, condensate evaporator
(T4A; 6.3 x 32 mm)

46 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 11 Appendix: Cut-out and hole sizes
11 Appendix: 354
Cut-out and hole sizes 340
EN

78.5

55
11.1 Dimensions for external mounting

260
353
326
280

360
251 140
354

360
354

49

260
353
Ø8
155
(10x)

165.5
550
501

354

85.5
Fig. 92: SK 3366.xxx, SK 3377.xxx external mounting

400

32.5
Fig. 89: SK 3302.xxx external mounting 250 260

(except SK 3302.3xx)

280
255
350

525
471 153
6

Ø 9.5 (8x)

255
950

385
350
340
281

350

15
25

Fig. 93: SK 3304.xxx, SK 3305.xxx external mounting

Fig. 90: SK 3302.3xx external mounting

400
280 295
35

280
262 206
15.5

310

380

350

266
480

532
550

550
1580

Ø 13 (10x)
Ø 8 (4x)
325
260

320

Fig. 91: SK 3303.xxx, SK 3361.xxx external mounting

340

275
25

Fig. 94: SK 3328.xxx, SK 3329.xxx external mounting

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 47

 11 Appendix: Cut-out and hole sizes
400
500

EN 380 340
370
45

320 145 150

330

380
440 R9.5 (2x)

500
1580

Ø 13 (10x)

1558

1580
1540
1554
375

440 376
164
360

275
25

Ø 13 (4x)

Fig. 95: SK 3332.xxx external mounting R9.5 (2x)

11.2 Dimensions for partial internal 320

mounting
Fig. 98: SK 3328.xxx, SK 3329.xxx partial internal mounting

280
254 100 106
20

500
362 145 195

25
550
497
523
524

266

Ø 8 (4x)
1550

1580
1530

474
18 x 45
(230)

Fig. 96: SK 3303.xxx, SK 3361.xxx partial internal mounting

Ø 13 (4x)
400
370
330 105 155

Fig. 99: SK 3332.xxx partial internal mounting

25 x 45
950
920

920

380

Ø 9.5 (4x)

Fig. 97: SK 3304.xxx, SK 3305.xxx partial internal mounting

48 Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions

 11 Appendix: Cut-out and hole sizes
11.3 Dimensions for full internal mounting
280
254
98
42
400
210
EN
370
200 R6 (4x) 25

25
50

25 x 45
Ø 15 (2x)

550
518
492
524

266

950

920
920
380
Ø 8 (4x)

18 x 45°
(230) Ø 9.5 (4x)

Fig. 100: SK 3302.1xx full internal mounting

98 55 Fig. 103: SK 3304.xxx, SK 3305.xxx full internal mounting

525
510 400
370
320 245 50

R9.5 (2x)
340

325
314

20 x 45

Ø 7.5 (4x)

499
1558

1580
1540
1554

376
Fig. 101: SK 3302.3xx full internal mounting

42
280 164
254
200
25

Ø 13 (4x)

Ø 19 (2x)
R9.5 (2x)

320
550
518
492
524

266
Fig. 104: SK 3328.xxx, SK 3329.xxx full internal mounting

18 x 45°
Ø 8 (4x)
45

400
R9

200
5

(230)

Fig. 102: SK 3303.xxx, SK 3361.xxx full internal mounting

1500
1510

45

Fig. 105: SK 3366.xxx, SK 3377.xxx full internal mounting

Rittal cooling unit assembly and operating instructions 49

䡲 Enclosures
䡲 Power Distribution
䡲 Climate Control
䡲 IT Infrastructure
䡲 Software & Services

1st edition 07.2011 / ID no. 328 124 / Drawing no. A4491200SK23

RITTAL GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach 1662 䡠 D-35726 Herborn
Phone +49(0)2772 505-0 䡠 Fax +49(0)2772 505-2319
E-mail: [email protected] 䡠 www.rittal.com
D Assemblies Assembly PD-096/098-000 Safety block with/without sub-spindle

Technical Product Documentation

20 Assembly PD-096/098-000 Safety block

with/without sub-spindle

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 20-250

D Assemblies Assembly PD-096/098-000 Safety block with/without sub-spindle

20.1 Drawings and parts list

20.1.1 Exploded view drawing of safety block with sub-spindle

(see next page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 20-251

D Assemblies Assembly PD-096/098-000 Safety block with/without sub-spindle

Figure 20-1: Exploded view drawing of safety block with sub-spindle option

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 20-252

D Assemblies Assembly PD-096/098-000 Safety block with/without sub-spindle
20.1.2 Exploded view drawing of safety block without sub-spindle option

Figure 20-2: Exploded view drawing of safety block without sub-spindle option

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 20-253

D Assemblies Assembly PD-096/098-000 Safety block with/without sub-spindle
20.1.3 Parts list
Assembly PD-096-000 Safety block with sub-spindle option; Article No. 10796
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs PD-096-001 Elbow 1 22370
1 Pcs PD-096-002 Elbow 2 22371
1 Pcs PD-096-003 Elbow 3 22372
1 Pcs PD-096-004 Elbow 4 22373
2 Pcs PD-097-000 Assembly air distributor 22364
1 Pcs SB-NC-161-001 Valve base plate 1 22323
1 Pcs SB-NC-161-002 Valve base plate 2 22324
1 Pcs SB-NC-161-003 Distribution bank 1 22325
1 Pcs SB-NC-161-004 Distribution bank 2 22326
4 Pcs SB-NC-161-005 Adapter 1 22327
8 Pcs SB-NC-161-006 Adapter 2 22328
2 Pcs Techno Chemie Banjo bolt G1/8; 3802 2148 3040 22321
4 Pcs Techno Chemie Conical nipple DIN 7603; 3913 1080 0090 22322
3 Pcs Bosch Steck-Fix M5, pipe D=4 mm; 1823 373 009 30601
16 Pcs AVS Banjo bolt Type 163M-11-1/8A; 304025 22337
12 Pcs AVS Conical nipple Typ 265A-1/8x1.5; 252871 22315
4 Pcs Rexroth Check valve G1/8; 534 098 100 0 31114
1 Pcs Rexroth Silencer M5; 532 400 006 0 31146
2 Pcs Ermeto Angle swivel joint G1/8, pipe D=6 mm; SWVE 6-PLR 22335
2 Pcs Ermeto Straight threaded joint G1/8, pipe D=6 mm; GE 6-PLR- 22363
ED
1 Pcs Rexroth Silencer G1/8; 532 401 110 0 31145
1 Pcs Bosch Angle joint G1/8, pipe D=8 mm; 1823 391 122 31130
4 Pcs WIKA P/V converter (pressure/voltage converter) G1/8“; 31152
891.14.540
2 Pcs Rexroth 5/2-port solenoid/solenoid valve; 576 365 022 0 31144
4 Pcs Murrelektronik Valve plug; MSDU-CB1Z-G1.0 31193
1 Pcs Ermeto Angle swivel joint G1/8, Rohr D=8 mm; SWVE 8-LLR 22336
1 Pcs Rexroth 5/2 port solenoid/spring valve; 576 351 022 0 31128
1 Pcs Murrelektronik Valve plug; MSUD-CB1Z-G1.0 31193
2 Pcs Rexroth Electro/Pneumatic converter; 561 012 012 0 31143
1 Pcs Bosch Locking screw M5; 1823 462 016 31233

Assembly PD-098-000 Safety block without sub-spindle option; Article No. 10790
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs SB-NC-161-001 Valve base plate 1 22323
1 Pcs SB-NC-161-002 Valve base plate 2 22324
1 Pcs SB-NC-161-003 Distribution bank 1 22325
1 Pcs SB-NC-161-004 Distribution bank 2 22326
2 Pcs SB-NC-161-005 Adapter 1 22327
4 Pcs SB-NC-161-006 Adapter 2 22328
2 Pcs SB-NC-162-001 Lock 22331
12 Pcs AVS Banjo bolt Type 163M-11-1/8A; 304025 22337
6 Pcs AVS Conical nipple Typ 265A-1/8x1.5; 252871 22315
2 Pcs Rexroth Check valve G1/8; 534 098 100 0 31114
1 Pcs Rexroth Silencer M5; 532 400 006 0 31146
1 Pcs Rexroth Blind plate; 898 512 149 2 31147
2 Pcs Ermeto Straight threaded joint G1/8, pipe D=6 mm; GE 6-PLR- 22363
ED
1 Pcs Rexroth Silencer G1/8; 532 401 110 0 31145
1 Pcs Bosch Angle joint G1/8, pipe D=8 mm; 1823 391 122 31130
2 Pcs WIKA P/V converter (pressure/voltage converter) G1/8“; 31152

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 20-254

D Assemblies Assembly PD-096/098-000 Safety block with/without sub-spindle
891.14.540
1 Pcs Rexroth 5/2 port solenoid/solenoid valve; 576 365 022 0 31144
2 Pcs Murrelektronik Valve plug; MSDU-CB1Z-G1.0 31193
2 Pcs Ermeto Angle swivel joint G1/8, pipe D=6 mm; SWVE 6-PLR 22335
1 Pcs Ermeto Angle swivel joint G1/8, pipe D=8 mm; SWVE 8-LLR 22336
1 Pcs Rexroth 5/2 port solenoid/spring valve; 576 351 022 0 31128
1 Pcs Murrelektronik Valve plug; MSUD-CB1Z-G1.0 31193
1 Pcs Rexroth Electro/Pneumatic converter; 561 012 012 0 31143

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 20-255

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle 5000/42

Technical Product Documentation

21 Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle 5000/42

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 21-256

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle 5000/42

21.1 Description
The spindle unit has a classic moveable/fixed bearing arrangement using precision
angular contact ball bearings. The bearing package built into the front in a tandem-O
arrangment forms the fixed bearing point. Located between the two bearing points is the
air supply integrated in the spindle for the clamping cylinder used at the spindle end. This
clamping cylinder is set up as a tandem cylinder to increase strength. The stroke limiting
rings located on the end permit adjustment of the push/pull tube clamping stroke in both
directions.

21.2 Handling

21.2.1 Setting the clamping stroke

Stroke limiting rings

Proximity
switch

Stop ring

Figure 21-1: Setting the clamping stroke

Proceed as follows to set the clamping stroke:

1. Loosen the 2 attachment screws on the stroke limiting rings.

2. Rotate the stroke limiting rings away from the stop ring until the full path of the
clamping cylinder can be traversed.
3. Mount the chucking tool and clamp a workpiece in.
4. Rotate the stroke limiting ring that limits the stroke in this clamping direction until
it touches the stop ring. Rotate the stroke limiting ring about 1 turn back and then
as far as required until the spacing slits in the stroke limiting ring are not lying
over the cavities in the headstock spindle. If this is not done, the ring rotation
trueness and therefore also the spindle trueness will not be ensured. Tighten the
stroke limiting ring with the attachment screws.
5. Leave the workpiece in place. Rotate the second stroke limiting ring up to the
stop ring until the stroke of the stop ring is still sufficient to open the chucking
tool and remove the workpiece. Note however that the stroke must be sufficiently

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 21-257

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle 5000/42
great that the proximity switches cannot be overlapped in any circumstance. The
spacing slits in the stroke limiting ring must not lie over the cavities in the
headstock spindle. Otherwise, the ring rotation trueness and therefore also the
spindle trueness will not be ensured. Tighten the stroke limiting ring with the
attachment screws.
6. Check the chucking tool function.

THE SPINDLE MUST NOT BE OPERATED IF THE STROKE

LIMITING RINGS ARE NOT TIGHTENED! SPINDLE ELEMENTS
MAY BE DAMAGED!

21.3 Drawings and parts list

21.3.1 Detail assembly

(see next page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 21-258

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle 5000/42

Figure 21-2: Detail assembly spindle unit 5000/42

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 21-259

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle 5000/42

21.3.2 Parts list

Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle unit 5000/42
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
5 Pcs Spindle bearing 21718
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-001 Spindle housing 21719
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-002 Rear cover 21720
2 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-016, 15.6x1.78 30611
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-003 Front cover 21721
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-004 Front cover 21722
1 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-161, 139.37x2.62 30801
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-005 Bearing ring 21723
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-006 Balancing element 21724
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-007 External spacer ring 21725
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-009 Sealing disc 21727
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-010 Inner ring air supply 21728
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-011 Cover disc 21729
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-012 Belt wheel Rod T.2.5 Z=128 DT=101.85 DK=101.35 21730
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-013 Flanged wheel 21731
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-015 Indexed wheel 21733
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-016 Pre-loaded nut 21734
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-017 Locking nut 21735
14 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-010, 6.07x1.78 30803
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-019 Clamping cylinder 2 21737
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-020 Separating piston 21738
3 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-048, 120.37x1.78 30605
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-021 Sealing plate 21739
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-022 Piston 21740
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-023 Reducer disc 21741
4 Pcs Shaft locking ring DIN471-55x2 30807
2 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-034, 53.7x1.78 30802
2 Pcs Merkel Airzet PK 125, L2529-059.161 30056
4 Pcs Helmbrecht PDF Rod seal C1 5040 N3571 30806
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-027 Rod belt pulley T.2.5 Z=128 DT=101.85 DK=101.35 100426
3 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-041, 75.92x1.78 30804
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-034 Flanged pulley without indexing 21752
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-035 Headstock spindle 21753
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-018 Clamping cylinder 1 21736
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-036 Push/pull tube 21755
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-008 Inner spacer ring 21726
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-024 Stopper 21742
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-026 Support ring 21744
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-025 Adjusting nut 21743
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-042 Main belt wheel HTD 8m Z=42 centre piece 22405
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-044 Intermediate flanged wheel 22404
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-043 Main belt wheel HTD 8m Z=42 edge piece 22403
6 Pcs DIN 6912-M5x12 Filister head cap screw 30054
2 Pcs DIN6885 A10/8x50 Feather key 108340
1 Pcs SB-NC-195-003 Flanged wheel 104105
1 Pcs SB-NC-195-001 Incremental disc 104107
1 Pcs SB-NC-195-002 Back cover 104106
1 Pcs VS Sensorik Incremental toothed-wheel encoder RGM2-A 121766
1 Pcs Lenord+Bauer Incremental toothed-wheel encoder GEL244 KN1G3 110912

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 21-260

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-194-000 Spindle 8000/32

Technical Product Documentation

22 Assembly SB-NC-194-000 Spindle 8000/32

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 22-261

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-194-000 Spindle 8000/32

22.1 Description
The spindle unit has a classic moveable/fixed bearing arrangement using precision
angular contact ball bearings. The bearing package built into the front in a tandem-O
arrangment forms the fixed bearing point. Located between the two bearing points is the
air supply integrated in the spindle for the clamping cylinder used at the spindle end. This
clamping cylinder is set up as a tandem cylinder to increase strength. The stroke limiting
rings located on the end permit adjustment of the push/pull tube clamping stroke in both
directions.

22.2 Handling

22.2.1 Setting the clamping stroke

Stroke limiting rings

Proximity
switch

Stop ring

Figure 22-1: Setting the clamping stroke

Proceed as follows to set the clamping stroke:

1. Loosen the 2 attachment screws on the stroke limiting rings.

2. Rotate the stroke limiting rings away from the stop ring until the full path of the
clamping cylinder can be traversed.
3. Mount the chucking tool and clamp a workpiece in.
4. Rotate the stroke limiting ring that limits the stroke in this clamping direction until
it touches the stop ring. Rotate the stroke limiting ring about 1 turn back and then
as far as required until the spacing slits in the stroke limiting ring are not lying
over the cavities in the headstock spindle. If this is not done, the ring rotation
trueness and therefore also the spindle trueness will not be ensured. Tighten the
stroke limiting ring with the attachment screws.

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 22-262

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-194-000 Spindle 8000/32

5. Leave the workpiece in place. Rotate the second stroke limiting ring up to the
stop ring until the stroke of the stop ring is still sufficient to open the chucking
tool and remove the workpiece. Note however that the stroke must be sufficiently
great that the proximity switches cannot be overlapped in any circumstance. The
spacing slits in the stroke limiting ring must not lie over the cavities in the
headstock spindle. Otherwise, the ring rotation trueness and therefore also the
spindle trueness will not be ensured. Tighten the stroke limiting ring with the
attachment screws.
6. Check the chucking tool function.

THE SPINDLE MUST NOT BE OPERATED IF THE STROKE

LIMITING RINGS ARE NOT TIGHTENED! SPINDLE ELEMENTS
MAY BE DAMAGED!

22.3 Drawings and parts list

22.3.1 Detail assembly

(see next page)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 22-263

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-194-000 Spindle 8000/32

Figure 22-2: Detail assembly spindle unit 8000/32

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 22-264

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-194-000 Spindle 8000/32

22.3.2 Parts list

Assembly SB-NC-194-000 Spindle unit 8000/32
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
5 Pcs Spindle bearing 21901
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-001 Spindle housing 21902
2 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-016, 15.6x1.78 30611
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-003 Front cover 21904
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-004 Front cover 21905
1 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-159, 126.67x2.62 30834
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-005 Bearing ring 21906
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-006 Balancing element 21907
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-007 External spacer ring 21908
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-009 Sealing disc 21910
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-010 Inner ring air supply 21911
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-016 Pre-loaded nut 21917
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-017 Locking nut 21918
14 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-010, 6.07x1.78 30803
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-019 Clamping cylinder 2 21920
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-020 Separating piston 21921
1 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-043, 88.62x1.78 30837
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-021 Sealing plate 21922
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-022 Piston 21923
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-023 Reducer disc 21924
4 Pcs Shaft locking ring DIN471-45x1.75 30841
2 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-031, 44.17x1.78 30835
2 Pcs Parker Piston seal set profile OA, OA 0110 00811 30839
4 Pcs Helmbrecht PDF Rod seal C1 4035 N3571 30838
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-071 Toothed wheel/encoder T2.5 Z=108 DK=85.45 20208
DT=85.94
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-070 Path holder 20207
2 Pcs Feather key 6885 A6/6x45 30840
3 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-038, 66.40x1.78 30836
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-025 Flanged pulley without indexing 21926
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-026 Headstock spindle 21927
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-018 Clamping cylinder 1 21919
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-008 Inner spacer ring 21909
2 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-046, 107.67x1.78 30607
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-024 Stopper 21925
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-026 Support ring 21744
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-006 Push/pull tube 21724
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-025 Adjusting nut 21743
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-031 Main belt wheel HTD 8m Z=36 centre piece 22407
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-032 Main belt wheel HTD 8m Z=36 edge piece 22406
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-033 Intermediate flanged wheel 22408
4 Pcs SB-NC-020-007 Slide-on sleeve adjusting key 20376
1 Pcs SB-NC-001 Back cover 104097
1 Pcs PD-125-003 Flanged wheel 104096
1 Pcs PD-125-001 Incremental disc 104099
1 Psc VS Sensorik Incremental toothed-wheel encoder RGM2-A 121766
1 Pcs (Lenord+Bauer Incremental toothed-wheel encoder GEL244 110912
KN1G3)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 22-265

D Assemblies Assembly PD-110-000 spindle drive 5000/42 (Fanuc)

Technical Product Documentation

23 Assembly PD-110-000 spindle drive 5000/42

(Fanuc)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 23-266

D Assemblies Assembly PD-110-000 spindle drive 5000/42 (Fanuc)

23.1 Drawings and parts list

23.1.1 Detail assembly

Figure 23-1: Detail assembly of main spindle drive 5000/42 (Fanuc)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 23-267

D Assemblies Assembly PD-110-000 spindle drive 5000/42 (Fanuc)

23.1.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-110-000 Main spindle drive Article. 108668
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs Belt pulley part 5000 10506
2 Pcs SB-NC-175-002 Belt pulley part 2; 5000 Upm 22233
1 Pcs SB-NC-175-001 Belt pulley part 1; 5000 Upm 22232
2 Pcs SB-NC-175-004 Outer disk 22235
2 Pcs SB-NC-175-003 Inner disk 22234
1 Pcs SB-NC-175-005 Clamping ring 22236
1 Set 3x 1000x8; Toothed belt; HTD 8M; 8mm 31473
1 Pcs PD-109-001 Base plate for main spindle motor 22230
1 Pcs PD-109-002 Motor holding plate 22231
2 Pcs SB-NC-156-005 Thrust plate HS-Motor 22194
1 Pcs A06B-1505-B103; spindle-motor; 400V, 3.7kW 103605
1 Pcs SW46 G1 1/4" Hexagon nut 41084
1 Pcs RLK 300 - 28x32; Taper clamping ring 31472
1 Pcs SB-NC-175-006 reducing for terminal box 22238

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 23-268

D Assemblies Assembly PD-109-000 spindle drive 8000/32 (Fanuc)

Technical Product Documentation

24 Assembly PD-109-000 spindle drive 8000/32

(Fanuc)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 24-269

D Assemblies Assembly PD-109-000 spindle drive 8000/32 (Fanuc)

24.1 Drawings and parts list

24.1.1 Detail assembly

Figure 24-1: Detail assembly of main spindle drive 8000/32 (Fanuc)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 24-270

D Assemblies Assembly PD-109-000 spindle drive 8000/32 (Fanuc)

24.1.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-109-000 Main spindle drive 8000/32 Article 10807
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs Belt pulley 8000 10533
2 Pcs SB-NC-174-002 Belt pulley part 2; 8000 Upm 22226
1 Pcs SB-NC-174-001 Belt pulley part 1; 8000 Upm 22225
2 Pcs SB-NC-174-004 Outer disk 22228
2 Pcs SB-NC-174-003 Inner disk 22227
1 Pcs SB-NC-174-005 Clamping ring 22229
1 Set 3x 1000x8; Toothed belt; HTD 1000-8M-8; HTD 8M; 8mm 31473
1 Pcs PD-109-001 Base plate for main spindle motor 22230
1 Pcs PD-109-002 Motor holding plate 22231
1 Pcs SB-NC-156-005 Thrust plate 22194
1 Pcs conical clamping element RLK 300 - 28x32 31472
1 Pcs A06B-1505-B103; spindle motor; 400V, 3.7kW 103605
1 Pcs SW46; G1 1/4" Hexagon nut 41084
1 Pcs SB-NC-175-006 reducing for terminal box 22238

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 24-271

D Assemblies Assembly Incremental toothed-Wheel encoder VS Sensorik

Technical Product Documentation

25 Assembly Incremental toothed-Wheel

encoder VS Sensorik

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 25-272

D Assemblies Assembly Incremental toothed-Wheel encoder VS Sensorik

25.1 Description
(See documentation of the manufacturer)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 25-273

 Magnetic gear wheel encoder RGM2G-A
with anlog output signals
Contactless incremental encoder for measuring
rotary motion
High-resolution measurement of rotational speed and
rotational angle up to 60,000 1/min
Rotational direction recognition
Robust, not sensitive to dirt
Temperature stability up to 110°C

High EMC and ESD stability (up to 30kV)

Bespoke specifications due to a flexible design principle

I2C interface for the fine-tuning of signal parameters

if required
Automatic stabilisation of signal amplitudes (option)

Use in drive spindles of machine tools

Installation in drive motors

Output signals
SIN- and COS signals with 1Vpp
Reference signal
Remote Sense RS_UB
Supply voltage UB = 5V
Reverse voltage protection
Short-circuit proof

Principle of measurement
Magnetic, contactless gauging of the steel gear wheels
with module M = 0.3 or 0.5
Use of magneto-resistive (GMR) sensor elements
High degree of measurement accuracy when using e.g.
type ZR3-256/Di or ZR5-256/Di measuring gear wheels

Design
Robust metal sensor housing
GMR-Sensor elements
Frontal coverage of the sensor elements using metal
RGM2G-A-...3 foil to act as extra protection against ESD impulses
Electronics for signal conditioning
... for gear wheel module M = 0.3 Complete sealing of sensor interior
Screened connection cable with AWG28
Optional connector plug

RGM2G-A-...5
... for gear wheel module M = 0.5

Datei: VS-Sensorik_DB_E_RGM2G-A Version: 5 Blatt: 1 Datum: 08.05.2009

VS Sensorik GmbH, Max-Planck-Str. 3, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Tel: 089 / 310 50 16, Fax: 089 / 310 33 83, www.VS-Sensorik.com
 Magnetic gear wheel encoder RGM2G-A
Specifications
Signal parameters
600
Before delivery, each encoder is balanced at the nominal
400 distance encoder - gear wheel do = 0.1mm (for M = 0.3)
and 0.3mm (for M = 0.5) on optimal signal values (ampli-
eb ( t) 200 tude 1 Vpp, offset 0 mV, phase 90°, unambiguousness
A ( t)
of the reference pulse; signal aspect type - see figure).
B ( t) 0

Ref ( t)
200 The signal parameters may deviate from the optimal
values due to subsequent tolerances of attached parts,
400
gear wheel quality and the influence of temperature and
600
rotational speed.

t
Signal type Analog, differential signals
SIN (spur A),
Typical signal aspect. The signal spurs A, B and ref. are COS (spur B)
depicted. The area highlighted in grey shows the optimal Ref. pulse
position of the 0 channels for the ref. signals Inverted signals A, B & Ref.
(area of unambiguousness).
Signal amplitude A & B 1Vpp +/- 20% *
Amplitude differential A/B 0.9 ... 1.1 *
Phase A to B 90° +/- 1°
Offset - static +/- 20mV
Freq. of measurement 0 ... 200kHz

ø5 * Conditions: UB = 5VDC; f < 50 kHz; automatic stabi-

Connecting cable lisation of signal amplitudes is inactive (see page 4).
Position of the signal
9 x AWG28 channels A, B & Ref.
General parameters
21

Supply voltage UB 5VDC +/- 5%

4

Wattage
0,5

Without load 50mA

Operating temperature -20 ... 85°C
(up to 100°C on request)
9,5

+0,00
1

3,94 -0,02
Storage temperature -30 ... 110°C

Optimal distance do 0.1 +/- 0.02mm for M = 0.3

encoder - gear wheel 0.3 +/- 0.02mm for M = 0.5
35
13 Vibration resistance bis 200 m/s²
45
Shock resistance bis 2000 m/s²
R ° 4,3
3,5 Type of protection IP68
14,5

2
10

,3°
15
R

19
3,5

27

Datei: VS-Sensorik_DB_E_RGM2G-A Version: 5 Blatt: 2 Datum: 08.05.2009

VS Sensorik GmbH, Max-Planck-Str. 3, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Tel: 089 / 310 50 16, Fax: 089 / 310 33 83, www.VS-Sensorik.com
 Magnetic gear wheel encoder RGM2G-A
Assembly & Electrical connection
Assembly
Gear Wheel
do
The encoder is assembled using the following procedure:
15,5
10

4
9,5

1. Gauge blocks of the corresponding gauges do are

4

located on the front side of the encoder.

2. Fix the encoder using 2 M4 screws. The screws are

still not firmly tightened. The encoder should be loose.
Reference mark
3. Push the encoder slightly against the gear wheel.
Completely tighten the screws alternately.
14,5

4. After screwing the encoder tightly, remove the gauge

do

block (spacer) in the upward direction.

Distance encoder - gear wheel d (air gap)

The optimal distance encoder - gear wheel do is:
0.1 +/- 0.02mm for Modul M = 0.3

0.3 +/- 0.02mm for Modul M = 0.5

For this distance do the encoders are balanced
on optimal signal parameters. If required, the signal
The arrow indicates the direction of movement during parameters can be adjusted via the I2C signal
counter-clockwise rotation of the gear wheel with a view interface (see page 4).
to the encoder- illustrated in the example of the
RGM2G-A-M... encoder
Cable assignment (Type P)
On the output of the encoder is a screened cable with 9
600
wires AWG28. The cable is assigned as follows:

400 Signal A + brown

Signal A - green
eb ( t) 200
A ( t) Signal B + grey
0
B ( t)
Signal B - orange
Ref ( t)
200
Signal Ref + red
400
Signal Ref - black
600
UB = 5VDC violet
t GND (0V) yellow

Typical signal aspect during counter-clockwise rotation of RS_5V blue

the gear wheel with a view to the encoder. The signal spurs
A, B and ref. are depicted. The area highlighted in grey The shield is connected to the casing on the encoder
shows the optimal position of the 0 channels of the side.
ref. signals (area of unambiguousness).

Datei: VS-Sensorik_DB_E_RGM2G-A Version: 5 Blatt: 3 Datum: 08.05.2009

VS Sensorik GmbH, Max-Planck-Str. 3, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Tel: 089 / 310 50 16, Fax: 089 / 310 33 83, www.VS-Sensorik.com
 Magnetic gear wheel encoder RGM2G-A
I2C Interface
I2C-Interface
If required, the I2C interface can facilitate the fine-tuning
of the parameters amplitude, offset and phase of the
encoder signals A, B & Ref.
1

Pin 1
5

Before dispatch, the utmost care is taken to ensure that

all RGM2G encoder signals are working optimally. In spite
8 of this, a single fine-adjustment of the signal parameters
might be required. There are two possibilities for that:

1. By “sensitively“ adjusting the position of the encoder

to the gear wheel you can set the best possible signal
parameters. This method requires a lot of time and
experience when installing the encoder.

2. After installing the RGM2G encoder at the required

distance do from the gear wheel, the required fine-adjust-
Position and configuration of the connection sockets for ment of the encoder signals is quickly made via the
the I2C interface on the back of the encoder. I2C-interface.
The connection sockets can be reached after partially
removing the guard tag.

Automatic amplitude stabilisation (option)

The signal electronics of the encoder enables the
amplitude of signals A & B to be stabilised to a value of
1 Vpp. This helps to offset any problems the axis or gear-
wheel has when rotating.

Stabilisation of the amplitude can be configured via the

I2C-interface.

Fine-tuning via the I2C-interface

Alignment box
Gear wheel PC or laptop
PB-RGMA-USB or
DCMU Operating system: Windows... (no Vista)
USB connection 1.1 or 2.0
Software: SPB-RGMA-USB
USB-cable
Details on the alignment of the sensor
parameter are given in the external
Programming box PB-RGMA-USB-01
RGM2G - A -... instructions.
installed in distance do
to the gear wheel

Datei: VS-Sensorik_DB_E_RGM2G-A Version: 5 Blatt: 4 Datum: 08.05.2009

VS Sensorik GmbH, Max-Planck-Str. 3, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Tel: 089 / 310 50 16, Fax: 089 / 310 33 83, www.VS-Sensorik.com
 Magnetic gear wheel encoder RGM2G-A
Order identifiers - Standard version
RGM2G - A - - /P -
Connector plug

Cable length in cm (e.g. "050" for 50cm)

Optional: Number of teeth of the gear wheel N, if N is
considerably different from 256 (e.g. "064" if N = 64)

Type of the reference mark (e.g. "Z", "F" or "L"):

Z - Type

F - Type

L - Type

S - Type

Y - Type

? - other types on request

3 - for gear wheel module M = 0.3

5 - for gear wheel module M = 0.5

Position of Signal tracks - "M" or "V":

Accessories M Tracks A & B V Ref.

Ref. Tracks A & B
Measuring gear wheels: ZR3-256/Di or ZR5-256/Di
Other types of gear wheels on request.

External interpolation box for the digitalisation

and interpolation of the analogue encoder signals

PB-RGMA-USB box with SPB-RGMA-USB software

for the fine alignment of encoder signals via the
I2C-interface

Digital calibration and measurement unit DCMU for the

visualisation, detailed analysis and fine alignment of the
encoder signals.
Datei: VS-Sensorik_DB_E_RGM2G-A Version: 6 Blatt: 5 Datum: 10.12.2009

VS Sensorik GmbH, Max-Planck-Str. 3, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Tel: 089 / 310 50 16, Fax: 089 / 310 33 83, www.VS-Sensorik.com
 Magnetic gear wheel encoder RGM2G-A
Order identifiers - Cable assignment
RGM2G - A - - /P -
Cable assignment
On the output of the encoder is a screened cable with 9
wires AWG28. The cable is assigned as follows:

Signal A + brown
Signal A - green

Signal B + grey
Signal B - orange

Signal Ref + red

Signal Ref - black

UB = 5VDC violet
GND (0V) yellow

RS_5V blue

The shield is connected to the casing on the encoder

side.

RGM2G - A - - /T -
Cable assignment
A shielded cable with 9 wires, AWG28, is attached at the
sensor output. The outer sheath is green according to
RAL6018, based on DESINA specifications.

The cable is assigned as follows:

Signal A + white
Signal A - brown

Signal B + pink
Signal B - black

Signal Ref + grey

Signal Ref - yellow

UB = 5VDC red
GND (0V) blue

RS_5V green

The shield is connected to the casing on the encoder

side.
Datei: VS-Sensorik_DB_E_RGM2G-A Version: 5 Blatt: 6 Datum: 08.05.2009

VS Sensorik GmbH, Max-Planck-Str. 3, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Tel: 089 / 310 50 16, Fax: 089 / 310 33 83, www.VS-Sensorik.com
 Magnetic gear wheel encoder RGM2 series
Order identifiers - overview
Analog output signals SIN, COS & Ref.

RGM2G - A - - /P -
... Standard version

RGM2G - A - - /T -
... Standard version
... With modified cable configuration

RGM2T - A - - /T -
... Increased working temperature up to 120°C
... With modified cable configuration

RGM2S - A - - /T -
... With mounting base
... Compatible with SIZAG sensor (SIEMENS)
... With modified cable configuration

RGM2G - A - - /T - DM
... With 17-pin flange socket on mounting base
... With modified cable configuration

RGM2G - AS - - /P -
RGM2S - AS - - /T -
RGM2T - AS - - /T -
RGM2S - AS - - /T -
RGM2G - AS - - /T - DM
... With activated amplitude stabilisation

Digital output signals according to RS432 (TTL)

RGM2G - D - - /P -
... Standard version
... With integrated interpolation electronics

Datei: VS-Sensorik_DB_E_RGM2G-A Version: 6 Blatt: Ü1 Datum: 27.10.2009

VS Sensorik GmbH, Max-Planck-Str. 3, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Tel: 089 / 310 50 16, Fax: 089 / 310 33 83, www.VS-Sensorik.com
 Magnetic gear wheel encoder RGM2 series
Order identifiers - overview
Analog output signals SIN, COS & Ref.

RGM2G - A - - /SP -
... Standard version

RGM2G - A - - /ST -
... Standard version
... With modified cable configuration

RGM2T - A - - /ST -
... Increased working temperature up to 120°C
... With modified cable configuration

RGM2S - A - - /ST -
... With mounting base
... Compatible with SIZAG sensor (SIEMENS)
... With modified cable configuration

RGM2G - A - - /ST - DM
... With 17-pin flange socket on mounting base
... With modified cable configuration

RGM2G - AS - - /SP -
RGM2S - AS - - /ST -
RGM2T - AS - - /ST -
RGM2S - AS - - /ST -
RGM2G - AS - - /ST - DM
... With activated amplitude stabilisation

Digital output signals according to RS432 (TTL)

RGM2G - D - - /SP -
... Standard version
... With integrated interpolation electronics

Datei: VS-Sensorik_DB_E_RGM2G-A Version: 6 Blatt: Ü2 Datum: 27.10.2009

VS Sensorik GmbH, Max-Planck-Str. 3, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Tel: 089 / 310 50 16, Fax: 089 / 310 33 83, www.VS-Sensorik.com
 ø4,5
Anschlusskabel Lage der Signalspuren
connecting cable Position of the signal channels
9 x AWG28 A, B & Ref.
21
4

0,5

9,5
+0,00
1

3,94 -0,02

35
13
R 45 4,3
3,5 °
14,5

2
10

,3°
15
R

19
3,5

27

Material Allgemeintoleranzen Dateiname Datum Maßstab

ISO 2768 - f RGM_ax 27.10.09 2:1

RGM2G-A ... /...

VS Sensorik GmbH Version Blatt
09VS042701
1 1
 Lage der Signalspuren
Position of the signal channels
A, B & Ref.
21

ø4,50
16,75
4

0,5

9,5
+0,00
1

3,94 -0,02

35
13
R 45 4,3
3,5 °
14,5

3,50
2
10

Anschlusskabel
connecting cable
R3

19
9 x AWG28
,5

27

Material Allgemeintoleranzen Dateiname Datum Maßstab

ISO 2768 - f RGM_tan 27.09.2009 2:1

RGM2G.../S...
VS Sensorik GmbH Version Blatt
09VS091709
1 1
D Assemblies Assembly PD-088-000 Feedscrew X-axis

Technical Product Documentation

26 Assembly PD-088-000 Feedscrew X-axis

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 26-274

D Assemblies Assembly PD-088-000 Feedscrew X-axis

26.1 Description
The feedscrew of the X-axis is a planetary roller spindle with rotary nut. The preloaded
feedscrew nut, without clearance, is driven by a toothed belt drive.

26.2 Maintenance and repair

The feedscrew of the X-axis has a central bore and is equipped with a grease nipple (see
Figure 26-1). This grease nipple is used to force the high performance grease into the
bearing and spindle nut. Lubrication can only be implemented at a certain slide position. If
lubrication is carried out at another slide position, the grease cannot reach the necessary
areas and the process has to be repeated.

26.2.1 Lubricating the X-axis

Grease nipple

Figure 26-1: Lubricating the X-axis

Proceed as follows to lubricate the X-axis:

1. Select the JOG mode.
2. Move the X slide to the measurement A = 40 mm.
3. Press the Emergency stop button.
4. Use the grease press to force 3-5 cm³ high performance grease, as specified in
the table of lubricants, into the spindle.
5. Unlock the Emergency stop button.
6. Move the X slide slowly across the entire movement range.

26.3 Drawings and parts list

26.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 26-275

D Assemblies Assembly PD-088-000 Feedscrew X-axis

Figure 26-2: Exploded view drawing of X-axis feedscrew

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 26-276

D Assemblies Assembly PD-088-000 Feedscrew X-axis

26.3.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-088-000 Feedscrew X-axis; Article No. 10782
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-001 Bearing housing X-axis 21793
2 Pcs SB-NC-113-002 Adjusting strip 21794
1 Pcs PD-088-001 Feedscrew X-axis gradient 6mm 22305
2 Pcs INA Axial-Radial bearing NKX35Z/P5 30189
3 Pcs Larco Grease nipple 291 M6 30312
4 Pcs SB-NC-011-018 Nut for feedscrew 21160
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-003 Drive shaft X-feedscrew 21795
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-004 Support sleeve 21796
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-005 Pressure disc 21797
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-006 Pre-loaded nut 21798
12 Pcs Cylindrical pin DIN 6325-5M6x14 30778
24 Pcs Spring washer DIN 2093 10x5.2x0.4 30821
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-007 Lock washer 21799
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-008 Adjusting nut 21800
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-009 Locknut 21801
1 Pcs Dowel pin 4x12 DIN 1481 30820
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-012 Holder for stripper 21790
1 Pcs Synchroflex toothed belt ZR-T5/630/16 30210
1 Pcs SB-NC-154-002 Stripper 1 22187
1 Pcs SB-NC-154-003 Stripper 2 22188

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 26-277

D Assemblies Assembly PD-089-000 Feedscrew Z-axis

Technical Product Documentation

27 Assembly PD-089-000 Feedscrew Z-axis

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 27-278

D Assemblies Assembly PD-089-000 Feedscrew Z-axis

27.1 Description
The feedscrew of the Z-axis is a planetary roller spindle with rotary nut. The rotating
feedscrew is supported by a compact axial inclined ball bearing on the foundation plate.
The free spindle end is held in a guide sleeve. The feedscrew is driven by a toothed belt
drive.

27.2 Maintenance and repair

The feedscrew of the Z-axis has a central bore and is equipped with a grease nipple (see
Figure 27-1). This grease nipple is used to force the high performance grease into the
bearing and spindle nut. Lubrication can only be implemented at a certain slide position. If
lubrication is carried out at another slide position, the grease cannot reach the necessary
areas and the process has to be repeated.

27.2.1 Lubricating the Z-axis

Z slide

Grease nipple

Drive Z slide

Adjustment of
slide position

Figure 27-1: Lubricating the Z-axis

Proceed as follows to lubricate the Z-axis:

1. Select the JOG mode.

2. Move the Z slide to the measurement A = 13 mm.
3. Press the Emergency stop button.
4. Use the grease press to force 3-5 cm³ high performance grease, as specified in
the table of lubricants, into the spindle.
5. Unlock the Emergency stop button.
6. Move the Z slide slowly across the entire movement range.

27.3 Drawings and parts list

27.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 27-279

D Assemblies Assembly PD-089-000 Feedscrew Z-axis

Figure 27-2: Exploded view drawing of Z-axis feedscrew

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 27-280

D Assemblies Assembly PD-089-000 Feedscrew Z-axis
27.3.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-089-000 Feedscrew Z-axis; Article No. 10783
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs PD-089-001 Feedscrew Z-axis gradient 6mm 22306
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-002 Housing Z-feed nut 21803
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-008 Adjusting nut 21800
1 Pcs SB-NC-113-009 Locknut 21801
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-003 Link Z-axis 21804
2 Pcs SB-NC-114-004 Sleeve 21805
2 Pcs SB-NC-114-005 Sleeve for cross-slide 21806
1 Pcs SB-NC-011-040 Support bearing for Z-axis 21313
1 Pcs SB-NC-011-034 Feather key 21149
1 Pcs INA Axial inclined ball bearing ZKLF25752RS 30190
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-007 Locknut Z-axis bearing 21808
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-008 Locknut 21809
1 Pcs Larco Grease nipple 291 M6 30312
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-001 Fixing nut Z-feedscrew 21791
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-009 Locknut Z-feedscrew 21810
1 Pcs Synchroflex drive belt ZR-T5/725/16 30185
2 Pcs SB-NC-154-003 Stripper 2 22188
2 Pcs SB-NC-114-006 Shearing pin 21807
1 Pcs SB-NC-011-020 Drive disc 21148

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 27-281

D Assemblies Assembly PD-119-000 Tailstock

Technical Product Documentation

28 Assembly PD-119-000 Tailstock

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 28-282

D Assemblies Assembly PD-119-000 Tailstock

28.1 Handling
THE TAILSTOCK MUST NOT BE RUN UNDER FULL-LOAD (5
BAR AND FULL ROTATION SPEED) DURING THE CONTINUOUS-
OPERATION! THE AXIAL SPHERICAL ROLLER BEARINGS CAN
BE DAMAGED BY OVERHEATING! THIS WILL DESTROY THE
TAILSTOCK!

28.1.1 Adjusting the limit switches

Limit switch for status Limit switch for status
message M15 message M16
(quill at the front) (quill at the back)

Limit switch for

monitoring the end
position of the quill

Figure 28-1: Limit switches of the tailstock

When the tailstock is in the working position, adjust the limit switches for the quill as
follows (see signs of the switches to find them and their function in the circuit diagram):
• The limit switch for “Quill at the back“ must light up when the quill has been
moved to the back. The workpiece is not clamped by the quill (feedback
message M16).
• The limit switch for “Quill at the front“ must light up when the quill has been
moved to the front. The workpiece is clamped by the quill (feedback message
M15).
• The limit switch for “Quill in end position“ must light up when the quill is at the
front without workpiece in the chuck.

28.1.1.1 Monitoring characteristic

When during the machining of a workpiece the limit switch “M15“ is left or the limit switch
“Qill in end position“ is reached the machine is stopped with an emergency-off error
message.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 28-283

D Assemblies Assembly PD-119-000 Tailstock

28.2 Maintenance and repair

Lubrication of the quill is achieved automatically by means of the pressurised lubrication
system.

THEORETICAL PRESSING FORCE 636N/BAR

MAX. PRESSURE 5 BAR
RIGIDITY IN MACHINE X-AXIS, QUILL COMPLETELY MOVED
OUT, MEASUREMENT AT THE OUTERMOST END OF THE
QUILL (NOT AT THE POINT) AGAINST E SLIDE C=40N/µm

28.3 Drawings and parts lists

28.3.1 Detail assembly drawing and the ISO-view

(See following page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 28-284

D Assemblies Assembly PD-119-000 Tailstock

Figure 28-2: Detail assembly drawing and the ISO-view for the tailstock

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 28-285

D Assemblies Assembly PD-119-000 Tailstock

28.3.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-119-000 Tailstock
Quant. Unit Description Parts number/Spezification ID-Number
1 Piece Tailstock case PD-119-001 ID: 100002
Cast: 100003
1 Piece Base plate PD-119-002 ID: 100004
Cast: 100005
2 Piece Aligning strip PD-119-003 ID: 100006
1 Piece Cover PD-119-004 ID: 100007
1 Piece Holder for cabel tow PD-119-005 ID: 100008
1 Piece Protection cover PD-119-006 ID: 100009
1 Piece Quill PD-119-007 ID: 100010
1 Piece Seal support PD-119-034 ID: 101410
1 Piece Centering point PD-119-009 ID: 100012
1 Piece Pressure disk PD-119-010 ID: 100013
1 Piece Inner distance bushing PD-119-011 ID: 100014
1 Piece Outer distance sleeve PD-119-012 ID: 100015
1 Piece Aligning ring PD-119-013 ID: 100016
1 Piece Auxiliary centering PD-119-014 ID: 100017
bushing
1 Piece Anti-rotation device PD-119-015 ID: 100018
1 Piece Pressure rod PD-119-016 ID: 100019
1 Piece Aligning ring PD-119-017 ID: 100020
1 Piece Distance bushing PD-119-018 ID: 100021
1 Piece Axial bearing support PD-119-019 ID: 100022
1 Piece Pressure disk PD-119-020 ID: 100023
1 Piece Seal plate part 1 PD-119-021 ID: 100024
1 Piece Seal plate part 2 PD-119-022 ID: 100025
1 Piece Piston PD-119-023 ID: 100026
1 Piece Cylinder flange 1 PD-119-025 ID: 100028
1 Piece Cylinder flange 2 PD-119-026 ID: 100029
4 Piece Tension rod PD-119-027 ID: 100030
1 Piece Cylinder tube PD-119-028 ID: 100031
3 Piece Pressure bolt PD-119-029 ID: 100032
3 Piece Clamp for sensor PD-119-030 ID: 100033
1 Piece Casted end case PD-119-031 ID: 100034
4 Piece Upper washer PD-050-043 ID: 21003
4 Piece Lower washer PD-050-044 ID: 21004
1 Piece 2-fold distributor - ID: 100566
2 Piece Screw joint 1/8-M8 - ID: 100035
2 Piece Valve NG4 G1/8 ID: 100036
2 Piece Plug R1/8 - ID: 26132
1 Piece Sperical roller bearing - ID: 100037
4 Piece Spindle bearing - ID: 26030
2 Piece Needle roller bearing - ID: 100040
without internal ring
1 Piece Seal ring G24x32x4 - ID. 100041
3 Piece Sensor magnet., cylind. - ID: 100042
3 Piece Cable box - ID: 100043
1 Piece O-ring 53,7x1,78 - ID: 100044

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 28-286

D Assemblies Assembly PD-119-000 Tailstock

1 Piece O-ring 63.22x1.78 - ID: 100045

1 Piece O-ring 82.22x2.62 - ID: 100046
1 Piece Stripper A5 55x63x7/5,5 - ID: 100047
3 Piece Rof seal E5 - ID: 100048
1 Piece Rod seal C1 - ID: 100049
1 Piece Piston seal - ID: 100050

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 28-287

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-110-000 Spindle flushing system 5000/42

Technical Product Documentation

29 Assembly SB-NC-110-000 Spindle flushing

system 5000/42

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 29-288

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-110-000 Spindle flushing system 5000/42

29.1 Description
In the spindle flushing system the cooling fluid flows through the spindle to the clamped
workpiece. It can even serve as a cooling system for the interface for appropriate
workpieces and the chucking tools can also be rinsed free of chips. In the case of very
small workpieces which cannot be removed from the machine using a gripper, these can
be rinsed out of the chucking tools by the spindle flushing system and caught in a
container.

29.2 Handling

29.2.1 Mounting

2 3 4

1 5

Figure 29-1: Mounting of the spindle flushing system (for spindle speeds up to 5,000
r.p.m.)
You can assemble the spindle flushing system as follows:

1. Remove the adjusting nut 3 and the stop ring 4. Insert the sealing package 6
(Merkel B0153-131.175 - O-ring 41x1.78) according to Figure 21-1. Use screw 5
to fix the stop ring in place.
Screw 5: 12 pcs. DIN 912 M3x25-12.9; Mmax=1,5Nm
2. Assemble flange 1 onto the end of the spindle. Use screw 2.
Screw 2: 6 pcs. DIN 912 M3x6-12.9; Mmax=1,2Nm
3. Mount radial shaft seal ring 8 with a little grease. Connect the rotation guide 1
with the mounting bracket 7. Ensure exact alignment of the rotation guide.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 29-289

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-110-000 Spindle flushing system 5000/42

29.3 Maintenance and repair

Check all of the O-rings on the carriage and all other seals regularly before mounting and
using the spindle flushing system. This also includes the radial shaft seal ring. These
should be replaced immediately if signs of wear or cracks are found

Regularly check the cooling fluid connection to make sure that the line does not leak.
DRY RUNNING OF THE SPINDLE FLUSHING SYSTEM WILL
LEAD TO DESTRUCTION OF THE RADIAL SHAFT SEALING
RING!
WATCH OUT FOR THIS DURING WORK OPERATIONS WHERE
THE SPINDLE OPERATES FOR A SHORT PERIOD WITHOUT
ACTIVATED SPINDLE FLUSHING!

29.4 Drawings and parts lists

29.4.1 Detail assembly drawing

Figure 29-2: Detail assembly drawing of the spindle flushing system 5000/42

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 29-290

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-110-000 Spindle flushing system 5000/42
29.4.2 Parts list
Assembly SB-NC-110-000 Spindle flushing unit 5000/42; Article no. 10474
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs SB-NC-110-001 Longitudinal seal holder 21710
1 Pcs SB-NC-110-002 Sealing runner 21711
1 Pcs Merkel radial shaft seal ring 14x28x7; 0145-129.678 30799
1 Pcs Securing ring DIN472-28x1.2 30800
1 Pcs Merkel rod seal 32x39.3x3.2 OMS-MR B0153-131.175 30798
1 Pcs Parker O-ring 2-030, 41x1.78 30797
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-103 Torque support 21531
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-109 Base holder 21534
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-105 Support bracke 21529
1 Pcs T-tenon block DIN 508-6 (Thread M5) 30791
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-107 Clamping plate 21533
1 Pcs SB-NC-137-003 Connector 21933

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 29-291

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-137-000 Spindle flushing system 8000/32

Technical Product Documentation

30 Assembly SB-NC-137-000 Spindle flushing

system 8000/32

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 30-292

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-137-000 Spindle flushing system 8000/32

30.1 Description
In the spindle flushing system the cooling fluid flows through the spindle to the clamped
workpiece. It can even serve as a cooling system for the interface for appropriate
workpieces and the chucking tools can also be rinsed free of chips. In the case of very
small workpieces which cannot be removed from the machine using a gripper, these can
be rinsed out of the chucking tools by the spindle flushing system and caught in a
container.

30.2 Handling

30.2.1 Mounting

3 4

2
5

Figure 30-1: Mounting of the spindle flushing system (for spindle speeds up to 8,000
r.p.m.)
You can assemble the spindle flushing system as follows:

1. Attach seal holder with integrated sealing package 7 (Merkel B0153-131.171 - O-

ring 29.87x1.78) to the stop ring 4 and the push/pull tube 6. Use screw 5 to fix
the seal support.
Screw 5: 12 pcs. DIN 912 M3x25-12.9; Mmax=1,5Nm
2. Assemble flange 2 onto the end of the spindle. Use screw 3.
Screw 2: 6 pcs. DIN 912 M3x6-12.9; Mmax=1,2Nm
3. Mount radial shaft seal ring 9 with a little grease. Connect the rotation guide 1
with the mounting bracket 8. Ensure exact alignment of the rotation guide.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 30-293

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-137-000 Spindle flushing system 8000/32

30.3 Maintenance and repair

Check all of the O-rings on the carriage and all other seals regularly before mounting and
using the spindle flushing system. This also includes the radial shaft seal ring. These
should be replaced immediately if signs of wear or cracks are found

Regularly check the cooling fluid connection to make sure that the line does not leak.
DRY RUNNING OF THE SPINDLE FLUSHING SYSTEM WILL
LEAD TO DESTRUCTION OF THE RADIAL SHAFT SEALING
RING!
WATCH OUT FOR THIS DURING WORK OPERATIONS WHERE
THE SPINDLE OPERATES FOR A SHORT PERIOD WITHOUT
ACTIVATED SPINDLE FLUSHING!

30.4 Drawings and parts lists

30.4.1 Detail assembly drawing

Figure 30-2: Detail assembly drawing of the spindle flushing system 8000/32

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 30-294

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-137-000 Spindle flushing system 8000/32

30.4.2 Parts list

Assembly SB-NC-137-000 Spindle flushing unit 8000/32; Article N°. 10540
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs Merkel radial shaft seal ring 14x28x7; 0145-129.678 30799
1 Pcs Securing ring DIN472-28x1.2 30800
1 Pcs Merkel bar seal DIN 472-28x1.2 30843
1 Pcs Merkel O-ring 2-025, 29.87x1.78 30842
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-103 Torque support 21531
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-109 Base holder 21534
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-105 Support bracke 21529
1 Pcs T-tenon block DIN 508-6 (Thread M5) 30791
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-107 Clamping plate 21533
1 Pcs SB-NC-137-001 Longitudinal seal holder 21931
1 Pcs SB-NC-137-002 Sealing runner 21932
1 Pcs SB-NC-137-003 Connector 21933

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 30-295

D Assemblies Assembly PD-074-000 Stroke monitoring device for the main spindle

Technical Product Documentation

31 Assembly PD-074-000 Stroke monitoring

device for the main spindle

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 31-296

D Assemblies Assembly PD-074-000 Stroke monitoring device for the main spindle

31.1 Handling

31.1.1 Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device

A Clamping ring

Figure 31-1: Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device

A) Proximity switch for feedback „BACK“
B) Proximity switch for feedback „FRONT“
C) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITHOUT WORKPIECE“
D) Clamping screw for proximity switch

Proceed as follows in order to adjust the clamping stroke monitoring device. The following
example bases on the fact that the clamping direction in the CLAMPING PARAMETERS
screen is BACK. The control system determines automatically the corresponding function
of the proximity switches:

1. Adjust the clamping stroke limitation (see chapter 21/22).

2. Clamp a workpiece.
3. The clamping ring moves BACKWARD. Adjust proximity switch A in the way that
its LED lights up. The function of this switch is in this case: Position monitoring
CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE.
4. Release the clamping device.
5. The clamping ring moves FORWARD. Adjust proximity switch B in the way that
its LED lights up. The function of this switch is in this case: Position monitoring
CLAMPING DEVICE RELEASE.
Proximity switch A must not light up anymore.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 31-297

D Assemblies Assembly PD-074-000 Stroke monitoring device for the main spindle
6. Clamp the clamping device without workpiece.
7. The clamping ring moves backward again passing the proximity switch A for
CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE. Adjust proximity switch C in the way that its
LED lights up. The condition is that there is a remaining mechanical stroke.

Changing over to the clamping direction FRONT in the CLAMPING PARAMETERS

screen results in new function of the proximity switches. Proximity switch A and B only
need to be re-adjusted according to the new clamping situation but it is not necessary to
change completely their mounting position. Only proximity switch C is mounted on the
opposite side underneath proximity switch A in the way that its plug is on the left side (see
below on the right).
A) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPING DEVICE RELEASED“
B) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE“
C) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITHOUT WORKPIECE“

Arrangement of the switches according to the clamping situation:

Hinten Hinten Leer

Back Back Empty
A A C

C B B
Leer Vorne Vorne
Empty Front Front

Clamping direction BACK Clamping direction FRONT

PROXIMITY SWITCH A AND B MUST NOT LIGHT UP AT THE SAME

TIME! OTHERWISE AN ALARM WILL BE DISPLAYED!

THE SPINDLE MUST NEVER BE OPERATED WHEN THE STROKE

LIMITING RINGS ARE NOT CLAMPED! THE SPINDLE ELEMENTS CAN
BE DAMAGED!

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 31-298

D Assemblies Assembly PD-074-000 Stroke monitoring device for the main spindle

31.2 Drawings and parts lists

31.2.1 An exploded view drawing

Figure 31-2: An exploded view drawing of the stroke monitoring for the main spindle

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 31-299

D Assemblies Assembly PD-074-000 Stroke monitoring device for the main spindle

31.2.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-074-000 Stroke monitoring for the main spindle; Article no. 22002
Quant. Unit Designation Article
no.
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-024 Stop 21742
3 Pcs Bosch Initiator; 0830 100 525 30853
3 Pcs Bosch coupling housing; 1834 484 089 30854
3 Pcs PD-074-001 Connection adapter 22003
2 Pcs PD-074-002 Clamping holder 22004
1 Pcs PD-074-003 Base holder on the right 22005
3 Pcs PD-074-004 Clamp 22006
1 Pcs PD-074-005 Base holder on the left 22007

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 31-300

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-142-000 Universal limit stop 5000/42

Technical Product Documentation

32 Assembly SB-NC-142-000 Universal limit

stop 5000/42

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 32-301

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-142-000 Universal limit stop 5000/42

32.1 Description
The universal limit stop assembly SB-NC-142-000 serves to support workpieces against
the spindle unit in an axial position, regardless of whether the chucking tool (pull-type
collet) is moved along the axis. The adjustable threaded rod SB-NC-143-002 is used to
set the axial position of the universal limit stop SB-NC-143-001 within the spindle. The
universal limit stop can be modified to adapt to the conditions and requirements of the
current clamping situation. The spindle moves in the axial direction by turning the
threaded rod SB-NC-143-002 with respect to the guide tube 1 SB-NC-143-004. The guide
screw SB-NC-143-005 glued into the guide tube 2 SB-NC-143-006 can be clamped by
clamping the tie rod SB-NC-143-007 against the threaded rod SB-NC-143-007, thereby
fixing the threaded rod in place.

32.2 Handling

32.2.1 Mounting the universal limit stop

1 2 3

Figure 32-1: Universal limit stop, stop part and mounting equipment
1) Socket spanner
2) Allen key SW5 for length adjustment
3) Guide sleeve
4) Stop part
5) Universal limit stop

Proceed as follows to mount the universal limit stop:

1. Screw the guide sleeve using the supplied socket key into the push/pull tube
from the front.
2. Push the universal limit stop from the back through the push/pull tube and
through the attached guide sleeve. Fix the universal limit stop at the rear to the
spindle with 6 screws DIN 912-M3x6, Mmax=1.5 Nm.
3. Screw the stop part onto the front of the universal limit stop.
4. Loosen the tie rod using an SW6 Allen key. Rotate the threaded rod using the
Allen key towards/away from the spindlenose until the required clamping depth of
the workpiece to be processed is set.
5. Reclamp the tie rod.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 32-302

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-142-000 Universal limit stop 5000/42

32.3 Maintenance and repair

The system must be protected against corrosion after use and must be suitably cleaned.

32.4 Drawings and parts list

32.4.1 Detail assembly

(see next page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 32-303

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-142-000 Universal limit stop 5000/42

Figure 32-2: Detail assembly of universal limit stop 5000/42

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 32-304

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-142-000 Universal limit stop 5000/42
32.4.2 Parts list
Assembly SB-NC-142-000 Universal limit stop 5000/42; Article No. 10614
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-001 Universal limit stop 22026
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-002 Threaded rod 22027
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-004 Guide tube 1 22029
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-005 Guide screw 22030
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-006 Guide tube 2 22031
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-007 Tie rod 22032
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-008 Seal runner 22033
1 Pcs Merkel Rod seal 22x29.3x3.2 OMS-MR B0153-131.171 30843
1 Pcs O-Ring 23.52x1.78 30875
1 Pcs SB-NC-142-001 Guide sleeve 22025
1 Pcs Locking plate DIN6799-9 30885

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 32-305

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-143-000 Universal limit stop 8000/32

Technical Product Documentation

33 Assembly SB-NC-143-000 Universal limit

stop 8000/32

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 33-306

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-143-000 Universal limit stop 8000/32

33.1 Description
The universal limit stop assembly SB-NC-143-000 serves to support workpieces against
the spindle unit in an axial position, regardless of whether the chucking tool (pull-type
collet) is moved along the axis. The adjustable threaded rod SB-NC-143-002 is used to
set the axial position of the universal limit stop SB-NC-143-001 within the spindle. The
universal limit stop can be modified to adapt to the conditions and requirements of the
current clamping situation. The spindle moves in the axial direction by turning the
threaded rod SB-NC-143-002 with respect to the guide tube 1 SB-NC-143-004. The guide
screw SB-NC-143-005 glued into the guide tube 2 SB-NC-143-006 can be clamped by
clamping the tie rod SB-NC-143-007 against the threaded rod SB-NC-143-002, thereby
fixing the threaded rod in place.

33.2 Handling

33.2.1 Mounting the universal limit stop

1 2 3

Figure 33-1: Universal limit stop, stop part and mounting equipment
1) Socket spanner
2) Allen key SW5 for length adjustment
3) Guide sleeve
4) Stop part
5) Universal limit stop

Proceed as follows to mount the universal limit stop:

1. Screw the guide sleeve using the supplied socket key into the push/pull tube
from the front.
2. Push the universal limit stop from the back through the push/pull tube and
through the attached guide sleeve. Fix the universal limit stop at the rear to the
spindle with 6 screws DIN 912-M3x6, Mmax=1.5 Nm.
3. Screw the stop part onto the front of the universal limit stop.
4. Loosen the tie rod using an SW6 Allen key. Rotate the threaded rod using the
Allen key towards/away from the spindlenose until the required clamping depth of
the workpiece to be processed is set.
5. Reclamp the tie rod.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 33-307

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-143-000 Universal limit stop 8000/32

33.3 Maintenance and repair

The system must be protected against corrosion after use and must be suitably cleaned.

33.4 Drawings and parts list

33.4.1 Detail assembly

(see next page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 33-308

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-143-000 Universal limit stop 8000/32

Figure 33-2: Detail assembly of universal limit stop 8000/32

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 33-309

D Assemblies Assembly SB-NC-143-000 Universal limit stop 8000/32

33.4.2 Parts list

Assembly SB-NC-143-000 Universal limit stop 8000/32; Article No. 10613
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-001 Universal limit stop 22026
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-002 Threaded rod 22027
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-003 Guide sleeve 22028
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-004 Guide tube 1 22029
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-005 Guide screw 22030
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-006 Guide tube 2 22031
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-007 Tie rod 22032
1 Pcs SB-NC-143-008 Seal runner 22033
1 Pcs Merkel Rod seal 22x29.3x3.2 OMS-MR B0153-131.171 30843
1 Pcs O-Ring 23.52x1.78 30875
1 Pcs Locking .plate DIN6799-9 30885

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 33-310

D Assemblies Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C

Technical Product Documentation

34 Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 34-311

D Assemblies Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C

CHUCKING TOOLS MAY ONLY BE MOUNTED, CHANGED AND

SET UP BY TRAINED PERSONNEL!

LOOSE, INCORRECTLY CLAMPED PARTS ARE HAZARDOUS

AND MAY CAUSE INJURY!

THE MOVING CLAMPING CYLINDER AND THE PUSH/PULL

TUBE ARE HAZARDOUS AND MAY CAUSE INJURY!

34.1 Description
The pull-type collet assembly is used to securely clamp the workpiece to be machined.
The pull-type collet, which is connected to the push/pull tube through an adapter, clamps
the workpiece when the tube is moved back.

34.2 Handling

34.2.1 Mounting the pull-type collet

Spindle nose

1 2

6
1 2

6
8
5

Figure 34-1: Mounting the pull-type collet

1) Adapter for the push/pull tube

2) Spindle headpiece
3) Collet seat
4) Pull-type collet
5) 4 set screws for radial adjustment

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 34-312

D Assemblies Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C
6) 1 special screw to ensure that the collet does not turn
7) 4 axial mounting bolts (M8x20, strength grade 10.9 ISO 4762)
8) Spindle nose

1. Move the push/pull tube as far as possible in the direction of the spindle nose.
2. Screw the adapter (1) into the push/pull tube of the spindle using a suitable
wrench.
3. Move the push/pull tube back again until the adapter is not extended out any
more and the spindle headpiece can be mounted.
4. Unscrew the set screws (5) in the spindle headpiece (2). Then place the spindle
headpiece on the spindle nose (8). Loosely tighten the axial mounting bolts (7).
5. Check to see if the centering seat (3) runs true using a dial gauge. Adjust the
centering seat using the set screws (5). Tighten the screws moderately.

IF NECESSARY, UNSCREW THE BOLT ON THE OPPOSITE

SIDE WHEN ALIGNING. THIS WILL ALLOW MORE FREEDOM
OF MOVEMENT FOR THE ASSEMBLY IN THE DESIRED
DIRECTION.

6. Tighten the axial mounting bolts (7) step by step up to a torque of 20 Nm. Check
to see if the centering seat runs true after each bolt is tightened.
7. Move the push/pull tube back in the direction of the spindle nose until it touches
the spindle headpiece.
8. Then check to see if the centering seat runs true again.
9. Then screw the collet on until all threads have made contact. Then unscrew the
collet until you can see the beginning of the groove. The torsional locking screw
(6) can then be screwed in.
10.Set the clamping forces.
11.Set the stroke limit of the clamping cylinder.
12.Adjust the clamping position monitor.

Carry out steps 10-12 according to the machine model/spindle type.

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 34-313

D Assemblies Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C

34.3 Maintenance and repair

The push-type collet assembly is to be regularly removed, cleaned, greased and checked
for wear. The cleaning/inspection period depends on how dirty it is and how long the
machine has been running. Defective parts are to be replaced immediately.

DEFECTIVE PARTS MAY ONLY BE REPLACED WITH MATCHING

REPLACEMENT PARTS THAT FULFILL THE REQUIREMENTS!

34.4 Drawings and parts list

34.4.1 Exploded view drawing

(See following page)

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 34-314

D Assemblies Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C

Figure 34-2: Pull-type collet W25 normal

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 34-315

D Assemblies Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C

Figure 34-3: Pull-type collet W25 long

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 34-316

D Assemblies Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C

Figure 34-4: Pull-type collet 5C

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 34-317

D Assemblies Pull-type collet assembly W25/5C

34.4.2 Parts list

Assembly SB-NC-151-000 Pull-type collet W25 normal
Number Unit Designation Article
desig. Number
1 Piece SB-NC-151-001 Spindle headpiece W25 22142
1 Piece SB-NC-151-002 Adapter for W25 22143
4 Piece 4x srews M1x1x8 DIN 914-45H 20177
1 Piece Collet 364E 10010

Assembly PD-076-000 Pull-type collet W25 long

Number Unit Designation Article
desig. Number
1 Piece PD-076-001 Spindle headpiece W25 21976
1 Piece PD-076-002 Adapter for W25 21977
4 Piece 4x screws M1x1x8 DIN 914-45H 20177
1 Piece Collet 364E 10010

Assembly SB-NC-146-000 Pull-type collet 5C

Number Unit Designation Article
desig. Number
1 Piece SB-NC-146-001 Spindle headpiece 5C 22070
1 Piece SB-NC-146-002 Adapter for 5C 22071
4 Piece 4x screws M1x1x8 DIN 914-45H 20177

PD Fanuc 32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 34-318

D Assemblies Push-type collet assembly F38/F48

Technical Product Documentation

35 Push-type collet assembly F38/F48

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 35-319

D Assemblies Push-type collet assembly F38/F48

CHUCKING TOOLS MAY ONLY BE MOUNTED, CHANGED AND

SET UP BY TRAINED PERSONNEL!

LOOSE, INCORRECTLY CLAMPED PARTS ARE HAZARDOUS

AND MAY CAUSE INJURY!

THE MOVING CLAMPING CYLINDER AND THE PUSH/PULL

TUBE ARE HAZARDOUS AND MAY CAUSE INJURY!

35.1 Description
The push-type collet assembly is used to securely clamp the workpiece to be machined. If
the push/pull tube moves towards the spindle nose, then a pressure collet moves over the
slotted push-type collet. The push-type collet is thereby pressed together and clamps the
workpiece.

35.2 Handling

35.2.1 Mounting the push-type collet

Spindle nose

10
1

3
4

5
7
6
1
8
3

6
9
7 10

Figure 35-1: Mounting the push-type collet

1) Spindle headpiece for push-type collets

2) Centering seat
3) Pressure collet
4) Compression spring

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 35-320

D Assemblies Push-type collet assembly F38/F48
5) Push-type collet
6) Lock nut
7) 4 set screws for radial adjustment
8) 4 axial mounting bolts (M8x20, strength grade 10.9 ISO 4762)
9) Spindle nose
10) Pulling chock (already mounted in the spindle headpiece)

1. Unscrew the set screws (7) in the spindle headpiece (1). Then place the spindle
headpiece on the spindle nose (9). Loosely tighten the axial mounting bolts (8).
2. Check to see if the centering seat (2) runs true using a dial gauge. Adjust the
centering seat using the set screws (7). Tighten the screws moderately.

IF NECESSARY, UNSCREW THE BOLT ON THE OPPOSITE

SIDE WHEN ALIGNING. THIS WILL ALLOW MORE FREEDOM
OF MOVEMENT FOR THE ASSEMBLY IN THE DESIRED
DIRECTION.

3. Tighten the axial mounting bolts (8) step by step up to a torque of 20 Nm. Check
to see if the centering seat runs true after each bolt.
4. Then check to see if the centering seat runs true again.
5. Move the push/pull tube as far away from the spindle nose as possible.
6. Insert the pressure collet (3), compression spring (4) and the collet (5). The
pulling chock (10) must sit in the groove in the pressure collet when inserting the
collet. You can then screw on the lock nut (6) and tighten it.
7. Set the clamping forces.
8. Set the stroke limit.
9. Adjust the clamping position monitor.

Carry out steps 7-9 according to the machine model/spindle type.

35.3 Maintenance and repair

The push-type collet assembly is to be regularly removed, cleaned, greased and checked
for wear. The cleaning/inspection period depends on how dirty it is and how long the
machine has been running. Defective parts are to be replaced immediately.

DEFECTIVE PARTS MAY ONLY BE REPLACED WITH MATCHING

REPLACEMENT PARTS THAT FULFILL THE REQUIREMENTS!

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 35-321

D Assemblies Push-type collet assembly F38/F48

35.4 Drawings and parts list

35.4.1 Exploded view drawing

(See the following page)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 35-322

D Assemblies Push-type collet assembly F38/F48

Figure 35-2: Push-type collet F48

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 35-323

D Assemblies Push-type collet assembly F38/F48

Max. Bar capacity: Ø32mm

Max. Clamping diam.: 32mm

Figure 35-3: Push-type collet F38

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 35-324

D Assemblies Push-type collet assembly F38/F48

35.4.2 Parts list

Assembly SB-NC-111-000 Push-type collet F48
Number Unit Designation Article
desig. Number
1 Stk SB-NC-111-001 Pressure collet 21713
1 Stk SB-NC-111-002 Lock nut 21714
1 Stk SB-NC-111-003 Spindle headpiece F48 21715
2 Stk SB-NC-111-004 Pulling chock 21716
1 Stk Compression spring D 475-681 21717
1 Stk Collet 173E 10541

Assemby SB-NC-147-000 Push-type collet F38

Number Unit Designation Article
desig. Number
1 Stk SB-NC-147-001 Pressure collet 22062
1 Stk SB-NC-147-002 Lock nut 22063
1 Stk SB-NC-147-003 Spindle headpiece F38 22064
2 Stk SB-NC-111-004 Pulling chock 21716
1 Stk Compression spring D 475-681 20172
1 Stk Collet 164E 10151

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 35-325

D Assemblies Power-chuck assembly, 3 jaws/4 jaws

Technical Product Documentation

36 Power-chuck assembly, 3 jaws/4 jaws

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 36-326

D Assemblies Power-chuck assembly, 3 jaws/4 jaws

THE MOUNTING, CHANGING AND SETTING UP OF CHUCKING

TOOLS MAY ONLY BE CARRIED OUT BY PERSONNEL WITH
THE APPROPRIATE TRAINING!

THERE IS A DANGER OF AN ACCIDENT OCCURRING IF

INCORRECTLY CLAMPED PARTS BECOME FREE!

THERE IS A DANGER OF AN ACCIDENT OCCURRING DUE TO

THE MOVING CLAMPING CYLINDER AND THE PUSH/PULL
RODS!

36.1 Description
The power-chuck assembly is used to safely clamp the workpiece to be machined and is
connected directly to the push/pull rod. When it is moved in the direction of the spindle
nose, the jaws are pressed outwards, and when it is moved away from the spindle nose,
the jaws are pressed inwards. This provides you with two methods of clamping
workpieces.

36.1.1 Mounting the power-chuck

Spindle nose

1 2
3

4
5

Figure 36-1: Mounting of the power chuck

1) Connecting threads
2) Power-chuck
3) Jaw base
4) Tenon block

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 36-327

D Assemblies Power-chuck assembly, 3 jaws/4 jaws
5) Head jaw
6) 4 adjustment screws for radial alignment
7) 3 or 4 axial mounting bolts (M8x20, strength grade 8.8 DIN 912)

1. Move the push/pull rod as far as possible in the direction of the spindle nose.
2. Release the adjustment screws (6) in the power-chuck (2). Screw the chuck
completely into the push/pull rod using the connecting threads (5). The bores for
the mounting bolts (7) and the corresponding bores in the spindle nose must line
up.
3. Move the push/pull rod carefully back again until the chuck touches the spindle
nose. Screw the mounting bolts (7) on loosely.
4. Check the solid chuck body (2) with a dial gauge to make sure it is true when
rotating. Align the chuck using the adjustment screws (7). Do not screw the bolts
in too tight, only moderately.

IF NECESSARY, UNSCREW THE BOLT ON THE OPPOSITE

SIDE WHEN ALIGNING. THIS WILL ALLOW MORE FREEDOM
OF MOVEMENT FOR THE ASSEMBLY IN THE DESIRED
DIRECTION.

5. Tighten the axial mounting bolts (7) step by step up to a torque of 30 Nm. Check
to make sure that the chuck is true when rotating.
6. Check to make sure that the chuck is true when rotating one more time.
7. Set the clamping forces.
8. Set the stroke limit.
9. Adjust the clamping position monitor.

Carry out steps 7-9 according to the machine series/type of spindle.

TECHNICAL DATA AS WELL AS INFORMATION ABOUT THE

FUNCTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE POWER CHUCK CAN
BE FOUND IN THE TECHINCAL DOCUMENTATION OF THE
MANUFACTURER.

36.2 Centre of gravity of the workpiece

IF THE CENTRE OF GRAVITY OF THE WORKPIECE DOES NOT
CORRESPOND WITH THE TURNING CENTRE OF THE
CLAMPING DEVICE (E. G. IN CASE OF NOT ROUND OR
EXCENTRIC WORKPIECES ECT.) THEN A COUNTERWEIGHT
MUST BE USED FOR THE BALANCE! IF THE WORKPIECE IS
TURNED WITHOUT PREVIOUS BALANCEING IT COULD COME
OFF THE CLAMPING DEVICE WITH HIGH SPEED AND CAUSE
SERIOUS INJURIES OR DAMAGE THE MACHINE!

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 36-328

D Assemblies Power-chuck assembly, 3 jaws/4 jaws

36.3 Customised jaws

If the operator is using customised jaws, care should be taken that these do not exceed
the maximum jaw weight specified in the technical data.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 36-329

D Assemblies Assembly Reduction pipe

Technical Product Documentation

37 Assembly Reduction pipe

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 37-330

D Assemblies Assembly Reduction pipe

37.1 Description
Reduction pipes are used to reduce the size of the spindle bore in the rotating spindle.
This becomes necessary when operating with bar feed units in order to guide the material
optimally and to avoid vibrations and drifting of the material from its central axis
particularly at high spindle revolutions .

There are various inner diameter pipes available which are matched to the gradation of
the bar feed unit. The pipe inner diameter A should have the same diameter as the guide
pipe for the bar feed. The maximum workpiece diameter is always 1 mm smaller than the
inner diameter of the reduction pipe.

The length of the reduction pipe depends on the type of clamping system being used.
Shorter pipes are used when using pull-type collets while longer pipes are used when
using push-type collets or power clamping chucks.

37.2 Handling

37.2.1 Mounting the reduction pipe

You can mount the reduction pipe as follows:

1. Switch off the machine by pressing the Emergency Stop Button. The machine
must not be switched on again by other persons while the mounting is taking
place.
2. Remove the support ring at the end of the spindle SB-NC-109-026 (see Book
Sub-assemblies, Chapter 21 Assembly SB-NC-195-000 Spindle 5000/42 or.
Chapter 22 Assembly SB-NC-194-000 Spindle unit 8000/32).

THE STOP RING SB-NC-109-025 MUST BE TURNED TOWARDS

THE REAR BEFORE REMOVING THE SUPPORT RING WHERE
NECESSARY

3. Lead the reduction pipe from the end of the spindle into the main spindle.
4. Fix the end of the reduction pipe onto the clamping cylinder 2 (SB-NC-135-019).
Use the three screws M6X12.
5. Check the function of the clamping cylinder.

THE MACHINE MUST ONLY BE OPERATED WHEN THE

REDUCTION PIPE HAS BEEN PROPERLY MOUNTED AND FIXED
IN PLACE! IT IS NECESSARY TO CHECK THE FUNCTION OF
THE CLAMPING UNIT ONCE THE MOUNTING OPERATION IS
SUCCESSFUL! DAMAGED REDUCTION PIPES SHOULD NO
LONGER BE USED!

37.3 Maintenance and repair

Used sufficient anti-corrosion agent when storing the reduction pipes in storage.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 37-331

D Assemblies Assembly Reduction pipe

37.4 Drawings

37.4.1 Reduction pipes for pull-type collets

Section A-A

Article No. ØA ØB
1068509.0 9 11
1068513.0 13 15
1068517.0 17 19
1068520.0 20 22
1068550 Special Special

Figure 37-1: Reduction pipes for pull-type collets - max. speed 5,000 r.p.m.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 37-332

D Assemblies Assembly Reduction pipe

Section A-A

Article No. ØA ØB
1059809.0 9 11
1059813.0 13 15
1059817.0 17 19
1059820.0 20 22
1059850 Special Special

Figure 37-2: Reduction pipes for pull-type collets - max. speed 8,000 r.p.m.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 37-333

D Assemblies Assembly Reduction pipe

37.4.2 Reduction pipes for push-type collets and a chuck

Section A-A

Article No. ØA ØB
1059609.0 9 11
1059613.0 13 15
1059617.0 17 19
1059620.0 20 22
1059624.0 24 26
1059627.0 27 29
1059631.0 31 33
1059635.0 35 37
1059638.0 38 40
1059650 Special Special

Figure 37-3: Reduction pipes for push-type collets and a chuck - max. speed 5,000 r.p.m.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 37-334

D Assemblies Assembly Reduction pipe

Section A-A

Article No. ØA ØB
1059709.0 9 11
1059713.0 13 15
1059717.0 17 19
1059720.0 20 22
1059724.0 24 26
1059727.0 27 29
1059750 Special Special

Figure 37-4: Reduction pipes for push-type collets and a chuck - max. speed 8,000 r.p.m.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 37-335

D Assemblies Assembly PD-067-000 Roller belt cover

Technical Product Documentation

38 Assembly PD-067-000 Roller belt cover

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 38-336

D Assemblies Assembly PD-067-000 Roller belt cover

38.1 Description
The equipment serves to fully cover the machining work area of the machine PD. The
cover belt PD-067-017 is passed through a bending spring PD-067-018.

38.2 Maintenance and repair

One must take care concerning the free moving smoothness of the whole system.
Excessive dirt can lead to jamming of the belt and possible damage to the equipment. If
one establishes during operation that the cover belt PD-067-017 is no longer being drawn
in cleanly, then the equipment should be cleaned in the area of the wipers PD-067-012
and PD-067-013. The forces and lengths shown in the drawing should be observed when
replacing belt PD-067-017.

38.3 Drawings and the parts list

38.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 38-337

D Assemblies Assembly PD-067-000 Roller belt cover

The pre-loading of the spring (PD-067-018) should be adjusted in

such a way that on extracting the belt (dimension B) to a length of
550mm the block position of the spring is reached. The belt entry
force Fz is ca. 25N

Figure 38-1: Exploded view drawing of the roller belt cover

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 38-338

D Assemblies Assembly PD-067-000 Roller belt cover
38.3.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-067-000 Roller belt cover; Article no. 10559
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs PD-067-001 Shaft guide pulley 21937
2 Pcs FAG Radial ball bearing 608 RSR (in the guide pulley) 30083
1 Pcs PD-067-002 Guide pulley 21938
1 Pcs PD-067-003 Ring (in the guide pulley) 21939
1 Pcs Securing ring DIN 472-22x1 30845
1 Pcs PD-067-004 V-ring-support (guide pulley) 21940
1 Pcs Forsheda V-ring V-18A (B 3992-058.603) 30847
1 Pcs Hexagonal nut DIN 934-M8 -
1 Pcs PD-067-006 Shaft spring housing 21942
2 Pcs SFK Radial ball bearing 20/37/9 RS1 30846
1 Pcs PD-067-007 Internal spacer ring 21943
1 Pcs PD-067-008 External spacer ring 21944
1 Pcs PD-067-009 Bearing cap 21945
1 Pcs PD-067-010 Cap below 21946
1 Pcs PD-067-012 Wiper 1 21948
1 Pcs PD-067-013 Wiper 2 21949
1 Pcs PD-067-014 Belt holder 21950
1 Pcs PD-067-015 Housing cover 1 21951
1 Pcs PD-067-016 Housing cover 2 21952
1 Pcs PD-067-017 Niro-belt 21953
1 Pcs PD-067-018 Spring-belt 21954
1 Pcs PD-067-011 Support shaft for the extendable belt 21947
1 Pcs PD-067-005 Housing 21941
1 Pcs PD-067-019 Washer 21981
1 Pcs PD-067-017 Guideway wiper 20811

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 38-339

D Assemblies Assembly PD-078-000 E-slide / PD-082-000 Replacement-E-slide

Technical Product Documentation

39 Assembly PD-078-000 E-slide /

PD-082-000 Replacement-E-slide

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 39-340

D Assemblies Assembly PD-078-000 E-slide / PD-082-000 Replacement-E-slide

39.1 Drawings and parts list

39.1.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 39-341

D Assemblies Assembly PD-078-000 E-slide / PD-082-000 Replacement-E-slide

Figure 39-1: Exploded view drawing of the E-slide

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 39-342

D Assemblies Assembly PD-078-000 E-slide / PD-082-000 Replacement-E-slide

Figure 39-2: Exploded view drawing of the replacement E-slide

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 39-343

D Assemblies Assembly PD-078-000 E-slide / PD-082-000 Replacement-E-slide
39.1.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-078-000 E-slide; Article no. 104619
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs PD-050-001 Guide plate for the sub-spindle 20987
1 Pcs PD X/Z/E-axis Fanuc linear scale absolut LC493F-ML420mm 113402
2 Pcs PD-050-010 Bolts for the locating rail 20965
2 Pcs PD-050-011 Setting block 20973
2 Pcs PD-050-012 Setting wedge 20974
1 Pcs PD-050-013 Guideway wiper 20812
1 Pcs PD-050-014 Guideway wiper 20813
1 Pcs PD-050-015 Base strip for the retainer gib 20975
2 Pcs PD-050-016 Retainer gib below 20976
2 Pcs PD-050-017 Holder for the measuring scale 20977
2 Pcs PD-050-018 Clamp for the measuring scale 20978
1 Pcs PD-050-046 Guideway wiper 20814
1 Pcs Locating rail 20963
2 Pcs SB-NC-010-015 Retainer gib strip on the Z-axis 21291
1 Pcs ISO 8734-4x30-C1 Cylindrical pin 102728
2 Pcs Holder for the measuring head 104768
4 Pcs Cylindrical pin DIN 6325-4M6x20 30861
2 Pcs Bär pressure spring D10-13 30623
1 Pcs Busak und Luyken wiper ASA-60x70x7/10-N 30622
1 Pcs PD-050-019 Holder for the measuring head 20979

Assembly PD-082-000 Replacement-E-slide; Article no. 10599

Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs PD-050-013 Guideway wiper 20812
2 Pcs PD-050-016 Retainer gib below 20976
2 Pcs SB-NC-010-015 Retainer gib for Z-axis 21291
1 Pcs PD-082-001 E-slide-replacement plate 22017

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 39-344

D Assemblies Assembly PD-108-000 Sub-spindle headstock (Fanuc)

Technical Product Documentation

40 Assembly PD-108-000 Sub-spindle

headstock (Fanuc)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 40-345

D Assemblies Assembly PD-108-000 Sub-spindle headstock (Fanuc)

40.1 Drawings and parts list

40.1.1 Exploding view drawing

(see next page)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 40-346

D Assemblies Assembly PD-108-000 Sub-spindle headstock (Fanuc)

One additionally needs not visible):

Energy line pipe R58-35 links; Order number 58.05.075.0
complete with connecting elements 581.12
Article number 31236

Figure 40-1: Exploded view drawing of the sub-spindle headstock (Fanuc)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 40-347

D Assemblies Assembly PD-108-000 Sub-spindle headstock (Fanuc)
40.1.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-108-000 Sub-spindle headstock; Article no. 10805
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs PD-068-001 Housing for the sub-spindle 21955
1 Pcs PD-050-025 Flap cover 20985
1 Pcs PD-050-028 Spring support 20988
1 Pcs PD-068-005 Holding bracket for the air spring 21959
1 Pcs PD-068-004 Holding bolts 21958
1 Pcs PD-068-003 Cable holder 21957
2 Pcs PD-050-026 Hinge for the flap cover 20986
2 Pcs PD-050-027 Hinge 20964
1 Pcs PD-068-002 Cover plate 21956
1 Pcs PD-050-030 Axial bolts for the air spring 20990
2 Pcs Pin DIN 6325 10M6x32 30848
2 Pcs Pin DIN 6325 10M6x36 30849
1 Pcs Bansbach Gas spring A1A1-40-060-205/050N 9202 30212
2 Pcs Pin DIN 6325 6M6x16 30676
4 Pcs PD-050-043 Washer above 21003
4 Pcs PD-050-044 Washer below 21004
1 Pcs PD-068-009 T-grooved plate 21963
1 Pcs PD-068-012 Pressure cap 22024
1 Pcs PD-100-001 Holder for the cable support unit 22374
1 Pcs PD-068-011 Cover plate 21965

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 40-348

D Assemblies Assembly PD-097-000 Air distributor

Technical Product Documentation

41 Assembly PD-097-000 Air distributor

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 41-349

D Assemblies Assembly PD-097-000 Air distributor

41.1 Drawings and parts list

41.1.1 Assembly drawing

(see next page)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 41-350

D Assemblies Assembly PD-097-000 Air distributor

Figure 41-1: Detail assembly drawing for the air distributor

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 41-351

D Assemblies Assembly PD-097-000 Air distributor
41.1.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-097-000 Air distributor; Article no. 22364
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
2 Pcs PD-097-001 Connection piece 22365
2 Pcs PD-097-002 Hose connector 1 22366
2 Pcs PD-097-003 Hose connector 2 22367
2 Pcs PD-097-005 Clamping ring 2 22369
1 Pcs Ermeto Straight screw-in-swivel joint G1/8“, pipe D=6 mm; GE 22363
6PLR-ED
2 Pcs Ötiker 2-ear-clamp made out of pipe (13.0-15.0 mm); 1315 -
2 Pcs O-ring 5.70x1.90 31234
2 Pcs O-ring 20.35x1.78 31235
2 Pcs Bosch locking screw M5; 1823 462 016 31233
1 Pcs Ermeto angled- swivel joint G1/8“, Pipe D=6 mm; SWVE 6-PLR 22335
1 Pcs Bosch PU-plastic hose D=8x1, L=3244 -
1 Pcs Bosch PU- plastic hose D=14x1.5, L=3280 -
1 Pcs Rubber sleeve holder KT16 (holed: D=12 mm) - contained in the 41220
spray protection sub-assembly PD-099-000 Article no. 10781

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 41-352

D Assemblies Assembly PD-113-000 Sub-spindle 8000/32 (Fanuc)

Technical Product Documentation

42 Assembly PD-113-000 Sub-spindle 8000/32

(Fanuc)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 42-353

D Assemblies Assembly PD-113-000 Sub-spindle 8000/32 (Fanuc)

42.1 Handling

42.1.1 Setting the clamping stroke

Stroke limiting ring Stop ring

Micro-switch
Figure 42-1: Setting the clamping stroke monitoring

Proceed as follows to set the clamping stroke:

1. Loosen the 2 attachment screws on the stroke limiting rings.

2. Rotate the stroke limiting rings away from the stop ring until the full path of the
clamping cylinder can be traversed.
3. Mount the chucking tool and clamp a workpiece in.
4. Rotate the stroke limiting ring that limits the stroke in this direction until it touches
the stop ring. Rotate the stroke limiting ring about 1 turn back and then as far as
required until the spacing slits in the stroke limiting ring are not lying over the
cavities in the headstock spindle. If this is not done, the ring rotation trueness
and therefore also the spindle trueness will not be ensured. Tighten the stroke
limiting ring with the attachment screws.
5. Leave the workpiece in place. Rotate the second stroke limiting ring up to the
stop ring until the stroke of the stop ring is still sufficient to open the chucking
tool and remove the workpiece. Note however that the stroke must be sufficiently
great that the micro-switches cannot be overlapped in any circumstance. The
spacing slits in the stroke limiting ring must not lie over the cavities in the
headstock spindle. Otherwise, the ring rotation trueness and therefore also the
spindle trueness will not be ensured. Tighten the stroke limiting ring with the
attachment screws.

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 42-354

D Assemblies Assembly PD-113-000 Sub-spindle 8000/32 (Fanuc)
6. Check the chucking tool function.

THE SPINDLE MUST NOT BE OPERATED IF THE STROKE

LIMITING RINGS ARE NOT TIGHTENED! SPINDLE ELEMENTS
MAY BE DAMAGED!

42.2 Drawings and parts list

42.2.1 Detail assembly

(see next page)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 42-355

D Assemblies Assembly PD-113-000 Sub-spindle 8000/32 (Fanuc)

Figure 42-2: Detail assembly sub-spindle 8000/32 (Fanuc)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 42-356

D Assemblies Assembly PD-113-000 Sub-spindle 8000/32 (Fanuc)

42.2.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-113-000 Sub-spindle 8000/32 (Siemens)
Quant. Unit Description Article No.
5 Pcs Spindle bearing 21901
2 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-016, 15.6x1.78 30611
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-003 Front cover 21904
1 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-159, 126.67x2.62 30834
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-005 Bearing ring 21906
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-006 Balancing element 21724
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-007 External spacer ring außen 21908
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-009 Sealing disc 21910
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-010 Inner ring air supply 21911
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-011 Cover disc 21912
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-012 Belt wheel ROD, T2.5 Z=108 DT=85.94 21913
DK=85.45
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-013 Flanged wheel 21914
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-015 Indexed wheel 21916
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-016 Pre-loaded nut 21917
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-017 Locking nut 21918
14 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-010, 6.07x1.78 30803
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-019 Clamping cylinder 2 21920
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-020 Separating piston 21921
1 Pcs Parker 2-043, 88.62x1.78 30837
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-021 Sealing plate 21922
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-022 Piston 21923
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-023 Reducer disc 21924
4 Pcs Shaft locking ring DIN 471-45x1.75 30841
2 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-031, 44.17x1.78 30835
2 Pcs Parker Piston seal set profile OA; 0110 00811 30839
4 Pcs Helmbrecht PDF Rod seal C1 4035 N3571 30838
2 Pcs Feather key DIN 6885-A6/6x45 30840
3 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-038, 66.40x1.78 30836
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-025 Flange pulley without indexing 21926
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-026 Headstock spindle 21927
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-018 Clamping cylinder 1 21919
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-008 Inner spacer ring 21909
2 Pcs Parker O-Ring 2-046, 107.67x1.78 30607
4 Pcs PD-069-001 Plain washer 21966
2 Pcs Pin DIN 6325 10M6x20 30850
1 Pcs PD-069-002 Spindle housing 21967
1 Pcs PD-069-003 Rear cover 21968
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-004 Front cover 21905
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-024 Stopper 21925
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-026 Support ring 21744
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-006 Push/pull tube 21907
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-025 Adjusting nut 21743
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-031 Main belt wheel centre piece HTD-8M Z=36 22407
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-032 Main belt wheel edge piece HTD-8M Z=36 22406
2 Pcs SB-NC-135-033 Intermediate flanged wheel 22408

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 42-357

D Assemblies Assemblies PD-107-000 Sub spindle drive 8000/32 (Fanuc)

Technical Product Documentation

43 Assemblies PD-107-000 Sub spindle drive

8000/32 (Fanuc)

PD Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 43-358

D Baugruppen Assemblies PD-107-000 Sub spindle drive 8000/32 (Fanuc)

43.1 Drawings and parts list

43.1.1 Exploded view drawing

Figure 43-1: Exploded view drawing Sub spindle 8000/32 (Fanuc)

PD_Fanuc32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 43-359

D Assemblies Assembly PD-090-000 Feed spindle E-axis

43.1.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-107-000 Sub spindle Article no. 10785
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs PD-107-001 Motor holder 22222
1 Pcs PD-107-003 Clamping plate 22224
1 Pcs SB-NC-174-005 straining ring 22229
1 Pcs SB-NC-174-000 Rod belt pulley 10533
1 Pcs SB-NC.174-001 Rod belt pulley Part 1 22225
2 Pcs SB-NC-174-003 Flanged wheel innen 22227
2 Pcs SB-NC-174-002 Inner Rod belt pulley Part 2; 8000 Upm 22226
2 Pcs SB-NC-174-004 External Flanged wheel 22228
1 Set 3x 720x8 Toothed belt; HTD-8M-720-8; CXP III 31310
1 Pcs PD-107-002 Motor carrier 22223
2 Pcs Cylindrical pin 8x14; ISO 8734-8x14-C1 26301
1 Pcs Taper clamping ring; RLK 300 - 28x32 31472
1 Pcs PD-070-004 clamp segment 21962
1 Pcs A06B-1504-B103; Spindlemotor 2/10000HVi, 400V, 2kW 103604

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 43-360

D Assemblies Assembly PD-090-000 Feed spindle E-axis

Technical Product Documentation

44 Assembly PD-090-000 Feed spindle E-axis

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 44-361

D Assemblies Assembly PD-090-000 Feed spindle E-axis

44.1 Description
The feed spindle on the E-axis is a planetary roller threaded spindle of the highest
precision and rigidity. It is supported on one side by an axial angular contact ball bearing
set and is driven over toothed belts and toothed belt pulleys from a feed motor.

44.2 Maintenance and repair

The feedscrew of the E-axis has a central bore and is equipped with a grease nipple (see
Figure 44-1). This grease nipple is used to force the high performance grease into the
bearing and spindle nut. Lubrication can only be implemented at a certain slide position. If
lubrication is carried out at another slide position, the grease cannot reach the necessary
areas and the process has to be repeated.

44.2.1 Lubricating the E axis (only with sub spindle option)

Spindle

Grease nipple

E slide

Cover

Figure 44-1: Lubricating the E axis

To lubricate the E axis proceed as follows:

1. Select the REF mode.

2. Move the E slide to its reference position.
3. Select the JOG mode.
4. Move the E slide to the position E1=545 using the arrow keys (see screen).
5. Press the emergency off button. Remove the cover of the grease nipple.
6. Use the grease press to force 3-5 cm³ high performance grease, as specified in
the table of lubricants, into the spindle.
7. Unlock the Emergency off button.
8. Move the E slide slowly across the entire movement range.
9. Put the cover onto the nipple.

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 44-362

D Assemblies Assembly PD-090-000 Feed spindle E-axis

44.3 Drawings and parts list

44.3.1 Detail exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 44-363

D Assemblies Assembly PD-090-000 Feed spindle E-axis

Figure 44-2: Detail exploded view drawing of the drive spindle on the E-axis

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 44-364

D Assemblies Assembly PD-090-000 Feed spindle E-axis
44.3.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-090-000 Feed spindle E-axis; Article no. 10784
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs PD-055-001 Bearing flange 20923
1 Pcs PD-055-002 Protective pipe 20924
1 Pcs PD-055-003 Nut housing 20925
1 Pcs PD-055-004 Securing ring 20926
1 Pcs PD-055-005 Securing nut 20927
1 Pcs PD-055-006 Clamping nut 20928
1 Pcs PD-090-001 Feed spindle E-axis lead 6 mm 22304
1 Pcs PD-055-008 Cap 20929
1 Pcs PD-055-009 End flange 20930
1 Pcs PD-055-010 Connecting pipe 20931
1 Pcs SB-NC-011-034 Parallel key 21149
1 Pcs SB-NC-011-020 Drive disc for the Z-axis 21148
1 Pcs INA Axial-angular contact ball bearing ZKLF25752RS 30190
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-007 Securing nut for Z-axis bearing 21808
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-008 Securing nut 21809
1 Pcs Larco lubricating nipple No. 291 M6 30312
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-001 Fixing nut for the Z-feed spindle 21791
1 Pcs SB-NC-114-009 Securing nut for the Z-feed spindle 21810
1 Pcs O-ring 31.47x1.78 30621
4 Pcs Cylindrical pin DIN6325-5M6x8 30144
1 Pcs Synchroflex toothed pulley belt T5/815/16 ZB=163 30195
(A=282.055mm)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 44-365

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-111-000 Q-Feed drive (Fanuc)

Technical Product Documentation

45 Assembly: PD-111-000 Q-Feed drive (Fanuc)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 45-366

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-111-000 Q-Feed drive (Fanuc)

45.1 Drawings and parts list

45.1.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 45-367

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-111-000 Q-Feed drive (Fanuc)

Figure 45-1: Exploded view drawing of the Q-Feed drive

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 45-368

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-111-000 Q-Feed drive (Fanuc)
45.1.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-111-000 Q-Feed drive Fanuc 32i-B; Article no. 108811
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs SB-NC-176-001 Motor plate Z/Q axis Fanuc 32i-B 22237
1 Pcs Servo motor Fanuc ALM2.5; A06B-0377-B577/7008 -
1 Pcs Fanuc Power plug A06B-6050-K121 -
1 Pcs Fanuc Impulse plug A06B-6050-K115 -
1 Pcs SB-NC-106-004 Pinion Z axis (Fanuc) 21633
1 Pcs SB-NC-020-017 Clamping plate 21170
1 Pcs SB-NC-020-018 Clamping plate 21169
1 Pcs SB-NC-122-006 Clamping plate 21836
1 Pcs SB-NC-106-012 Washer 21837
1 Pcs SB-NC-106-013 Locking plate 21838

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 45-369

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device

Technical Product Documentation

46 Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-370

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device

46.1 Handling

46.1.1 Setting up the bar gripping device

The speed at which the bar gripping device moves out or in, swings in or out as well as
the speed at which the gripper opens and closes can be set using the appropriate throttle
check valves (see Figure 46-1).

On the upper side of the machine; for

setting: Swinging in/swinging out

Behind the left side machine

cover; for setting: Movement
in/movement out

In the working area on the grabber arm;

for setting: grabber open and close

Figure 46-1: Throttle check valves for the bar gripping device

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-371

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device
46.1.2 Alignment of the bar gripping device
The bar gripping device should be set up and aligned at the works in such a way that it
grips the machined workpiece axially and radially in an optimum manner. It is possible
that the bar gripping device will need exchanging or re-aligning after a collision with other
machine elements in the working area or after wear has occurred on a shock absorber.

Proceed as follows to exchange the equipment:

1. Switch off the machine and remove left-hand side panelling, the panel above the
bar gripping device (roof) and the panel PD-065-045 in the working area (can be
moved over the gripper arm), though which the operating arm is passed (see
Figure 46-2).

Covering panel PD-065-045 in the

working area

Figure 46-2: Covering panel in the working area

2. Mark all of the electrical and pneumatic connections and then disconnect them.
The arm can be swung in manually.
3. Remove the screws which are shown in Figure 43-3 M8x80 (4 pcs.). Ensure that
the adjusting feet PD-065-009 do not turn. Pull the swinging arm into the working
area and lift the bar gripping device out of the machine using at least two people.

DO NOT PUT YOUR HANDS INTO THE SIDE SLIT ON THE

SUPPORT PIPE PD-065-019 WHEN LIFTING OUT THE
GRABBING DEVICE! THERE IS THE DANGER OF BEING
INJURED THROUGH SQUASHING! THE GRABBING DEVICE
MUST BE LIFTED EVENLY (PARALLEL), SINCE OTHERWISE
THE OPERATING ARM WILL SLIP INTO THE GUIDE PIPE!
THERE IS DANGER IN THIS CASE OF SUFFERING INJURY
THROUGH SQUASHING AT THE CLAMPING CUP!

Adjusting feet

M8x80 (4x)

Figure 46-3: Locking screws for the base plate PD-065-001

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-372

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device
4. Fix the clamping strips PD-065-002 (from the old bar gripping device) over the
oblong slots in the base plate PD-065-001 of the new bar gripping device using a
little thick grease. Place the new device in the shaft and put screws M8x80 back
in again to fix the base plate. Tighten them up manually so that they are still
loose enough to allow the base plate to be moved over the adjusting feet (see
also Figure 46-3).
5. Restore all of the pneumatic and electrical connections. The machine and the air
supply should not be switched on just yet. Move the swinging arm into its starting
position.

Aligning the gripper device:

1. Align the front bearing block PD-065-003 roughly using a calliper gauge after
mounting the gripper device, so that the distances to the shaft walls on both
sides are the same (see Figure 46-4). Then tighten the four fixing screws M8x80
up to hand tight to fix the base plate PD-065-001 in position (see Figure 46-3).

Front bearing block

Figure 46-4: Rough alignment of the front bearing block

2. Disconnect the air connection M84 (gripper arm at the front - see Figure 46-5)
and close this off with a suitable blind plug. Switch on the machine and the air
supply. The operating arm can now be moved manually forwards and backwards.

Air connection M84

Figure 46-5: Air connection M84

3. In order to align the operating arm its horizontal and vertical parallelity over the
required operating length (which depends on the machining program) and in the
swung-in position of the gripper arm must be measured and corrected for any
deviation above 0.02mm. Place the dial gauge on it as shown in Figure 38-6. Fix

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-373

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device
the foot on the X-slide in order to be able to bring the gauge past the operating
arm in the Z-direction.

WHEN MOVING THE OPERATING ARM DOWNWARDS

WITH THE DIAL GAUGE, ONE MUST ABSOLUTELY MAKE
SURE THAT THIS DOES NOT COLLIDE WITH MACHINE
ELEMENTS IN THE WORKING AREA!
ALSO ENSURE THAT NO COLLISION OCCURS WITH
MACHINE ELEMENTS IN THE WORKING
AREA WHEN SWINGING IN THE SWINGING ARM.

Vertical alignment Horizontal alignment

Figure 46-6: Parallelity measurement of the operating arm of the gripper device
Start by measuring the horizontal parallelity and the vertical parallelity. The
horizontal parallelity is corrected by moving the front bearing block PD-065-003
or the base plate PD-065-001 to the left or right, while the vertical parallelity is
corrected by turning the adjusting feet PD-065-009 to move upwards or
downwards (see Figure 46-7).

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-374

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device

Turning of the adjusting feet is

undertaken on the left side of the
machine (see above).

Figure 46-7: Alignment of the operating arm of the gripper device

Measure and correct the parallelity until the point is reached where the horizontal
and vertical deviations are smaller than 0.02mm. Then tighten up the four screws
M8x80, which go through the adjusting feet until the base plate PD-065-001 can
no longer be moved to the side, but the height of the plate must still alterable,
however, since this is important for aligning the gripper jaws. Allow the swinging
arm to swing out again and push it back into its starting position. We refer the
reader to Book D Assemblies, Chapter 44 Assembly PD-066-000 Gripper jaws
for instructions on how to set up the gripper jaws
4. Once the gripper jaws have been set up the four screws M8x80 are tightened up
to the point where the base plate PD-065-001 cannot be moved either to the side
or in its height. Assemble on the panels which were removed and move the
swinging arm into its starting position.

46.2 Maintenance and repair

There is no maintenance and repair work to be undertaken on this assembly.

46.3 Drawings and parts list

46.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-375

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device

Figure 46-8: An exploded view drawing of the bar gripping device

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-376

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device
46.3.2 Part list
Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device; Article no. 10343
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs Bosch cylinder, double action D=25 Hub=500, 0822 034 212 30772
1 Pcs PD-065-021 Guide tube 21600
4 Pcs Nadella Roller (concentric), FRN32 30656/
30657
2 Pcs FAG Radial ball bearing 61824-2RS1 30774
1 Pcs Festo Rotary cylinder DSR 25 30501
4 Pcs ACE Shock absorber FA1010K2-B 30777
2 Pcs Sensor 1 (inductive) OMNI-RAY: M8x1; DW-AD-603-M8-295 30359
PNP-Closer-5m
1 Pcs PD-065-006 Roller carrier 21585
2 Pcs ACE Shock absorber MC150MH2 30776
1 Pcs PD-065-004 Bearing block at the rear 21583
1 Pcs PD-065-003 Bearing block at the front 21582
1 Pcs PD-065-005 Bridge 21584
2 Pcs PD-065-008 Stop screw 21587
1 Pcs PD-065-013 Holder for the rotary cylinder 21592
2 Pcs PD-065-014 Support 21593
1 Pcs PD-065-011 Pulley wheel 21590
1 Pcs PD-065-012 Pressure disc 21591
1 Pcs Toothbelt ZR-T5/560/16 30775
4 Pcs PD-065-020 Clamping cup 21599
2 Pcs PD-065-047 Stop screw 21627
1 Pcs PD-065-019 Support piper 21598
4 Pcs PD-065-016 Supply line pipe 21595
4 Pcs PD-065-017 Entry point 21596
1 Pcs PD-065-022 Holder for hose 21601
1 Pcs Bosch cylinder, double action D=25 Hub=25; 0822 034 202 30773
2 Pcs PD-065-036 Gripper jaws 21615
1 Pcs PD-065-035 Guide plate at the front 21614
2 Pcs PD-065-029 Crank web 21608
1 Pcs PD-065-032 Axis 21611
2 Pcs PD-065-033 Tensioning strut 21612
1 Pcs PD-065-031 Starter disc 21610
1 Pcs PD-065-030 Bearing bolts 21609
1 Pcs PD-065-027 Holding bolts for the cylinder 21606
1 Pcs PD-065-028 Connecting head 21607
2 Pcs Cylindrical pin DIN 6325-5M6x14 30778
1 Pcs PD-065-023 Link cylinder 21602
1 Pcs PD-065-024 Clamping cover 21603
1 Pcs PD-065-026 Cover for the swinging arm 21605
4 Pcs Tenon block DIN 508-5-M4-8 30779
2 Pcs Cylindrical pin DIN 6325-5M6x8 30144
1 Pcs PD-065-001 Base plate 21580
2 Pcs PD-065-002 Clamping strip 21581
1 Pcs PD-065-046 Inward movement shaft 21624
4 Pcs PD-065-009 Adjusting foot 21588
4 Pcs PD-065-010 Spacer disc 21589
1 Pcs PD-065-045 Covering plate 21626
1 Pcs Cylindrical pin DIN 6325-8M6x40 30769
2 Pcs PD-065-048 Guide rod 21625
1 Pcs PD-065-034 Guide plate at the rear 21613
2 Pcs PD-065-007 Stop segment 21586

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-377

D Assemblies Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device
1 Pcs PD-065-018 End plate 21597
1 Pcs PD-065-015 Connecting flange 21594
1 Pcs PD-065-043 Panel at the inside left 2 21622
1 Pcs PD-065-044 Panel at the outside left 1 21623
1 Pcs Bosch cylinder, double action D=20 Hub=200, 0822 333 508 30620
1 Pcs PD-065-039 Console 21618
1 Pcs PD-065-037 Collection cup 21616
2 Pcs PD-065-040 Sliding block 21619
1 Pcs PD-065-038 Collection channel 21617
1 Pcs PD-065-042 Panel at the outside left 3 21621
1 Pcs PD-065-041 Cup1 21620
1 Pcs PD-065-025 Swinging arm 21604
1 Pcs Murrelektronik 6-way-distributor MVC6-VC3.0 31142
1 Pcs PD-065-049 Holder for initiators 41402
2 Pcs IPF sensor (inductive) 2, IB 090170 10-30VDC/200MA/SN1.5 41400
2 Pcs Angled 3-pin plug, connection arrangement turned through 180°; 41403
VK990938
4 Pcs SB-NC-085-019 Spacer roller for PD/SB 21261
8 Pcs O-ring 4.9x1.9 30780

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 46-378

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-066-000 Gripper jaws

Technical Product Documentation

47 Assembly: PD-066-000 Gripper jaws

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 47-379

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-066-000 Gripper jaws

47.1 Description
Various standardised sets of gripper jaws are available for the gripping device PD-065-
000. These can be mounted onto the bar gripping device according to the attached
exploded view drawing using the support bracket PD-066-005. Alignment of the gripper
jaws centrically to the workpiece which is to be removed is achieved due to the special
design of the gripper element as well as the support bracket when mounting the gripper.

47.2 Handling

47.2.1 Mounting of the gripper jaws

The required gripper jaws are mounted on the gripping arm using the support bracket PD-
066-005 and tenon blocks (see also Figure 47-7). Loosening the angle allows the
clamping range of the gripper jaws to be adjusted. The mounting is undertaken as
follows:

1. Move the tenon blocks in the longitudinal slots to the lower end of the swinging
arm (see Figure 47-1).

Tenon block

Figure 47-1: Mounting the tenon blocks

2. Mount the support bracket into place and then the gripper jaws onto that.

Support

Grabber jaws

Figure 47-2: Mounting of the gripper jaws

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 47-380

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-066-000 Gripper jaws
47.2.2 Alignment of the gripper jaws
Alignment of the gripper jaws requires the operating arm to be already set up and aligned
horizontally and vertically. If that has not been done yet then first follow the steps
described in Book D Assemblies, Chapter 43 Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device
to align the operating arms and then continue according to the instructions on this page.

1. Switch off the machine and air supply. Disconnect the air connection M83
(Gripper open) and close this off with a suitable blind plug. The jaws can now be
opened and close manually in the following procedures. Switch the machine and
the air supply back on again.

Air connection M83

Figure 47-3: Air connection M83

2. The gripper position in the radial direction to the spindle axis may have to be
adjusted manually before the jaws can be aligned. Clamp a workpiece in the
chuck or the collet. Pull the swinging arm into the working area and allow this to
swing with opened jaws without colliding with any other part. Move the arm in an
axial direction back to the gripping position. Remove the cover from the swinging
arm as well as the screws shown on the right in Figure 39-4 and the arm can
now be adjusted in the radial direction (see Figure 47-4 on the left as an
example)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 47-381

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-066-000 Gripper jaws

Cylindrical bolts

Support bracket

Grabber jaw

Direction of adjustment

3rd. Screw under the

cylinder connection

Figure 47-4: Adjustment of the gripping position

rd
The 3 screw can only be removed if the holding bolts for the cylinder have been
taken out. You should, however, replace them once the screw has been
removed!
3. Align the swinging arm in such a way that the jaws totally surround the
workpiece. Fix this gripper setting by tightening up the screws shown on the right
in Figure 39-4 again (up to those which are below the cylinder connection).

The last step served to achieve provisional adjustment of the gripper position in the radial
direction to the spindle axis. A swing-in command would cause the swinging arm to reach
the workpiece with the jaws. Nevertheless, since the height of the whole gripper device
has not been set exactly yet a middle offset of the workpiece axis will exist as shown in
Figure 39-5. If one were to clamp in a large workpiece in this situation then one will not be
able to shift the lower support bracket far enough down to make an adjustment since its
available adjusting distance is already virtually exhausted.

4. Close the jaws manually. We are assuming in the example given here that the
lower jaw is resting against the workpiece after the closing operation and the
upper one does not reach it (see Figure 47-5 on the left). Loosen the screws of
the Support bracket which stands off from the workpiece. Move the angle
towards the workpiece until the jaw mounted on it rests against the workpiece
(see Figure 47-5 on the right). Tighten the screws up again to fix the angle in
place.

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 47-382

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-066-000 Gripper jaws

Figure 47-5: Establishing the middle offset

5. In this example we should recognise that the middle axis of the workpiece is
located too far down since the gripping device is sitting too high. The axis should
be corrected by adjusting it upwards. The position of the unclamped workpiece is
governed by the chuck, however, so it is not just a matter of simply loosening the
support bracket and adjusting its height. The workpiece cannot move with it. The
support bracket and the jaws as well as the workpiece are seen as fixed. The
correction in this case is not achieved by shifting the angle upwards but by
lowering the whole gripping device. One must first of all determine the correction
required. To do this open the jaws manually and move the swinging arm of the
device away from the workpiece. Switch the machine and the air supply off and
attach the air connection M83 on again. Switch the machine and the air supply
on again. Clamp in a 5 mm gauge block as shown in Figure 47-6.
WHEN CLOSING THE JAWS THERE IS THE DANGER OF
SQUASHING ONE’S FINGERS, SINCE THE GUAGE BLOCK
MUST BE HELD IN PLACE AT FIRST! BE CAREFUL!

Guage block

e. g. 1mm

e. g. 3mm

Figure 47-6: Measuring the middle offset

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 47-383

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-066-000 Gripper jaws
Measure the distances from the jaws to the edge of the gauge block using a
calliper gauge. In our example the gripper device must be lowered by 1 mm to
cause both distances to be the same.
6. Mount the dial gauge on again as was done for aligning the operating arm (see
Book D Assemblies, Chapter 46 Assembly PD-065-000 Bar gripping device).
Lower the gripper device with the help of the dial gauge through turning each of
the four adjusting feet by the same amount, namely 1 mm. Check the vertical
and horizontal parallelity of the operating arm again. Make corrections as
required (see Book D Assemblies, Chapter 46 Assembly PD-065-000 Bar
gripping device).
7. Check afterwards whether the middle offset still exists by proceeding in the same
way as for the first measurement. Please note that after every height adjustment
of the gripping unit the parallelity of the operating arm must be checked and
corrected where necessary. Continue such measurements until there is no
further middle offset to correct.
8. Once the correct alignment of the jaws has been achieved tighten up the three
screws on the gripper arm again. The screws under the cylinder connection can
only be inserted when the cylinder bolts are removed for a short time. These
should, nevertheless, be put back immediately after tightening the screws up
firmly (see Figure 47-4). Tighten up the fixing screws for the support bracket
again. Ensure that all of the pneumatic connections are re-established after
switching off the machine and that the air supply is switched on again.

47.3 Drawings and parts list

47.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 47-384

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-066-000 Gripper jaws

ID-No. Ø-area Required mounting space a for a fully

Gripper jaw opened gripper
PD-066-001 Ø32- Ø24 34mm
Ø24- Ø18 26mm
Ø18- Ø12 20mm

PD-066-002 Ø12- Ø4.5 14mm

PD-066-003 Ø4.5- Ø2.25 7mm

PD-066-004 Ø2.25- Ø1.4 4mm

Figure 47-7: Exploded view drawing of the gripper jaws

47.3.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-066-000 Gripper jaws; Article no. 10466
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
2 Pcs PD-066-005 Jaw base 21647
2 Pcs PD-066-001 Gripper jaw D32 - D12 21643
4 Pcs Tenon block DIN508-5M4-8 -
2 Pcs PD-066-002 Gripper jaw D12 - D4.5 21644
2 Pcs PD-066-003 Gripper jaw D4.5 - D2.25 21645
2 Pcs PD-066-004 Gripper jaw D2.25 - D1.4 21646

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 47-385

D Assemblies Assembly PD-075-000 Stroke monitoring for the sub-spindle

Technical Product Documentation

48 Assembly PD-075-000 Stroke monitoring for

the sub-spindle

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 48-386

D Assemblies Assembly PD-075-000 Stroke monitoring for the sub-spindle

48.1 Description
The stroke monitoring of the sub-spindle serves to monitor the position of the clamping
cylinders in the sub-spindle. A micro-switch tracks the position of the stop ring on the
actuating piston of the clamping device which tracks the position of the piston and
therefore the clamping device.

48.2 Handling

48.2.1 Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device

Clamping ring

Stroke limiting ring

Figure 48-1: Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device

A) Proximity switch for feedback „BACK“
B) Proximity switch for feedback „FRONT“
C) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITHOUT WORKPIECE“
D) Clamping screw for proximity switch

Proceed as follows in order to adjust the clamping stroke monitoring device. The following
example bases on the fact that the clamping direction in the CLAMPING PARAMETERS
screen is BACK. The control system determines automatically the corresponding function
of the proximity switches:

1. Adjust the clamping stroke limitation (see chapter 21/22).

2. Clamp a workpiece.
3. The clamping ring moves BACKWARD. Adjust proximity switch A in the way that
its LED lights up. The function of this switch is in this case: Position monitoring
CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE.
4. Release the clamping device.

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 48-387

D Assemblies Assembly PD-075-000 Stroke monitoring for the sub-spindle
5. The clamping ring moves FORWARD. Adjust proximity switch B in the way that
its LED lights up. The function of this switch is in this case: Position monitoring
CLAMPING DEVICE RELEASE.
Proximity switch A must not light up anymore.
6. Clamp the clamping device without workpiece.
7. The clamping ring moves backward again passing the proximity switch A for
CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE. Adjust proximity switch C in the way that its
LED lights up. The condition is that there is a remaining mechanical stroke.

Changing over to the clamping direction FRONT in the CLAMPING PARAMETERS

screen results in new function of the proximity switches. Proximity switch A and B only
need to be re-adjusted according to the new clamping situation but it is not necessary to
change completely their mounting position. Only proximity switch C is mounted in the way
that its plug is on the right side. C must be to the left of B (see below on the right).
A) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPING DEVICE RELEASED“
B) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE“
C) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITHOUT WORKPIECE“

Arrangement of the switches according to the clamping situation:

Hinten Hinten
Back Back
A A

B C C B
Vorne Leer
Leer Vorne
Front Empty
Empty Front

Clamping direction BACK Clamping direction FRONT

PROXIMITY SWITCH A AND B MUST NOT LIGHT UP AT THE

SAME TIME! OTHERWISE AN ALARM WILL BE DISPLAYED!

THE SPINDLE MUST NEVER BE OPERATED WHEN THE

STROKE LIMITING RINGS ARE NOT CLAMPED! THE SPINDLE
ELEMENTS CAN BE DAMAGED!

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 48-388

D Assemblies Assembly PD-075-000 Stroke monitoring for the sub-spindle

48.3 Drawings and parts list

48.3.1 Detail exploded view drawing

Figure 48-2: Detail exploded view drawing of the stroke monitoring on the sub-spindle

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 48-389

D Assemblies Assembly PD-075-000 Stroke monitoring for the sub-spindle

48.3.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-075-000 Stroke monitoring of the sub-spindle; Article no. 22008
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs SB-NC-135-024 Stop 21925
3 Pcs Bosch Initiator; 0830 100 525 30853
3 Pcs Bosch couplings housing; 1834 484 089 30855
1 Pcs PD-075-001 Base holder 22009
3 Pcs PD-074-001 Connection adapter 22003
2 Pcs PD-074-002 Clamp holder 22004
3 Pcs PD-074-004 Clamp 22006

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 48-390

D Assemblies Assembly PD-071-000 Spindles flushing system sub spindle 8000/32

Technical Product Documentation

49 Assembly PD-071-000 Spindles flushing

system sub spindle 8000/32

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 49-391

D Assemblies Assembly PD-071-000 Spindles flushing system sub spindle 8000/32

49.1 Description
In the spindle flushing system the cooling fluid flows through the spindle to the clamped
workpiece. It can even serve as a cooling system for the interface for appropriate
workpieces and the chucking tools can also be rinsed free of chips. In the case of very
small workpieces which cannot be removed from the machine using a gripper, these can
be rinsed out of the chucking tools by the spindle flushing system and caught in a
container.

49.2 Handling

49.2.1 Mounting

3 4

2
5

Figure 49-1: Mounting of the spindle flushing system (for spindle speeds up to 8,000
r.p.m.)
You can assemble the spindle flushing system as follows:

1. Attach seal holder with integrated sealing package 7 (Merkel B0153-131.171 - O-

ring 29.87x1.78) to the stop ring 4 and the push/pull tube 6. Use screw 5 to fix
the seal support.
Screw 5: 12 pcs. DIN 912 M3x25-12.9; Mmax=1,5Nm
2. Assemble flange 2 onto the end of the spindle. Use screw 3.
Screw 2: 6 pcs. DIN 912 M3x6-12.9; Mmax=1,2Nm
3. Mount radial shaft seal ring 9 with a little grease. Connect the rotation guide 1
with the mounting bracket 8. Ensure exact alignment of the rotation guide.

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 49-392

D Assemblies Assembly PD-071-000 Spindles flushing system sub spindle 8000/32

49.3 Maintenance and repair

Check all of the O-rings on the carriage and all other seals regularly before mounting and
using the spindle flushing system. This also includes the radial shaft seal ring. These
should be replaced immediately if signs of wear or cracks are found

Regularly check the cooling fluid connection to make sure that the line does not leak.
DRY RUNNING OF THE SPINDLE FLUSHING SYSTEM WILL
LEAD TO DESTRUCTION OF THE RADIAL SHAFT SEALING
RING!
WATCH OUT FOR THIS DURING WORK OPERATIONS WHERE
THE SPINDLE OPERATES FOR A SHORT PERIOD WITHOUT
ACTIVATED SPINDLE FLUSHING!

49.4 Drawings and parts lists

49.4.1 Detail assembly drawing

Figure 49-2: Detail assembly drawing of the spindle flushing system 8000/32

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 49-393

D Assemblies Assembly PD-071-000 Spindles flushing system sub spindle 8000/32
49.4.2 Parts list
Assembly SB-NC-071-000 Spindle flushing unit 8000/32; Article no. 10540/GS
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs Merkel radial shaft seal ring 14x28x7; 0145-129.678 30799
1 Pcs Securing ring DIN472-28x1.2 30800
1 Pcs Merkel bar seal DIN 472-28x1.2 30843
1 Pcs Merkel O-ring 2-025, 29.87x1.78 30842
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-103 Torque support 21531
1 Pcs BK-NC-020-107 Clamping plate 21533
1 Pcs SB-NC-137-001 Longitudinal seal holder 21931
1 Pcs PD-071-001 Support bracket 21973
1 Pcs SB-NC-137-003 Connector 21933
1 Pcs SB-NC-137-002 Sealing runner 21932

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 49-394

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-WA-000 Tailstock

Technical Product Documentation

50 Assembly: PD-WA-000 Tailstock

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 50-395

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-WA-000 Tailstock

50.1 Description
The tailstock consists of a guide housing PD-WA-002 as well as the quill PD-WA-003
inside which is secured against rotating. This quill is actuated by means of pneumatic
cylinder and is fitted at the front end with a carrier for a centring live centre.

50.2 Handling
When the tailstock is in the working position, adjust the limit switches for the quill as
follows (see signs of the switches to find them and their function in the circuit diagram):
• The limit switch for “Quill at the back“ must light up when the quill has been
moved to the back. The workpiece is not clamped by the quill (feedback
message M16).
• The limit switch for “Quill at the front“ must light up when the quill has been
moved to the front. The workpiece is clamped by the quill (feedback message
M15).
• The limit switch for “Quill in end position“ must light up when the quill is at the
front without workpiece in the chuck.

50.2.1.1 Monitoring characteristic

When during the machining of a workpiece the limit switch “M15“ is left or the limit switch
“Qill in end position“ is reached the machine is stopped with an emergency-off error
message.

50.3 Maintenance and repair

Lubrication of the quill is achieved automatically over the pressurised lubrication system.

50.4 Drawings and parts lists

50.4.1 Detail assembly drawing and the ISO-view

(see next page)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 50-396

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-WA-000 Tailstock

Figure 50-1: Detail assembly drawing and the ISO-view for the tailstock

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 50-397

D Assemblies Assembly: PD-WA-000 Tailstock
50.4.2 Parts list
Assembly PD-WA-000 Tailstock
Quant. Unit Designation Article-Nr.:
4 Pcs PD-050-043 Washer above 21003
1 Pcs PD-WA-009 guide plate 14119
1 Pcs PD-WA-003 Quill 14113
2 Pcs Wiper ring 40X48,6 30812
1 Pcs PD-WA-005 Cylinder flange 14116
1 Pcs PD-WA-004 Intermediate flange 14114
1 Pcs PD-WA-002 Tailstock housing 14108
1 Pcs PD-WA-006 Anti-rotation device made from DIN 912 M10x16 14109
1 Pcs PD-WA-007 Upper strip above 14117
2 Pcs PD-WA-008 Aligning strip 14118
1 Pcs PD-100-001 Holder for cable support 22374
1 Pcs PD-WA-011 Adapter for the tow chain holder 100057
1 Pcs Cylinder 80x100 100369
2 Pcs Cylinder switch, electrical 3m PUR 30497
1 Pcs PD-WA-014 Forcing rod 112555
1 Pcs Screw M20x1,5x40-10.9 114441
2 Pcs Clamp holder for the electrical cylinder switch 100260

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 50-398

D Assemblies Assembly SB-BA-000 Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42 (option)

Technical Product Documentation

51 Assembly SB-BA-000 Hydraulic spindle unit

5000/42 (option)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 51-399

D Assemblies Assembly SB-BA-000 Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42 (option)

51.1 Handling

51.1.1 Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device

C Clamping ring

Figure 51-1: Adjustment of the clamping stroke monitoring device

A) Proximity switch for feedback „BACK“
B) Proximity switch for feedback „FRONT“
C) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITHOUT WORKPIECE“
D) Clamping screw for proximity switch

Proceed as follows in order to adjust the clamping stroke monitoring device. The following
example bases on the fact that the clamping direction in the CLAMPING PARAMETERS
screen is BACK. The control system determines automatically the corresponding function
of the proximity switches:

1. Clamp a workpiece.
2. The clamping ring moves BACKWARD. Adjust proximity switch A in the way that
its LED lights up. The function of this switch is in this case: Position monitoring
CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE.
3. Release the clamping device.
4. The clamping ring moves FORWARD. Adjust proximity switch B in the way that
its LED lights up. The function of this switch is in this case: Position monitoring
CLAMPING DEVICE RELEASE.
Proximity switch A must not light up anymore.
5. Clamp the clamping device without workpiece.
6. The clamping ring moves backward again passing the proximity switch A for
CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE. Adjust proximity switch C in the way that its
LED lights up. The condition is that there is a remaining mechanical stroke.

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 51-400

D Assemblies Assembly SB-BA-000 Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42 (option)

Changing over to the clamping direction FRONT in the CLAMPING PARAMETERS

screen results in new function of the proximity switches. Proximity switch A and B only
need to be re-adjusted according to the new clamping situation but it is not necessary to
change completely their mounting position. Only proximity switch C is mounted on the
opposite side underneath proximity switch A in the way that its plug is on the left side (see
below on the right).
A) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPING DEVICE RELEASED“
B) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITH WORKPIECE“
C) Proximity switch for feedback „CLAMPED WITHOUT WORKPIECE“

Arrangement of the switches according to the clamping situation:

Leer Hinten Hinten

Empty Back Back
C A A

B B C
Vorne Vorne Leer
Front Front Empty

Clamping direction BACK Clamping direction FRONT

PROXIMITY SWITCH A AND B MUST NOT LIGHT UP AT THE SAME

TIME! OTHERWISE AN ALARM WILL BE DISPLAYED!

51.2 Drawings and parts lists

51.2.1 Detail view drawing

(see next page)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 51-401

D Assemblies Assembly SB-BA-000 Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42 (option)

Figure 51-2: Detail drawing Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 51-402

D Assemblies Assembly SB-BA-000 Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42 (option)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 51-403

D Assemblies Assembly SB-BA-000 Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42 (option)

51.2.2 Parts list

Assembly Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Set Spacer ring 117841
1 Pcs SB-BA-002 Turning spindle 100051
1 Pcs SB-NC-195-003 Flanged wheel 104105
1 Pcs SB NC-195-002 Back cover 104106
1 Pcs SB-NC-195-001 Incremental disc 104107
4 Pcs SB-NC-020-007 Adjustment wedge spindle 20376
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-001 Spindle casing 21719
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-003 Front cover 21721
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-004 Front cover 21722
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-005 Bearing ring 21723
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-009 Sealing disc 21727
1 Pcs SB-BA-004 Spacer sleeve 100699
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-016 Pre-tensioning nut 21734
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-017 Locking nut 21735
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-034 Flanged wheel 21752
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-043 Main belt pulley, edge piece 22403
2 Pcs SB-NC-109-044 Intermediate washer 22404
1 Pcs SB-NC-109-042 Main belt pulley, centre 22405
1 Pcs SB-BA-006 Push-/pull tube 100052
2 Pcs O-ring 15,6x1,78; AS 568 B - 016; NBR 75 Shore 30611
1 Pcs O-ring 139,37x2,62; AS 568 B - 161; NBR 70 Shore 30801
12 Pcs Cheese-head screw M5 x 12, DIN 6912, black 30054
4 Pcs Hexagon bolt M4 x 10-8.8, ISO 4017 102287
6 Pcs Grub screw M4 x 10 with internal hexagon and point ISO 4027 101659
2 Pcs Grub screw M6 x 8 with internal hexagon and flat point ISO 4026 114259
2 Pcs Feather key A10x8x50; DIN 6885 - A - 10x8x50 108340
5 Pcs Spindle bearing 21718
1 Pcs Incremental gear wheel sensor GEL244 101832

51.2.3 Parts list

Assembly SB-NC-201-010 Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42 Part 2, Article 122019
Quant. Unit Designation Article no.
1 Pcs SB-BA-001 Connecting flange clamping cylinder 100053
1 Pcs PD-BO-110 Collecting 112922
1 Pcs PD-BO-111 Cover for collecting 100747
2 Pcs SB-BA-010 Fixing clip 100871
1 Pcs SB-BA-011 Clamping plate 100872
1 Pcs SB-BA-006 Push-/pull tube 100052
1 Pcs SB-NC-201-009 Stop 122000
1 Pcs SB-NC-201-006 Stroke scanner flange 112973
2 Pcs SB-NC-201-007 Grub screw 112974
1 Pcs PD-BO-109 Mounting block, left 100553
1 Pcs PD-074-005 Base holder, left 22007
1 Pcs PD-BO-108 Mounting block, right 100552
1 Pcs PD-074-003 Base holder, right 22005
2 Pcs PD-074-002 Clamping holder 22004
3 Pcs PD-074-004 Clamp 22006
3 Pcs PD-074-001 Clamping holder 22003
1 Pcs PD-132-001 Bracket 112652
2 Pcs O-ring 8x2 NBR 70 Shore 30311

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 51-404

D Assemblies Assembly SB-BA-000 Hydraulic spindle unit 5000/42 (option)
1 Pcs Hose clip 25-40, DIN3017 – 25-40/12 W1 26056
1 Pcs Röhm clamping cylinder SZS 45/92 107062
1 Pcs Incremental gear wheel sensor GEL244 101832
1 Pcs Proximity switch 46 x 36.5 x 16.5 30853
1 Pcs Cable socket M12/5/GEW 30854
1 Pcs Ermeto angled screw coupling with shank 10 G1/4A; 21214
EW10PLREDA3C
1 Pcs Parker angled connector, EV10LOMDCF 116786
2 Pcs Ermeto screw union, GE10LM16X1.5EDOMDCF 120024
2 Pcs Hydraulic hose 1000 mm, 1SN08 x 1000 BDS/DKOL - 10L 114494
1 Pcs Hydraulic power unit 111371
1 Pcs Ermeto screwed plug, VSTI R1/2-EDCF 26041
2 Pcs Ermeto screwed sealing plug 3/8, VSTI3/8EDCF 26156
3 Pcs Seal ring 27 x 32 x 2 100445
1 Pcs Double nipple G3/4" 102632
1 Pcs Angled section G3/4" 90° 102634
1 Pcs Screw-in hose sleeve G3/4"-25, L = 29 107292
2 Pcs Ermeto screw union, 3/8-10, GE10LR3/8EDOMDCF 112254
1 Pcs Hose 25 x 5 135195

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 51-405

C Assemblies Part-catcher PD „1 Spindle“

Technical Product Documentation

52 Part-catcher PD „1 Spindle“

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 52-406

C Assemblies Part-catcher PD „1 Spindle“

52.1 Handling

Fastening

Fastening

Loosen the screws of the fastenings in order to move the catcher device slightly forward
or backward.

FASTEN THE SCREWS AGAIN AFTER MOVING THE CATCHER

DIVICE!

52.2 Maintenance and upkeep

52.2.1 Machine
Once per day clean the complete part catcher from chips (surface and inside)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 52-407

C Assemblies Part-catcher PD „1 Spindle“

52.3 Drawing and parts list

52.3.1 Exploded view drawing

(see next page)

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 52-408

C Assemblies Part-catcher PD „1 Spindle“

52.3.2 Parts list

Assembly PD-DB-001 Part-catcher PD "1 spindle"; article 101700
Qty Unit Designation Article
no.
1 Pcs PD DB-006 Part collector 101701
1 Pcs PD-DB-007 Bearing housing 101702
1 Pcs PD-DB-008 Shaft 101703
1 Pcs PD-DB-009 Pipe with Adapter 101704
1 Pcs PD-DB-010 Support 101705
1 Pcs PD-DB-11 Shaft 101706
1 Pcs PD-DB-012 Clamping ring 101707
1 Pcs PD-DB-013 Base 101708
1 Pcs PD-DB-014 NA Q-Replacement plate 101709
1 Pcs PD-DB-015 Cover 101710
1 Pcs PD-DB-016 Panel 101711
1 Pcs PD-DB-018 NA Front plate 101713
1 Pcs PD-DB-019 Inner sleeve 101714
1 Pcs PD-DB-020 Outer sleeve 101715
1 Pcs PD-DB-021 Cover 101716
1 Pcs PD-DB-022 Stopper 101717
1 Pcs PD-DB-023 Rocker 101718
1 Pcs PD-DB-024 Crank support 101719
1 Pcs PD-DB-025 Crank 101720
1 Pcs PD-DB-026 Spring 101721
1 Pcs PD-DB-036 Elastic protective mat 101752
2 Pcs PD-Fo-016 Clamping strip 101722
1 Pcs SB-NC-181-001 Connecting piece 80 for exhausting device 101655
4 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M8x40-8.8 30002
8 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M5x16-8.8 30004
2 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M6x25-8.8 30008
2 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M8X25-8.8 30013
1 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M4x12-8.8 30018
1 Pcs Screw DIN 6912-M5x12-8.8 30054
4 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M3x6-8.8 30075
1 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M4x10-8.8 30084
4 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M4x20-8.8 30154
4 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M3x10-8.8 30444
2 Pcs Ball bearing 6200-2Z DIN 625-1 30508
2 Pcs Plastic clamp 3 42141
4 Pcs Screw ISO 4762-M4x16-8.8 101167
9 Pcs Nut ISO 4032-M5-8 101271
1 Pcs Cylinder 101723
1 Pcs Fastening-parts-kit 101724
2 Pcs Cylinder switch 101725
1 Pcs Groove nut ZM10 M10x1 101726
0,6 Pcs Hose Ø=80mm 101727
1 Pcs Hose clamp Ø77-84 101728
1 Pcs Pin ISO 8734-6x20-C1 101729
5 Pcs TC-025-000 Panelling 101751
4 Pcs Screw ISO 10642-M4x10-8.8 101760
1 Pcs Threaded pin ISO 4026-M3x6 101761

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 52-409

C Assemblies Part-catcher PD „1 Spindle“

1 Pcs Screw ISO 4017-M5x12-8.8 101762

2 Pcs Washer ISO 7092-8-140HV 101763
4 Pcs Valve NG2,5 M5 4x1 30499

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 52-410

C Assemblies Assemblies Low pressure duplex filter

Technical Product Documentation

53 Assemblies Low pressure duplex filter

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 53-411

C Assemblies Assemblies Low pressure duplex filter

53.1 Drawing and parts list

53.1.1 Exploded view drawing

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 53-412

C Assemblies Assemblies Low pressure duplex filter

53.1.2 Parts list

Assemblies SW107989 Low pressure duplex filter
Pos. Qty Unit Designation Article no.
1 1 Pcs Mahle 300Pi2130-058 / Pi8530 114796
2 2 Pcs RI1EDX ½; G11/2-G1/2 136759
3 2 Pcs SWVE 15 G1/2 G1/2 26234
4 1 Pcs 137429
5 1 Pcs DKL 22x1,5 L 1500mm 21186

PD_FANUC32i-B  SPINNER Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik GmbH 53-413